JP2021000481A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A performance in which an operation effective period is set is executed by performance execution means, and a performance mode based on the performance is displayed in display means. A plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed by a predetermined dynamic display mode by the performance execution means, and by operating operation means when the operation effective period is set, a dynamic display performance for stop-displaying predetermined identification information from the plurality of pieces of dynamically displayed identification information is executed. When the operation effective period becomes a predetermined residual period in the dynamic display performance, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is made variable, and is dynamically displayed. Thereby, the dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is made variable by the residual period of the operation effective period in which an operation to the operation means is effective so that a player can operate the operation means at various timings, and interest in the game is enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided and an effect of aligning a predetermined pattern is executed by operating the operating means (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223651

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, further improvement of interest has been required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period for which an operation on the operation means is effectively determined, and an operation validity period setting means. The effect executing means includes an effect executing means for executing the effect for which the operation validity period is set, and a display means for displaying the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means. Is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation validity period is set, the operation means is operated to determine a predetermined value from the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information. A dynamic display effect for stopping and displaying the identification information is executed, and when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period is possible. It is dynamically displayed by changing it to a variable display mode.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period. , The predetermined dynamic display mode when the remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect and the remaining period determining means determine that the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period. It has a dynamic display mode changing means for changing at least a part of the above to the variable dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect in the game machine according to claim 1 or 2. However, the variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect. The execution means executes the specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect satisfies a predetermined condition. The variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the operation valid period setting means has a plurality of the operation valid periods during the period during which the dynamic display effect is executed. The number of times is set, and the remaining period determination means determines whether the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operation validity period for which the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation validity period setting means, and the operation validity period is set. It is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed by the effect executing means in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and a plurality of identifications that are dynamically displayed by operating the operation means when the operation validity period is set are set. When a dynamic display effect that stops and displays a predetermined identification information from the information is executed and the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period changes. It is displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed changes depending on the remaining period of the operation valid period in which the operation on the operating means is effective, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1. That is, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined by the effect executing means, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determining means. To. Then, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is a predetermined period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches a predetermined remaining period, so that there is an effect that the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. That is, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is identified as another identification as the variable dynamic display mode. It is a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than information.

As a result, the specific identification information on which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is stopped becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It becomes possible to increase. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 3. That is, the effect executing means executes the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination of the above satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, the variable symbol satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1. To. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player to operate the operating means can be increased during the continuous dynamic display effect.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4. That is, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period during which the dynamic display effect is executed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means according to the remaining number of operation valid periods.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of operation valid periods, so that the player is enthusiastically operated by the operating means during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper united unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the upper united unit. It is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is a front schematic diagram of the drive arm in the retract rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position and the extension rotation position. It is a partially enlarged front schematic view of the drive arm when it is rotated from a retract rotation position to an extension rotation position. It is a front view of the upper united unit and the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a protruding unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a protruding unit. It is a front view of a base member and an elevating base. It is an exploded front perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is a front view of the elevating base and the rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body arranged in the first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the elevating unit, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 1st state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 2nd state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 3rd state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the 1st state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the second state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the third state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state, (c). ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in the united state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 65 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 66 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are meshed with each other, and (b) is a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are disengaged. It is a schematic view of the slide unit viewed from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of a front view of the slide unit in a state where the counterclockwise transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are in mesh with each other, and (b) is a schematic view in which the accommodating member is displaced and under the main body base member. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state which the meshing of the side 1st rack gear and a transmission gear was released. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of the base member in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the base member are meshed with each other, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state. It is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the left slide member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member in the state after the switching plate is operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state after the switching plate is operated in the front view. is there. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). (A) is a front view of the elevating unit according to the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an operating unit in the combined state. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIb-CIIb of FIG. 101. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state where the drive body is arranged in the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a state in which the drive body is arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section in the first control example, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a variable winning device in the first control example. It is a top view of. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram showing the area division of the display screen when the reach navigation effect is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and (d) is the schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the navigation effect selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first navigation effect selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second navigation effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing for display executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the numerical command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a V executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a resident execution executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the combined pressing effect in the second control example is started, and (b) is the time when the effect setting timing D3b is reached in the combined pressing effect in the second control example. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the timing pressing period Db1 is reached in the combined pressing effect in the second control example, and (b) shows the timing pressing period Db1 in the combined pressing effect in the second control example. It is a figure which showed another example at the time of arrival. (A) is a diagram showing an example when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing pressing period in the compound pressing effect in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example in the compound pressing effect in the second control example. It is a figure which showed an example at the time when it reached the 2 consecutive hit period Dc. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the continuous slot effect executed in 2nd control example. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in the second control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode" in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the "sugoroku mode" in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of the point effect in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario in the second control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press pressing scenario in the second control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the compound pressing scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the character selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning character selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the character selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the point selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit point selection table, and (c) is a deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the point selection table schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the first slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the normal slot production executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st shortening slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 2nd shortening slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during extension slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a pressing command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a length executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the push command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an auto-press start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the auto press end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the release command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the first modification of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the first combined pressing scenario schematically. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second compound pressing scenario. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the frame button control device in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically each mode used for the point effect in 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode A" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "sugoroku mode" in the third control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the "bingo mode" in the third control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which a character is displayed in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which points are displayed in the third control example. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of layers are synthesized in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the number-of-times selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table in the third control example. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation number selection table in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the used score selection table in the third control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the final display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the final second display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the final 3rd display mode selection table in 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the character display selection table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the display data table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the transfer data table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the drawing list in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect initial setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the point effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the indicator command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing another example of the layer on which the character is displayed in the third control example, and (b) is another example of the layer on which the points in the third control example are displayed. Is a diagram schematically showing, and FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing another example in which a plurality of layers are synthesized in the third control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the reach navigation effect executed in the 4th control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect in the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 2nd internal level selection table in 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect scenario storage area in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect scenario selection table in the fourth control example. It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 1 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 2 of the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 3 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example, and (b) is a timing showing the flow of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example. It is a chart. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the display mode storage area in 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the hit display mode selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table for deviation in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the stop mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the hit stop mode selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table for disconnection in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the initial slot effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the normal slot effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st shortening slot production process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 2nd shortening slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the extension slot production process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. (A) and (b) are examples of schematic views of the display mode of the rear image in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the compound pressing effect executed in 6th control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the background change operation mode of the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing a button operation content and an effect mode executed in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams which show an example of the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow which the additional effect is set in 7th control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing a display example displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing a display example of an additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is the 2nd variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example, (d) is the content of the 3rd variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example schematically shown. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the additional effect selection table in 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the effect counter in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. (B) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 7th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow which the additional effect is set in the modification of the 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an additional effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (C) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (A) to (c) are schematic views which show the modification of the additional effect. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the effect in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a sphere. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when it is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (expanded state) makes it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441,475,476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are moved to the retracted positions, respectively. In the displaced state, from the state shown in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the right slide member 450, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the overhanging positions. In FIG. 9, the state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the overhanging positions from the state shown in FIG. 7 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a slide unit 400, an upper uniting unit 500, a lower uniting unit 600, The projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are rotatably housed.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 is arranged with a horizontally long base member 410 having a rectangular shape in the front view, which is arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the upper end portion of the base member 410 is slidably displaceable. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and each slide member 430 is independently placed in the left-right direction (base member) on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. It is formed so that the effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be in contact with each other. However, in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are in contact with each other, they are damaged. A restraining structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

A rectangular horizontally long guide member 419 in front view is arranged in a posture parallel to the base member 410 in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are arranged. When is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are guided by sliding between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower end sides of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper uniting unit 500 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 510 in front view arranged in front of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 displaceably arranged in the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower uniting unit 600 includes a front view substantially L-shaped base member 610 and a lower base member 610 arranged on the left side portion and the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. The lower displacement member 640 is provided so as to be displaceable.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back surface side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is displaceably formed between the retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and the overhanging position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When overhanging to the overhanging position, the side surfaces (upper contact portion 533 and lower contact portion 643) of both displacement members 530 and 640 are brought into contact with each other (combined).

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced in the directions close to each other come into contact with each other, an impact may be generated and the posture may become unstable such as being bounced off each other. In the present embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of such contact is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projecting unit 700 has a horizontally long rectangular base member 710 in front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and an evacuation unit 700 arranged so as to be able to move up and down in the base member 710. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720 are provided, and the elevating base 720, together with the rotating member 730, is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and the rear case 300. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated) from the overhanging position overhanging the opening 301a toward the front side.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that is displaced (slide displacement) in the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 that is swingably arranged in the rotating member 730, and the projecting member 735. It includes a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swing member 732.

The protrusion unit 700 drives the protrusion member 735 and the swing member 732 by the drive motor 763 of 1. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the projecting member 735 and the driving force required to drive the swing member 732 overlap, which may increase the load and reduce the durability of the drive motor 763. In the embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such a structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500, and an elevating member 820 arranged so as to be able to elevate on the base member 810. The elevating member 820 is formed so as to be displaceable (elevated) between the retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and the overhanging position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure in which the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 10 to 12 show a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450).

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 410. The member 420, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. It is mainly provided with a drive mechanism for making the vehicle run.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, in the base member 410, a plate-shaped projecting plate portion 411 is horizontally projected from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the projecting plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420). The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the side), and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod-shaped body having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. By doing so, both slide members 430 and 450 are held slidably. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 extend along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 is a second member in which a first member 431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably arranged on the first member 431, and the first side pinion gear 432 are meshed with each other. A front-view rectangular horizontally long second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a front-view rectangular vertically long base member 434 hanging downward from the tip side of the second member 433, and a rotatable base member 434 on the front side of the base member 434. 435, a displacement member 436 that is possibly arranged on the back side of the rotating member 435, and a transmission that transmits the motion (slide displacement) of the base member 434 to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435. The gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. , Sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear to which the left drive gear 471 described later is meshed with, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. To.

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably arranged (shafted) on the first member 431, and the arranged portion of the first side pinion gear 432 (front side of the first member 431). A front-view rectangular plate-shaped cover 431b is disposed of the vehicle. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the first member 431 is acted on by the base side rack gear 412 along with the slide displacement. Then, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is displaceably arranged (connected) to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the tip side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. It is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, the second member 433 is engraved with the second side rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the slide displacement of the first member 431, it is affected by the first side pinion gear 432 (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is affected. The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into a linear motion by the second rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the second member 433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state of being faster than the first member 431. Can be done.

The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. To.

The right slide member 450 is rotatable toward the front side of the front view rectangular horizontally long rack member 451 and the front view rectangular vertically long base member 454 hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451 and the base member 454. To transmit the motion (slide displacement) of the rotating member 455 to the rotating member 455, the displacement member 456 displaced on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and the base member 410 of the base member 454 to the rotating member 455. The transmission gears 457a to 457f of the above are mainly provided.

The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. As a result, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the drive gears 471 and 472, respectively. A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 to which a drive shaft is connected to each of the pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 rotationally drive the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby passing through the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid and displaced independently of each other.

A cover member 416 is arranged on the front surface of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471 and 472 and the pinion gears 473 and 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. .. Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 is a back side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front side arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434a. A base member 434b is provided, and transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (shaft support) between facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. A shaft support hole 434b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 434b.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the head and the transmission gear 437f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 435a of the rotary member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 437f can rotate the rotating member 435.

The rotating member 435 includes a rotating shaft 435a and a supporting shaft 435b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 437f, the rotating member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 435b, the displacement member 436 from the support shaft 435b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 435. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotating member 435, the rotating shaft 435a can be displaced along the relief hole 436b and is displaced from the rotating member 435. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 435 with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in which the front view shape has a larger dimension in the length direction than the dimension in the width direction, and is a position that is substantially the center in the length direction and the width direction. The rotation shaft 435a is arranged on the. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed by dividing the rotating member 435 into substantially two at the center in the length direction thereof. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435, making it difficult for the player to see. Can be done.

Further, since the drive motor 441 is arranged on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the rotating member 435. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (the state where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435), the rotating member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the 435 substantially coincides with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in a state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visibly overhanging to the side of the rotating member 435). The position of the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of the overhang of the displacement member 436. As a result, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 projects laterally to the rotating member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When it is located on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the above-mentioned rotating action due to the weight of the structure causes the displacement member 436. It can assist the rotation. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435 (rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is brought close to (matches) with the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. As a result, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435) is stopped. When it is located on the side of the structure, the rotation of the structure can be easily stopped by the weight of the structure described above. As a result, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. The transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (shafted) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the head and the transmission gear 457f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 455a of the rotary member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the base member 410 from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 457f can rotate the rotating member 455.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 457f, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 455b, the displacement member 456 from the support shaft 455b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 455. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotating member 455, the rotating shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b and is displaced from the rotating member 455. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 455 with the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in which the front view shape is larger in the length direction than the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is provided on one end side in the length direction. The drive motor 461 is arranged on the other end side as well as being arranged. Further, since the displacement member 456 is arranged on the rotating member 455 on the side opposite to the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 The position of the center of gravity can be arranged at a position eccentric to one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, at the start of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. By locating it on the side, the weight of the structure can be caused to act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. As a result, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure is used as resistance. It can be made to act to make it easier to stop the rotation of the structural value. As a result, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Further, as will be described later, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). By locating the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure acts as a resistance and exerts a buffering action due to the rotation of the structure value. Can be made to.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid displacement. Note that FIGS. 17 and 18 show a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left slide member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side of FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the first member 431 moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a (FIG. 11). 17 (a) Slide displacement toward the right side (direction closer to the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side are arranged so as to face each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slidably displaced together with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is acted on the second side rack gear 433a, so that the second member 433 Is slid and displaced in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, catches up with the first member 431 and is second with respect to the first member 431. The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the positive direction, and the first member 431 is further to the right with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 17A, the direction closer to the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 18A, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is at the right end of the movable range (FIG. 18). (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the overhanging position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. Due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (left side in FIG. 18A, in the direction away from the right slide member 450). ..

Also in this case, the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431, as in the case described above. As a result, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, precedes the first member 431 with respect to the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extending direction (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is extended more than the total length at the overhang position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the opposite direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is at the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17). (A) The position farthest from the left and right slide members 450), that is, the overhanging position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is arranged on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position, and the detected portion is detected by the detection sensor. When is detected, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position.

On the other hand, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped at the overhang position, the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after starting the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the overhang position is cumulatively added. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the overhanging position) has a portion overlapping with the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect.

However, if the movable ranges are overlapped in this way, it is caused by variations in component dimensions / assembly, variations in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) based on tolerances, or poor control (for example, poor control). Due to the occurrence of (error of cumulative addition of the number of drive steps), the left slide member 430 slide-displaced to the overhanging position may come into contact with the right slide member 450, resulting in damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to suppress damage while ensuring the effect of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, the second member is formed by the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. The 433 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435) which is visible to the player on the second member 433. Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the effect of the slide displacement can be ensured.

On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 brings the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). , The impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is made to stand by (stop) closer to the retracted position than the overhanging position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the overhanging position. When the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 is pushed by the left slide member 430 in the direction of slide displacement, and the two are slid and displaced in an integrated state. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to weaken the impact of and suppress damage to both.

The right slide member 450 is arranged on the base member 410 so as to be slidable, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, when the right slide member 450 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is separated from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18A). FIG. 18A has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side), and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can be slidably displaced is the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the left slide member 430. It is considered to be the direction that allows the slide displacement of.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (relieved backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Therefore, a buffering action can be exerted (see FIG. 18B). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the directions of slide displacement between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel, so that when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 The escape operation can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert a buffering action and easily suppress damage to both.

Further, in this case, by sharing the sliding rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the directions of slide displacement of both members are parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. .. That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The space is increased by that amount, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the sliding rod member 420 of 1 in both the sliding rod members 430 and 450, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (on the right side in FIG. 18A), and is not different from the left slide member 430. It can be placed at the position of contact. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-mentioned variation and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper), while the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position with the target position. Therefore, by arranging the right slide member 450 at a position where it is not in contact with the left slide member 430, the number of contacts can be reduced and the fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, the left slide member 430 is provided with both members 431 and 433 separately in order to accelerate the speed of the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between the 433a, and the number of parts and the sliding portion are increased, so that the weight and the driving resistance are increased. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial velocity when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the slide displacement may be hindered.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be in contact with the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the contacted state (FIG. 18 (a). ) It is formed so that it can be slidably displaced to the left). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. As a result, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid and displaced from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be increased to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430. (The first member 431 is pushed back), so that the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

That is, the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431, which has a slower slide displacement speed than the second member 433 of the left slide members 430, and pushes back the first member 431. Therefore, the right slide member 450 The speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after the time when the auxiliary force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (that is, after the left slide member 430 in the stopped state starts to be pushed back). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450) can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be improved.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational driving force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion to slide-displace the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio and the rotational driving force of the right drive motor 476 are converted into linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a). The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the direction of slide displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means that the amount is large.

As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily slid and displaced quickly from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force of the right slide member 450 to push back the left slide member 430 is increased. The initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased by that amount. The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect due to the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (delayed). That is, both the smooth initial operation of the left slide member 430 and the increase in the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation are compatible. However, by adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, which was not possible in the past, such compatibility has become possible for the first time.

Next, the detailed configurations of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

FIG. 19A is a front view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper united unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper uniting unit 500 is connected to the base member 510, the rack member 520 displaceable in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. It includes an upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for sliding displacement of the rack member 520.

The base member 510 includes a front view rectangular horizontally long back base 511 and a front view rectangular horizontally long front base 512 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back base 511, and the back base 511 and the front base. The rack member 520 is housed in a slide-displaceable manner between the facing surfaces (internal space) of 512.

The back base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member projecting to the front side. A support shaft 511c inserted into the guide groove 522 of the 520 is provided.

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced due to the slide displacement of the rack member 520, the upper displacement member 530 The posture (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521, which is a front view circular hole for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It includes a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 carved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

The support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extension direction of the guide groove 522 is the extension direction of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of slide displacement of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 projecting from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511, and the guide pin 532 is the back base 511. It is a columnar body having a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. .. Further, the upper displacement member 530 is formed with an upper contact portion 533 on its side surface. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is on the side surface opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (tip side). It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 to which the drive shaft is connected to the pinion gear 542. Be prepared. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced along the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

Next, the operation of the upper uniting unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are front views and rear views of the upper uniting unit 500, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 23 (a), when the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are on one end side of the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b. It is located on the right side of FIG. 23), and the upper displacement member 530 forms a horizontal posture and is arranged in a state of being hidden behind the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the connecting shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connecting hole 511a and the guide pin 532 is displaced in the guide hole 511b as the rack member 520 slides. As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), the upper displacement member 530 is tilted diagonally (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) in the horizontal direction by being guided along the above. Displaced to. That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further obliquely tilted (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and displaced in the horizontal direction, and FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (c) and FIGS. As shown in 23 (c), a vertical posture is formed in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhanging position (first position).

Next, the lower coalescing unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower united unit 600. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower uniting unit 600 has a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. The drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, the lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, the connecting arm 650 to connect the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and the drive arm 630 are attached. It includes an urging spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the drive arm 630.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a projecting base portion 611 projecting from the front at the lower end of the substantially L-shape and projecting from the front at the upper end portion of the substantially L-shape. It is provided with a connecting shaft 612 to be formed. The projecting base 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position protruding from the front of the base member 610 (raised toward the front side), and is along the edge portion at the lower end of the base member 610. Be thrust.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

Since the back side of the back side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding base portion 611 of the base member 610, the amount of the protruding base portion 611 is increased. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back surface side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position is formed so as to be able to be accommodated in such a space, the outer shape of the lower uniting unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

In the drive arm 630, a plurality of teeth are engraved along the shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and the outer peripheral surface of the columnar portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As a long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at an end opposite to the gear portion 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 projecting from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. It is a columnar body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connecting arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 by rotating the drive arm 630.

The lower displacement member 640 is formed with a lower contact portion 643 on its side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is formed from a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side separated from the overhanging direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface oriented substantially orthogonal to the virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 includes connecting holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connecting holes 651 and 652 are provided with the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. Are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion is changed to the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as an arc shape at the center.

The urging spring 660 is a metal torsion spring, and one leg extending from the winding portion is engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg is engaged with the drive arm 630 to engage the drive arm 630. Is urged in the direction of rotation from the retracted position to the overhanging position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the displacement member 630 to be displaced. The 640 is urged in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 27A) to displace the 640 from the retracted position to the overhang position. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the overhanging direction can be smoothly performed.

The drive mechanism is arranged in front of the transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, the drive shaft is connected to the transmission gear 671a, and the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). It is provided with a drive motor 672 to be installed. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the head and the transmission gear 671c is at the tail. The gear train (gear train) of 1 is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c acts on the gear portion 632, so that the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Next, the operation of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower uniting unit 600, showing a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the state where the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 27 (a) counterclockwise rotation direction). It is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "retract rotation position"), and is in a tilted posture in which the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631) is inclined downward toward the tip side (connecting hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the directions connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 are substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is on the leftmost side (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27 (a)), and the vertical position is the lowest. It is arranged at a position (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the vertical direction, the lower side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640. Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27 (b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further driven as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view. Along with being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position.

In the overhanging position, the drive arm 630 is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as “overhanging rotation position”) that is maximally rotated clockwise in the front view (FIG. 27 (c) rightward rotation direction). In the rotation position, the drive arm 630 is arranged at a position where its tip side (connecting hole 633) crosses the vertical line passing through the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted most upward. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27 (c)), and the vertical position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest from the retracted position in the vertical direction, slightly downward from the upper side of FIG. 27 (a).

Here, the displacement speed of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a front schematic view of the drive arm 630 at the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extension rotation position. Further, FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the overhanging rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the overhang rotation position. In the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position, and the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal posture. The rotation position (the imaginary line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction) is called the "horizontal rotation position", and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position in which the drive arm 630 is in an upright posture (a posture in which the virtual line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a "vertical rotation position". The overhang rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29 (c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29 (d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. Corresponding to 630, FIG. 29 (e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

The drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, and therefore the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period from the stopped state until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation is sufficiently small and there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) and 29 (b), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The tilted posture is positioned below the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the arc shape of the connecting hole 633) The tangential speed in the displacement locus) is maximized at the horizontal rotation position, with the upward speed component (speed Vv) gradually increasing. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed upward thereof is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The tilting posture is set so as to be positioned above the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is further displaced upward as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, so that the speed V of the connecting hole 633 goes upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to 0 at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed of the downward displacement member 640 is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (d) and 29 (e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The speed V of the connecting hole 633 is increased because the connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture so as to be positioned above the hole 631. It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. As will be described later, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (merges) with the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from being repelled by the upper displacement member 530, and to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (a) to 29 (d), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is set. While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is the velocity component Vh toward the right in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). Gradually increased.

As a result, in the lower displacement member 640, the vicinity of the connecting hole 633 is displaced to the left in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is inverted at the rotation position, and in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), it is displaced toward the right (direction toward the retracted position).

That is, after the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at one end on the leftmost side (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It can be gradually displaced horizontally in an accelerated state toward the direction. As a result, it is possible to bring out the action of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction, and to give a dynamic feeling to the action of the lower displacement member 640.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased (range of angle θ1), the vertical velocity component Vv is increased while the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle). In the range of θ2), since the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, the above-mentioned operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 is made stronger for the player. You can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines) the upper displacement member 530, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). ), In the configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, the effect of the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction can be increased, so that the lower displacement member is displaced in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the displacement in the upward direction. The effect of 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be ensured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 640, the connecting arm 650 is attached to a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) separated upward from the connected portion (driving arm connecting shaft 641) of the drive arm 630. Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right as the rotation centered on the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. .. Therefore, as described above, when the motion of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is exhibited, the motion of bending and stretching is increased by the amount of the horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650. The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Further, when the lower displacement member 640 is produced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) is increased to produce the effect. Can be easily secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contact (coalescence) operation at the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden behind the base member 510 to the tip side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved locus, and is arranged at the overhanging position in a state in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward in a vertical posture. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowermost position, and is stretched by the drive arm 620. Placed in the out position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the overhanging position are united in a state where the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 are in contact with each other. As a result, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the evacuation position.

Here, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, they are repelled in a direction in which they are separated from each other by the impact generated at the time of the contact. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speeds of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 are slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, it takes time for both displacement members 530 and 640 to be integrated to form one character. Is bulky and stretches, which hinders the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640. Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being repelled in the direction of being separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Further, since the downward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually reduced in the section (range of the angle θ2) from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the lower displacement member 640 as a whole is reduced. It is possible to secure the velocity component Vv that goes upward. Therefore, the time required to integrate the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 to form one character can be shortened, and the extension can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the tip (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connecting portion (connecting hole 633) is used. ) Is drawn to draw an arc-shaped locus to gradually reduce the upward speed component Vv. Therefore, the downward speed component Vv of the downward displacement member 640 is reduced to keep the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the overhang rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the overhang position where the lower displacement member 640 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the overhanging position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position (range of angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is in the downward direction (direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent both displacement members 530 and 640 from being repelled in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize their postures.

Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 is a negative value. With the configuration, even if the position of contact (coalescence) is displaced due to dimensional tolerance / assembly tolerance or control variation in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to easily bring the displacement member 640 into contact with the upper displacement member 530 within a range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the projecting unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projecting unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and shows a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

The projecting unit 700 refers to the base member 710, the elevating base 720 rotatably arranged on the base member 710, the rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. It mainly includes a drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720.

First, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 has an insertion hole 711 opened as a circular hole in the front view at substantially the center in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 projecting from the front, and projecting from the back surface. It is provided with two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the back support shafts 713 and 714, respectively. ..

The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the rear base 721 and the front base (FIGS. 34 and FIG. See 35). The rear base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 at a predetermined interval by the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is located between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably housed (arranged).

One side of the back base 721 in the width direction is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged on the front surface of the base member 710, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the base end rail and the tip rail to be relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL, the elevating base 720 can be moved up and down with respect to the base member 710 along the vertical direction.

The back base 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. The sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slid along the sliding groove 721a to raise and lower the elevating base 720 (rear base 721). To.

The connecting arm 719 has a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevating base 720 (rear base 721) projecting from the front at an end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ) Is provided with a sliding pin 719b slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a and a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support holes 719a and the sliding pin 719b. .. The drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719c via the collar C. As will be described later, the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven so that the connecting arm 719 is rotated around the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 is a drive arm 771 in which the rotation shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and the rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the tail transmission gear 772d is connected, and the transmission gear 772a at the head of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and the drive is arranged in front of the base member 710. It is provided with a motor 773.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 772d is the head of the transmission gear 772d. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the lowermost position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21 (a)), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. It is transmitted from the gear 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33A) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33 (a)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (overhang position) (FIG. 21 (c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extending position) (see FIG. 21 (c)), the rotational driving force is the leading transmission gear. It is transmitted from 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (c)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowermost position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a)). )reference).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. In addition, the rotating shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the back base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b arranged on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the curved rack gear 731b. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 781a causes the rotating member 730 to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 is the transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in a state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center of the curved rack gear 731b in the circumferential direction, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of slide displacement of the projecting member 735 (the direction of projecting or immersing when appearing and descending) as the vertical direction. It is arranged at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "center rotation position") (see FIG. 36 (b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 uses the rotation shaft 731a as the rotation center. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36B). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36 (c)) (see FIG. 36 (c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated on the rotating shaft. It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36C) with 731a as the center of rotation. As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36 (a)) after passing through the central rotation position (see FIG. 36 (a)). ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the protruding member 735 appears and disappears from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swing member 732 that is swingably arranged in front of the back base 731, and the swing members 732 and the back base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between the two, a front base 734 disposed in front of the back base 731, a projecting member 735 disposed slidably on the back of the front base 734, and a front base. A drive mechanism for displacementing (sliding displacement and swinging) the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the 734 and the back base 731 is provided.

The back base 731 is formed in the shape of a container having a substantially circular front view with the front open, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is missing, and the bottom is formed from the part where the outer peripheral wall is missing. A part of the wall protrudes upward. On the back surface of the rear base 731, as described above, the rotating shaft 731a pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the curvature meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35) are curved. A rack gear 731b is arranged.

Further, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotation shaft 732a of the swing member 732 and the tip of the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 are slidably inserted into the back base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e through which the slide pin 733b of the intermediate member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 731c, with one end side and the other end side. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swing member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swing member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and the axis of the rotation shaft 731a is positioned on an extension line in the extension direction, and the slide hole 731e and the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 described later Formed in parallel. A pair of shaft support holes 731c and guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to a virtual line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The rocking member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an acted shaft 732b formed as a columnar shaft body, and the base end sides on which the rotating shaft 732a and the acted shaft 732b are arranged face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 731c of the back base 731, and the actuated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into the working hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the back base 731. Will be done.

The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the rotating shaft 732a from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is formed by the rotating shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between them. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is the acted shaft 732d and the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between the 731d and the action hole 733a.

The interposition member 733 is a plate-shaped portion interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swing member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the elevating and lowering (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposition member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732, and the pair is oriented in a front view C shape. It is arranged line-symmetrically.

As will be described later, when the interposition member 733 is raised (sliding displacement upward), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b upward, and the swinging member 732 lifts the tip end side thereof. When the interposition member 733 is lowered (sliding displacement downward) while being swung (rotated), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 is moved downward. It is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down the tip side.

The slide pin 733b is a columnar portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the back surface of the interposition member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the line of symmetry of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the intermediate member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along a horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the intermediate member 733) so as to project from the front surface of the intermediate member 733. The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b is slid on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). The intermediate member 733 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) according to the change (increase / decrease) of. That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the drive body 761, the interposition member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposition member is pushed up. The 733 is lowered by its own weight.

An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in a state of being elastically extended, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the intermediate member 733. That is, the lowering of the interposing member 733 (sliding displacement downward) is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the own weight of the interposing member 733). As a result, as will be described later, the rocking member 732 can be swung (rotated) quickly in the tilting direction (direction in which the tip is lowered).

The front base 734 is a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the back base 731. A slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted is formed in the front base 734. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731.

The projecting member 735 is a long plate-like body that is slidably displaced on the back surface side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a columnar portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the front of the projecting member 735. , Are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735, and the sliding pin 761c of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is slidably inserted. To. Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

An urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735.

The drive mechanism for displacement (slide displacement and swing) of the projecting member 735 and the swing member 732 is a drive body 761 rotatably arranged in front of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the drive body 761. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 762a to 762e to which the tail transmission gear 762d is connected to the 761a, and the transmission gear 762a at the head of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 731. It is provided with a drive motor 763.

The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is a portion formed as a disk cam in which a curved surface corresponding to the rotation position of the drive body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is formed. By sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intermediate member 733, the intermediate member 733 is driven (sliding and displaced). Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761 and acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 as described above to project. Drive the member 735 (slide displacement).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the drive body 761. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 762a is the head of the transmission gear 762e. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the trailing transmission gear 762e. The drive body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

When the drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swing member 732 moves downward on its tip side due to its own weight. It is oscillated (rotated) in the direction of displacement to (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the position of the sliding pin 761c in the vertical direction is raised. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is raised (sliding displacement upward) (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposing member 733 is raised, so that the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the working hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and shakes. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces its tip side upward.

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (sliding displacement downward).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

40 (a) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. is there. In addition, in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the sliding wall 733c and the protruding member 735 of the intermediate member 733 are slid in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. Hole 735b is schematically illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) is in contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from the position P1 to the position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has its bottom surface (the lower surfaces of FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)) in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the interposition member 733, FIG. 40). It is formed in a straight line along (a) and 40 (b) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is moved from the top to the maximum when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously lowered to the lower side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side of the sliding hole 735b (right side in FIG. 40 (a)) to a predetermined range, and the other end of the sliding hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed from a straight portion 735b2 extending in a range up to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is formed by being curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the drive body 761 in a state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. Further, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is located on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the drive body 761 slides from the drive body 761. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, so that the protruding member 735 is maintained in the state of being stopped at the lowermost position.

The rotation position where the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position (that is, the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is set to the "predetermined rotation position". ".

The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40A and 40B). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that the driving body 761 is in the second rotation position due to the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2. When it is rotated toward, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40B), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is predetermined on the straight portion 735b2. It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and then enters the straight portion 735b2, and the end (sliding) of the straight portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end side of the moving hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40 (a)), the direction is changed at the end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). As a result, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, showing a transition state when the protruding member 735 is slidably displaced and the rocking member 732 is swung. Note that in FIGS. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically shown. Further, in FIG. 41 (a), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position, and in FIG. 41 (b), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged in the predetermined rotation position is shown in FIG. 42 (a). 42 (b) shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at a rotation position between a predetermined rotation position and a second rotation position, and FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. Will be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) (that is, the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position and the protruding member 735 is located at the lowermost position. Will be done. When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from this state, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter, as shown in FIG. 41 (b) (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

When the drive body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41 (b)) is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is further increased as shown in FIG. 42 (a). By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid upward by pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is reduced to the radius R2, which is the minimum diameter, as shown in FIG. 42 (b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and the swing member 732 is further rotated by its own weight, and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position when the straight portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the drive body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) (that is, the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position), FIG. 42 (a) ), The cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40B), so that the interposition member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Along with this, the swing member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid downward by pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the operation of rotating the swing member 732 in the direction of raising its tip is also continued. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position when the straight line portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. 41 (a). As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position accordingly. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the position is at the lowermost position (that is, FIG. 41 (b). ) Is maintained in the stopped state.

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the member 2 (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by the drive motor 763 of 1.

Here, in the conventional product, when the two members are displaced by the one drive motor, the driving forces for driving the two members are overlapped, so that the load on the drive motor becomes large and the durability thereof decreases. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (cam portion 761b and the intermediate member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swing member 732 lowers the tip of the swing member 732. The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) is increased by raising the tip of the swing member 732 (the drive body 761 is first rotated from the second rotation position). It can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section to be rotated to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 is a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the drive body 761 is secondly rotated). The load of the drive motor 763 in the section where the drive motor 763 is rotated from the position to the first rotation position) is driven in the section where the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward (the section where the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). It can be smaller than the load of the motor 763.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and the first transmission means has a relatively high load. Can make the second transmission means a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and its durability can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), and a state in which the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 are both displaced can be formed, so that the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. While trying to improve the effect, the effect of displacement of both members 732 and 735 can be improved.

Further, the first transmission means displaces the swing member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. It is displaced, and swings per unit displacement of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the drive body 761) according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced while suppressing the load of the drive motor 763.

Further, it is a section for reducing the load of the drive motor 763 (in the first transmission means, a section for lowering the tip of the swing member 732 (a section for rotating the drive body 761 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). In the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is gravitationally driven by the displacement of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735. It is formed by having a displacement component downward in the direction, that is, by utilizing the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from becoming complicated. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced. Further, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the displacement speed of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily kept constant, and the drive motor 763 can be increased accordingly. The burden can be suppressed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are arranged separately. Space for this can be eliminated, and the size of the rotating member 730 can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement deviation of the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. Can be enhanced.

Here, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is started, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load on the head becomes large, the initial speed may become slow and the effect of the effect may be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) is formed from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be increased by that amount, so that the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be used. The upward slide displacement can be started smoothly.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering the tip thereof (see FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b)). Therefore, when the swing member 732 is swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swing can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the momentum to the rotation of the drive body 761, so that the upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, in this way, the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, so that both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. This can be avoided and the effect of displacement can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b and the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the drive body 761. By giving momentum to the member, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the drive body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 but at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1). Positioned (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 42 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the amount of upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the drive body 761 suddenly increases. The load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 is arranged on the horizontally long rectangular base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500 and on the base member 810 so as to be able to elevate. The elevating member 820, the drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820, the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force for the rotation of the drive motor 891, and one end of the base member 810 are pivotally supported. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around a shaft support by the rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is displaceable by the displacement of the link member 850, and a slide member 860 thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 870 that transmits the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed through the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B) in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 protruding in a columnar shape on the back surface side. It is formed mainly with and.

Each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813 is a hole through which each of the sliding pins 861, 862, 863 of the slide member 860, which will be described later, is inserted to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860, and is the direction of gravity (FIG. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that opens long in the 43 (b) vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811 and 812, 813 are formed side by side, and a sliding hole 811 is formed in the central portion, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. .. In other words, a sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 to be described later and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844, and are formed on the shafts of the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole to be formed through.

The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted through a through hole 851 formed through one end of the link member 850, which will be described later, to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a columnar shape.

As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is arranged on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-like body on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is internally fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train formed by connecting gears 844 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 can rotate to shaft support pins 814 to 816 protruding toward the back surface of the base member 810. It is supported by. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, the driving force thereof is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving the drive motor 891.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back surface side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850, which will be described later, and is formed so as to project at a distance at which the tip thereof overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 that penetrates circularly at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 that penetrates in a long hole shape at the other end in substantially the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850, and the through hole 851 and transmission. It is mainly provided with a connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole for inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 inside to rotatably support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so as not to fall off because the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted into the through hole 851 and the collar C3 is inserted from the back side and fastened with a screw or the like. Will be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 of the link member 850, an annular portion 852 projecting in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 43B). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap, and each of the transmission gears 840 The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 843 to 844.

Further, a torsion spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by laminating a wire made of a metal material on a cylindrical spiral, and can apply an urging force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion wound over the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the spirally wound state of the torsion spring SP1 is broken, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied to the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can suppress the spiral state from collapsing and stabilize the urging direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for arranging the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the urging direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can be done.

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 protruding from the front side of the link member 850 in a hook shape, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 protruding from the back side of the base member 810 in a hook shape. Engage. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and apply an urging force to the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation axis.

The connecting side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844a can be displaced by sliding inside the connecting side sliding groove 853. As a result, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof. Is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 through which the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 is inserted can be inserted into the inside of the transmission side sliding groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected to each other via the base member 810. Therefore, the slide member 860 arranged on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid and displaced by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 arranged on the back side of the base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the length dimension in the gravity direction is set to be smaller than the length dimension in the gravity direction of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. As a result, the overall outer shape of the elevating unit 800 in front view can be reduced.

The slide member 860 has a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed to protrude from the back surface side in a columnar shape, a plurality of slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding to the front side. It is mainly provided with two columnar protrusions 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, and can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pins 862 and the sliding pins 862 The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back surface side of the base member 810 with screws or the like.

Therefore, the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and the sliding holes 813 formed through the base member 810 in a straight elongated hole shape, so that the slide member 860 is inserted. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810 and is slidably connected to the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 in the elongated hole direction. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, so that the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which the protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape long in the gravity direction and have a width dimension in the lateral direction. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusions 871a to 871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member arranged on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with racks 872 extending in the direction of gravity and arranged in pairs on the target and rack gears on the racks 872. Each pinion gear 873 is mainly provided with a second slide member 871 arranged between the pinion gears 873.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, the rack 872 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the central portion of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and is meshed with a pinion gear 873 described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid and displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is also displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 includes an upright portion 871e formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view and bent toward the front side at a lower end portion, and rack gears 871d engraved on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. It is mainly provided with a plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c that project in a columnar shape on the back surface side.

The erecting portion 871e is a wall portion to which the elevating member 820 described later is fastened to the elevating tip surface thereof, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw inside the elevating member 820 and fastening the elevating member 820 to the tip portion thereof penetrates. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

Further, the upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging the decorative member 830 described later in the gap, and is a gap forming portion in the front-rear direction of the decorative member 830. The vertical dimension is set to be larger than the thickness of. As a result, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a tooth contact surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on both the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and each slide from the back side of the slide member 860 to the tip end side of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is made rotatable with respect to the slide member 860, and is held slidably along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, and the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid-displaced along with the rotation. Therefore, since the second slide member 871 slides and displaces with respect to the slide member 860 in the direction of gravity, the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 and slides. The displacement distance can be made larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed from becoming small.

As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that projects toward the back surface side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the upright portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the upright portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened through the fastening hole 821a. As a result, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are arranged on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that regulates the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, whereby the transmission member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape imitating the title or logo of the game machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of interest by emitting light from the title, logo, or the like on the player side.

Next, the movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. 49 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. FIG. 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is arranged on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position. It is a state in which it is located at the lowermost position and is arranged below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 that can be placed at the end farthest from the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and a reference numeral of the virtual line KS3 is given. ..

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a), when the elevating unit 800 is located in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side on which the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). Is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in a state of being positioned upward. Therefore, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also in a state of being positioned upward.

Further, in the first state, the virtual line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 and the protrusion 844a for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850. The position is orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 connecting the intermediate position of the connecting side sliding groove 853 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the link member 850 from being displaced by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the elevating unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a) and the driving force for rotation acts on the drive motor 891, as described above, the gears 184 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate. The driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted into and connected to the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, which is connected by inserting the sliding pin 861 into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, is slidably displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to its displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slidably displaced. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52 (b), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. It is said that it is in a state of being. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward from the first state with respect to the base member 810.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the second state.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830. Therefore, the title and logo of the game machine formed on the decorative member 830 can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the elevating member 820 is adjacent below the decorative member 830, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state to the third state of the initial position, it is possible to display a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 of the elevating unit 800 are combined in front of the game area. it can.

Further, in the third state, the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are located at the descending ends of the sliding holes 81 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by each of the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 of the transmission gear 840. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gear 844 from being damaged.

Next, the united state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operating unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 200 on the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53.

In the combined state shown in FIG. 53, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800. The 820 is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing each member (elevation base 720, rotating member 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (protruding unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern (elevation unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) is formed. It can be visually recognized by the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the game machine 10.

In addition, each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating the wings of an animal, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in a bow shape, and the elevating unit 800. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of the game machine.

Further, as described above, since the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 435 in the combined state (overhanging state). The pattern (character) of 1 can be formed by combining 455, the elevating member 820, and the decorative member 830.

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also other movable units (protruding unit 700 and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be combined with and used as one display surface. As a result, a plurality of display forms can be formed by making the displacement states of the movable units (elevating unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) arranged in the operating unit 200 different, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, a part of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is attached to the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 54). It is placed in an overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The elevating member 820 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 54) of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed to include a protrusion unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are displaceably formed at the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and the elevating member 820 is formed. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 of the three movable units can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the elevating member 820 in consideration of damage due to the impact at the time of contact. And since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later elevating member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the starting rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhanging position, and an effect is produced when forming a pattern (character). Can be enhanced.

Further, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced, if the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 is attached to the protruding member 735. It is possible to suppress contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are movable and united in the space at the center of the game machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surfaces thereof. There are game machines that collide with each other and coalesce. However, when the side surfaces collide and coalesce, the collision tends to form scratches on the collision surface. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is easily impaired.

Further, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to slow down the speed of the collision, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the accessory is increased. It has gone down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the movable unit is provided. The sides do not collide with each other when they are displaced and combined in the central space of the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and prevent the design of the movable unit from being impaired.

Further, when the movable units are displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined, the side surfaces of the movable units do not collide with each other, so that the speed of displacement can be made constant when the combined displacement occurs. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the uniting operation of the characters, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the elevating unit 800 and the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 are two-stage racks (the elevating unit 800 is a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871. The slide unit 400 is configured via a first side pinion gear 432 between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13), and thus the conventional one-stage. The speed of displacement operation can be improved compared to the rack of the type (a form consisting of only a rack and a pinion). Therefore, by increasing the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) can be improved. As a result, the time during which the player can visually recognize the union operation can be shortened, so that the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the dimensions in the front-rear direction increase and the size increases. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes a second slide member 871 formed so as to project to the side having the same front-rear direction position as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, the whole (elevating member 820, rotation). The front-rear direction dimension of the member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine 10 in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the elevating member 820 is increased to increase its rigidity. Can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a position protruding toward the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. It is arranged at an overlapping position. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same positions in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 53 left-right direction), the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 It is possible to reduce the width of the bulge in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference with and (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be prevented from intersecting with the displacement locus, so that the second slide member 871 and the rotating member 871 can be separated from each other. It is possible to suppress collision during displacement (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, the displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. 55 to 58 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 55 to 58 sequentially show the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the projecting unit 700 sliding displacement of the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed in the middle of displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating member 720.

As described above, in the slide members 430 and 450, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced as they are slid and displaced. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotating members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. (Fig. 57, center position in the left-right direction) is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle.

Here, the first member and the second member, which are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (overhanging) position, are provided, and the first member and the second member are displaced to the united position, respectively. There is a gaming machine that makes the player visually recognize as one character by associating (integrating) the first member and the second member with each other or bringing them into contact with each other.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, if the structure is such that the first member and the second member are displaced to the united (overhanging) position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they are displaced to the united position while being displaced from each other. May interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. , The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 in a linear displacement, so that the elevating base 720 is arranged at the united position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400. Since the 455 is arranged at the united position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the united position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the displacement of the elevating base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the locus. That is, with respect to the displacement locus on the straight line of the elevating base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720, and the rotation locus is united (overhanging). ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease as it is displaced to the position.

As a result, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be made into a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevating base 720. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set as a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that linearly displaces the elevating unit 700. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 deviate from each other, the trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 do not intersect each other, so that the members can be prevented from interfering with each other. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened. The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 becomes a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape of the slide unit 700 is linearly displaced in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720. Is increased, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be increased in size.

As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the coalescing (overhanging) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the united position.

That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the united (overhanging) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation is moved to the united position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the projecting unit 700 instead of moving, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when only the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced, the position of the rotating shaft is fixed. Therefore, when the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the end of the rotating members 435 and 455. In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, the end portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft is only rotationally displaced, so that it is difficult to set a large displacement distance of the elevating base 720. Further, when the rotation axis of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the center of the rotating members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotating member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotating member is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position. , It is difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating shafts of the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed at the center positions of the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating shafts are formed on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated by combining linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is referred to as the posture at the combined position. Can be specified independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotated and displaced between the retracted position and the united position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the overhanging position. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 are combined with the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position by the amount of the linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the longitudinal direction of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position (position where the base members 434 and 454 are arranged outside) is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space at the retracted position. On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), by rotating, the direction is substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the retracted position can be increased, and in the combined position, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be projected from the central portion of the game board 13.

Further, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged in the central portion of the game machine 10 (operation unit 200), as the size of the third symbol display device 81 increases. , The space on both the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in a configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully exhibited. That is, the game area is formed vertically, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed. , It is difficult to secure the arrangement space for the members. Therefore, in order for the rotating members 435 and 455 to not protrude into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position, while they are arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged by that amount, and as a result, they are formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the united position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, the evacuation space for the rotating members 435 and 455 to retract is reduced to secure the space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the game machine 10, and at the combined position, the evacuation space is moved to the central portion of the game machine 10. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably connected to the base members 434 and 454 so that the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protruding unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the projecting unit 700 during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size together with the projecting unit 700 at the united (overhanging) position. The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member 435 is in such an area. The rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size while setting the retracted positions of, 455.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swing member 732 is in a state of being displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that the swing member 732 can be brought into close contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by abutting on the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swing member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swing member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swing member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected to each other, the player can visually recognize the state in which each movable unit is integrated (combined state), and can give a hobby by the displacement of the accessory.

Further, since the swing member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swing member 732. The gap (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

As a result, it is possible to secure a displaceable space when the rotating members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) are in the combined state. As a result, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) can be further rotated, and the variation of the displacement mode in the combined state of the operating unit 200 can be increased. ..

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the swing member 732 is kept away from the rotating member 730 to exert a role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455, and then. Displaces the swing member 732 in a direction close to the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. The displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 produces an effect. Can be enhanced.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining each operation unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of each operation unit is combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by forming the rotating members 435 and 455 into a shape imitating a bow, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow is formed. It is possible to form a state in which the bow is pulled by an arrow or a state in which the arrow is released from the bow and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (opposite side of the arrowhead) of the arrow, and the elevating member 820. Is the central portion of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show transition states when the stop position of the left slide member 430 shifts in the excess direction and the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 collide with each other.

Further, in FIGS. 59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 will be described, and when the right rotating member 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the left rotating member The 435 is considered to be the same as the case where the operating unit 200 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center position in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are originally due to poor control, rattling of each member, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor, as shown in FIG. 59 (a). It was not stopped at the stopped position in the combined state, and there was a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 collided with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700. Therefore, there is a risk that the swing member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with each other and the parts are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged with respect to the elevating base 720, and is therefore shown in FIG. 59 (b). As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 with respect to the elevating base 720, not only the variation of the displacement mode of the projecting unit 700 can be increased, but also the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other. It can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The rocking member 732 arranged in pairs with the rocking member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to alleviate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force for the rotating member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rotating member 730 is further rotated.

That is, two sets of the swing member 732 and the rotary member 435 (rotary member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotary member 435 (rotary member 455) is brought into contact with the swing member 732 in one set, the contact is made. With the contact, the swing member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is formed. When the swing member 732 is displaced beyond the reference position and abuts on the swing member 732, the swing member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set in accordance with the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the other set. The impact can be received not only by the rocking member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the rocking member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 07 (b)) than the rotation axis, so that the rotating member 455 (rotation) When abutting on the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotational moment acting on the axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) can be applied. ) Can be used to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730. Therefore, it is not necessary to supply electric power to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730, so that the driving energy can be suppressed.

Next, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 60A and 60B show transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 deviate in the excess direction, the swing member 732 and the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with each other, and the swing member 732 or the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with each other. Was in danger of being damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-mentioned third operation at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to alleviate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 or each of the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Further, in this case, the impact when the rocking member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for projecting the projecting member 735. Therefore, the drive motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735. The load can be reduced. That is, the impact when the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, whereby the drive body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third operation may be allowed to wait a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 shift in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the drive that displaces the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735. The rotational resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacementing the rocking member 732.

Further, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front views of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700. Note that FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the gap between each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 is the gap of the rotating member 730 when the displacement of the third operation is performed. The swing member 732 is increased by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be further displaced as compared with the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61B, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be rotated by further sliding-displace the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 toward the central portion of the game machine 10. It can be displaced toward the center of the game machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further give a sense of unity to the united (overhanging) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second united state of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second united state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 62 to 64 show transition states in which each movable unit of the operating unit 200 projects to the position of the second united state. Further, FIG. 62 shows the operation unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 in the second united position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second united position. However, each is illustrated.

Further, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operating unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. ) And the elevating member 820) at the united (overhanging) position will be referred to as the first united state below. Further, in the first united state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the first effect mode. It can be recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is arranged in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (position shown in FIG. 17A) and the upper united unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22 (a)). The lower united unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A) at the position shown in). In the formation of the second united state by the operating unit 200, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slidably displaced to the central portion of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by being displaced downward and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 being displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper union unit 500 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower union unit 600 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A). By being displaced to the positions shown in FIG. 27 (c), the second united state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second united state, each movable unit of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, and lower united unit 600) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the second effect mode. It can be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second production mode is, for example, a pattern (character) that imitates Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the part forming the body portion of the Pegasus is the lower united unit 600, the part forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper uniting unit 500, and the part forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second united state, the base member 434 displaced so as to be slidable is displaced to the overhang position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the end of the slide. That is, the base member 434 in the first united state and the base member 434 in the second united state are arranged at different distances that are slidably displaced from the retracted position. Further, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged can be different between the first united state and the second united state.

Further, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is moved from the retracted position in the first united state and the second united state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently due to the difference in the slide displacement distance. In the present embodiment, the rotation angles (postures) of the rotating member 435 are arranged in different postures by about 180 degrees about the rotation axis in the first united state and the second united state.

As described above, the operating unit 200 is a tension of each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of each operating unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700 and elevating unit 800). By the displacement to the protruding position, each member can be united to form one pattern (character).

That is, as the first effect mode, the operation unit 200 simply combines each member into the central space of the operation unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) to form one pattern (character). Instead, as a second effect mode, each member can be combined in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, and the like. Can be made to. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, it is possible to show the player various productions and give them a hobby.

Here, a first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units formed displaceably between the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and displaceably formed between the retracted position and the extended position. A game machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

According to this game machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the overhanging positions, each movable unit of the first movable unit group is associated (integrated) with one pattern (integrated). While making the player recognize the character) as the first effect mode, when each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged at the overhang position, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is associated with each other. (Integrated), another pattern (character) is made to be recognized by the player as a second effect mode. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is arranged at the overhanging position. A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group of the above, and in the second gaming state, each of the first movable units is retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is retracted. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the overhanging position, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form the plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the movable unit is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united) of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700 and elevating unit 800) Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower united unit 600) is also used as a movable unit, the movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) production modes are correspondingly used. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. Since it is also used as a part of the above, the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, a space is created in the evacuation space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (a space other than the central space in the evacuation state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), and each movable unit (slide). The unit 400, the upper united unit 500, the lower united unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the evacuation unit 800) can be enlarged.

Further, since each member of each movable unit (rotating member 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) can be enlarged, the first The pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode can be enlarged.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. ), And if they are arranged at the same position in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, they are movable in common in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is used, which hinders the interest.

Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the members (rotating member 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is a united (extended) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a united (extended) position arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since the position is different from the position (out position), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the interest is hindered. Can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being hindered.

Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at different positions (extending positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be increased. It is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from.

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first united state and the second united state, the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to see this, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the rotating members 435 having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the first effect mode are used. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the rotating member 435 when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress that the interest is hindered. Further, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 is arranged in a different position and in a different posture (rotation angle) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that both the first effect mode and the second effect mode are used, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode is in a state in which either the position or the posture arranged in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is different. There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, but the rotating member 435 is the first effect. Since both the arranged position and the posture are different between the mode and the second effect mode, the player is informed that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first united state and the second united state. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably arranged on the base member 434 which is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Further, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) and the entire body can be recognized by the player as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be transformed into. For example, even if there is an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member is in such an area. The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of the 435.

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in the region so that the rotating members 435 of the base member 434 are overlapped with each other in the front view at the retracted position. Therefore, the other regions of the base member 434 (conversion mechanism) The size can be reduced in the front-back direction of the area where is not placed. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second united state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600. 67 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 65 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIb. 68 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb.

It should be noted that FIGS. 65 (a) to 66 (b) show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second united state in order. 65 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65 (b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, and FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. The slide unit 400 in the retracted state is shown in the figure.

Further, the displacement from FIG. 65 (a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second united state, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. Further, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66A, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. It is done by. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacement of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second united state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper uniting unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by chain lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), in the retracted state (state in which the upper united unit 500 is arranged in the retracted position), the upper displacement member 530 is housed inside the base member 510. The lower uniting unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of a front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and a back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the back side as described above. A step portion 434b2 recessed on the back surface side is formed on the lower side (lower side of FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is the entire back surface. By denting to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, since the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is formed by being recessed on the back surface side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the gap below the lower uniting unit 600 can be increased. The displacement member 640 can be arranged.

Further, since the thickness of the base member 434 on the lower side in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the first state (the state shown in FIG. 65B) described later, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, on the upper side of the base member 434 above the step portion 434b2, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13), which are transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotating member 435, can be arranged by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said that.

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected to the base member 410 so as to be slidable and hangs down, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction (FIG. 65 (a) left-right direction) toward the upper side. Where it is easy, the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, so that the deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

Further, at the retracted position (position in FIG. 65A), the back surface side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower uniting unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower united unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower uniting unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 connected above the lower displacement member 640 are where the upper end portion is likely to fall in the front-rear direction. The upper end of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower unit 600 in the retracted position in the front-rear direction can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 is slidably displaced to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the rotating member 435 is rotated by the displacement of the base member 434 by a predetermined amount, so that the rotating member 435 and the lower uniting unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower unit 434 can be positioned below. The position may be such that the united unit 600 does not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the front view, the area K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600 does not overlap with the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. The lower displacement member 640 of the portion is arranged.

As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is likely to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is an upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) separated from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 (rotational driving force). It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 530 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced to the second state, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper uniting unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotating shaft 435b of the rotating member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start the displacement, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the overhang position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 630. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 when it is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 is rotated downward and displaced as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction (center portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B) of the operating unit 200. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced while the base member 434 is slide-displaced to the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side of the front surface of the base member 434. Then, when it collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so that the base member 530 is displaced when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. It is possible to suppress collision with the side surface of the member 434.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68A, in the second state between the first state and the second united state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further laterally oriented than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right side (right side in FIG. 66A). Therefore, the rotating member 435, which is rotationally displaced (in conjunction with) according to the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. As a result, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65 (b)) of the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (FIG. 66 (a) left-right direction) is increased by sliding displacement of the base member 434, and the width of the region K2 is increased by rotating the rotating member 435 (FIG. 66 (Fig. 66)). a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

As a result, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the displacement is performed from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be arranged on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to prevent the upper contact portion (533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the base member 434 in front view while being displaced from the first state to the second united state, so that the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to a position where the second united state is formed. It is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 before the displacement.

Further, since the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see the upper displacement member 530. The displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily see the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

As shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second united state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower united unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 68B) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower uniting unit 600.

As a result, the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged at close positions so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stopped states. The structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, the rotating member 435 If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, while if the arrangement position or orientation of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper uniting unit 500 is formed. The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the united state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protruding unit 700) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , Elevating unit 800) movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit is viewed from the front. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member of the above, even if the stopped state (extension or posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member. It can be easier to maintain sex. That is, by partially overlapping in the front view, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between each movable member of each movable unit and the position in the front-rear direction. By making the difference, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent each movable member of each movable unit from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship of each movable unit with each movable member in the combined state.

Further, in the second effect mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other and arranged, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper contact portion 533. The upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second united state.

That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (overhanging) state can be placed at the same position. Since the pattern (character) formed in the second production mode can be easily visually recognized by the player because it can be integrated and easily visually recognized by the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and the upper displacement member is placed at the stopped position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode. In the structure that abuts on the 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position and the posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 and they are associated (integrated). ) Is inhibited.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other. Therefore, if the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member When the arrangement position or posture of the 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the state of being in contact with each other are displaced from each other, not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, but also the position is displaced. Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other at the united (overhanging) position, the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

Further, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side of at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. The rotating member 435 makes it difficult for the player to see the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

Next, the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment have been described. The 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. It is composed.

The main body base member 2480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board on the lower edge portion. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with protruding portions 2481 on the lower surface side of both end portions in the longitudinal direction.

The protruding plate portion 411 is engraved with a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 with the slide displacement of the first member 431 on the upper surface side.

As described above, the projecting portions 2481 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. The protrusion 2481 is recessed with a circular bearing hole 2481a into which the shaft portion 2486 of the rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed through the protruding portion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game machine) of the main body base member 2480 in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 toward the outside, and the axial centers formed at both ends are concentrically formed.

The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485, a rotation portion 2487 having a substantially circular shape and a predetermined thickness is formed, and the shaft portion 2486 of the axial body is formed outward in the longitudinal direction from the axis of the rotation portion 2487. Is formed to protrude.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up.

The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are formed concentrically with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2488, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed to be smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2488 and arranged in the main body base member 2480.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmission member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a is meshed with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in the front view) of the main body base member 2480.

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotary transmission member 2485, and the axis is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotation shaft of the rotary drive motor 2489 is inserted into the through hole 2481b of the protruding portion 2781, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protruding portion 2488.

Therefore, by applying the rotational driving force to the rotary drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with the transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a transmits a driving force to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, the rotating member 435 can be driven to rotate as the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces.

The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a transmits the drive to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed to include a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the back surface side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension as the tooth portion (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges into a shape that gradually decreases toward the central portion of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness increases toward the back surface side. The distance dimension in which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 to the back surface side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. It is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 viewed from the front in the state where the teeth are released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 73 (a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located downward (lower side of FIGS. 72 and 73), it transmits to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. A state in which the gear 2437a is in mesh with the gear 2437a is formed.

Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when a rotation driving force is applied to the rotation drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotation transmission member 2485 upward on the back side, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Tooth.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 changes to the rotation transmission member 2485. Displaces upward as the rotation of. As a result, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be formed so as not to rotate.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430, and the slide of the left slide member 2430. The second drive state in which the displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the left slide member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is stopped to rotate. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by the inertial force.

As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotary movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor that applies a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 increases. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotary drive motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410 forms a second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member 435. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for rotationally driving the rotary member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 provided with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 to transmit the left rotation. When the mesh between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when the second drive state in which the mesh is released is switched to the first drive state in which the gears are engaged, the gears cannot be engaged and the side surfaces are engaged with each other. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not be meshed due to collision.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second drive state in which the teeth are released to the first drive state in which the teeth are engaged, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the teeth portion of the transmission gear 2437a. it can.

Further, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the back surface side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the inclined surface that is gradually reduced. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is released.

It is preferable that the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment has its axis formed on a flat surface on the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are suppressed from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and an accommodating member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board) on the lower surface side, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side in the vertical direction.

The accommodating member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge to the front side of the game machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Further, the housing member 3490 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. As a result, the accommodating member 3490 can be arranged inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the protruding wall 3491 on the lower side of the accommodating member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the protruding wall 3491 on the upper side of the accommodating member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the accommodating member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the accommodating member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495. The diameter is formed smaller than the diameter of.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides and displaces the accommodating member 3490 up and down by its drive, and by applying electric power, a shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion thereof is inserted. It is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of the cylinder.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the accommodating member 3490 with its shaft portion inserted inside the insertion hole 3481c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced vertically, and the accommodating member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced vertically. That is, the accommodating member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the accommodating member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 75B is a schematic view of the accommodation member 3490. Is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a front view in a state where the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. 76 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the accommodating member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 76A, when the accommodating member 3490 is located above, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is large. It is arranged in a sufficiently secured state, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing between the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, when the accommodating member 3490 is located below, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is arranged in a state of being smaller than the distance dimension L1 and the main body. The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in a disengaged state (distance dimension L1> L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides with respect to the base member 3410, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so that the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, it is possible to form a form that does not rotate even if the left slide member 430 is displaced.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. It is possible to switch between the 1st drive state and the 2nd drive state.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly meshed with each other.

That is, when the tooth portions of the transmission gear 437a and the tooth portions of the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, if the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a state of being out of phase, the left rotation transmission rack gear While the tooth surface of 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other, the transmission gear 437a is engaged while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. Therefore, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phases, and the gears can be smoothly matched.

Next, the slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge portion. .. On the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

The counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed so as to be located on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notched portions 4413a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both end portions and the central portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a include a small tooth 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed so as to be located on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notches 4414a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch 4414a include a small tooth portion 4414b whose outer shape is smaller than that of the non-adjacent teeth.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view of the base member 4410. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit 4400 in the state where the meshing of a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and a transmission gear 437a is released. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIG. 78A, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates counterclockwise. It forms a state of being in mesh with the transmission rack gear 4413.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is moved. A state in which the teeth are disengaged from the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

That is, the rotating member 435 can be rotated along with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. .. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is caused by its inertial force. Can be continued by.

Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for disengaging the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so that the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. This can be prevented and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a passing through the notch portion 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly engaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 not provided with the small tooth portion 4413b, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, if the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth There is a risk that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 will mesh with each other and the teeth cannot be engaged.

In this case, when the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are formed to have a smaller outer shape than the other teeth, the rotation phases of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the teeth from engaging with each other and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase thereof. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly performed.

Next, the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment have been described. The 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed through the axis of the transmission gear 5437f in a circular shape, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. A plurality of rollers 5439d arranged in the above, a cage 5439e for holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the cage 5439e and switching the phase of the rollers 5439d with respect to the cam surface are mainly provided. ..

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in an elongated hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding from the front side of the displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. ..

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a front view before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81 (b) is a left view after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawings are simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in a state where the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. It is bitten by the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotating member 5435, the position of the protruding portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is changed to the rotating member 5435 due to the displacement. Displace with respect to. As a result, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displace the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 5430 is slid-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating, and the one-way clutch is used to stop the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. By changing the state in which the 5439 allows the transmission of rotation to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, a third driving state is formed in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the displacements of the displacement member 5436 can be combined in addition to the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435, the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment have been described. The 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. To.

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to the operator 6438 described later. To.

The operator 6438 is formed in a vertically long rod-like body having a rectangular front view. In the operator 6438, a connecting pin 6438a projecting forward is formed at the lower end portion, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed slightly above the central portion in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole to be inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 protruding rearward from the back side of the back surface side base member 434a in a columnar shape, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operator 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back surface side base member 434a in a state of being rotatable about the axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter dimension is formed to be smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the operator 6438 rotates about the through hole 6438b while the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes and the one-way The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back surface side base member 434a, and the other end is locked to the operator 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always urged in the clockwise rotation direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis in the front view. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in the driving state (the state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435) when no external force is applied to the operator 6438.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in the state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84 (b) is the slide unit in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the 6400 from the front. 85 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are shown by broken lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), in a state where no external force is applied to the operator 6438, the operation operator 6438 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Placed in.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 slides and displaces, and the other end of the operator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side of the front view on the side (upper side) comes into contact with the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

When the left slide member 6430 further moves to the end portion after the side surface of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the base member 6410, the operator 6438 is displaced around the through hole 6438b in the counterclockwise rotation direction in the front view.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430. By changing the one-way clutch 5439 from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the left slide member 6430 is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by its inertial force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment have been described. The 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which the second slide member 7460, which will be described later, is arranged is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged to face the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462. The shaft portion 7436 to be formed, the roller 7465 arranged with the shaft portion 7436 inserted, and the drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461 are mainly provided. Tooth.

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the tooth surface 7461a of the gear is formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction in the front view.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding the roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed on the side surface in the vertical direction, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw to the set hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7436 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is formed to be larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7436 is sandwiched and held by the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7436 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. ..

The outer shape of the roller 7465 is formed into a columnar shape, and a shaft hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the axis thereof. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7436 inserted through the shaft hole and is arranged between the two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member for applying a driving force that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to slide and displace the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged in the front is decorated (display of a pattern or the like) on the plane arranged in the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can be made visible to the player by sliding displacement from the position where it overlaps with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to the position where it does not overlap.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position before displacement of the operator 6438, and the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. The only difference is that no urging spring is arranged between the 6434a2 and the 6434a2, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slidably displaced, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right side.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced so that the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87B), the left slide member 7430 The rotating member 5435 can be rotationally moved with the displacement of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the operator is urged downward by the slide displacement while urging the roller 7465 downward. The 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operator 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincide with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is changed to the roller 7465. It comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displacement allows the operator 6438 to be rotated around the through hole 6438b while urging the roller 7465 to the right.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged so as to be tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Will be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the neutral position on the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Further, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is rotated to a state of being tilted to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is in contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Get in touch. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is tilted to the left side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89A, the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Further, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 is blocking the rotation transmission as described above. The rotation can be continued by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the sliding displacement is performed.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 are In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 can be continued by its inertial force to form a third driving state.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third driving state (for example, waiting until the time when the inertial force stops acting), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435. It is possible to form a second drive state in which the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. .. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is It is possible to change the position where the permissible state is changed to the regulated state or the permissible state is changed to the regulated state. As a result, the position where the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, and the position where the rotating member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. However, the second slide member 7460 is displaced due to the displacement. Since the role of performing the effect and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are combined, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched by displace the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is arranged in either the left-right direction of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to either the left-right direction in the state where the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacement, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without sliding the left slide member 7430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied by the displacement of the left slide member 7430. The first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating. Two drive states can be formed.

Next, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding-displace the left slide member 8430 along the sliding rod member 420. ..

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 8433. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably arranged on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 having a rectangular laterally long front view having a third side rack gear 8445a to which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed. , 8446, which is a horizontally long base member with a rectangular shape in front view, which hangs down from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the slide displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second member 8433 is engraved with the second rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the slide displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably arranged in the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the third member 8445 is engraved with the third side rack gear 8445a on the lower surface thereof. Further, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is acted on by the second side pinion gear 8433d, so that the third member 8445 becomes the second member. It is displaced relative to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 is fitted with the second side pinion gear 8433d. It is possible to apply the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, and show a transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. 94 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 94 (a), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is arranged inside the first member 8431 and the second member 8433. A third member 8445 is arranged inside the.

In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is arranged in front of the base member 8434. Will be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slide-displaced, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid-displaced without interfering with each other. .. Further, the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the central portion of the game board (in FIG. 93A, the base member 8410 An area where the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446 overlap each other) can be secured.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left. The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side are arranged facing each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both of the 433a, the driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with exercise. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged to face each other in a posture parallel to each other, and teeth are provided on both of the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 is interposed in the combined state, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with the third member 8445, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93B, the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged so as to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433, leaving a part of overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface on the left side of the base member 8431b hung on the first member 8431 and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8434 hung on the second member 8433 are substantially in the front-rear direction. They are placed in the same position. Further, the side surface on the left side of the base member 8434 hanging on the second member 8433 and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8446 hanging on the third member 8445 in the front-rear direction are arranged at substantially the same positions in the front-rear direction. To.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Next, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is hung on the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is hung on the first member 431 and the second member 8433. A base member 9434 hanging from the base member 9434 is arranged. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding-displace the left slide member 9430 along a sliding guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 9431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 9433. Mainly provided with 9434, a slide rail 9443 arranged on the base member 9434, a rectangular vertically long base member 9446 connected to the slide rail 9443, and a freely deformable thread-like wire 9444. It is composed of.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the left side of the front view on the upper end side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431b1 extending in the upward and downward directions is formed inside the concave groove. It is formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the second member 9433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433, the second member 9433 , The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c whose upper end side is cut out in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. Further, on the base member 9434, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the base member 9434 in a state where the expansion / contraction direction is the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described later, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for holding the third member in a slidable manner, and is formed of two plates and the plates of each other are slidably displaceable. Further, the slide rail 9443 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) inside, and is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The base member 9437 is slidably arranged with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back surface side to the slide rail 9443.

The base member 9437 is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the right side of the upper end portion when viewed from the front, and a columnar connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the concave groove. Will be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displace the base member 9437 with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, a fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connecting path for connecting one end and the other end located between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. (See FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid displacement. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). It is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are located at different positions in the front-rear direction. Placed in. Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced without interfering with each other. The space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the urging force of the slide rail arranged between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move to the left with respect to the base member 9434. Although a sliding force acts, the wire 9444 connects the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, so that the base member 9434 causes the base member. It is possible to prevent the 9446 from sliding to the left with respect to the base member 9434.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is a combination of the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. It is possible to maintain a state in which the 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are overlapped in the front-rear direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated to rotate the left pinion gear. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Is provided, so that the second member 9433 can be provided with a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 9400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 by the amount that the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state of being faster than the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened, and the shielding state and The open state can be switched quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b in the front view and the right side of the base member 9434 in the front view. The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the side surface of the base member 9434 on the left side in the front view and the side surface of the base member 9446 on the right side in the front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, so that the third member 8445 is arranged above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. You don't have to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be reduced, and the space for arranging the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

Next, the elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. 99 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 10800. Is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the united (extending) position has been described. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 10800)) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in a united state. The same as in each of the above embodiments. The same reference numerals are given to the parts of, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed by including an elevating member 10820 which is arranged so as to be elevated on the base member 810. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is mainly provided with a protrusion 821 projecting to the back surface side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to project from the back surface side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, and is an elevating member. It is formed so as to project from the back surface side of the 10820. The left-right dimension of the engaging portion 10822 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than that of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed so as to protrude toward the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the united state, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 10822 (see FIG. 102 (a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 is provided with a through hole 10822a which is formed so as to project in a rectangular shape from the back surface side of the elevating member 10820 and penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 in the top view. As a result, when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102 (b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is an operating unit 10200 in a united state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 of FIG. 101. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 in the CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, each rotating member 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is brought into contact with the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

The engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension is reduced as the outer shape thereof is directed downward in the rear view. That is, the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99B) of the engaging portion 10822 are formed so as to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction toward the lower side.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the back surface side of the projecting member 735 so that the projecting distance increases toward the lower side, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be in contact with each other. ..

Therefore, the engaging portion 10822 allows the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 to be in contact with each other, so that each movable unit (elevating unit 10800, slide) in the combined state can be brought into contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700) from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of each movable unit in the combined state, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

More specifically, the elevating member 10820 is displaced (vibrated) up and down at a relatively small distance by repeatedly acting a relatively small rotational drive on the drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 in a reciprocating manner.

In this case, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99B) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822, so that the left and right side surfaces are in contact with each other. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 101) of the operating unit 10200.

At the united (overhanging) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment in a direction in which the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 due to the center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operating unit 10200. .. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455, which are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820, can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is displaced repeatedly periodically, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be displaced repeatedly periodically.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700, since the inclined portion 10735a is brought into contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, the elevating member 10820 is given a periodic and repeated displacement, so that the inclined portion 10735 The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the above. Therefore, the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a periodically displaces the distance at which the projecting member 735 is pushed forward (to the left in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, the elevating member 10820 is displaced repeatedly periodically, so that the protruding member 735 can be displaced repeatedly periodically. Therefore, the driving energy can be suppressed because it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763,475,476.

That is, at the united (overhanging) position, the elevating member 10820 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 is formed so that it can be displaced periodically. The rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating member 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. .. Further, in this case, the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by abutting each other, and a mechanism for periodically displaces the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated from each other (non-contacting), the elevating member 10820 may be subjected to periodic displacement without being affected by each other. it can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

Further, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners from each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they are vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the portion of one character formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably arranged with respect to the base members 434 and 454, due to the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820, the rotating members are arranged in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis. The rotating member 730 can be arranged to periodically repeat the operation of being pushed out in the front-rear direction due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

Further, since each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 is directly connected to the displacement (vibration) driving source, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the projecting member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the projecting member 735 is transmitted via each of the rotating members 435 and 455, and thus is transmitted to the projecting member 735. Where the driving force is reduced, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the displacement (vibrating) driving source, so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Further, the elevating member 10820 is arranged on the side closer to the player because the position in the front-rear direction at the united (overhanging) position is arranged in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by the elevating member 10820 on the front side, which is easy for the player to see, as a vibration source, it is possible to easily transmit the force of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the drive body 11761 in a state where the drive body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) shows the drive body 11761 in the second rotation. It is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged at a position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the drive body 761 is lowered so that the intermediate member 733 is lowered with the rotation of the drive body 761 that displaces the projecting member 735 to the overhanging position (the state of protruding from the rotating member 730). Although the case where the 761b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the interposition member 733 is generated as the driving body 11761 displaces the protruding member 735 to the overhanging position (protruding state from the rotating member 730). The cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 is formed so as to rise. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is attached to the sliding wall 733c in a state where the drive body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) on the abutted cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted on the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) on the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from the position P1 to the position P2.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is moved from the bottom to the top. It is continuously raised to the upper side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the intermediate member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. Along with this, the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, the displacement mode will be described when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 104 to 107 sequentially show the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united (overhanging) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 104.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upwardly displaced, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operating unit 200 at the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operating unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, and the amount of extension during the extension operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the protruding unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves to the base. It is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the member 810. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip of the swing member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in a state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until it is arranged in the coalescing (overhanging position), and thus rotates in the middle of the displacement to the coalescing position. It is possible to prevent the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swing member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (elevating member 820, rotating member 435, 455, and rotating member 11730) is formed, and enhance the effect.

Further, since the tip of the swing member 732 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating member 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating member 435 and 455 can be formed large. Therefore, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730) and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700 and elevating unit 800) is formed by being united (character). ) Can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in the direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the united (overhanging) position, the tip of the swing member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730, so that the elevating member 820, the rotating member 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering) The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to be in contact with the base member 410.

In this case, the base member 410 is provided with the contacted portion, and the contacted portion is arranged at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and each component is provided. When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 and the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is brought into contact with the first member 431. It is brought into contact with the member (that is, the contacted member functions as a stopper that regulates the displacement of the left slide member 430). By bringing the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the contacted member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) which is the contact target (member with which the first member 431 is abutted) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). The case where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) should have at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

As described above, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) When they are brought into contact with each other, the above-mentioned parallel displacement component can cause the contacted object to be retracted (released), and a buffering action can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displace the contact object in the direction opposite to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( It is possible to assist the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state).

The contact target does not have to be driven by the driving means. Instead of being driven by a driving means, or in addition to being driven by a driving means, it is formed so as to be urged by an urging means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, etc.). Is also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with the left slide member 430, the urging means is elastically deformed so that the above-mentioned cushioning action can be exerted and the elastic recovery force thereof is increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the case where the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are arranged to the overhanging positions substantially at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is placed in the overhanging position first, and then the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the overhanging position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 hits the upper contact portion 533 in the stopped state. It may be touched). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the upper displacement member which is the object of contact with the lower displacement member 640 (the object with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (combined) at the overhang position). Although the case where the 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact target may be a stationary object (non-displaceable object). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in the lower uniting unit 600 is set to the overhanging rotation position has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited.

For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position may be the vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is set as the overhanging position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be in contact with the upper displacement member 530 at the overhanging position. You may.

Alternatively, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the overhang position is set to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotation position). It may be a rotated rotation position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and at the extension position, the lower displacement member 640 is the upper displacement member. It may be formed so as to be in contact with 530.

In any of these configurations, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened and the bounce can be suppressed by changing (decreasing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower united unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a columnar guide pin is projected from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove into which the guide pin can slide is provided. An example is a structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position by extending to the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

In the case of such a structure, at least a component in the displacement (velocity) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target (the target with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (merged) at the overhang position) is. The shape of the guide groove is set so that it decreases at least in the vicinity of the overhanging position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the bounce is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, only the lower uniting unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper uniting unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be done. In this case, the lower united unit 600 that is turned upside down may be arranged as the upper united unit 500.

In the first embodiment, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the drive state (power supply) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant. ) Has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive state (power supply) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased or decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). You may increase or decrease the speed). For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least one of the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the other party is reduced in the vicinity of the overhang position. An example is a mode in which the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are reduced. It should be noted that the target for reducing the supplied power may be only one of the drive motors 543 and 672, or both.

In the first embodiment, in the protruding unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intermediate member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 come into contact with each other is the rotation of the drive body 761 in the front view. Although the case where the vehicle is located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the above-mentioned position where the bottom surface and the cam surface abut is passed through the rotation center of the drive body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 732 are provided so that the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the projecting member 735. When the weight of the member 733 acts on the drive body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the swing member 732 and the intermediate member 733. It is preferable that the weights of the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 are formed so as to act on the drive body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weights of the swing member 732, the intermediate member 733, and the projecting member 735.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the projecting unit 700 has been described, but it is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of this predetermined range is preferably set according to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swing member 732 is started can be matched with the timing at which the displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 has a displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (velocity) component. ) The case where the load of the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming it so as to have a displacement (velocity) component in the upward direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 The cam shape (cam diameter) in the above and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761) may be combined to make the load of the drive motor 763 uniform.

That is, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively large, the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is applied. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is relatively large, the sliding hole 735b is slid. The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c is relatively small.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735 in the projecting unit 700 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 may be acted as an urging force in the direction of raising (sliding displacement upward) the projecting member 735. In this case, due to the synergistic effect of the sliding hole 735b described above with the curved portion 735b1, the initial velocity when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the left side of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulging portion in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced. In this case as well, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to smoothly perform the tooth engagement when switching from the second drive state in which the teeth are released to the first drive state in which the teeth are released.

Further, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, since bulging portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive meshed from the second drive state in which the teeth are released. Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portions on both sides of the gears to be meshed with each other, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400. Although the case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described above, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430 and 430 are extended from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) (the position on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced to the position of the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small teeth formed in a small size to increase the rigidity thereof. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a may be formed to be large to increase the rigidity thereof.

Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. This can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 6411a that displaces the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 has been described in the slide unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a is provided on the back case 300. It may be formed in the above and arranged so as to be in contact with the operator 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on the member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400. The case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are retracted (positions on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced from the overhanging position (position at the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the roller 7465 that displaces the operator 6438 is arranged on the second slide member 7640 in the slide unit 7400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operator 6438 is not necessarily limited to this. The roller 7645 is arranged on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 arranged on the base member 7410. There may be.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the second member 8433 is formed with respect to the first member 8431. The relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, but the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is not necessarily limited to this. The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is formed to be smaller or larger than the outer shape, so that the distance at which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 are displaced relative to the second member 8433. It may be formed differently from the distance.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, when the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 are slidably displaced to the effect region K in the slide units 8400, 9400, the effect region The case where K is made invisible has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part or all of the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 may be used. , It may be formed from a light-transmitting material so that a part or all of the effect region K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surface on the left side of the base members 8431b and 9431b in the front view and the side surface on the right side of the base members 8434 and 9434 in the front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surface on the left side of the base members 8434 and 9434 and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8446 and 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction has been described. The side surface on the left side of the front view of the members 8431b and 9431b and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8434 and 9434 may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the mode in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other is controlled and dimensioned. The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both are closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where they constantly collide with each other.

In this case, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member, so that the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swing member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the drive motors are quickly stopped at the united (overhanging) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436 and 456 arranged in the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated to the opposite side of the first embodiment. You may overhang.

In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 at the united position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the united (extending) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated from each other. Although the case where the rotating members are arranged in the state has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arranged in the abutted state. .. In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 are arranged in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating members 820 are displaced and formed at the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. , The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 absorb the impact when colliding with the swinging member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotating member 730 is connected to the transmission path for transmitting the drive for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is attached to the base member 710 where it is difficult to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720. By rotating the members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when they come into contact with the swinging member 732. Therefore, the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 can be easily absorbed.

In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion of the rotating member 435 with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. Although it is arranged on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is the entire contacted portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the. Further, it may be arranged on the front side of the region beyond this.

In this case, since the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be made invisible to the player by the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 are combined into one pattern. It can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

<First control example>
Next, the first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central region of the game board 13, and a first winning opening 64 is provided below the variable display device unit 80. Further, in the area on the right side of the game board 13 (hereinafter, referred to as the right area) on which the ball launched so as to jump over the variable display device unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flows down, a through gate 66 is provided. The second winning opening 140 and the open state in which the ball can enter the second winning opening 140 attached to the second winning opening 140 and the closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state are changed. The electric accessory 140a, the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a attached to the specific winning opening 65a and the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. A variable winning device 65 that is variable to the above is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the lottery result. The third symbol display device 81 executes variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Then, when the variable display of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a big hit game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), so that the player aims at the right area of the game board 13 (hereinafter, , This is referred to as a right-handed game.) The ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player can obtain many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal game state in which the jackpot game is not executed, a game is performed in which the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64, and in the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed, the right-handed game is variable. We will aim for the winning device 65. Therefore, by making the area where the ball is launched different according to the game state, it is possible to make the player feel that the game is being played.

Further, the variable winning device 65, in which the opening operation is executed during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, but the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which the ball that has entered can pass, and the ball that has flowed down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, the probability variation state) is a game state in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. Is given).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right-hand region unit (not shown) in which a ball that is launched by a right-handed game and passes through a through gate 66 provided in the right-side region of the game board 13 flows into the pachinko machine 10. There is. The right region unit is provided with a croon in which three discharge holes through which the sphere can pass are formed as a distribution means for distributing the inflowing sphere into a plurality of paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in this croon, a ball that has passed through one discharge hole flows down the first path and is guided to the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball that has not entered the second winning opening 140 is guided to a specific general winning opening (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the other two discharge holes among the three discharge holes formed in the croon flows down the second path and is guided to the variable winning device 65. Then, the ball that has not entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is discharged from the second path as it is, passes through the first out port 71, and is discharged from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10.

With this configuration, for example, during a jackpot game, a ball that can enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening and a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are simultaneously generated. Since it is possible to make the ball flow, it is possible to complicate the flow of the ball during the jackpot game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, if the prize ball is paid out for the entry into the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening, the winning ball may be paid out for the entry into a plurality of winning openings during the jackpot game. Since this is possible, the number of prize balls that the player can obtain during the jackpot can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Further, an effect based on the balls that have entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game may be executed. For example, the number of balls that have entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game exceeds a predetermined number. It is good to execute the production based on. In this case, a jackpot with a long period in which the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot that is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a) can increase the number of balls entering the specific general winning opening. There is an effect that a privilege can be given to the player even if a state in which it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a occurs during the jackpot game.

In addition, during the jackpot game, it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a, that is, during the period when the variable winning device 65 is closed (opening period, interval period, ending period), the ball enters the specific general winning opening. It may be configured so that the effect is executed based on the entry of the ball. As a result, the player can be made to execute the game of continuously firing the ball during the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine from being lowered.

As described above, in addition to the effect based on the ball entering the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game, the effect (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game. For example, by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot game, it is possible to enter a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a specific general winning opening at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3: 1). In the case where a distribution member for sorting the ball is provided, if it is determined that the ball did not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game or one round game during the jackpot game, that effect. May be notified. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage the case where the jackpot game is not executed by the normal right-handed game or the abnormality of various devices (distribution members, etc.) provided on the game board 13.

In addition, the ball can pass in the middle of the path until the ball that has flowed into the right area unit (not shown) reaches the Kroon as a means for changing the drop position in order to make the position where the ball falls into the Kroon indefinite. A moving member having such a path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate in a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left-right direction (left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by a motor (not shown), and the timing at which the ball flows into the moving member. The position where it is discharged (the position where it falls on the croon) can be changed. In this way, by providing the moving member which is the drop position changing means above the croon which is the sorting means, it is possible to complicate the movement of the ball on the croon. The moving speed of the moving member described above may be set to such a speed that when a continuously launched ball falls on the croon, the falling position is separated by 10 mm or more. By setting in this way, it is possible to suppress damage to the device due to collisions and bounces between balls that have continuously fallen on the croon. Further, even if the separation distance between the croon and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has fallen first and a ball that has fallen later interfere with each other to cause ball clogging. It will be possible.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a croon-shaped mechanism is used as the distribution means, but it may be configured so that the spheres can be distributed to a plurality of paths. For example, the spheres that flow down next depending on their own weight. A flow path switching member that switches the flow direction of the sphere may be used, or a switching member that electrically switches the flow path of the sphere may be used. Further, in this control example, a moving member is used as a drop position changing means so that the position where the ball falls on the croon does not become a fixed position. However, a configuration capable of changing the drop position of the ball may be used, for example. The croon itself may be moved.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned probability variation state is established, while the variable winning device during the jackpot game. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 at 65, it is in a normal gaming state aiming at the first winning opening 64.

Here, in the probabilistic state in this control example, as described above, the probability that the result of the lottery of the special symbol will be a big hit is high, and the lottery in which the ordinary symbol in which the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 66 is the winner. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time until the lottery result of the special symbol and the normal symbol is confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the variable time) is also set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation state in this control example is set so as to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a lottery result other than the jackpot 100 times in a row after the end of the big hit game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times. It is set to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state after the game is not a big hit in a row. By setting a limit on the duration of the probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player in this way, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can win a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it. The period during which the probability change state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next big hit is won, or at the same timing as the special symbol lottery is executed. A transition lottery may be performed to shift the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state. Further, the period during which the probabilistic state continues may be set in time.

Further, in the probabilistic state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a, which is driven to be released when a hit is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 66, is the normal gaming state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the probability change state is such that the ball is placed in the second winning opening 140 more than the opening pattern set during the normal gaming state. It is set so that the open period during which the ball can enter is extended.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to execute the right-handed game in the probabilistic state, and to efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning opening. Has been done. Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the probabilistic state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

<About the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game projecting into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 109 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 109 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110 (b).

As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning opening 140 side. It is configured in. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second winning opening 140 while hitting right, and the game method is changed to left hit immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 109 (a) is a sectional view taken along line La-La shown in FIG. 109 (b). As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 110, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 110A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 110A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. To. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Will be done.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured so that it is impossible to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. There is. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 110B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 13th round is won in the 13th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the winning ball as a privilege to the player (15 for one ball winning in this embodiment). (Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 111B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, combinations of predetermined main symbols indicating small hits (for example, on the effective line L1, the combinations of the main symbols are "3" and "4" in order from the left symbol row Z1. "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the present embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Further, in this control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to differ depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, when the same reference numerals are given in the description of each effect described later, it indicates that the displays or areas have the same function, and the places (display forms) where the displays or areas are arranged are different. Will be described with the same reference numerals.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a display mode of the effect executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol, and is shown in FIG. 112 (a). ) And FIGS. 113A to 113C are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. This reach navigation effect allows the player to visually grasp the progress of the mode of the effect (main effect) executed by the predetermined fluctuation pattern (super reach or special reach), and gradually notifies or suggests it. It is a production (secondary production). In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect (explanation of the effect of the main effect, the fluctuation time, and the expectation of a big hit) executed by the third symbol display device 81 using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Next, the reach navigation effect will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. It is reduced to a small area Dm5 and displayed in a variable manner, and the main effect based on the variable pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, is executed in the small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

In this small area Dm4, as an image constituting the reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, a character Dm4b as a moving display unit visually indicating the progress of the main effect, and the main effect A notification unit Dm4c for notifying at least a part of the effect result and guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e for guiding at least a part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating a period during which the main effect is executed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is a movement display unit, advances from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. The notification unit Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b moving in response to the main effect executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the notification content is notified to the notification unit Dm4c. Is stopped and displayed. In this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as the period display unit for indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, but other display may be used, for example, a predetermined finished product (for example, building). The structure may be such that the process of creating (things and dishes) can be displayed.

The character Dm4b is a movement display unit that moves according to the progress of the main effect, and is displayed so as to move from the left side to the right side on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. By moving the character Dm4b on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed in this way, the player can predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. In the figure shown in FIG. 112 (a), only an image imitating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b, but in reality, a plurality of character images having different speeds of moving on the time gauge Dm4a are stored. It is controlled so that the length of the time gauge Dm4a and the selected character are set based on the length of the selected main effect (the length of the fluctuation time).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying the sub-effect on the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of fluctuation patterns (main effects) having different fluctuation times. It should be noted that the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect executed by changing the display mode (for example, color) of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display unit, and the effect associated with the character is a big hit. , Or it may be configured to suggest the progress destination of the main effect depending on the display mode of the selected character. As a result, it is possible to have both a function of notifying the progress of the main effect and a function of suggesting the result of the main effect, and it is possible to execute an effect display having a high effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the production result of the main effect, and a rotation display (see FIG. 112B) that rotates in the left-right direction on the small area Dm4 is performed. The notification unit Dm4c is configured so that an index indicating the effect result of the main effect can be displayed on both sides thereof, and the effect result of the main effect is displayed by the index stopped and displayed in the small area Dm4 when the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped. Is notified.

In this pachinko machine 10, as an index for notifying the production result of the main production, "V" which is an index indicating that it is a big hit, "x" which is an index indicating that it was out of order, and "x" of the main production "Development", which is an index indicating that the production is continuously executed, and "?", Which is an index indicating that the production result of the main production is not notified, are set, and two of these indexes are set. An index is selected, and an index of 1 (for example, "V") is displayed on one side of the notification unit Dm4c, and another index (for example, "?") Is displayed on the multi-sided side.

With this configuration, for example, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed while the "V" index and the "x" index are displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the character Dm4b is notified. When it reaches the part Dm4c, it will be notified in advance that there will be no further development, that is, the production time of the main production this time (the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main production) will be grasped in advance. Therefore, it is possible to display the main effect that is easy for the player to understand. If the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed while the "V" index and the "development" index are displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, a big hit occurs when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c. Since it will be notified in advance that either the main effect will be further developed or the main effect will be further developed from there, the player expects a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c). However, you can see the main production with confidence.

In this control example, a configuration that can be grasped by the player by rotating and displaying a plurality of indexes is used, but a plurality of indexes may be grasped by the player using other configurations. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of indexes are switched and displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indexes are simultaneously displayed on the notification unit Dm4c and the index to be selected in this production is deleted with the passage of time is used. You may.

The guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, the guidance display suggesting the effect content of the main effect of this time is executed. When the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the character "chance" is displayed or rotated as an effect suggesting that the result of the main effect of this time is a big hit. The index attached to the notification unit Dm4c is switched. In this way, by providing the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle stage where the main production is in progress, it is possible to notify the player of information based on the result of the main production step by step. On the other hand, the display content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can always be watched.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the guidance display unit can notify the guidance display suggesting the result of the main effect and the guidance display suggesting the period of the main effect at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. Therefore, there is an effect that the information notified to the player on the guidance display unit can be diversified. Although the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two guidance display units, one may be provided or three or more may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 (b) and 113 (a) to 113 (c), a display mode at each timing of the above-mentioned reach navigation effect will be described. FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation effect is started, and FIG. 113 (a) shows the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect. FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the reach navigation effect is further continued, and FIG. 113 (c) is a diagram showing after the main effect is continued in the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of.

First, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the reach navigation effect is executed, a movement display is executed in which the character Dm4b moves from the left side to the right side (from the start point to the end point) on the time gauge Dm4a. In addition, the notification unit Dm4c executes a rotation display that allows the player to visually recognize the indexes displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c. By executing the reach navigation effect in this way, the player is informed of the production period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect in the middle stage of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance (before the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed).

Further, in FIG. 112 (b), the character Dm4b has a chance to be below the guidance display unit Dm4d! !! "Is displayed. This is a display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, and is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4c as described above. In this way, by providing the guidance display unit Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, at what timing the display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit is executed for the player. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display content of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c can be changed when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, for example, at the timing when the reach navigation effect is executed, two indexes of "V" and "x" are displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, but at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d. It is possible to switch the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c to the display of two indexes, "V" and "development". By changing the display content of the notification unit Dm4c at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d) in this way, it is possible to diversify the production content of the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, for the game. It has the effect of suppressing getting bored early.

Next, a case where the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). As shown in FIG. 113A, when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped, and the index “?” Displayed on one surface of the notification unit Dm4c is changed to the small area Dm4. Stop is displayed. When the index of "?" Is displayed, next, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the character Dm4b is blown off and returned to the point where the guide display unit Dm4d on the timing gauge Dm4a is provided. To.

The index "?" Displayed by the notification unit Dm4c is an index that prevents the player from grasping whether the main production ends or continues at this timing. If the main production this time does not develop, FIG. 113 After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b getting up. On the other hand, when the main effect of this time is developed and further continued, the character Dm4b rises as shown in FIG. 113 (c), and the reach navigation effect of moving on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (display mode of the peripheral effect of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can grasp that the reach navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

The position where the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113B is returned is determined based on the period of the main production after the development. Specifically, if the time it takes for the character Dm4b to move on the time gauge Dm4a and reach the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time of the main production after development (the remaining period of the main production is 10 seconds), the time. It is returned to the center position of the gauge Dm4a. With this configuration, it is possible to display the reach navigation effect corresponding to the main effect after development using the moving speeds of the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b corresponding to the main effect before development. It is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing a certain reach navigation effect.

Further, it is possible for the player to predict the period of the main effect after the development depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. In this pachinko machine 10, when a lottery of a special symbol is won, a long fluctuation time is easily selected. Therefore, the closer the character Dm4b is to the starting point side of the time gauge Dm4a, the more the jackpot is returned. It has the effect of making you think that you have won the game and improving the interest of the game. Further, when the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c is "?", The character Dm4b is returned to the player because the player is not notified whether or not the main effect of this time is developed. After confirming the position (after predicting the effect period when it develops), the effect of whether or not the character Dm4b stands up will be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the reach navigation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect used in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player in advance of information about the main effect, which is an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, to the player. There is an effect that the main production can be watched in a state where the progress destination of the main production is predicted. Further, by displaying the information about the main effect step by step, the player can continuously pay attention to the effect, which has an effect that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach navigation effect used in this control example is such that various other effects are displayed. For example, in the above-mentioned reach navigation effect, a character imitating a rabbit is used as a movement display unit, but as other characters, a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed. In this way, when selecting a character to be used in the reach navigation effect from a plurality of characters, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content of the main effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the display contents of the main production and the sub production related to each other, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a comfortable production. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the character is displayed in the reach navigation effect which is a sub-effect before the character is displayed in the main effect. As a result, the content of the main production can be grasped in advance by looking at the reach navigation production, which has the effect of further enhancing the production effect.

Further, the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed in response to the main effect before the development and the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed in response to the main effect after the development may be different. .. As a result, the period of the main effect after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, so that the period of the main effect after development can be easily grasped. Has the effect of being able to suppress.

Further, the degree of expectation that the main effect develops may be indicated depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, even if a region with high development expectation and a region with low development expectation are provided on the time gauge Dm4a, and the character Dm4b is returned to the region with high development expectation, the main production is developed with high probability. Good. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the position where the character Dm4b is returned, which has the effect of further enhancing the effect.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the random number counter C1 per first acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is either "0 to 9". If it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the sphere wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first is 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random number value "0" is for low probability. It is stored in the random number table for the first time. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are duplicated values. A random number value that is a big hit may be set so as not to be. If there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot of the special symbol is changed by changing the random value that becomes the jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 29", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the type is not limited to one, and two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 140.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns of jackpot A. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown, the voice lamp control device 113 also has a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, and more detailed fluctuations correspond to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern commands output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. In this control example, the normal symbol is also set to a high probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, and the normal symbol is also set to the low probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. Is stipulated to be. That is, there is no gaming state in which the special symbol has a low probability and the normal symbol has a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol is hit. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of winning random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 140. Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is only "1 second x 2 times". It will be released, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117.

FIG. 115A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) is a table in which the values of random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols are defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

In the first random number table 202a, a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at a low probability, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol are displayed. A jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is provided, and the number of determination values (random numbers) for each jackpot is different. In this way, by making the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected respectively according to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Has been done. Specifically, in the special symbol 1, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the jackpot A, "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the jackpot B, and the jackpot in the special symbol 2. The value (0 to 99) of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value of A.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not it is in the probability change state). However, in the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, the determination of whether or not the probability change state is reached is not executed).

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the distribution of the jackpot type differs between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. In the special symbol 1, 50% of the jackpots are selected as "big hit A", and in the special symbol 2, the jackpot is selected. Of these, "big hit A" is configured to be 100% selected. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which the lottery is executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 140 as described above, and the lottery is hardly executed in the normal game state, and the second The lottery is executed in a probable state in which the ball is likely to enter the winning opening 140. In this control example, if the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times without a big hit after the transition to the probabilistic state, the game transitions to the normal gaming state. By continuing to win the jackpot again until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times, it is possible to repeatedly execute the game in the probabilistic state. Therefore, the player will enthusiastically play the game in order to win the next big hit as soon as possible even after the transition to the probabilistic state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (c). FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device (not shown) is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117 (c)). At least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117 (d)) is specified.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 117 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 117 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description will continue. FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, probability change It has at least an effective flag 203q, a probability variation effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a probability variation counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on winning a prize is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 (with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting winning) into the second winning opening 140. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning opening 140 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 122).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the first special symbol N1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the number of holdings of the variable display in the first special symbol N2) is , The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the hold ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the balls at the through gate 66. Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 66 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S603: FIG. 126: No).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probabilistic switching switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown, it is set to off based on the probability variation counter 203t being set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. You may configure 203h to formally turn on and return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again while the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). .. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this control example, the voice "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the attention of the player. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1302 in the notification processing (see FIG. 133) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is urged to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic gaming state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable prize is won before the start of the 13th round. By notifying the device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 12 rounds, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read the code. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot is A or B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round and the abnormality processing described later can be executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In this control example, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds. In this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1507 of FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual state, and the jackpot B is obtained. It is also possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round is started, the next round game is executed until the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, and a new round game is executed. There is no chance of winning a prize.

If the number of winnings and the number of dischargeds do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When this probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. Indicates that no time has passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball may pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false detection of passing through a magnetic sensor due to radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls winning in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. The probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when drawing a special symbol. (S213 in FIG. 123), 1 is subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (S221 in FIG. 122).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 127) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, decorative lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the other device 228, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and various other data and programs necessary for controlling the game. ..

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (disengagement, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect information used in the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table used to set the reach navigation effect to be executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach navigation effect will be briefly explained. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach navigation effect is an effect that suggests and informs the content of the main effect of the fluctuation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), and is a small area Dm4 (FIG. 112). This is a sub-production performed in (see). This reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. This is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

In the above-mentioned reach navigation effect, the character Dm4b is set to be able to move on the time gauge Dm4a multiple times. Among them, the effect related to the first movement is the first navigation effect, and the effect related to the second transition movement is the second navigation. Set as a production. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured so that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, and by combining the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b. It is configured so that various production patterns can be set.

The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table that is referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected for the remaining fluctuation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, so when super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, , The remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and when special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect The fluctuation time is 60 seconds.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "100 to". If it is "199", a 30-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "70 to". If it is "199", a 30-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect.

In this way, by configuring the first navigation effect so that the effect patterns at different times can be selected, the remaining variation time when selecting the second navigation effect, which will be described later, can be made different, so that the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect can be selected. Can be set more complicatedly. Furthermore, when the special reach with high expectation that the lottery of the special symbol is won as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set (when the remaining fluctuation time is 60 seconds), the super reach is set. Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the rate of setting the variation pattern of 30 seconds as the first navigation effect is larger than that (when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds), the player is the first. Isn't this change developing into a special reach by looking at the progress of the production navigation? You can play the game while predicting.

In the first navigation effect, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used, and a 20-second effect pattern and a 30-second effect pattern are set by changing the movement speed of the character Dm4b, which is a movement display unit. It is possible. Specifically, in the 30-second effect pattern, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b, and in the 20-second effect pattern, a character imitating a rabbit is set. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the moving speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set a plurality of effect patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of the reach navigation effect. be able to.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed according to the movement speed on the time gauge Dm4a, only by looking at the character displayed in the reach navigation effect. Although the jackpot expectation is predictable, the same character may be used and the movement speed may be set to be different. With this configuration, only the player who has experienced the reach navigation effect multiple times can understand that the movement speed of the character of the reach navigation effect this time is different from the movement speed of the character of the previous reach navigation effect. , There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced for a player who has been playing for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the moving speed of the character Dm4b is set so as not to be changed in the middle during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. Not limited to this, the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be changed in the middle during the first navigation effect. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table that is referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining variation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and is the remaining time storage area 223h. The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected based on the remaining fluctuation time stored in the effect counter and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds, that is, super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, 20 in the first navigation effect. When the effect pattern of seconds is selected, the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds, so "second 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. In this second time, the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end point of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113 (a)), and then the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again. It shows that the production starts (see FIG. 113 (b)). In this control example, it is possible to set up to the third movement effect.

Next, when the remaining fluctuation time is 30 seconds, that is, when special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, when the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, 3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation effect is the second. "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the 2nd navigation effect, and if it is "7-9", "2nd 30 seconds" is selected as the 2nd navigation effect.

Then, when the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd 10 seconds, 3rd 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation effect. "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect, and if it is "7-9", "2nd 30 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect.

As explained above, when setting the effect pattern for the reach navigation effect, it is possible to easily create a complex effect pattern by making it possible to select the effect period separately for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect. Can be done. Further, in this control example, when selecting the effect pattern of the second navigation effect, only the last digit value of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. As a result, it is possible to independently select a plurality of effect patterns in one process by using one effect counter, so that the processing load when setting the effect pattern can be reduced. There is an effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. At least a type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and the winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved spheres corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved sphere number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 138). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. A detailed description will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 used for advance notice effect and various lottery. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round has been executed in a jackpot game. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223 g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining fluctuation time referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect. In the remaining time storage area 223h, when the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the fluctuation time based on the acquired fluctuation pattern is set (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is performed. It is updated to the remaining fluctuation time after the setting (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when the setting of the reach navigation effect is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using the remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol by dividing it into a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, information indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 60 seconds is first set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, as the first effect, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having an effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds. Then, when the effect pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the effect pattern of the first effect, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining variation time. After that, it becomes possible to select the second effect by using the remaining period based on the remaining fluctuation time. This has the effect of reducing the processing when selecting the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach navigation effect in which the variation pattern is selected stepwise. In the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the variation pattern is set (S2101 in FIG. 141), and then selected. The effect pattern of the first navigation effect is set (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then the selected effect pattern of the second navigation effect is set (S2106 in FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It controls the variable effect) and the advance notice effect.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. There is. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115. Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (not shown) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when the incoming ball is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the "city stage", the rear surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", and the rear surface C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the 81, and the image controller 237 displays the image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the back image horizontally from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki and the helmet Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to command-related displays, round effects, and demo effects are available.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal symbol start port 66, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second winning opening 140 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 140, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, the player notifies that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery will be a big hit of the special symbol, so that the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will definitely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to a game information-related command, one display related to a jackpot-related command, and one display data table corresponding to a round effect and a demo effect are stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame are defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back type also describes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. Specify the image content to be drawn and create a drawing list described later. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of program activation and execution, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, in the example of FIG. In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, a drawing list to be described later is created, and transfer data is transferred. From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. , The added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 109) (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 111B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 111 (b) see S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. Generates a drawing list, which will be described later, that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. Generates a drawing list, which will be described later, that describes the drawing instructions. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list described later, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 111 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. Is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created. Add to list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transferred data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 111 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, it is performed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting a display area (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) for prohibiting the display of the character symbol and the point symbol during the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed in the point effect. .. In the point effect, the period during which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed is set a total of three times, so that the first to third prohibited areas are set according to each period (first to third periods). A storage area of 223 m is provided. As a result, different prohibited areas can be set in each period, so that the variation of the production can be increased.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is other than the demo display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115A). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 135. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S216: Yes), set an opening scenario for a specific winning opening based on the big hit type (S217), and then set the start of the big hit (big hit such as 16 rounds). (Setting) is executed (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is different (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221). Then, when the above-described processing of S218 or S221 is completed, a stop command is set (S219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302).

When the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, when the current state is the probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special value for high probability. Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116A) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when the current state is not the probability variation state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. Since it is a (low probability gaming state), it is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116 (a)). The lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A or jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 140 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (125, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so it is acquired by the processing of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 116 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 116 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 140 The opening period of the electric accessory 140a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S617), and shift to the process of S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 140 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 125, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 126 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 129, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 129), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 122) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 124) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command, the notification command, and the error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 123) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 127 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S98 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S801) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 129). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 122) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1101. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1102, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the round number round number command is set (S1105), and this process is terminated. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has been started is set as a round number command. Then, each time a round number command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the round number command is added so that the current number of rounds can be grasped. This has the effect of reducing the amount of command data output from the main control device 110. The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including the round number information of the newly started round may be set. By doing so, even if a problem occurs in the data related to the number of rounds on the voice lamp control device 113 side (data stored in the memory is deleted due to a power failure or the like), the latest round is started every time a new round is started. Since it is possible to receive the round information of, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1006). When it is determined that the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is reached (S1006: Yes), the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to off (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off just in case in the processing of S1009. In this control example, the start timing of the ending effect is set to be after the waiting time elapses (3 seconds in this control example) after the game of the final round ends (opening / closing door 65f1 is closed), but the game of the final round ends. Immediately after that, the ending effect may be executed. In this case, the abnormal processing for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1010) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202). If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t (S1203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game is determined. You can play the game with interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. In the process of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), the notification process is executed (S1011). Here, the details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1301). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The end timing of the 12th round is determined depending on whether it is detected that 10 balls have been won or that 30 seconds have passed in the 12th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 12th round is reached (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the S1305 process, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter for 2 seconds in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 12th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, by providing a notification counter 203 m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 12th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), the notification command is set. (S1304). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1401). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the opening / closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is added and updated by 1, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j is executed. Set. After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). After that, the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1411). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1414). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to on (S1415). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change It can be controlled so that the game is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is ON (S1416). If the probabilistic valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation effective flag 203q is set to off (S1419). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being illegally passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1013). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality processing (S1013), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501). If it is outside the round validity period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1506: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prize counters 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if the jackpot is B.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value 0 (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1511), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1716 (see FIG. 137) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1716. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1714 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1714. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the data shifts to S1608.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the decorative lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1611) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1609 is that when the processing of S1608 is reached via the processing of S1604 to S1606, the processing of S1604 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1701 this time was executed (S1701), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1702 to S1811 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1712 and the command determination process of S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the decorative lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without notifying the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. It also monitors the input of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

When the process of S1710 is completed, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In the process of S1712, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to the process of S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 138, S1711), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1804). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the process of S1808, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1808 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1808. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to the process of S1811. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of S1811 as it is.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

When it is determined that the notification command output from the main control device 110 has been received by the process of S1811, the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected. , Set the display command for notification.

Next, the jackpot-related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S1810). This jackpot-related process (S1810) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related process, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1901). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1902), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S1903). When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S1903 (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223 g (S1904). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223 g (S1905), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1906). If it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S1906 (S1906: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this processing is performed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S1906 that the ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not the V-pass command has been received (S1909). In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, and an effect suggesting that the probability change game state is given is executed. A display V effect command is set (S1910), and this process ends.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2007 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 138). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004: Yes), then the reach navigation effect setting process is executed (S2005). The details of the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but when the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for setting a reach navigation effect (sub-effect) that guides the main variable effect (main effect) executed in.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2004, when the acquired variation pattern type is not the variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, that is, the acquired variation pattern type is out of alignment or the variation pattern type corresponding to normal reach (S2004). : No), based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Here, the above-mentioned reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), the player is informed of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type and the effect content (expectation degree, effect period) of the main effect. A sub-effect to be performed is set.

When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. The fluctuation pattern is set in the temporary storage area 223i (S2101). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the effect of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112). It is a production performed in the central part of (see).

After finishing the processing of S2101, the remaining time storage area 223h is then set based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S2102). In this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), a process of stepwise setting a sub-effect based on the variation time corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired this time by this processing is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to the special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this processing.

Although not shown, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect (sub-effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, so the fluctuation pattern type with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds is set in the area 223h, a process of subtracting 30 seconds, which is a sub-effect non-executable period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119 (b), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f. The first navigation effect period is set based on the value, and the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the set first navigation effect period. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the first navigation effect is 60 seconds and the acquired effect counter 223f value is "80", the first "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the effect pattern information corresponding to the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i.

After finishing the processing of S2103, the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining fluctuation time for which the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, should be set is calculated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected while the remaining time storage area 223h is set to "60 seconds" as the remaining fluctuation time, the remaining time storage area 223h is processed by this process. The remaining fluctuation time of is updated to "30 seconds".

Then, it is determined whether the residual variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is larger than 0 (S2105), and if it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 (S2105: No), the reach navigation effect is produced. The setting is completed, and the process proceeds to S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period in which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is performed only by the first navigation effect. It will be set. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern type acquired this time is the fluctuation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to the super reach, and the remaining fluctuation time is set to "30 seconds" in the remaining time storage area 223h. This corresponds to the case where the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected in.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2105, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is larger than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation effect is selected from the second navigation effect selection table, and the variation pattern is selected. Update to temporary storage area. This second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119 (c), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f. Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when the second navigation effect is selected is 30 seconds, and the value of the last digit of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". In this case, the effect pattern information of "2nd time 10 seconds" and "3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period "30 seconds", and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

As described above, the second navigation effect is configured to generate an effect pattern using the remaining variation time after setting the first navigation effect. Therefore, rather than setting the effect pattern for all the periods in which the reach navigation effect can be set, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the second navigation effect period, and the effect pattern is set for each. By combining after setting, it is possible to diversify the production pattern of the reach navigation effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

In this control example, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the other period, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), an effect pattern that does not use the entire remaining variation period can be selected, and the residual variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h after executing the process of S2016. It is preferable to configure so as to determine again whether is 0 (S2105). As a result, it is possible to set the reach navigation effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time after the second navigation effect is set by the same process as the process for setting the second navigation effect, and the process can be simplified.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 141. When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of S2105 (S2105: No) or when the processing of S2106 is completed, then, the fluctuation pattern for display is based on the information of the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area. Set the command (S2107). Here, the information stored in the variation pattern temporary storage area includes a display variation pattern command corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the process of S2101, and a sub-effect. Corresponds to the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the process of S2103 that constitutes the reach navigation effect, and the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the process of S2106. This is a display variation pattern command.

When the processing of S2107 is completed, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information regarding the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this processing is completed. ..

In this control example, the main effect and the sub effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 executed based on the acquired variation pattern are set as one display variation pattern command and output. Although the configuration for reducing the number of commands is used, the display main effect variation pattern command and the display sub-effect variation pattern command may be output as separate commands. As a result, for example, the display control device 114 can display the main effect on the layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub-effect can be displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed. By operating the frame button 22 by the player, it is possible to easily execute control such as displaying or erasing the sub-effect.

Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to easily perform control such as outputting an additional command for the sub-effect and switching the effect pattern of the sub-effect while the main effect is variablely displayed. Specifically, it is used for the sub-effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22 executed during the period from the execution of the main effect to the execution of the sub-effect (30 seconds in this control example). It is possible to change the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) and the content of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 142) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2302. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2302 and S2302, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2301 to S2305 may be executed without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 142. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 154 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2205, the interrupt permission is set (S2206). After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 (a). FIG. 144 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 (b). FIG. 144 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. The command determination process (S2502) is executed in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, and then the display setting process (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150.

In the display setting process (S2503), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), which are determined in the task process (S2504), are used. , A drawing list is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed to display the S2504. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2603).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2706), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2702e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2704, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the processing of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display variable type command (S2606: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2803), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2504), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2802.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the processing of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the jackpot is hit. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the above-mentioned jackpot-related command process for display (S2609), which is one process of the command determination process (see S2502 and FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The details will be described. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command (S2901). S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3005), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3105), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 147. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3201). S3204). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3205), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. In the processing of S2905, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and the display is performed. If there is a V effect command for display (S2907: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot related command process ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S2908) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the V effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. If it is determined that there is no display V effect command in the process of S2907 (S2907: No), the display jackpot related command process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the rear image change command is determined. If there is (S2610: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). FIG. 150A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3903) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S3401). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3402), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3401 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3402. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3402 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the processing of S2610, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and there is an error command. If (S2612: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3501). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3502). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the error frame command processing, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3501, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the processing of S3502 is determined, and the error type is set to the error type. The process is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3502 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

In the processing of S2601 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), The processing of S2602 to S2613 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 146 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2701. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3601: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3602 to S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3602), S3603 to S3604 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3603). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3604).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3701).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604) or in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3603: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3605.

In S3605, the pointer update process is executed (S3605). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3801, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3803), and if it is a demo display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3805), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3803: No). S3806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 151 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3606 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S3609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set to (S3610), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2504), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3615, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off instead of on (S3609: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S3617) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3618). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3621), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the processing of S3616, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2509), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. The process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the details of the transfer setting process (S2505) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 154 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3901 (S3901: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3902), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (b). FIG. 154 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4001: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4002). In the process of S4002, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4002 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4002: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4003. Further, as a result of the processing of S4001, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4003.

In the processing of S4003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4003: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4003 (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4103) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

Further, in the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4102: No), the processes of S4103 and S4104 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4106).

In the process of S4106, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4106 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4107. Further, as a result of the processing of S4105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4105: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4107.

In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4108), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4107: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4109). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4109: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S4110), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4111). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4113, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The discrimination in the processing of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4113 (S4113: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4114). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4114, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505) (S4201). That is, in the processing of S4201, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2504). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S4202 (S4203). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. In the first control example described above, a gaming machine in which a reach navigation effect is executed as an effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect proceeds by the operation of continuously pressing (striking) the frame button 22 and the operation of pressing the frame button 22 at the right time. The compound pressing effect to be performed and the slot effect to stop the pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 by pressing the frame button 22 are continuous slot effects for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example). , A predetermined value (point) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a point effect in which a specific effect (reach effect) is executed is executed by accumulating a predetermined number of the points. As a result, various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In this second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed with respect to the first control example. The difference is that the changed point, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the effects executed in this control example, the combined pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing an example at the time when the composite pressing effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157 (b) shows the executing composite pressing effect at the effect notification timing D3b. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the compound pressing effect is reached, and FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the compound pressing effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1. It is a figure which showed another example at the time when the compound pressing effect during execution reached the timing pressing period Db1, and FIG. 159 (a) operated the frame button 22 during the timing pressing period of the compound pressing effect during execution. FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing an example at the time when the compound pressing effect being executed reaches the second continuous striking period Dc.

This compound pressing effect is a pressing effect in which three pressing effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left of the main display area Dm is based on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22 in each pressing effect period. The effect of accumulating the meters of the meter display unit D1 displayed on the side is executed. When a predetermined amount of meters are accumulated in the meter display unit D1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

When the compound pressing effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the pressing effect corresponding to the first continuous striking period is executed. The third symbol display device 81 displays the meter display unit D1 described above, a button display D2 that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding the combined pressing effect. A comment column is displayed in the area below the main display area Dm to guide the contents of the effect in characters.

The meter display unit D1 is a display unit that finally displays the effect result of the combined pressing effect, and is controlled so that the meters are accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each pressing effect (see FIG. 157 (b)). .. Then, the comment "accumulate the meter" is displayed on the meter display unit D1 as a comment for encouraging the player to participate in the game. In the meter display unit D1, "V" is displayed at the right end of the meter at the initial stage, and the special symbol jackpot was won as a privilege that is advantageous to the player by accumulating the meters up to this "V". Is notified. Further, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the compound pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159 (a)). When the meter area is extended as shown in FIG. 159 (a), "VV" is displayed at the right end thereof, and the benefit that the player is further advantageous by accumulating the meter up to this "VV" (for example, 2). It will be notified that (winning) will be given to the jackpot.

The benefits given by the combined pressing effect are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, an image that is not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, or is collected by the player. Value information (points) may be given. Further, the display mode displayed by "V" and "VV" is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the conditions for granting the privilege to the player are visually displayed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage for the privilege given when the "V" is reached and the privilege given when the "VV" is reached, and different benefits are set so as to be given. Just do it.

The button display D2 is a display unit for notifying the player of the operation content for the frame button 22, and is schematically for causing the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit during the first continuous hitting period shown in FIG. 157 (a). The display and the comment "Continuous hit !!" are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the button display is blinked. It is highlighted by enlarging or enlarging it, and when the player is operating the frame button 22, it is changed to a display that is not highlighted by enlarging or erasing it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game guidance display to the player from being excessively displayed. Further, even when the period in which the player does not operate the frame button 22 elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the button display D2 may be changed to a display that does not emphasize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button from being continuously highlighted, and it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

The effect gauge D3 is a display unit showing the overall flow of the compound press effect, and the compound press effect is chronologically displayed from the left side to the right side of the effect gauge D3 (from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 157 (a)). it's shown. The effect gauge D3 is divided into a first continuous hit period Da, a timing push period Db1, and a second continuous hit period Dc in the order in which the pressing effect is executed, and is currently displayed according to the position of the moving body D3a moving on the effect gauge D3. It is configured so that the player can grasp the situation of. In this way, in the composite pressing effect in which the pressing effects with different operation methods of the frame button 22 are continuously executed, the game is performed by displaying the entire composite pressing effect and the status of each pressing effect so that the player can grasp the situation. It is possible to perform an effect that is easy for people to understand.

Further, since the moving body D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the entire period of the combined pressing effect based on the moving state of the moving body D3a. ..

Further, in the effect gauge D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first continuous striking period Da. The effect notification timing D3b notifies in advance the content of the pressing effect executed during the timing pressing period Db1 executed after the first continuous hitting period Da has elapsed. When the moving body D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the compound pressing effect, the guidance of the pressing effect to be executed in the next pressing effect period is displayed in the comment column described later. As a result, the mode of the pressing effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) is suddenly changed during the compound pressing effect, and a problem such as an unintended operation is suppressed. When the effect notification timing D3b is reached, the player's operation status with respect to the frame button 22 may be determined, and the effect mode of the next press effect period may be set.

In the comment column provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the compound pressing effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157 (a), a comment is displayed stating, "Press and hold the button to execute automatic repeated hits." In the automatic continuous hitting, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit by the player performing a predetermined operation (long pressing operation for 2 seconds or more) during the pressing effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22. It is a control process. By executing this automatic continuous striking, it is possible to entertain the continuous striking effect even for a player who has difficulty pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

Next, a case where the combined pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (b). When the combined pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period is started while continuing the pressing effect by the first continuous hitting period Da. Specifically, the timing gauge Db2 in which the region of the timing pressing period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the target to be targeted by the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge. Then, in the comment column, "Aim at the center of the x mark and press the button ..." is displayed as a part of the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period.

The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by extending the same period as the timing pressing period Db1. Therefore, it is displayed that the moving body D3a moves on the timing gauge Db2 at the same time as the time when the moving body D3a moves on the timing pressing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, it is possible to set the speed at which the moving body D3a moves faster than the speed at which the moving body D3a moves on the effect gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying any one of the plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, the moving speed of the moving body D3a can be made different. With this configuration, the player is notified of the period of the combined pressing effect by using the effect gauge D3 and the moving body D3a that moves on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed. There is an effect that the production of the timing display can be diversified without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 when the effect notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing push effect executed this time, and it is possible to facilitate the timing. There is.

In FIG. 157 (b), the target Db3 for which the frame button is operated in the timing pressing effect is displayed in the center of the timing gauge Db2, but the displayed position is moved to the end of the timing gauge Db2 and the timing is pressed. The difficulty level of the production may be set. Further, the target Db3 may be configured to move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of target Db3s may be displayed.

Next, a case where the compound pressing effect reaches the timing pressing effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) and 158 (b). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example in the case where the automatic continuous striking is not executed when the timing push effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts moving from the left end of the timing gauge Db2 toward the right. As described above, since the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the region of the timing push period Db1 is extended, the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing pushing period Db1 and the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing gauge Db2. The time it takes to do this is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length approximately eight times as long as the timing push period Db1, the speed of the moving body passing through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing push period Db1. It is about 8 times the speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, the target Db3 indicating the timing of pressing the frame button 22 in the timing pressing effect is blinking and highlighted. Further, in the comment column, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed as a timing pressing effect and a diagram schematically showing pressing the frame button 22 are displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic continuous striking is executed when the timing push effect period is reached. The difference from FIG. 158 (a) described above is that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to indicate that the automatic continuous hitting is in progress, and the comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment column is The point is that it has been changed to "Hanase". That is, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the player has reached the timing pressing effect while pressing the button, and therefore cannot perform the act of pressing the button in that state.

Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic continuous hitting is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing pressing effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment column is changed from "press". In addition to changing to "Hanase", the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing pressing effect is released from the pressed timing (the timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) (the operation signal of the frame button 22). Change to the timing when is turned off). As a result, in the compound pressing effect, even if the timing pressing effect is executed in the state where the automatic continuous hitting operation is performed in the previous pressing effect (first continuous hitting effect Da), the effect is executed without causing any trouble to the player. can do.

In the timing pressing effect period Db1 described with reference to FIG. 158 (a) or FIG. 158 (b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving body D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158 (a)). When the pressing operation and the releasing operation in the case of FIG. 158 (b) are performed, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the moving body D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment column. A comment of "perfect !!" is displayed to inform that the frame button 22 is often operated. Further, the meter display unit D1 is extended and displayed as a privilege of succeeding in the timing pressing effect, and a comment column to that effect is notified.

Even at this timing, the moving body D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. As a result, the progress of the combined pressing effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3 while the result of the timing pressing effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2. Therefore, there is an effect that both the result of the timing pressing effect and the progress of the combined pressing effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, a case where the timing push effect period Db1 elapses and the second continuous striking period Dc is reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). When the second continuous striking period Dc is reached, the display for repeatedly striking the frame button 22 is executed as in the first continuous striking period. The difference from the above-mentioned display of the first continuous striking period is that the game result of the timing push effect is displayed in the area of the timing push period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the meter display unit D1 shows the game result of the timing push effect. The point is that the benefits based on it have been granted. Since the other display contents are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second continuous hitting period elapses, the combined pressing effect result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the combined pressing effect this time is notified. This ends the compound pressing effect. As described above, in the combined pressing effect of the present embodiment, as the operation of the frame button 22, the continuous pressing operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 and the timing pressing of operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner are performed. The timing pressing effect for performing the operation is set to be executed continuously, and the result of the entire combined pressing effect is determined based on the result of each pressing effect. Therefore, in order to make the result of the effect sufficient, it is necessary to execute a plurality of types of frame button operations, so that there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, since it has an automatic continuous striking function for assisting the continuous striking operation, it is possible to facilitate the player to operate the frame button. Here, if a player who is executing the auto-continuous hitting function during the continuous-hit effect enters the timing-pressing effect while pressing the frame button 22, the frame button is automatically hit immediately after the timing-pressing effect is started. The problem that the situation of pressing 22 occurs has surfaced. Therefore, a period in which the automatic continuous striking function is valid and a period in which the automatic continuous striking function is disabled are provided, and the auto continuous striking function is disabled during the timing pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed due to automatic repeated hits during the timing pressing effect, and there is an effect that an effect unintended by the player can be generated.

Further, the above-mentioned solution alone prevents an erroneous pressing due to the automatic repeated hitting for a player who has entered the timing pressing effect while the auto continuous hitting function is being executed, that is, the frame button 22 is being pressed. There was a problem that it was not possible to participate in the timing push production. Specifically, when the same timing pressing effect as usual is executed only by disabling the automatic continuous hitting function, a game having a content such as "press the button at the right time" for the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. There was a problem that the guidance was displayed, the player was confused by the displayed contents, and could not enjoy the timing push effect.

Therefore, in this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing when the timing pressing effect is executed, and when the automatic continuous striking function is set to ON, the content of the timing pressing effect is timely. Changed to change to the effect of releasing the button. As a result, the player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released at the right time, and can participate in the production of executing the operation of the frame button 22 at the timing. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this control example, the pressing effect is switched while the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is continued in the compound pressing effect, but the operation invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid while the pressing effect is switched. May be provided. In this case, it is advisable to notify the player of the content of the next pressing effect within the operation invalid period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous display of the information display regarding the pressing effect being executed and the information display regarding the pressing effect being executed next, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. There is an effect.

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, the continuous slot effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous slot effect executed in this control example. This continuous slot effect is an effect in which the slot effect in which the pseudo symbol that is rotated and displayed is stopped and displayed is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (30 seconds) when the player operates the frame button 22. , The result of the effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects that are executed a plurality of times. Specifically, it is a production in which a privilege (big hit game) is given to the player by stopping and displaying all combinations of predetermined symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) during the continuous slot production. ..

As shown in FIG. 160, when the continuous slot effect is executed, the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is first executed. This slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (2 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-) during the latter 5 seconds (between 8 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). 2) Then, after the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 has elapsed (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop of one row of effective lines). (Display), and then, the process proceeds to slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), and the second slot effect is executed.

On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operated) during the first 6 seconds (between 2 and 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). When 1-1) is performed, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed within 8 to 9 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). ) Is executed. Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the pseudo symbol is not displayed as a stop and the special slot effect is displayed as it is. To do.

This special slot effect is an effect in which the frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set, and an effect in which the pseudo symbol that has been rotated and displayed is stopped and displayed is executed regardless of the operation of the player. Any of the 1st to 3rd columns of the effective lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect ends.

The frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set in the above-mentioned special slot effect, even though the frame button operation valid period of 11 seconds is set in slot effect 1 (first slot effect). Since the player who does not operate the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, the purpose is to prevent the effect of operating the frame button 22 from being displayed again during the slot continuous effect. Is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In this control example, a special slot effect in which the rotation display of the pseudo symbol is automatically stopped is executed as an effect in which the frame button operation valid period is not set, but the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. It suffices if the effect to be performed is executed. For example, the slot effect may be terminated and a different effect may be executed.

Next, slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 12 and 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) operate the frame button 22. It is set as the valid period (BT) of the frame button operation to be valid. This slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is performed only when the frame button 22 is operated within a predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in slot effect 1 (first slot effect). It is a slot production to be executed.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed during (18 to 20 seconds) (stop display of one row of effective lines), and then the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is entered.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the extension slot effect is executed without stopping the pseudo symbol. This extended slot effect is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, and the frame button operation enables the operation of the frame button 22 for 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as the validity period (BT).

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) during the extension slot effect, after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). In the meantime, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of two effective lines), and the continuous slot effect ends.

Subsequently, the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) operate the frame button 22. It is set as the valid period (BT) of the frame button operation to be valid. This slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). is there.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines) during (28 to 30 seconds), and the continuous slot effect ends.

Further, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the continuous slot effect is executed after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed. The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines) within 28 to 30 seconds after that, and the continuous slot effect ends. In the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed is a predetermined combination depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated or not within the frame button operation valid period (BT) (2nd shortened slot effect). The ratios of "AAA", "BBB", and "CCC") are set to be different, and the above-mentioned predetermined combination is set to be stopped and displayed more easily when the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Finally, the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (between 17 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). The frame button operation valid period (BT) is set. This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is the latter 5 seconds (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot effect 1 (first slot effect). This is a slot effect that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the period.

When the frame button 22 is operated during the latter 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect). , The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of 1 or 2 effective lines) after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), and the continuous slot effect is displayed. Is finished.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first two seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation valid period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after 19 seconds have elapsed, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and the process shifts to the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) described above.

Further, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), the continuous slot effect is executed after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed. The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines) within 28 to 30 seconds, and the continuous slot effect ends. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), when the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol becomes the effective line 1 row or 2 rows. It is set to be decided by lottery, and one of them is selected at a ratio of 1: 1.

Next, the display mode of the continuous slot effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 161. 161 (a) to 161 (e) are views showing an example of a display mode displayed in a continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161 (a), the first slot effect to be executed first among the continuous slot effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the initial slot effect, a pseudo symbol row having a plurality of pseudo symbols is rotated and displayed in three rows, and a frame button 22 for guiding the pressing of the frame button 22 is schematically below the pseudo symbol row. A guide map and a time gauge showing the effective operation period of the frame button are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, a history display unit for displaying a combination of predetermined pseudo symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) stopped and displayed in this continuous slot effect is displayed.

When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and the three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed (“AAA”), and the guide map and the time gauge are erased. Then, when the symbol displayed stopped this time is a combination of the predetermined pseudo symbols described above, "Get" is displayed at the corresponding position of the history display unit.

Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the first slot effect is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (c), and the normal slot effect is started. In this normal slot effect as well as the first slot effect described above, three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed. Is. The difference from the initial slot effect is that the stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol rows are stopped is selected as the stop display mode in which the effective lines are two rows as shown in FIG. 161 (c). Specifically, the left and right symbol rows of the three pseudo symbol rows are normally stopped 2 seconds after the slot effect is started, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the middle symbol rows.

Then, when the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols, "Get" is displayed in the history display unit. Here, when all of "A", "B", and "C" displayed on the history display unit are acquired, a privilege (big hit game) is given after the continuous slot production is completed.

In this way, when the continuous slot effect is executed by the normal frame button operation, the slot effect (first slot effect and the normal slot effect) is performed twice, and three predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols are combined by the slot effect. The game characteristics to be acquired are provided.

On the other hand, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the first slot effect is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (d), and the first shortened slot effect is started. To. In this first shortened slot effect, as in the normal slot effect, three pseudo symbol sequences are rotated and displayed in the same manner as the first slot effect described above, and the player operates the frame button 22 to rotate and display the three pseudo symbols. This is an effect in which the rows are stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed (“BBB”) in one effective line. After that, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161 (e) is executed.

Since this second shortened slot effect is the same as the first shortened slot effect described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the player operates the frame button 22 according to the timing of the next operation. It is configured so that the effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured so that the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed as a combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and is further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of slot productions increases, the production result of continuous slot production is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 at an early stage, the slot effect can be executed three times, so that the last It is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is small, a plurality of predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols can be stopped and displayed in one slot effect, so that the player can see them. You can have expectations until the end.

For the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the first slot effect is completed, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal mode” is selected, and FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a “dice mode” selected. It is a figure which showed the display example of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the case.

Although detailed description of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is omitted, in this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a frame button operation for shifting the game mode is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the game mode. When the transition lottery is won), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to transition between two game modes (“normal mode” and “dice mode”) having different display modes.

The "normal mode" is a game mode in which the fluctuation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol reaches the reach, a predetermined character ("rabbit", "turtle", "hero") ) Is a game mode in which an effect in which any or all of the characters appear is executed. Then, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) for accumulating and displaying the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed, and one of the indicators (P1 to P3) is displayed. In any of P1, P2, and P3), when the accumulated points exceed a predetermined number (7 points), the player is given a privilege (reach effect).

On the other hand, in the "dice mode", the variation display of the third symbol is reduced in the small area Dm5, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player by the progress of the game (not shown) using the dice in the main display area. This is a game mode in which the effect of playing is executed. Then, as in the above-mentioned "normal mode", two indicators (P4 to P5) that are displayed by accumulating the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed, and one of the indicators (P4 to P5) is displayed. In P4 or P5), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points), the player is given a privilege (reach effect).

First, the point effect executed in the "normal mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a display example in the “normal mode”. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the "normal mode", three indicators are displayed, and "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" are associated with each indicator. This is because the points given to the player (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the point effect are set to the types associated with each character, and the types of points given to the player are set. Points are given to each indicator (P1 to P3) according to the above.

The characters "Rabbit", "Kame", and "Brave" associated with each indicator (P1 to P3) are the third symbol variation effect and the reserved symbol display (not shown) executed in the "normal mode". ), And the point type corresponding to the character is set so as to be easily displayed based on the character being displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect with the situation in which points are accumulated in the point effect. It is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be randomly determined. As a result, the points associated with the characters other than the characters displayed on the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Further, in this control example, one of a plurality of characters ("Rabbit", "Kame", "Brave") appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as a point effect, and the displayed character is the time point. It is set so that a high point is given when the character matches the character displayed as the main body of the third symbol variation display.

Further, the period for displaying the character as the point effect is set three times during one point effect, and points are set to be given at each timing. As a result, the progress of the third symbol variation effect (presence or absence of a main character or the type of the character) can be more related to the point effect, and the complex effect can be easily understood by the player. There is an effect.

In this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, it is associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Display objects (eg, "swords" associated with "heroes") may be used. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can play the game while predicting the presence or absence of relevance by comparing the display object displayed in the point effect with the content of the third symbol variation effect.

It should be noted that the point effect may be associated with something other than the third symbol variation effect, for example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or it is output from the voice output device. It may be associated with the voice of the character. By associating some kind of effect provided to the player with the point effect in this way, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

Further, in this control example, points are accumulated on the indicator at various timings during the fluctuation display of the special symbol (during the fluctuation of the third symbol), and the number of points is the maximum value (7th stage in FIG. 162). ) Is reached, at least an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the variable effect of the third symbol being executed at that time is executed.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy whether or not any of the indicators reaches the maximum value by the point production, and can execute the game while expecting the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

The mode in which points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

As described above, in this control example, the "normal mode" and the "dice mode" are set by the voice lamp control device 114, which is the effect mode setting means, as a plurality of effect modes. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process described later executed by the voice lamp control device 114. It should be noted that a plurality of production modes may be set so as to be possible by operating the frame button 22.

Then, indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as stage information of a plurality of stages, and the stage information is variably displayed by displaying points which are variable information on the third symbol display device 81. To.

Next, the point effect executed in the “dice mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a display example in the “dice mode”. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the "dice mode", two indicators imitating the dice are displayed, and the cumulative value of points is displayed by the dice roll. The two dice associated with each of the indicators are configured in the same display mode as the dice used by the "dice effect" executed in the "dice mode".

As described above, in the point effect of this control example, the indicator is displayed in the display mode related to the game mode being executed, so that it is possible to suppress the display that gives the player a sense of discomfort in each effect. be able to.

Further, in each game mode, the types of points accumulated by the point effect and the upper limit value are set to be different, so that different point effects can be enjoyed in each game mode. For the points given in the point production, the point reference value to be given is determined in advance, the point reference value is converted so as to correspond to the indicator display of the currently executed game mode, and the converted points are converted. It may be configured to be given to the player. This makes it possible to simplify the control of giving points.

Further, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, the points already accumulated in the indicator may be converted into points corresponding to the game mode of the transfer destination and displayed. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already assigned during the point production is stored in the storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 114 which is the stage information storage means, and the game mode It is preferable to convert the point reference value stored at the timing of the transition so as to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the transition destination, and control the display. As a result, the indicator display corresponding to the game mode can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic view showing a main display area Dm, and FIG. 163 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) given to the player by the point effect is based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. I have decided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point displayed in the main display area Dm from overlapping with the third symbol variation effect, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

First, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11 to 13, Dm21 to 23, Dm31 to 33) based on the coordinate axes. Has been done. The place where the point is displayed is determined in units of the divided small areas. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying the points in each small area unit is stored in advance, the small area in which the point display is executed this time is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect. , The point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when the point display is executed, only the process of determining the display location needs to be executed, and there is an effect that the process can be simplified.

A method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. For example, in the control of first determining the point display image to be executed in the current point display and then determining the small area to perform the point display. Good.

Further, in this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine, but it may be divided into more than that, and the point display is not executed in one small area, but a plurality of small areas. You may execute the point display using.

Next, a specific example of the point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (b). When the point display is performed while the effect shown in FIG. 163 (b) is being executed as the third symbol variation effect, first, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect and the small area not used are used. The area is determined, and as a result of the determination, a small area (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) that is not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, an allowable area that allows point display is set.

Then, an image related to the "hero" is displayed as a character indicating an indicator in which points are given to the selected small area Dm12 among the small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) set in the allowable area. Then, the display of 2 points is executed in the selected small area Dm11 among the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the image that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, two points of the indicator corresponding to the hero are accumulated among the indicators shown in FIG. 162 (a).

In this control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, the points that can be acquired by the player are higher than those of other images are displayed. It is set. Therefore, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect before the points are displayed with the character image that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, and whether or not the points that can be obtained in this point effect are high. Can be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to watch while expecting the continuation of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this control example, a character image is displayed in the point effect, and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing at which the point is displayed. In, points may be accumulated in the indicator corresponding to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect.

Further, for example, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the reason why the reserved image has changed is due to the point production or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the changed reserved image shows the expectation that it will be a big hit. It is possible to pay attention to the effect to be executed later.

As described above, the display location of the points is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and the points are further distributed based on the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. It is possible to perform point production that is easy for people to understand.

If there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, the points to be displayed can be selected based on the number of points given and the effect result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), if the points displayed this time are 1 point (low points) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order, the points can be displayed in the small areas Dm11 to Dm13. The points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy role "monster" as the subject of the third symbol variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special symbol is won. In the case of, it is preferable to display the points in the small area Dm11 near the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display the points. As a result, by grasping the points where the player displays the points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for this special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area where the point display is not performed, but for example, in one small area, the subject of the third symbol variation effect is set. When the ratio occupied by the image is calculated and the ratio is not more than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area capable of displaying points. As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167.

FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the pressing scenario table 222c, the character selection table 222d, and the point selection table 222e are added. Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the pressing scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), a normal pressing scenario 222c1, a long pressing scenario 222c2, and a combined pressing scenario 222c3 are set in the pressing scenario table 222c.

FIG. 165 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario 222c1. In the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the period during which the normal button pressing is effective (normal pressing period) is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). This is a scenario. The information of the normal pressing scenario 222c1 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the normal pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is the normal pressing period based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

In addition, the timing type is set for each period during which the button press is effective. By executing (displaying) the effect according to the timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

Specifically, in the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the normal pressing period is set as the pressing period type for the value "5001 to 9000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. "OK" is set as the timing type. Although the details will be described later, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the fluctuation display is started, and then 1 is added every 1 ms. Therefore, the period from 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the normal pressing period. Will be done.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored in the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the pressing effect is executed.

In the case of the values "0 to 5000" and "9001 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing is an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press pressing scenario 222c2. In the long press pressing scenario 222c2, the period during which the long pressing button pressing is effective (long pressing pressing period) is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display). This is the scenario that has been done. The information of the long press pressing scenario 222c2 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the long pressing pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and the long pressing pressing period is based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined to be.

Specifically, in the long press pressing scenario 222c2, the long pressing pressing period is set as the pressing period type and "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. There is. That is, the period from the start of fluctuation to 5001 ms to 12000 ms is determined as the long press press period. The long press pressing period is a period for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (long pressed) for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the long-press pressing effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the characters "long-press successful!" Is displayed) is executed based on the long-press operation performed during the long-pressing period.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored in the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the pressing effect is executed.

In the case of the values "0 to 5000" and "9001 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing is an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the combined pressing scenario 222c3. The compound pressing scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which a plurality of types of button pressings are valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). The information of the compound pressing scenario 222c3 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the compound pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is various pressing periods based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined. In this embodiment, only one type of compound pressing scenario is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the composite pressing scenario 222c3, the auto pressing period is set as the pressing period type and "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, the period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the auto pressing period. The auto-pressing period is a period for executing auto-pressing based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-press effect, based on the long-press operation performed during the auto-press period, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is pressed every second while the long-press operation continues (for example, the frame button). The effect of increasing the gauge by hitting 22 repeatedly) is executed.

For the value "12001 to 13200" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the auto is pressed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-auto pressing is in progress. "NG" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13201 to 13800" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the auto is pressed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-auto pressing is in progress. "OK" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13801 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the auto is pressed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-auto pressing is in progress. "NG" is set as the timing type.

That is, when auto is being pressed, a release effect that is an effect of releasing the frame button 22 is displayed, and by releasing the frame button 22 during the period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of fluctuation, an effect based on the timing type of "OK" ( For example, the characters "Good timing!") Are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the characters "bad timing!") Is displayed.

When non-automatic pressing is in progress, the normal pressing effect, which is the effect of pressing the frame button 22, is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the period from the start of fluctuation to 13201 ms to 13800 ms, it is based on the timing type of "OK". The effect (for example, the characters "Good timing!") Is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the characters "bad timing!") Is displayed.

The automatic pressing effect is set for the value "1500 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "20001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 20001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the compound pressing effect is executed.

Next, the details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a hit character selection table 222d1 and a hit character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (b). FIG. 166 (b) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is the specified table.

Although not shown, the effect counter 223f has three types of independent counters, and when a character is selected in each period, the selection is performed using different counters. As a result, the variation of the characters displayed in the first to third periods can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the hit character selection table 222d1, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "50 to 100" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "Kame" is defined as the character corresponding to the value "101 to 149" of the effect counter 223f. As the character corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the effect counter 223f, "the same character as the type of point effect" is defined, and the character (hero, rabbit, turtle) who performs the main effect in the point effect is defined. The same character will be selected.

That is, in the point effect executed when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is easily displayed in the first to third periods, whereby the game Since the player plays the game with the expectation that the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is displayed in the first to third periods, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the contents of the off-character selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (c). FIG. 166 (c) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is wrong, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is the specified table.

Specifically, in the disengagement character selection table 222d2, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 65" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "66 to 132" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "Kame" is defined as the character corresponding to the values "133 to 199" of the effect counter 223f.

Next, the details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a hit point selection table 222e1 and a loss point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, and the points correspond to the values of the effect counter 223f. Is the specified table. When selecting points in each period, the selection is performed using different counters, as in the case of character selection. As a result, the variation of the points displayed in the first to third periods can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the hit point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the value "0 to 2" of the last digit of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f. "2" is specified as a point corresponding to "3 to 6", and "3" is specified as a point corresponding to the last digit value "7 to 9" of the effect counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "0 to 4" of the effect counter 223f in the detachment point selection table 222e1. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "5 to 7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "8 to 9" of the production counter 223f. It is stipulated.

Therefore, the hit point selection table 222e1 is configured to facilitate selection of higher points than the hit point selection table 222e2. That is, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, higher points are more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that high points will be displayed in the first to third periods of the point production, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 164, the description will be continued. FIG. 164B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example has a pressing effect flag 223j, a pressing effect scenario counter 223k, a pressing scenario storage area 223m, a slot effecting flag 223n, and a slot effect counter 223p with respect to the RAM 223 in the first control example. , The slot effect state 223q is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing effect in progress flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the pressing effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the pressing effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it is pressed. Indicates that the effect is not executed (displayed). This pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired variation pattern is the pressing effect (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170). S2031). Then, it is referred to in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) to determine whether or not the pressing effect is in progress (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to off at the end of the pressing effect (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the pressing effect is set. The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time it is determined in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) that the pressing effect is in progress (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 at the end of the pressing effect. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the pressing effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the pressed effect scenario counter 223k is added by 1 every 1 ms. Based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (elapsed time since the start of the variable display) and the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m described later, is the button pressing valid period? Whether or not it is determined.

The pressing scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the pressing scenario stored in the above-mentioned pressing scenario table 222c. In the pressing scenario storage area 223m, when the variation pattern for which the pressing effect is set is acquired in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the pressing scenario corresponding to the set pressing effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button pressing is a valid period.

The slot effect in progress flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the effect is not executed (displayed). This slot effect in-progressing flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired variation pattern is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172). See S2305). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to for determining whether or not the slot effect is in progress (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to off when the slot effect is terminated (see FIG. 174). See S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the slot effect is set. The slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) that the slot effect is being produced (S4601: Yes in FIG. 174) (S4603 in FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 every 1 ms. The values of the slot effect counter 223p are the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), the initial slot effect process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect process (see FIG. 176), and the first shortened slot effect process (FIG. 177). (See), the second shortened slot effect processing (see FIG. 178), and the extension slot effect process (see FIG. 179).

The slot effect state 223q is an area in which information indicating the state of the slot effect is stored, and during the first slot effect, the normal slot effect, the first shortened slot effect, the second shortened slot effect, and the extension slot effect. The corresponding value is stored. The slot effect state 223q is set to the initial slot effect when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the slot effect is set in the acquired variation pattern (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170). (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the initial slot effect processing (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect is set when the normal slot effect is selected (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and the first shortened slot effect is selected when the first shortened slot effect is selected. The effect is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and the special slot effect is set when the special slot effect is selected (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot effect processing (see FIG. 176), when the slot stop command for displaying the stop mode in which the two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second shortened slot effect is produced. The second shortened slot effect is set when the display slot effect command corresponding to is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the first shortened slot effect processing (see FIG. 177), when the second shortened slot effect is selected, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when the extension slot effect is selected. An extension slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178), when the slot stop effect command for displaying the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, it is set to the end waiting state (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the process during the extension slot effect (see FIG. 179), when the slot stop effect command for displaying the stop mode in which the two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to in order to determine which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and is cleared at the end of the slot effect (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 168. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, the work RAM 233 in this control example has a prohibited area storage area 233 m added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area of the display area composed of a total of nine areas in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into three vertically and three horizontally (see Dm11 to Dm31 and FIG. 163). Information indicating the above is stored, and the character symbol and the point symbol are controlled so as not to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, for example, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as information indicating the display area in the prohibited area storage area 233m, the information does not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, Select the character symbol (not displayed in Dm12 and Dm13) and the point symbol, and execute the point effect. Further, after the character symbol is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area in which the selected character symbol is displayed, and then the point symbol is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character symbol and the point symbol from being duplicately displayed in the same display area. When selecting a point symbol, if all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m, duplicate display is displayed by synthesizing (or reducing) the image data of the character symbol and the point symbol. It may be prevented, or one of the character symbol and the point symbol may not be displayed.

In the character ROM 234 in this control example, a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 are added to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table in which image data for displaying a character symbol in the above-mentioned point effect is stored. This character data table 234a3 stores the display information of the character symbol displayed in the first to third periods in the point effect, and is used as the character information of the received command in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186). The display information of the corresponding character symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The character symbol display information includes information about a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so that it is not selected. As a result, the character symbol can be prevented from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m. Therefore, for example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are displayed in duplicate. You can prevent it from happening.

The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying a point symbol in the above-mentioned point effect is stored. The point data table 234a4 stores the display information of the point symbols displayed in the first to third periods in the point effect, and is used as the point information of the received command in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186). The display information of the corresponding point symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The point symbol display information includes information about a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so that it is not selected. As a result, the point symbol can be prevented from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m. Therefore, for example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are displayed in duplicate. You can prevent it from happening.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, with respect to the first control example described above, the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) is changed so that the pressing effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732) are executed. The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169. In the main process 2, the processes S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S1710 is completed, the pressing effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to the process of S1711. Then, the command determination process is executed (S1711), the variation display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the process proceeds to the process of S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 170. The variable display setting process 2 (S1712) adds a process for executing a pressing effect, a slot effect, and a point effect to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example, instead of the reach navigation effect. It differs in that it does, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes S2001 to S2003 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and then the display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

When the processing of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether or not the set fluctuation pattern command executes the pressing effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired fluctuation pattern is set to the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is set to (S2033), and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the process of S2033, for example, if the acquired fluctuation pattern executes the normal pressing effect, the normal pressing scenario is acquired from the pressing scenario table 222c and set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, the button valid period can be adjusted to the display of the effect based on the press scenario storage area 223 m and the press effect scenario counter 223 k.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is not executed (S2031: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect is executed (S2034).

In the process of S2034, when it is determined that the set fluctuation pattern command executes the slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q. Is set to the first slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2034, when it is determined that the slot effect is not executed (S2034: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect is executed (S2037).

If it is determined in the process of S2037 that the set fluctuation pattern command executes the point effect (S2037: Yes), the point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to the process of S2007. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2037 that the point effect is not executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2007.

In the S2007 transition, the processes from S2007 to S2011 are executed and the present process is terminated, as in the first control example.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. is there.

In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S4301). Then, the first to third character information is determined based on the type of the point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying the character symbol in the three periods in which the character symbol set in the point effect and the point symbol are displayed. The first character information is the information of the character symbol to be displayed in the earliest of the three periods (the time elapsed since the start of the variable display is the shortest), and the second character information is the first period. It is the information of the character symbol to be displayed in the second period which is the next period of, and the third character information is the information of the character symbol to be displayed in the third period which is the next period of the second period.

As described above, the hit character selection table 222d1 is configured so that the same character symbol as a predetermined character can be easily selected in the point effect. As a result, when the character mainly displayed in the point effect and the character symbol displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, the player is expected to be a big hit after that. Can be done.

When the processing of S4302 is completed, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the hit point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4306. The first to third point information is information for displaying the point symbol in the first to third periods set in the point effect, similarly to the first to third character information described above.

As described above, the hit point selection table 222e1 is configured so that a point symbol having a higher point can be easily selected than the hit point selection table 222e2. As a result, many high-point point symbols are displayed in the point production, and the player can be expected to win a big hit thereafter.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301 when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is out of order (S4301: No), the first to third characters are based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the outlier character selection table 222d2. The information is determined (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the deviating point selection table 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

When the processing of S4303 or S4305 is completed, a display point effect command is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display point effect command, the display control device 114 receives the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the point effect based on the first to third point information. Is set, and the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the pressing effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. This pressing effect setting process (S1731) detects the pressing of the frame button 22 (normal pressing, long pressing, etc.) according to the pressing effect being executed (displayed), and displays and controls the command corresponding to the pressing. This is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

In the pressing effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is on (that is, whether or not the pressing effect is in progress) (S4401). If it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing flag 223j is off (S4401: No), it is not necessary to make settings related to the pressing effect, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4402 in order to execute the process related to the pressing effect.

In the processing of S4402, the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is added by 1 (S4402), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4403. Since the pressing effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the pressed effect scenario counter 223k is every 1 ms while the pressing effect is being executed. It is added one by one.

In the processing of S4403, the pressing of the frame button 22 whose current period is normal is based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k updated in the processing of S4402 and the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. It is determined whether or not it is the detection period (normal pressing period) (S4403).

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4404). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S4404 (S4404: Yes), a display pressing command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal pressing period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and the display pressing command corresponding to the timing type is set. As a result, when different effects are executed depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is possible to determine at what timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the pressing timing.

In the process of S4403, if it is determined that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the period for detecting the long press of the frame button 22 (long pressing period). (S4406). In the process of S4406, when it is determined that the current period is the long press press period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is long press (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or longer, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time.

If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 is long-pressed (S4407), a long-press display command indicating that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed during the long-press press period is set (S4407). S4408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed and held (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the current period is not the long press pressing period (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the auto pressing period (S4409). If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the current period is the auto-press period (S4409: Yes), the auto-press effect setting process is executed (S4410), and this process ends. Details of the auto-press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not the auto-press period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the release period (S4411). In the processing of S4410. When it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been released (whether or not it has changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state) (S4412). ..

If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been released in the process of S4412 (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released is set during the release period, and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the process of S4413 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4411, when it is determined that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), then whether or not it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (acquired based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k). Whether or not the pressing period type of the pressing scenario is "END" information) is determined (S4414).

In the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to off. Then (S4416), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: No), the processes of S4415 and S4416 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 173, details of the auto-pressing effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined that the auto-pressing period is determined in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) will be described. .. This auto-press effect setting process (S4410) is based on the fact that the frame button 22 is long-pressed and pressed during the auto-press period, and the long-pressed period is the frame button at regular intervals (every 1 second). This is a process for transmitting a command indicating that 22 has been pressed to the display control device 114. That is, in the auto pressing effect, the frame button 22 is automatically (automatically) pressed by pressing and holding the frame button 22 for a long time.

In the auto-press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has been started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or longer, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has started. If it is determined in the processing of S4501 that the long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for auto pressing (S4501). S4502). Then, an auto-press start command indicating that the long press of the frame button 22 is started (auto-press is started) is set during the auto-press period (S4503), and this process is terminated. By changing the pressing scenario to the pressing scenario for auto pressing in the processing of S4502, the effect mode displayed thereafter is changed to the effect mode assuming that the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed. (For example, you can change the effect of pressing a button to the effect of releasing a button).

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has not been started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 is in progress (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed and held (S4504: Yes), the previous auto-pressing is executed during the period when the auto-pressing started by the long-pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. It is determined whether or not a certain period (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the execution of (S4505).

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has passed since the previous auto-press was executed (S4504: Yes), the display auto-press command is set (S4506), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous auto-pressing was executed (S4504: No), the processing of S4506 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is not in progress (S4504: No), then it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 is completed (S4507). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is not pressed continuously for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 is long pressed, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is completed. This prevents it from being mistakenly determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has been completed when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like. it can.

In the process of S4507, when it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is completed (S4507: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223 m is changed to the press scenario for non-automatic press. (S4508). Then, a display auto-press end command indicating that the long-press of the frame button 22 is completed (auto-press is started) is set during the auto-press period (S4509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is not completed (S4507: No), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510).

In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is manually pressed (continuously pressed) during the auto continuous striking period, so it is based on the timing type. A display press command is set (S4511), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S4510 that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. This slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

In the slot effect setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect during effect flag 223n is on (whether or not the slot effect is being produced) (S4601). In the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effecting flag 223n is off (S4601: No), it is a case where the slot effect is not executed (displayed), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effect in progress flag 223n is on (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, the value of the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 every 1 ms during the execution (display) of the slot effect. To.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603). In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), it means that the first slot effect (first slot effect) is executed in the slot effect. In order to execute the process in the first slot effect, the process during the first slot effect is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the processing during the initial slot effect (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 175. The initial slot effect in-process (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the initial slot effect of the slot effect. is there.

In the processing during the initial slot production (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is a valid button pressing valid period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 13000 (that is, between 2 seconds and 13 seconds after the start of the slot effect), it is determined that the button press is valid. To do.

When it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button pressing valid period is (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4702). If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4702: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S4701 (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). .. In the process of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button press valid period (between 2 seconds and 13 seconds) is early (from 2 seconds). Since the frame button 22 is pressed during (8 seconds) and the remaining effect time of the slot pressing effect is long, the process shifts to the process of S4706 in order to execute the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first shortened slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value from 2000 to 8000 (that is, a value of 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process of S4704 for executing the normal slot effect is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to the process of S4708.

In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4709), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

In the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4701: Yes), it is the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button pressing valid period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 13000 or less (S4710: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the initial slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the process during the normal slot effect (S4606).

This normal slot effect processing is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect processing (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is a valid button pressing valid period (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 17,000 to 28,000 (that is, from the start of the slot effect to the elapse of 17 seconds to 28 seconds), the button press valid period is determined. Determine.

In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4801 when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802).

If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4802: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803).

If it is determined in the process of S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during the execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then the effect. This is a case where it is possible to execute the second shortened slot effect in which the time is 10 seconds. In this case, a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), a slot effect state 223q is set as a second shortened slot effect (S4809), and a display corresponding to the second shortened slot effect is set. A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4804 in order to end the slot effect.

In the processing of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined to be an even number (S4804: Yes), a slot for displaying a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned. A stop effect command is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4804, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, and the process proceeds to S4807. Transition.

In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4807), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the normal slot effect, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, in the second shortened slot effect, one symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition to the stop display in the slot effect, three symbols will be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed late, it is determined whether the two symbols are stopped or the one symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the value of the effect counter. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, there is a high possibility that the two symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the player can actively participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the first shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4607).

If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the first shortened slot effect is being set (S4607: Yes), the first shortened slot effect process is executed (S4608), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the processing during the production of the first shortened slot will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 177. The first shortened slot effect in-process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot effect of the slot effect. It is a process for.

In the process during the first shortened slot effect (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 12000 to 18000, it is determined that it is the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4901, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect is (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902).

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4902: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set as the second shortened slot effect. (S4904). Then, a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S4901: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906).

If it is determined in the process of S4906 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18000 or less (S4906: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect. is there. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

When the processing of S4905 or S4908 is completed, the display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4909), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then whether or not the second shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4609).

If it is determined in the process of S4609 that the second shortened slot effecting process is set (S4609: Yes), the second shortened slot effect process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the second shortened slot effect in-process (S4610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178. The second shortened slot effect processing (S4610) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and corresponds to pressing the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the second shortened slot effect. It is a process for performing the process.

In the process during the second shortened slot effect (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid period in the second shortened slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the process of S5001, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S5001: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002).

If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5002: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is set. Set to the end waiting state (S5004), and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then whether or not the extension slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q is determined. Determine (S4611).

If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extension slot effect is being set (S4611: Yes), the extension slot effect process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the extension slot effect processing (S4612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 179. The process during the extension slot effect (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is to perform a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the extension slot effect. It is the processing of.

In the extension slot effect in-process (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not the button press valid period in the extension slot effect is valid (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S5101: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102).

If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5102: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is set. Set to the end waiting state (S5104), and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extension slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

In the process of S4613, in order to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the slot effect, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613). If it is determined in the process of S4613 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28,000 or less (S4613: No), it is not the end timing of the slot effect, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot effect. Therefore, the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state. It is determined whether or not there is (S4614).

In the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the slot effect has already been stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. This is the case when a special slot effect is being executed. In this case, the display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped and displayed. In this case, in order to stop and display the effect mode in the slot effect and then end the slot effect, a display slot effect forced end command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

In the process of S4617, the slot effect during effect flag 223n is set to off (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) is different from the first control example in that the press effect-related command process, the slot effect command process, and the point effect command process are added. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 180. In the command determination process 2, the processes S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

Then, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the pressing effect has been received (S2631).

If it is determined that the press effect-related command has been received in the process of S2631 (S2631: Yes), the press effect-related command process is executed (S2632), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the pressing effect-related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

On the other hand, in the process of S2631, if it is determined that the command related to the pressing effect has not been received (S2631: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect command has been received (S2633).

If it is determined that the slot effect command has been received in the process of S2633 (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, in the process of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect command has been received (S2635).

If it is determined that the point effect command has been received in the process of S2635 (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the point effect command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command has not been received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed in the same manner as in the first control example (S2614), and the processing of S2601 is performed. Return to.

Next, the details of the pressing effect-related command processing (S2632) will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. The press effect-related command process (S2632) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (execution) the press effect.

In the pressing effect-related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not the display pressing command has been received (S5201). If it is determined that the display pressing command has been received in the processing of S5201 (S5201: Yes), the pressing command processing is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5203.

Here, the details of the pressing command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a flowchart showing the pressing command processing. This pressing command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display pressing command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the press command processing, first, the press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is used. Set (S5301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302).

Then, based on the pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5303). S5304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5305), the pressing command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the pressing effect-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201 when it is determined that the display press command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the display long press command has been received (S5203).

If it is determined in the process of S5203 that the long press command for display has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to the process of S5205.

Here, the details of the long press command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a flowchart showing a long press command process. This long press command process executes a process corresponding to the display long press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the long press command processing, first, a long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the long press command for display is determined, and the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5402).

Then, based on the long-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5405), the long press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the long press command for display has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the auto press start command for display has been received (S5205).

If it is determined that the display auto-press start command has been received in the process of S5205 (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

Here, the details of the auto-press start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (a). FIG. 183 (a) is a flowchart showing the auto-press start command processing. This auto-press start command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press start command processing, first, the auto-press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press start command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502).

Then, based on the auto-press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5505), the auto press start command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that the display auto-press start command has not been received (S5205: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press command has been received (S5207).

If it is determined that the display auto-press command has been received in the process of S5207 (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to the process of S5209.

Here, the details of the auto-press command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). FIG. 183 (b) is a flowchart showing auto-press command processing. This auto-press command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press command processing, first, an auto-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press command is determined, and the determined auto-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602).

Then, based on the auto-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5605), the auto press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

If it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to the process of S5211.

Here, the details of the auto-press end command process (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (a). FIG. 184 (a) is a flowchart showing the auto-press end command process. This auto-press end command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press end command processing, first, the auto-press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press end command is determined, and the determined auto-press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the auto-pressed end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5705), the auto press end command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the display auto press end command has not been received (S5209: No), then it is determined whether or not the display release command has been received (S5211).

If it is determined that the display release command has been received in the process of S5211 (S5211: Yes), the release command process is executed (S5212), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the release command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a flowchart showing release command processing. This release command process executes the process corresponding to the display release command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the release command processing, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is used. Set (S5801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5803). S5804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5805), the release command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the pressing effect-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5211 that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), this process ends.

Next, the details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing slot effect command processing. This slot effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the slot effect command processing, first, a slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5902).

Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5905), the slot effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

Next, the details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the point effect command processing. This point effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display point effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, the information of the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233 m (S6002).

Character data of the character symbol to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233 m set in the process of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command. The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the information of the prohibited area corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Point data of the point symbol to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233 m updated in the processing of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command. The table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

Then, by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6005).

Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6008), the point effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

As described above, the combined pressing effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player continuously executes different operation modes (continuous hitting, timing pressing) on the frame button 22, so that the player can produce the effect. It can increase the willingness to participate in the event. Further, when it is determined that the player has executed the auto-pressing function during the compound pressing effect, the pressing effect mode of the compound pressing effect to be executed is switched, so that the player is provided with an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort. Can be done.

In this control example, it is set so that the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at the right time (timing pressing effect) is executed after the pressing effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 (continuous pressing effect) as the compound pressing effect. If the auto-press function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous hit effect to the timing press effect, the above-mentioned timing push effect is configured to be switched to the release effect in which the button is released at the right time. Other configurations may be used.

For example, when the auto pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous striking effect to the timing pressing effect, the timing of the pressing operation during the timing pressing effect may be automatically determined, or the continuous striking may be performed. The production may be continuously executed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player who is executing the auto-pressing function.

Further, in the second control example, the normal pressing effect, the timing pressing effect, and the release effect are configured to be displayable as the combined pressing effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period in which the long press effect is executed may be provided as part of the compound press effect.

Further, in the second control example, the timing at which each pressing effect mode of the composite pressing effect is changed is the timing at which the pressing effect is switched, but the production mode of the next pressing effect is at the timing when the previous pressing effect is executed. May be decided. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the combined pressing effect.

Further, the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously accepted during the effect period of the combined pressing effect executed in the second control example, but an invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted is provided. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the compound pressing effect using the invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the period during which the compound pressing effect is being executed, which is easy for the player to understand. A production can be provided.

In the compound pressing effect described above in the second control example, the result of the compound pressing effect is displayed based on all the operation results for each pressing effect executed during the compound pressing effect. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play for each pressing effect. The method of displaying the effect result of the composite press effect is not limited to this, and the effect result may be displayed independently for each press effect executed during the compound press effect.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the player operates the frame button 22 according to the timing of the next operation. It is configured so that the effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured so that the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed as a combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and is further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of slot productions increases, the production result of continuous slot production is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 at an early stage, the slot effect can be executed three times. It is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is small, a plurality of predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols can be stopped and displayed in one slot effect, so that the player can see them. You can have expectations until the end.

Further, for the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the end of the first slot effect, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

In this second control example, the slot effect is used as a plurality of operation effects executed during the continuous effect executed for a specific period, but it is based on the operation result for one operation effect executed during the continuous effect. Therefore, as long as the effect mode and the number of times of other operation effects executed during the continuous effect can be changed, an effect other than the effect using slots may be used.

As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the point display location is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and is further displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Since the points are distributed based on the character, it is possible to perform a point effect that is easy for the player to understand.

If there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, the points to be displayed can be selected based on the number of points given and the effect result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), if the points displayed this time are 1 point (low points) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order, the points can be displayed in the small areas Dm11 to Dm13. The points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy role "monster" as the subject of the third symbol variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special symbol is won. In the case of, it is preferable to display the points in the small area Dm11 near the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display the points. As a result, by grasping the points where the player displays the points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for this special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed in Dm12 of FIG. 163 (b)) may be changed to a display mode for guiding the point display location (small area) to be executed later. Specifically, it is preferable to use a display mode in which the point display location (small area) is guided by the character's line of sight.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area where the point display is not performed, but for example, in one small area, the subject of the third symbol variation effect is set. When the ratio occupied by the image is calculated and the ratio is not more than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area capable of displaying points. As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

The following configuration may be used as a configuration for setting the display location of the point effect based on the location where the third symbol variation effect is displayed. That is, on the display control device 114 side, when a command for displaying points is received, the points are controlled to be displayed in all the small areas, and the small areas other than the small areas in which the player actually visually recognizes the point display. Control may be performed to mask the point display displayed in the area so that the player cannot see it. With this configuration, for example, during the third symbol variation effect, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect moves to various small areas, and the prohibited area and the allowable area are interchanged. Case processing can be facilitated.

Further, as the same processing, the point display image layer for displaying the points is made to display points in all the small areas, and the effect display image layer that displays the third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer. Is provided, and a process of transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect to the effect display image layer may be executed.

Further, in the second control example, a small area in which the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as a prohibited area for prohibiting the point display, but a small area in which the other display is executed is a prohibited area. For example, a small area where game information such as a display of the number of holdings is displayed, or a pachinko machine 10 is provided and driven by satisfying a predetermined condition (predetermined fluctuation pattern selection). 3 In a gaming machine having a decorative accessory that covers a part (specific small area) of the front surface of the symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned specific small area when a predetermined condition is satisfied or an abnormality is detected when an abnormality is detected. In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area on which information is displayed, the predetermined small area when an abnormality is detected may be set as a prohibited area.

Further, in this second control example, a control example using the display area of one display device (third symbol display device 81) is described, but even if the same control is executed using a plurality of display devices. Often, for example, when a movable (rotatable) sub-display device is arranged at a predetermined position, it may be set in a prohibited area, and when it is arranged in another position, it may be set in an allowable area.

<First modification of the second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. In the first modification of the second control example, the contents of the ROM 203 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the second control example described above, and the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) is replaced. The difference is that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first modification of the second control example, three types of auto-pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are configured to be different in each auto-pressing period. As a result, for example, an effect that requires pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the button pressing period (continuous hitting effect), or pressing the frame button 22 only once at the right time during the button pressing period (timing pressing effect). Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

Further, in the first modification, an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the slot is rotated / stopped is executed three times is displayed as the slot effect, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the pressing of the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation effect, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes slower, and as the frame button 22 is pressed later, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes faster. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow and it becomes easy to align the target symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, the next The rotation speed in the rotation effect of is increased, and it becomes difficult to align the target patterns. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, and the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the first modification of the second control example>
First, the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 187. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modification is different from the second control example described above in that the content of the pressing scenario table 222c is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the pressing scenario table 222c in the first modification is different from the pressing scenario table 222c in the second control example described above, instead of the combined pressing scenario 222c3, the first combined pressing scenario 222c4 and The difference is that the second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first compound pressing scenario 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first compound pressing scenario 222c4. The first combined pressing scenario 222c4 is different from the combined pressing scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the pressing interval during the auto pressing period is different, and other points are the same. The same points will be omitted.

In the first compound pressing scenario 222c4, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the auto pressing period A (pressing interval 1 second) is set as the pressing period type for the value “5001 to 12000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. , The auto-pressing period B (pressing interval 0.5 seconds) is set for the value "1500 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k.

In this way, the player executing the auto-pressing function executes the auto-pressing function by making the pressing interval different from the auto-pressing period set in different periods depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. It is possible to prevent early getting bored with the production based on what is being done.

In this modification, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto pressing period, but other configurations may be used. For example, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the auto-pressing period is reached, one auto-pressing pattern is selected from the auto-pressing pattern selection table in which a plurality of auto-pressing patterns having different pressing intervals are stored, and the pressing interval is based on the selected auto-pressing pattern. May be set. With this configuration, even if the compound pressing effect based on the same compound pressing scenario is executed, the auto pressing functions having different pressing intervals are executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It is possible to suppress the storage.

Further, a predetermined auto-pressing pattern may be selected from the above-mentioned auto-pressing pattern selection table based on the determination result of the special symbol. Specifically, when an effect in which the degree of progress increases according to the number of times of pressing is executed, if it is determined that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is stored in the automatic pressing pattern selection table. It is preferable that the auto pressing pattern having the shortest pressing interval is selected from the existing auto pressing patterns. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of progress of the production when the discrimination result of the special symbol is won as a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is executing the auto pressing function predict the discrimination result of the special symbol according to the progress of the effect.

Further, it is preferable to notify the third symbol display device 81 of the pressing interval while the auto pressing function is being executed. As a result, the player can visually grasp the pressing interval of the auto pressing function executed this time.

Next, the contents of the second compound pressing scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (c). FIG. 187 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second compound pressing scenario 222c5. The second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is a period corresponding to the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) with respect to the above-mentioned first compound pressing scenario 222c4, and the values “12001” to “12001” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. The difference is that the auto-pressing period is set for "15000", and the other points are the same. The same points will be omitted.

In the second compound pressing scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the auto pressing period C (pressing interval 2 seconds) is set for the values “12001” to “15000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. .. By executing the automatic pressing function with a pressing interval of 2 seconds during the period in which the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) is set as the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) in this way, it is determined within a substantially predetermined period. It is possible to realize the situation where the button is pressed at the timing.

Specifically, for example, when the effect pressed by the auto-press function is executed at the timing when the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k during the auto-press period A is "14000", the press effect during the auto-press period C The next pressing effect is executed at the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is "16000", that is, at the timing 2 seconds after the previous pressing effect. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at the timing one second after the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) is started.

In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during auto pressing, button pressing effects having different playability are suitably executed in the state where the auto pressing function is executed (while the frame button 22 is held down for a long time). It becomes possible.

Next, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 188. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that a press count counter 223r is provided, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The press count counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution (display) of the slot effect. The press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 in the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press valid period has arrived (FIG. 189). (See S6108). Then, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2 or less, the next rotation effect setting is executed, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Further, the button pressing valid period is set based on the value of the pressing count counter 223r.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732). The slot effect setting process 2 (S1732) displays an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the slot is rotated / stopped is executed three times as the slot effect, and stops the rotation of the slot based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Perform processing. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed early so that the number of rotations in each rotation effect is the same, processing is performed so as to slow down the rotation speed in the next rotation effect. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow, and it becomes easy to align the target symbols.

In the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect is being executed (displayed) by determining whether or not the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is on (S6101).

In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is off (S6101: No), it means that the slot effect is not executed (displayed), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101 when it is determined that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), the slot effect is being executed (displayed), so the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 (1). S6102), the process proceeds to S6103.

In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing valid period (S6103). Specifically, the button press valid period is set by the process of S6115 described later. For example, when the press count counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is set. When the value is from 2001 to 8000 (that is, from the start of the slot effect to the elapse of 2001 ms until the elapse of 8000 ms), the button pressing valid period is set.

If it is determined in the process of S6103 that the button is not valid (S6103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button is valid (S6103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S6104 (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for stopping the rotating symbol in the rotation effect is set (S6105). , S6108.

If it is determined in the process of S6104 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the button pressing valid period (S6106). Specifically, when the press count counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000.

If it is determined in the process of S6106 that it is not the end timing of the button pressing valid period (S6106: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6106, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button pressing valid period (S6106: Yes), the display slot stop effect command is used to forcibly stop the rotating symbol in the rotation effect. Is set (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the process of S6108, the press count counter 223r is added by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

In the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), it means that the rotation effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times, so the next rotation effect is performed. The process proceeds to S6113 for setting.

In the process of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is the slot. The value of the effect counter 223p is 28,000, and the remaining time is obtained by subtracting the value of the current slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p, which is the upper limit of the time.

Set the display slot effect command of the display mode (S6114), which is the rotation speed of 10 rotations with the remaining time calculated in the processing of S6113, and set the button press valid period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r. (S6115), this process is terminated.

Specifically, in the processing of S6115, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p becomes a value of 12001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period, and the press count counter 223r. When the value of is 2, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22001 to 18000 is set as the button pressing valid period.

On the other hand, in the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed (or the button press is valid) in the final rotation effect of the slot effect. (The period has passed). In this case, the display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the press count counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), and the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112). This process ends.

As described above, in the first modification, in the slot effect in which the rotation effect is performed three times, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and the target pattern is used. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes high, and it becomes difficult to align the target symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, and the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

In addition to the above-mentioned ones, the short length of the button pressing effective period to be set next may be changed according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the button pressing effective period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period may be extended in the next rotation effect. As a result, since the button pressing period is set longer in the next rotation effect, even if the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, there are many timings to stop the target symbol (that is, the chance increases). Can be given, so the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

<Second modification of the second control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modification, when the frame button 22 is pressed automatically, a pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, as opposed to the second control example described above. When the button 22 is pressed non-automatically, the difference is that the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a frame button control device 290 that outputs a pressing signal based on the pressing of the frame button 22. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second modification, the frame button control device 290 described above is in a state of being automatically pressed based on a predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for 2 seconds). During the automatic pressing, the pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals without operating the frame button 22. Therefore, even when the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, and the operation burden on the player can be reduced. Can be done.

<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the second control example>
First, the electrical configuration in the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration in the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second modification via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected by the processing of the MPU 291 and the detection result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, and stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Here, the details of the RAM 293 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an auto-pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (a state in which a pressing signal is output at regular intervals regardless of whether the frame button 22 is pressed), and is on. If is, it is determined that the auto-pressed state (auto-pressed), and if it is off, it is determined that the auto-pressed state (non-auto-pressed).

This auto-pressing flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 2 seconds or longer in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). The auto-pressed flag 293a is referred to in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) when it is determined whether or not the auto-pressed state is being pressed.

The pressing time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time when the frame button 22 is pressed. The pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is being pressed. Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the value of the press time counter 293b is added by 1 every 1 ms when the frame button 22 is being pressed. Then, when the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the auto pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is completed.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time while the auto is pressed. This period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, when the auto-pressing state is in progress). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms while the auto is pressed. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c is counted, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button pressing signal is voice lamp controlled. It is transmitted to the device 113. Since the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches the predetermined value (1000), the button press signal is signaled every time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, every time 1 second elapses). Will be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

By changing the above-mentioned predetermined value, it is possible to change the interval at which the button pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during auto pressing. For example, the predetermined value may be 500 or 2000, and the timing of changing may be the timing when a predetermined operation (long press again, repeated hits, other button presses, etc.) is executed, or the effect. It may be the timing when is switched. The timing at which the effect is switched may be notified from the voice lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<Regarding the control process by the frame button control device in the second modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the control process executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the MPU 291 (every 1 ms in this modification). This timer interrupt process is a process for detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating the pressing of the frame button 22 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. When the long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the auto press function is executed, and the press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (1 second in this modification). It is a process to do.

The timer interrupt process first determines whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S6201 (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressing time counter 293b is added by 1 (S6202), and the added value of the pressing time counter 293b is added. It is determined whether or not it is 2000 (S6203).

In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), it means that 2 seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed. Therefore, the auto-pressing flag 293a Determines whether or not is on (S6204).

In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), it means that the auto-pressing function is not executed. Therefore, in order to start the execution of the auto-pressing function, The auto-pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. Since the pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S6206 and the effect based on the reception of the pressing signal is executed by the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the automatic pressing is set for the player. It can be easily recognized. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to outputting a pressing signal, but notifies that the automatic pressing is set, and based on the notification, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set. You may.

On the other hand, in the process of S6204, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6204: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so that the execution of the auto-pressing function is terminated. In addition, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to off (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6212.

If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the press time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the processes of S6204 to S6207 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6212.

If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208).

In the processing of S6208, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output. The process proceeds to S6209 for output. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 by the processing of S6208 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms), it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, the frame button 22 is short-term due to noise or the like. Even if it is determined that the button has been pressed for a while (for example, 1 ms), the press of the frame button 22 can be accurately detected.

The process of S6209 determines whether or not the value of the press time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the processing of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is normally pressed, so that the pressing signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the press time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), it means that the frame button 22 is pressed and held, so the processing of S6210 is skipped. , S6211.

In the process of S6211, the value of the press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to the process of S6212.

In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). In the process of S6212, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212: Yes), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so the value of the period counter 293c is added by 1. (S6213), it is determined whether or not the value of the added period counter 293c is a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) or more (S6214).

When it is determined in the process of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the voice lamp control device 113 ( S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

If it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off in the processing of S6212 (S6212: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is not executed. Therefore, the processing of S6213 to S6216 is executed, and this is performed. End the process.

As described above, in the second modification of the second control example, the auto pressing function can be switched on and off by executing a predetermined operation (holding down the frame button 22). Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the frame button 22 in order to execute the auto pressing function, so that the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

In the second modification, the pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the automatic pressing function is started. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic pressing is set. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to outputting a pressing signal, but notifies that the automatic pressing is set, and based on the notification, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set. You may.

In the second modification, even when the auto pressing function is executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 is detected and the pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, even when the auto-pressing function is executed, the player can arbitrarily operate the frame button 22 to change the effect mode, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. .. Not limited to this, when the auto pressing function is executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected. Further, when the auto-pressing function is executed, the execution of the auto-pressing function may be terminated based on the fact that the frame button 22 is normally pressed. As a result, the execution of the auto pressing function can be easily terminated, and a gaming machine that is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

In the second modification, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the MPU process, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the voltage of the capacitor exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 5 V), it is determined that the capacitor has been pressed for a long time. You may.

<Other production examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be described. The same points as those used in the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Mission production>
In each of the above-described control examples, when a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the voice lamp control device 113, the mission effect is executed. This mission effect is an effect of giving a privilege (for example, a big hit) when a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect content executed thereafter satisfies the command.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a command content (first command information) and a commander (second command information). Then, the past command display can be stored as a command history. With this configuration, when the mission effect is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display will be displayed at the same time. Here, based on the relationship between the command display of this time and the command display of the past (previous), it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not the mission production of this time is successful.

Specifically, if the command display (first command information and second command information) of this time and the previous time are the same, it is suggested that the mission production of this time is likely to succeed, and if they are different, this time. It suggests that the mission production is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, if a part of the command display matches (for example, the commander who is the second command information matches), it is set to suggest that if the mission production progresses to the second half, the possibility of success is high. To.

In this way, since the contents of the past mission production and the current mission production are overlapped so that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the same production is repeatedly executed and the player gets tired of the game. It is possible to turn an easy situation into a situation where you can expect a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Furthermore, in this mission production, for example, when a command "Gather people" is displayed as the command content, if the result of the production is "0 people", the command fails, and "1 person" to "100 people" When the command is successful and the command is successful, the command achievement rate (for example, "1 person" is 1% of the command achievement rate and "100 people" is 100% of the command achievement rate) is set. By setting this command achievement rate, it is possible to set the degree of expectation of a big hit in more detail. In addition, if the command content of the first command information is the same and the commander of the second command information is different between the current command display and the previous command display, the production is configured so that the command achievement rate is inherited. Has been done. As a result, even if the effect of the same command content is repeatedly executed, the content of the effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the above description, the effect is executed based on the previous command display history and the current command display. For example, a means capable of storing a plurality of command displays displayed in the past is provided, and the effect is increased. A selection means for the player to select an arbitrary command display is provided. Even if the command display selected by the selection means is displayed on the display screen (third symbol display device 81) and the effect is executed based on the instruction display selected by the selection means and the instruction display this time. Good. In addition, the information corresponding to the past instruction display is displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 with a two-dimensional code so that the player can acquire the information, and the acquired information is used for the next time the game is executed. By making it possible to input to 10, the command instruction executed in the past (for example, the previous day) may be taken over and displayed.

<Chance up production>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, in order to show the degree of expectation that the changing special symbol has won the jackpot, a partial display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display or reach). The effect of changing the color pattern of the title name display, background color, etc.) to a different color pattern is executed. As a result, when a similar effect is executed, the player pays close attention to the effect while expecting which color pattern will be displayed in a part of the effect, and the player gets tired of the game early. It suppresses that.

However, since the above-mentioned partial display mode is displayed at various timings in one effect (for example, 60 seconds), the player does not notice the change in the partial display mode or sees the effect in anticipation. As a result, there was a problem that the player felt dissatisfied because the color pattern with high expectation of the jackpot was not displayed.

On the other hand, in each of the above-described control examples, when the effect is executed, the color pattern advance notification means capable of notifying the player in advance of the color pattern displayed in the current effect is provided. As a result, the player can grasp the color pattern provided in this production in advance.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a specific color pattern is automatically selected from a plurality of displayed color patterns as the color pattern advance notification means. As a result, the color pattern with a high expectation of big hit is displayed among the plurality of color patterns once displayed, and the color pattern is selected by the color pattern advance notification means in the expectation that the color pattern will be selected. It is possible to pay close attention to the production to be performed.

Further, the color pattern advance notification means can notify a plurality of color patterns based on the number of changes in the partial display mode described above. As a result, when a plurality of colors and patterns with high expectation for big hits are notified in advance, the player only has to pay close attention to the production, and suppresses the distrust of the game caused by having excessive expectations for each production. be able to.

Further, since the plurality of partial display modes described above have different jackpot expectations when they are changed to the same color pattern, which partial display mode is the color pattern previously notified by the color pattern advance notification means. You can watch the production while enjoying whether it is used for.

<Hold change production>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, an area (hereinafter referred to as a hold display area) in which information indicating the number of rights for executing the change of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as hold number information) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (Hereinafter referred to as execution information) and an area (hereinafter referred to as execution display area) in which information corresponding to the special symbol whose fluctuation is currently executed (hereinafter referred to as execution information) is displayed are displayed. Then, the so-called hold look-ahead effect, in which the display mode of the hold symbol representing the hold number information displayed in the hold display area by the number of symbols is changed based on the pre-read information of the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol. Is configured to be executable.

Conventionally, this hold look-ahead effect has been configured to change the display mode of the hold symbol when a new change of the special symbol is started. In this case, it was possible to entertain the player with the hold look-ahead effect if the hold number information of a predetermined number or more is displayed, but if the hold number is small, the effect is sufficiently entertained. There was a problem that it could not be done.

On the other hand, in the hold change effect of each control example described above, the time required for the hold symbol to move to the execution display area is used based on the pre-read information of the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol. The display mode of the reserved symbol is changed. As a result, even if the number of reserved symbols is small, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the reserved symbol at least by using the time until the change of the currently executed special symbol is completed.

Specifically, the hold symbol that is the target of the hold change (for example, the hold symbol displayed in hold 3) is changed to a character, and the hold symbol changed to that character is displayed in a predetermined hold display area (for example, hold 2 is displayed). When it is displayed (shifted) in the area to be displayed), the hold change effect is started (for example, the battle effect). Then, the longer the time until the pending change effect is completed, the more the pending change progresses.

That is, when the reserved symbol that is the target of the pending change shifts to the pending 2, the length of the pending change effect is based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed and the fluctuation time of the reserved symbol displayed on the pending 1. Is determined. As a result, even if the hold change effect is started in the state of hold 1, if the change time of the special symbol currently being changed is long, the hold change effect can sufficiently proceed with the hold change effect.

Further, the end of the hold change effect may be the timing when the hold symbol to be the hold change effect shifts to the execution display area, or may end before that.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, when the reserved symbol to be the pending change effect shifts to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for the look-ahead effect of the hold symbol displayed in the hold display area in the state where the hold symbol whose character image is the target of the hold change effect is displayed in the execution display area.

Specifically, the character whose pending symbol has changed, which is the target of the pending change effect, and the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area execute the above-mentioned battle effect. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol changes to a character while the number of pending symbols is small, that character is used for the later pending change effect of the reserved symbol, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In the above-mentioned battle production, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the combination of the characters to be confronted. Further, it is preferable to set so that the frequency of the hold look-ahead effect and the expected degree of the jackpot differ depending on the type of the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area.

<Button effect setting>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as a variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 114, a plurality of frame button operation effects in which the frame button 22 can be operated can be executed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set in each of the above-mentioned control examples (for example, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing). , The effect of notifying the player of the expectation of the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol, which is changing this time, by changing the color emitted by the plurality of light emitting units provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the voice lamp. By repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the fluctuation pattern set by the control operation 114, the decoration mode can be changed, etc.). As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem that the frame button effects are frequently executed and the action of the player to operate the frame button 22 becomes complicated.

On the other hand, a means for determining whether or not a plurality of various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, and a plurality of set frame button operation effects when it is determined that a plurality of frame button operation effects are set. When the interval discriminating means for discriminating the interval of the frame button operation effect and the interval discriminating means for the interval discriminating means make the interval of a plurality of frame button operation effects a predetermined interval, the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled even at the predetermined interval. A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. As a result, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set the period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 so as to straddle the plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated in the operation of the frame button 22.

As the interval determination means described above, specifically, a period during which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and an interval between the plurality of frame button operation effects is set based on the set period. A storage means for storing a combination of items to be discriminated and a combination of frame button operation effects in which the interval at which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed is less than a predetermined amount is provided, and a combination of frame button operation effects stored in the storage means is provided. There is something to determine whether or not is set.

Further, as the above-mentioned frame button operation effect setting means, specifically, a case where the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is set to be extended and a frame button operation executed later. There are cases where the operation validity period of the effect is set to be advanced, and cases where a new frame button operation effect is set.

When the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is set to be extended, the third symbol is displayed in such a manner that the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation valid period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation valid period is predetermined. When the period (2 seconds remaining or 0 seconds remaining) is reached, the display that the operation valid period is extended may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not a new frame button operation effect has been set until just before the frame button operation effect that has been executed earlier ends. The button 22 can be continuously operated, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated in the operation of the frame button 22.

Further, the effect result of the frame button operation effect that has been executed earlier at the timing when the normal operation valid period is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is operated during the extended operation valid period. The display mode of the effect result of the previously executed frame button operation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

When setting the operation validity period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later to be advanced, the frame button operation effect itself to be executed later may be executed ahead of schedule, or the frame button operation effect to be executed later may be executed earlier. May be used as it is, and the operation valid period set ahead of schedule may be used as the preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when the frame button operation effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as the frame button operation effect to be executed later, the degree of the continuous hit operation may be displayed by executing the continuous hit operation during the preparation period. During the preparation period, the auto-striking function can be set to on.

Further, when a new frame button operation effect is set, the frame button operation effect that is not related to the frame button operation effect that is executed first or the frame button operation effect that is executed later is executed.

As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation valid period set in the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. By doing so, since the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated in the operation of the frame button 22.

As a method of setting the frame button operation effect, a plurality of frame button operation effects may be set when one effect is set, or each effect may be executed in close time. The frame button operation effect may be set. For example, it is expected that this special symbol will be a big hit by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 until the fluctuation of the third symbol based on the fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach). The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the degree is displayed by the emission color of a decorative lamp provided on the pachinko machine 10, and when a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) is set, the third symbol is a predetermined dynamic. When a pattern to be a display mode (for example, SP reach) is configured to be selectable from a plurality (for example, three) and a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display modes, 2 The interval at which the two frame button operation effects are executed may be set to a predetermined interval.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the operation is not limited to this, and for example, an operation of providing a proximity sensor that can be operated by the player bringing his / her hand close to it. The player can use the means, an operating means that reacts when the player touches it (detects changes in pressure sensitivity and capacitance), an operation that allows the player to tilt back and forth and left and right, and an operating means that can rotate. Any configuration may be used as long as it can be operated. Further, although the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operating means in the above contents, the operating means may be configured by using a plurality of devices.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned controls, a setting method of pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or longer is used as a setting method for automatically operating the operating means, but the setting method is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined method is used. The operation may be set when the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operating means is operated by a predetermined procedure. Further, a dedicated device for automatically switching to the state in which the operating means is operated may be provided.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 218. In the second control example described above, indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the indicators P1 to P5 are displayed. A point effect in which a specific effect (for example, SP reach) is executed when the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX) and a display mode of each indicator are changed in the point effect. The control of the point display for displaying a predetermined value (for example, a point) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the second control example described above will be described. In this third control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed with respect to the second control example. The difference is that the changed point, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the difference between the point effect executed in this control example and the second control example described above will be described. In the second control example described above, there were two types of modes used for the point effect (“normal mode” and “dice mode”), whereas in this control example, there are four types of modes used for the point effect (FIG. 195). It is different in that it is made (see).

Further, in the second control example described above, points are evenly allocated to each indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the "normal mode", whereas in this control example, the "normal mode A" is used. The difference is that the points are distributed differently according to the lottery result of the special symbol for each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in. Further, in this control example, a detailed description is added about the process related to the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram illustrating each mode used for the point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of the present control example is an effect performed while the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the display mode of the indicator is the same as the point effect executed in the second control example described above. It is a production that notifies the player that a privilege (a production with a high expectation of a big hit or a big hit) is given according to the player.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example is composed of four types of modes: "normal mode A", "normal mode B", "dice mode", and "bingo mode". In each of these modes, different indicators are displayed, and at the time of mode transition executed during point production, the indicators are displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator displayed in the mode before the transition. Is configured to. Specifically, it corresponds to the rabbit in the display mode (for example, "normal mode A") in which it is confirmed that the privilege 2 (for example, the effect with high expectation of big hit) is given before the mode shift of the point effect. When the indicator P1 is the maximum value (MAX) display mode), it is confirmed that the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is also given the privilege 2 (effect with high expectation of big hit) (for example, the display mode). In the "dice mode", the display mode indicating doublet) is displayed.

Specifically, it is confirmed that the display mode displayed by the indicator is given in a plurality of stages (privilege 1 display mode (big hit confirmed display mode), privilege 2 display mode (effect with high jackpot expectation is given). Display mode) and high standard display mode (display mode indicating a high standard state to which one of the benefits is given)) are configured so that they can be discriminated and memorized. The display mode corresponding to the stage of the mode is the initial display mode after the mode transition.

With this configuration, if a mode transition occurs during the point production, the player can easily grasp that the benefits acquired in the previous point production have not been lost, and the point production can be performed. By shifting to a different indicator inside, it is possible to diversify the production and prevent the player from getting bored early.

Here, the details of each mode used for the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 (a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode A" used for the point effect in the third control example. This "normal mode A" has the same display mode as the "normal mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the "normal mode" described above will be described. , Other explanations are omitted.

In the "normal mode A", three indicators P1 to P3 are used as in the "normal mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, unlike the second control example described above, the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to the "hero" is set higher than that of the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to the "rabbit" and the "turtle". .. Specifically, the benefits given to the player when the indicator value reaches the maximum (MAX) are different, and the indicator values P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Kame" are different, respectively. When it reaches the maximum (MAX), it notifies that it will shift to the production (main production) with high expectation of big hit as privilege 2, and when the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to "Brave" reaches the maximum (MAX), it will be as privilege 1. , It is configured to notify that the changing special symbol has won the jackpot.

Further, as a display mode (high standard display mode) indicating a high standard state in which the privilege is almost granted, a display mode in which any of the indicators P1 to P3 shows the sixth stage is set. As a result, when the mode is changed when any of the indicators P1 to P3 is the display mode indicating the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. It will be.

When "normal mode A" is set as the point effect, the effect of displaying "rabbit", "kame", and "hero" is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the content of the main production and the display mode of the indicator in the point production are related to each other, and the main production (third symbol variation production) and the sub production (point production) can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, the "dice mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). FIG. 196 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a “dice mode” used for the point effect in the third control example. This "dice mode" has the same display form as the "dice mode" of the point effect explained in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the above-mentioned "dice mode" will be described. Other explanations will be omitted.

In the "dice mode", two indicators P4 and P5 that imitate the dice are used as in the "dice mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, doublet), the player is set to be given a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). .. Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 show the same number (that is, a doublet display mode) is displayed, as a privilege 2, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is given, and the doublet display mode is given. In the case of "6.6", it is notified that the jackpot has been won as privilege 1.

In the "dice mode", the indicators P4 and P5 imitating the dice are rotated and displayed, and when the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotation display. It does not become a display mode showing numbers (that is, a non-doublet display mode), and a rotation display suggesting whether or not the number to be stopped and displayed increases in the doublet display mode is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-doublet display mode from being stopped and displayed after the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed once, so that the privilege given to the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

Further, in the "dice mode", the case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as the high reference display mode. For example, when shifting to the "dice mode" while the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", the indicator P4 The display mode is fixed to "5", and only the indicator P5 is rotated and displayed. As a result, even if the mode shift is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Further, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped and displayed at "5", "5.5" is stopped and displayed when the doublet display mode is displayed. Therefore, after the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed, it can be predicted that the doublet display mode "6.6" that notifies that the jackpot has been won is close, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the "dice mode" is set as the point effect, the effect using the dice is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the content of the main production and the display mode of the indicator in the point production are related to each other, and the main production (third symbol variation production) and the sub production (point production) can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, "normal mode B" will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (a). FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode B" used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "normal mode B", one indicator P6 representing the whole as 100% is used, and the display mode of the indicator P6 is a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode indicating 50% or 100%). In some cases, the player is set to be given a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). Specifically, when the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 50% is displayed, the effect with high expectation of a big hit is given as the privilege 2, and the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 100% is displayed. In addition, as privilege 1, it is notified that the jackpot has been won.

Further, in the "normal mode B", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as a high reference display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to "normal mode B" in the state where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in "normal mode A", the transition is performed after the transition. The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to a display mode showing 40%. As a result, even if the mode shift is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Next, the "bingo mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a “bingo mode” used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "bingo mode", a 9-square indicator P7 with numbers 1 to 9 is used, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point effect is erased (designated). The production is performed. Then, when the display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are aligned in a straight line is displayed, the player is set to be given a privilege (privilege 1 and privilege 2).

Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the indicator P7 has two lines aligned is displayed, as a privilege 2, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is given, and it indicates that the indicator P7 has three or more lines aligned. When the display mode is displayed, it is notified that the jackpot has been won as privilege 1.

Further, in the "bingo mode", a display mode indicating that one line of the indicator P7 is aligned is set as a high standard display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to the "bingo mode" in the state where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", the transition is performed after the transition. The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to a high standard display mode indicating that one line is aligned. As a result, even if the mode shift is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

As described above, the indicators used for the point effect in this control example have different display forms (appearance, number) and display modes (display modes for notifying the player to give a privilege). (P1 to P7) are used, and the effect of the monotonous point effect can be enhanced by shifting the mode during the execution of the point effect.

Further, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the point effect after the mode change is executed in the display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode change, so that the player can easily understand the point effect. Can be done.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in a predetermined mode (for example, “normal mode A”), the display mode (for example, indicators P1 to P3) indicating a low reference value with a low expectation that the privilege is given is “4. 4.4 ”is the display mode), but by shifting to a different mode (for example,“ dice mode ”) while the display mode is displayed, the player can display the indicator after the mode shift. Is set to display a display mode (for example, a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4") indicating that a privilege (for example, privilege 2) is granted.

In this way, by shifting the display mode of the indicator indicating that the privilege is given to the player to a different mode, the privilege is given from the display mode showing the low reference value with a low expectation that the privilege is given. It is possible to change to a display mode (or a high standard display mode in which a privilege is given with high expectation) without discomfort.

Further, in the final stage of the point production (for example, the state in which the special symbol is changed three times during the point production), the expectation that the display mode is such that the privilege is given in the current mode is low (for example, "normal mode A"). Even if each indicator P1 to P3 is in a display mode showing a low numerical value in the above, a display mode (or a display mode in which the privilege is given from a display mode showing a low reference value with a low expectation that the privilege is given). Since there is a possibility of shifting to the mode shift to the high standard display mode) in which the privilege is given with high expectation, the player can enjoy the production to the end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point effect in this control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to start from "normal mode A", and the mode transition is executed when it is determined as a result of the mode transition lottery executed during the point effect that the mode shift is performed. (Hereinafter, referred to as the first mode transition). In addition to the mode transition determination described above, the mode transition is executed based on the hit / fail determination result and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter, referred to as the second mode transition).

Furthermore, restrictions (that is, prohibition processing) are set for the mode transition destination based on the result of the hit / miss judgment and the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the point effect is reduced by executing the mode transition. It suppresses the occurrence of situations.

First, in "normal mode A", as shown in FIG. 195, "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode" are set as the transition destinations for the first mode transition, and when the mode transition lottery is won. In, it shifts to the mode set as the migration destination. That is, the "normal mode A" set as the first mode when the point effect is executed is set so as to be able to shift to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

Here, in the case of the display mode for notifying that the first mode transition described above is executed and the display mode before the mode transition gives the privilege 2, the display mode after the mode transition also notifies that the privilege 2 is given. When the display mode is displayed in the display mode and the display mode before the mode transition is the display mode showing the high standard (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in the display mode showing the high standard (high standard display mode). Will be done. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed in the middle of the point effect, the player can be easily notified of the status (display mode) of the indicator.

Further, this "normal mode A" is a "dice mode" in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, "4.4.4") in which all the indicators P1 to P3 have the same display mode as the second mode transition. It is configured so that it can be migrated to. In this case, in the "dice mode" after the mode shift, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same roll (that is, doublet) display mode (for example, "3.3"). In this way, by executing both the first mode transition executed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition executed based on the display mode, the mode transition is executed in various situations in the point production. It becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

In "normal mode A", when the transition condition for transition to the first mode and the transition condition for transition to the second mode are satisfied at the same time, the transition to the second mode is preferentially executed. This is because, in contrast to the first mode transition for enhancing the effect, the second mode transition is likely to be set based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the special symbol is won in the "normal mode A", the transition condition for the transition to the second mode is likely to be satisfied. It is configured in. In other words, the state in which the second mode transition condition is satisfied is a state in which a jackpot can be expected. Therefore, by executing the second mode transition condition in preference to the first mode transition condition, the player can win the jackpot. It is possible to perform a mode transition with expectations.

In this way, in the point production where multiple modes can be transferred, the conditions for satisfying the multiple mode transition conditions are set so that the winning expectation of the jackpot is different, and when multiple mode transition conditions are satisfied at the same time, the jackpot is won. By executing the mode transition based on the establishment of the mode transition condition with the higher expectation of winning, it becomes possible to execute the mode transition during the point production as a production in which the player expects a big hit, and the effect of the production is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

Next, when the mode set during the point production is the "dice mode", the "normal mode A" or the "bingo mode" is set as the first mode transition. That is, it is set not to shift from the "dice mode" to the "normal mode B". This is a preset prohibition process, and the first mode is for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to relate the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition to the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition. Even if the transition condition for transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), the mode transition is not set. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed during the point production, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when shifting from "dice mode" to "normal mode A", the "normal mode A" displayed when shifting from "normal mode A" to "dice mode" in this point production The display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 is set so as not to be lower than the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 (the numerical value of each indicator is not lowered). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the display mode of the mode transition destination can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode shift is executed a plurality of times during one point effect and the mode is changed to the initially set mode again. It should be noted that the number of mode transitions executed during one point effect may be limited (for example, once) so that the mode does not shift to the mode already displayed during one point effect.

When "normal mode B" is set, only "normal mode A" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for the first mode transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), and "normal mode A" is set. When the "bingo mode" is set, only the "normal mode B" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for the first mode transition is satisfied.

As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in this control example is an effect that is easy for the player to understand and has expectations due to a plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes.

In this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and the display mode of the indicator) is set only to "normal mode A", but it may be set in other modes. Good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, or an upper limit (for example, once) may be set for the number of mode transitions executed in one point effect. With this configuration, there is an effect that the effect of mode transition during the point effect can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the display mode of the indicator in the point effect will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of displaying points. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of layers are superimposed and created (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer for displaying a character image of a third symbol variation effect (main effect) among a plurality of layers, and FIG. 198 (b) shows a plurality of layers. Of these, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer for displaying a point image (sub-effect), and FIG. 198 (c) is a composite of a plurality of layers (a layer for displaying a character image and a layer for displaying a point image). It is a schematic diagram which shows the image typically.

As shown in FIG. 198 (a), the layer for displaying the character image is divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small area on which the character is displayed is displayed. (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) and a small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed are determined, and image processing is executed so that the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed is transparent.

Further, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the layer for displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, similarly to the layer for displaying the character image. It is divided, and a point display process for displaying points for all small areas is executed. In this point display process, by receiving a command indicating the number of points output from the voice lamp control device 113, a point image indicating the corresponding number of points is displayed for all the small areas.

Then, by creating an image of each layer, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), only a small area (Dm11) of the character image in which the character is not displayed is combined with the back surface of the layer displaying the character image. The layer for displaying the point image becomes visible, and the point can be displayed at a position that does not interfere with the character image.

By executing the image creation process described above, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when executing the point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, since there is only one small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, one allowable area in which the point can be displayed, the process of transmitting the small area as it is. However, if there are a plurality of small areas in which the character is not displayed, it is advisable to execute the process of selecting one small area from the small areas. For example, the type of the character image (main effect) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character imitating a brave man as a character associated with the point effect indicator) is determined. It is preferable to select one from the allowable areas adjacent to the small area where Dc1) is displayed (in the case of FIG. 198 (a), the small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, Dm32). As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is watching the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

Further, although the point display is made visible to the player by transmitting one of the allowable areas which is a small area in which the character image is not displayed among the layers for displaying the character image, another control method may be used. .. For example, in the image created this time, a small area in which the character is displayed but the character is not displayed later may be determined, and the transparency process may be performed at the timing when the character is no longer displayed in the small area. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time lag between the reception of the command for the point display and the actual display of the points, and the effect of the point display can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the point display is performed based on the movement of the moving character in the third symbol variation effect, the display is related to the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub-effect. The production) can be executed, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

When such a control method is used, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters confront each other is executed, and a ally character (for example, character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. If you do, the points will be displayed, and if the enemy character (for example, character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, the points will not be displayed, or the value will be lower than the points displayed when an ally attacks (numerical value). It is good to display the points (there are few). As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are related to each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

Although the above-described control example is configured to display the same number of points in each small area, different points may be displayed. Further, the point display method described in the second control example described above may be used.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208. First, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205.

FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example has an internal level selection table 222aa, an internal score selection table 222ab, a number of times selection table 222ac, a used score selection table 222ad, and a final, with respect to the ROM 222 in each of the above-mentioned control examples. The difference is that the display mode selection table 222ae, the character selection table 222af, the mode selection table 222ag, and the display form selection table 222ae are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 200A. FIG. 200A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure change is correct, the result of determining whether or not the winning information is currently held and stored, and the value of the effect counter 223f. A table for selecting internal levels. The winning / failing judgment result in the special figure variation this time is judged based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information currently held and stored is output from the main control device 110. Judgment is based on the winning command.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the hit / fail judgment result this time is "hit", the hit / fail judgment result in the hold is "hit", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level is "3". Is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected, the hit / fail judgment result of this time is "hit", and the hit / fail judgment result in the hold is "missing", and the effect is produced. If the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "missing", the result of the hit / fail judgment in the hold is "hit", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, the hit / fail judgment result of this time is "missing", and the winning / failing judgment result in the hold is "missing", and the effect counter 223f If the value is "0-149", the internal level "1" is selected, and if the value is "150-198", the internal level "2" is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is set to a high value according to the advantageous state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the game (for example, the state in which the jackpot is won). It is configured in. By providing an index (internal level) according to the game state in this way and executing an effect based on the index, it is easy to set the degree of expectation that the game state will be in an advantageous state for each effect to be executed. be able to.

Next, the details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (b). FIG. 200B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table referred to when selecting an internal score used when executing a point effect based on the internal level and the value of the effect counter 223f. Is.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level is selected. When the value of is "2" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and when the value is "100 to 198", "6" is selected as the internal score. .. Further, when the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal score is "4", and when the value is "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". Is selected.

As described above, in this control example, the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the internal level value set according to the gaming state, so that the player feels expectation. It is possible to perform a point effect that gives.

Next, the number-of-times selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (a). FIG. 201A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), the number-of-time selection table 222ac1 and the number-of-time selection table 222ac2 for hitting are set in the number-of-times selection table 222ac. The number-of-times selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of changes in the special symbol in which the point effect is continuously executed). Different selection tables are referred to depending on the winning / failing judgment result or the winning / failing judgment result for the winning information stored on hold.

FIG. 201 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit count selection table 222ac1. The hit number selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of points effect to be executed when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the point effect ends when the special symbol that hits the hit / fail judgment result changes. The number of point productions is selected. Specifically, if the result of determining whether or not the special symbol change is correct is correct, the number of point effects is "1 time", which is executed after the special symbol change after one rotation (that is, after the end of the special symbol change this time). If the hit / fail judgment result of the hold memory) is a hit, "2 times" is selected as the number of times of the point effect, and if the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol change after 2 rotations is a hit, "3 times" is selected.

In this way, by setting the number of points production based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that becomes a hit is executed, it is possible to suppress that the winning game is started in the middle of the point production, and the point production can be performed. The effect of the production can be enhanced.

FIG. 201 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment number selection table 222ac2. This loss count selection table 222ac2 is executed when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong (that is, when the hit / fail judgment result of this special symbol change is not a hit and the win / fail judgment result corresponding to the winning information stored on hold is not a hit). This is a table for selecting the number of points to be produced, and the number of points to be produced is selected based on the number of winning information held and stored (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved balls).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "0", "-" is set as the number of point effects. This is to prevent the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command to execute the point effect. With such a configuration, the hit / fail judgment result is out of order, and further, it is suppressed that the point effect that can be executed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuations is executed in the state where the number of reserved balls is "0". Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect to be executed. In this control example, the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, and the point effect is not executed when the number of reserved balls is "0". However, other configurations may be used, for example. , The point effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (10%).

When the number of reserved balls is "1", the number of reserved balls is "2", and when the number of reserved balls is "2", the number of reserved balls is "3" and the number of reserved balls is "3". In the case of "", "4" is set as the number of point effects. In this way, by selecting the number of points effect using the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, the point effect when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong and the point effect when the hit / fail judgment result is hit It is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated by the number of points produced.

In this control example, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the number of point effects is selected based on the timing when the special symbol change is executed, and when the hit / miss judgment result is wrong, the hit / fail judgment result is selected. Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the point effect when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the number of reserved balls may be set as the maximum number of points effect, and the number of times may be selected by lottery within that range. With this configuration, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

Next, the usage score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. 202A. FIG. 202A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the used score selection table 222ad. The used score selection table 222ad is for selecting the score to be used at each time of the point effect, and as shown in FIG. 202 (a), the used score selection table 222ad is the number of points effect (remaining number of times). And the remaining score of the internal score, the score to be used is selected.

Specifically, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "5", the usage score is used. When "2" is selected and the remaining score is "6", "3" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the used score. Further, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "3" and the remaining score is "3", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "4", the usage score is "2". , If the remaining score is "5", "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "6", "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", then "4" is selected. , "-" Is selected as the usage score.

Further, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "3", the usage score is "2". , If the remaining score is "4", the used score is "3", if the remaining score is "5", the used score is "4", and if the remaining score is "6", the used score is used. When "5" is selected as the score and "7" is the remaining score, "-" is selected as the used score. Further, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "2", the usage score is "2". , If the remaining score is "3", "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "4", "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "5", then "4" is selected. If the remaining score is "5" and the remaining score is "6", "6" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", "7" is selected as the used score.

In this way, by selecting the score to be used in the point effect executed during this special symbol change based on the remaining number of points effect and the remaining score, the number of times the point effect continues (the number of changes in the special symbol). ) Is suppressed from being grasped by the player in advance.

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. 202 (b). FIG. 202B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), in the final display mode selection table 222ae, the final first display mode selection table 222ae1, the final second display mode selection table 222ae2, the final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and the final fourth display The aspect selection table 222ae4 is set.

The final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point effect, and when the point effect is executed, the final display mode of each mode is displayed. It is configured to display the final display mode corresponding to the mode selected in advance and set in the final stage of the point effect (variation of the last special symbol in which the point effect is executed).

FIG. 203A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. The final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode A", and is set to the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. , In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.7" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are "4.4". The display mode indicating ".4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.7.7" is selected. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol fluctuation this time is a big hit, is selected, the final display mode is higher in value than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2). The final display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which the score is given has the maximum value is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.6.5" is selected, and ". In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.4" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are "5.4.7". In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the effect is produced. When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "6.3.1" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the indicators P1 to P3 are displayed. The display mode indicating "5.5.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.2" is selected, and "150 to 198". In the case of, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected, and "50" is selected. In the case of "~ 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.5.1" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are "5.4.3". In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the degree of change in the display mode of each indicator in the "normal mode A" is made different. This makes it possible to increase the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode in which a specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a high value.

In the point effect of this control example, the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage includes the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, and the number of points used this time. Since the indicator is selected according to the score, the indicator having a high numerical value in the final display mode (the closer the display mode is to the maximum value) tends to increase in value in the middle stage. Therefore, by grasping the rising state of the indicator in the middle stage of the point effect, the final display mode can be predicted, so that the point effect can be continuously watched.

FIG. 203B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "dice mode", and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. The final display mode of each of the indicators P4 and P5 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected, and " In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4" is selected. A mode is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. That is, when the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is won as a big hit, is selected, it is the display mode of the indicator in which a high value score is given as the final display mode. "6.6" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.3" is selected, and "50 to" In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.2" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 0". In the case of "49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.2" is selected. In the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicators P4 and P5 are "1.1". The display mode indicating "" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and "50 to 99" are selected. In the case of "", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the combination of the display modes of each indicator in the "dice mode" is doublet according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference whether it is doublet or not.

FIG. 204 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. The final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode B", and is set to the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "100%" is selected, and "150 to 198" is selected. In the case of "", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected. That is, when the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is won as a big hit, is selected, it is the display mode of the indicator in which a high value score is given as the final display mode. "100%" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and "50 to 149" is selected. In the case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected, and the internal score is "5". When the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the indicator P6 is "60". The display mode indicating "%" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicator P6 is "80". The display mode indicating "%" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "40%" is selected, and when it is "50 to 99". Is selected, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “50%” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “60%” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”. The display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of the indicator in the "normal mode B" is finally set according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference in how far it rises.

Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. 205. The character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point effect is executed in the "normal mode A", and is made to appear to suggest an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3. It is a table for selecting a character (a mini character for sub-effects (see FIG. 163)).

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", the character is "hero". "Kame" is selected as the character. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol change this time is a big hit, is selected, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes, so the character "hero" Is set so that it is easy to select.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 149", as the character. When "Rabbit" is selected and "150 to 198", "Kame" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". Is selected as a character, "Brave" is selected, "Rabbit" is selected as a character in the case of "50 to 99", and "Kame" is selected as a character in the case of "100 to 198".

Further, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 198", "Rabbit" is selected as the character. "Kame" is selected.

In this way, by selecting a character suggesting an indicator whose display mode changes from the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the displayed character can be used this time. It is possible to predict whether or not the point effect of is the point effect to be executed when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

If the display mode of the indicator is changed in the middle stage of the point effect in which the "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. There is. As a result, it is possible to associate the display of the character with the change in the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 199. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during the point effect. This mode selection table 222ag is referred to when it is determined in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) that the mode transition flag 223ai is on (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212) (S6406 in FIG. 212).

In this mode selection table 222ag, the mode of the transition destination is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode in which the prohibition is applied is set so as not to be selected as the mode transition destination. As a result, it is possible to prevent mode transition between modes in which it is difficult to find a relationship between the display modes of the indicators displayed corresponding to each mode.

The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode transition destination displayed at the time of mode transition. The display mode selection table 222ah is referred to when the display mode is determined in the display mode selection process (S6408 of FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 of FIG. 213).

In this display form selection table 222ah, whether or not to change the display form to the "high expectation form" is selected based on the internal score set in the current point effect and the value of the effect counter. This "high expectation form" is a display form for notifying the player that the point effect this time is a point effect with a high expectation of a big hit.

Specifically, it is a display form in which the outer shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)". .. It is advisable to set common contents for each indicator (P1 to P7) in this "high expectation form". As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the "highly expected form" is displayed regardless of which mode is used for any point effect.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display form only for the indicator displayed when the mode transition is executed, the player is expected to execute the mode transition during the point production. It has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the RAM 223 in the present control example has an internal level storage area 223aa, a continuous effect start flag 223ab, an effect count counter 223ac, a score information storage area 223ad, and a remaining score with respect to the RAM 223 in the second control example. The difference is that the information storage area 223ae, the display information storage area 223af, the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, the mode information storage area 223ah, the mode transition flag 223ai, and the character information storage area 223aj are added, and the other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter updates the value independently. However, the description thereof is omitted and the effect counter 223f is used as a general term. do. Therefore, even when the process of referring to the value of the effect counter 223f is executed at a plurality of places of one control processing routine, different counter values are actually acquired in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In the internal level storage area 223aa, an internal level determined based on the hit / fail determination result and the internal level selection table 222aa is set in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211). Then, the set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and when the point effect is completed in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210). If determined (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored internal level information is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether the point effect, which is a continuous effect, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point effect is being executed, and when it is off, the point effect is being executed. Indicates that it has not been executed. This continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) from the next time onward, it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) to be executed when the continuous effect is started. (S6301 in FIG. 210), when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), it is set to off (S6313 in FIG. 210).

The effect count counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of continuous effects (point effects) executed this time. The effect count counter 223ac is set with a value corresponding to the determined number of effects in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and is set in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209). Each time the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) to be executed is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the effect count counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when determining whether the point effect is a continuous effect (S2051 in FIG. 209), and the point effect setting process (see FIG. 209). (See FIG. 210), which is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous effect ends (S6307 of FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the score to be used in this variation is determined. (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected in the above-mentioned internal score selection table 222ab and the usage score selected in the above-mentioned use score selection table 222ad. In the score information storage area 223ad, the determined internal score is set in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and is determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). The usage score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score (set) stored in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when the final display mode is determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the character is displayed. It is referred to when determining (S6356 in FIG. 211), and is referred to when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). Further, the used score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when updating the remaining score information in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214). It is referred to when determining the display mode when the value of the effect count counter 223ac is larger than 1 (S6503: No in FIG. 214) (S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the used score already used from the internal score set in the continuous effect (point effect) executed this time. The remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the score to be used in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is completed (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point effect, which is a continuous effect, and the display mode displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is completed (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). The display information storage area 223af is configured so that the display mode for modes other than the currently set mode can be set, and the indicator can be smoothly displayed even when the mode transition is executed during the point production. It is configured so that it can be displayed.

The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect in order to output them to the display control device 114 with one display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag was determined by temporarily storing information regarding the determined display mode (indicator color, pattern, etc.) in the display mode change process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information on the display mode (display mode displayed after the mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and information on the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is temporarily stored (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214) and is referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information on various effects is initialized (S6505 in FIG. 214). S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. In the mode transition process (see FIG. 212), the mode information storage area 223ah is updated with information corresponding to the mode after the transition when the mode transition is performed (S6409 in FIG. 212), and a display background command is set. It is referred to at the time (S6410 in FIG. 212), and is referred to when the display mode is determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point effect is preset to start from the "normal mode A", when the point effect is executed, the information corresponding to the "normal mode A" is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah. Is stored.

The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether the mode transition condition (condition for establishing the first mode transition) is satisfied during the point effect which is a continuous effect, and when it is on, the mode transition condition is satisfied. If it is off, it means that the mode transition condition is not satisfied. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to on (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is a mode transition in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6509: Yes in FIG. 214), and the mode transition is set. In the process (see FIG. 212), it is referred to for determining whether the mode transition condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is turned off when the process related to the mode transition (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed. Set.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in this special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). After that, a lottery for whether or not to execute the mode transition is performed (S6509 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined to execute the mode transition (winning the mode transition lottery) (S6509: Yes in FIG. 214), the mode The transition flag 223ai is set to on. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (S6406 in FIG. 212), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), the processing related to the mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

That is, in the point effect in this control example, the mode is changed when the next special symbol change is executed. Therefore, for example, the lottery for whether or not to execute the mode change is performed this time. By configuring the lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by, the player is made to recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol change, and the mode shifts to the next special symbol change. Can be expected to be executed.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information related to the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in the character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to suggest which of the indicators P1 to P3 the display mode changes in the state where the "normal mode A" is set. Is. In this character information storage area 223aj, information about the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set, and when the display point effect command is set in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). In this control example, only the "normal mode A" is configured to display a character for suggesting whether the display mode of the indicator changes, but whether the display mode of the indicator changes for each mode. The effect suggesting the above may be executed, or the character information may be used to suggest whether or not to shift to the mode. In this case, for example, when a mode other than the "normal mode A" is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect shifts to the "normal mode A".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208, the differences in the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example from the above-described control examples will be described. The same parts as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example generates a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to a point is described on the back side of the image in one frame. It is different in that it is set as. By generating the drawing list in this way, it is possible to create the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 3 in the third control example. In the variation display setting process 3, the processes S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 in the second control example described above.

When the processing of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (0), it is set (S2051: No). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command executes the point effect (S2052). Here, if it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2051, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, when the point effect is already being executed, S2053 is not performed without the process of S2052. Move to the processing of. This prevents a situation in which a new point effect is executed while the point effect is being executed.

Further, in the processing of S2052, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command does not execute the point effect (S2052: No), and when the processing of S2053 is completed, the fluctuation in the second control example described above is performed. Similar to the display setting process 2, the processes S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). The point effect setting process 2 (S2053) is for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. It is a process.

In the point effect setting process 2 (S2053), it is first determined whether or not the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined to be off (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on (S6302), and the point effect initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the point effect which is the continuous effect has already been executed, so the point effect The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6304.

Here, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) executes the point effect, and various cases where the point effect is executed are executed. This is the process for executing the initial settings.

When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined with reference to the internal level selection table 222aa, and the internal level storage area 223aa is set (S6351). As a result, it is determined whether or not the point effect executed this time is a point effect that leads to the hit of a special symbol.

Next, the internal score used in the point effect executed this time is determined by referring to the internal score selection table 222ab based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa in S6351 and the value of the effect counter 223f. , Set in the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting the final display mode in the point effect and setting the character as described above. It is also used to set the score used each time the special symbol changes while the point effect continues, and to set the remaining score.

When the processing of S6352 is completed, the number of productions of the current point effect is determined based on the number of times selection table 222ac (S6353), and a value corresponding to the determined number of productions is set in the production number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number-of-times selection table 222ac refers to different tables depending on whether the hit / fail determination result is a hit or a miss.

Specifically, when the winning information corresponding to the hold storage executed after three rotations is a hit, the winning number selection table 222ac1 is referred to, and "4" is determined as the number of effects. Then, 4 is set in the effect number counter 223ac as a value corresponding to the effect number "4". The value of the effect count counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is executed, and is decremented until the counter value becomes “0”.

Next, the display mode of each indicator finally displayed in the current point effect is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, and the display information storage area 223af is used. Set (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to the four modes (“normal mode A”, “dice mode”, “normal mode B”, and “bingo mode”) that shift during the point production. Therefore, in this process, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. As a result, it is possible to display an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score regardless of the mode in which the point production ends.

When the processing of S6355 is completed, the character to be used when the mode of the point effect is set to "normal mode A" is determined based on the internal score set by the processing of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and the character information. The storage area is set to 223aj (S6356), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most modes including the final display mode of the point effect executed this time are set. By setting the mode of the point effect in advance in this way, it is possible to advance the mode of the point effect in the middle stage according to the final display mode, and it is a suitable effect that suppresses giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be executed.

In this control example, the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode. For example, the final display mode is set only for the indicators related to the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given. However, the display mode of other indicators may be set at random. As a result, the display mode of each indicator in the point effect can be made more diverse, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In this case, it is advisable to execute the prohibition processing so that the notification of giving the privilege that the randomly set display mode is not actually given is not given. As a result, it is possible to perform a point effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, the internal level is set based on the hit / fail judgment result when the point effect is executed, but the internal level based on the hit / miss judgment result is always set by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It may be. With this configuration, the internal level can be used when setting the production mode of the production other than the point production, and there is an effect that the production corresponding to the game state of the special symbol can be easily set. is there.

Further, in this control example, the winning / failing judgment result is determined by referring not only to the special symbol executed this time but also the winning information stored on hold, but the winning / failing is determined only based on the lottery result of the special symbol executed this time. The determination result may be determined and the internal level may be set.

Return to FIG. 210 to continue the description. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is completed, the mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode transition process (S6304), a process of determining whether to shift to the mode during the point effect and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode is changed are executed.

Here, the mode transition process (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process (S6304). In the point effect in this control example, when it is determined that the mode shifts as a result of a predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214) described later), the mode shift flag 223ai is turned on. It has two mode transition conditions, one is a mode transition to (when set to), and the other is a mode transition based on the set mode, the current display mode, and the number of internal scores.

In this way, by executing the mode transition randomly performed by lottery and the mode transition performed when the mode transition condition (for example, the display mode) is satisfied, the mode executed during the point production is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, when there is a high possibility that the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is doublet in "normal mode A". It is configured to shift to the "dice mode" when getting doublet ("2.2.2" or "4.4.4"). This is a situation in which it is difficult to give benefits that are advantageous to the player in "normal mode A" (for example, notification that a production with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed, notification that a jackpot has been won), that is, , Even if the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 have not reached the maximum value, when the display mode is a predetermined display mode (doublet display mode), a privilege advantageous to the player is likely to be given. This is to make it a state. As a result, even in a situation where the display mode of the indicator is not good in the point production (for example, in the case of "normal mode A", the point is not increased), there is a privilege that the player is advantageous by the mode transition. Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation given, it is possible to entertain the player to the end.

Further, in this control example, when the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 is doublet in the "normal mode A", the privilege that the display mode of the doublet is advantageous to the player is given to the "dice mode". Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode transition.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 212. When the mode transition process (S6304) is executed, first, the mode information currently set is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is "normal mode A". (S6402). When it is determined that the currently set mode is "normal mode A" (S6402: Yes), then the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is "2.2. It is determined whether it is "2" or "4.4.4" (S6403).

In the process of S6403, if it is determined that the current display mode is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is "6" or more. If it is determined (S6404) and it is determined that the score is "6" or more (S6404: Yes), the "dice mode" is set (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, in the process of S6404, if it is determined that the value is not "6" or more ("5" or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to off (S6411), and this process ends. To do.

Further, in the process of S6402, when it is determined that the currently set mode is not "normal mode A" (S6402: No), or in the process of S6403, the current display mode is "2.2.2". If it is determined that it is not "4.4.4" (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

This mode transition flag 223ai is a flag set in the point effect mode setting process (S6305) described later, and when this mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON, the next point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is set. ) In the mode transition process (S6304 in FIG. 212), the mode transition is executed.

If it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, in the process of S6406, if it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to on (set to off) (S6409: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the process of S6407 will be described. In this mode selection table 222ag, the mode of the transition destination is selected based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. Note that this mode transition is provided with a prohibition for limiting the mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, when the "dice mode" is set, the mode is not shifted to the "normal mode B". It is set so that the mode is not changed to the "dice mode" when the "bingo mode" is set.

This prohibition processing is for suppressing the display mode of the indicator from being changed by shifting to the mode during the point effect, which makes the effect difficult for the player to understand. With this configuration, the advantage of mode transition in point production (the point that the player can have expectations until the end of the production by changing the display mode of the indicator according to the mode transition) is utilized. However, it is possible to suppress the demerit (the point that the display mode of the indicator changes based on the mode transition, which makes the effect difficult for the player to understand).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 212. When the process of S6405 or the process of S6407 is completed, the display mode change process (S6408) is executed. This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition.

Next, this display mode change process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode change process (S6408). This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode transition based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition, and the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is predetermined. (A display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given and a display mode that approximates the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given), and the determination result The display mode after the mode transition is set based on.

When the display mode change process (S6408) is executed, the display form is first determined based on the display form selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). The display form selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after the mode transition based on the values of the internal score set in the current point effect and the effect counter 223f. As a result, when the mode is changed in the point effect, the player can pay attention not only to the display form of the indicator after the mode change but also to the display form (color, pattern), and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. ..

Further, even when the mode transition is executed at the beginning of the point effect, that is, in a state where the display mode of the indicator is significantly different from the final display mode, the indicator is displayed based on the internal score set in the point effect. Since the display form is set, it is possible to perform an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit.

When the processing of S6451 is completed, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453). This SP reach correspondence is a display mode for notifying that an effect (SP reach) with a high jackpot expectation is executed. Specifically, in the case of "normal mode A", either of the indicators P1 and P2. In the display mode in which the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), in the case of "dice mode", the indicators P4 and P5 are "doublet (excluding 6.6)", and in the case of "normal mode B". In the display mode in which the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", and in the "bingo mode", the indicator P7 is "two lines established".

In the process of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453: Yes), the SP reach compatible display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454). This process ends. That is, when the display mode before the mode transition is the display mode corresponding to SP reach, the display mode after the mode transition is also set to the display mode corresponding to SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege displayed before the mode transition (notification that SP reach is executed) disappears after the mode transition (display mode not compatible with SP reach is displayed), and the player can suppress the situation. It is possible to carry out a suitable production that does not give dissatisfaction to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is not compatible with SP reach (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode corresponding to the high standard. (S6455). As described above, this high standard is not a display mode in which the display mode of the indicator gives a privilege to the player, but is set as a display mode similar to the display mode.

Specifically, in the case of "normal mode A", the display mode of any of the indicators P1 to P3 is "6", and in the case of "dice mode", the number of the indicator P4 is "5". In the display mode, the indicator P6 is “40%” in the case of “normal mode B”.

With this configuration, even if the mode shift occurs during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is significantly different from the display mode of the indicator displayed in the point effect so far. It is possible to suppress the storage.

For example, in the "normal mode A", when the mode transition is executed while the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates "6" is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard, and the mode shifts to the "bingo mode". Is a display mode indicating that the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition is "1 line is established". Therefore, it is possible to execute the point effect after the mode transition while maintaining the expectation that the privilege before the mode transition is given to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 213. In the process of S6455, when it is determined that the current display mode is a display mode indicating a high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag Is set to (S6456), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the current display mode is not a display mode indicating a high standard (S6455: No), a display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the point effect in this control example, when the mode transition is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed, the display for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the mode, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

Further, the display mode similar to the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode indicating the high reference value is displayed. If this is the case, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating a high reference value. Therefore, when the display mode is such that the player is notified that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode transition is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In this control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given, the display mode is memorized so that it can be discriminated between the high standard and the other two stages, but it is divided into three or more stages. The display mode may be stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition and the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the meaning is the same as the display mode before the mode transition. The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode with, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is displayed based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. This makes it possible to raise the expectation of the player to shift to the mode.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 212. When the display mode change process (S6408 in FIG. 213) is completed, the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is then updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is updated. The display background command corresponding to (S6410) is set, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to off (S6411), and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 210 to continue the description. After finishing the mode transition process (S6304), the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed next. This point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator to be changed in the variable display executed this time.

Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point effect mode setting process (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the effect count counter 223ac are used to refer to the used score selection table 222ad this time. The usage score used for the fluctuation of is determined (S6501).

Then, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated based on the determined usage score (S6502). Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the used score used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new remaining score information.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and when it is determined to be 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, when it is the end of the point effect, the display information storage area 223af Based on the final display mode information set in and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, the final display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, a display point effect command is set based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the usage score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set. The display mode this time is determined based on the final display mode and the current display mode, and is set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), then it is determined whether or not the mode transition is executed (S6509), and if it is determined that the mode transition is present (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no mode transition (S6509: No), the above-described processes S6505 and S6506 are executed and the present process is terminated without setting the mode transition flag 223ai to ON.

Return to FIG. 210 to continue the description. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is completed, the value of the effect count counter 223ac is next subtracted by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac after the subtraction is "0" or less. (S6307). If it is determined that the value is not "0" or less (1 or more) (S6307: No), the point effect is continued, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6307 that the value of the effect count counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), the point effect is finished this time, so the score information storage area 223ad is used. Clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa. (S6312), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control 114 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 215) is different from the above-described second control example in that the point effect-related command process is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3. In the command determination process 3, the processes S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

Then, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the display point effect related command has been received (S2637).

In the process of S2637, when it is determined that the display point effect-related command has not been received (S2637: No), various processes described in the above-mentioned control examples are executed as other command processes (S2614). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point effect-related command has been received (S2637: Yes), the point effect-related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

Next, the point effect-related command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 216 (a). FIG. 216 (a) is a flowchart showing the point effect-related command processing (S2638). This point effect-related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands related to the point effect are output from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the point production related command processing (S2638) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a display point command (S6601), and if it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command The process (S6602) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command process (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603), and if it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), the indicator command processing (S6604) is executed and the display indicator is executed. If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the point command processing (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. 216 (b). FIG. 216 (b) is a flowchart showing the point command process (S6602). This point command process (S6602) executes a process corresponding to the point command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and suggests a change in the display mode of each indicator during the point effect (see FIG. 198). ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the point command processing (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. It is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the point command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, the indicator command process (S6604) executed in the point effect-related command process (see FIG. 216 (a)) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). This indicator command process (S6604) executes a process corresponding to the indicator command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, the effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to the display mode information (for example, the display mode and the set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined. The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6751, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. (S6754). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6755), the point command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a modified example of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 described above will be described. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the point display in the third control example. FIG. 218 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub-effect) among the plurality of layers in the present modification, and FIG. 218 (b) is a plurality of layers in the present modification. FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image in which layers are combined, and FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (b) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 218 (a), points are set at different display positions (display positions within each small area) in a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) for displaying a character image. Displayable data is stored, and among them, a small area corresponding to the main effect executed this time is set, and a point display process for displaying the points of the set small area is executed. Then, an image obtained by combining the layer for displaying the point image and the layer for displaying the character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 218 (b), in the image in which the two characters (Dc1 and Dc2) displayed in the state where the main effect is started face each other, the points executed in the point display process (displayed in the small area Dm31) are displayed. The points) overlap with the character Dc1, and the display processing is performed so that the display of the points cannot be visually recognized by the player.

After that, the main effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218 (c), when the character Dc1 moves, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player. In this case, as the main effect, a plurality of operation patterns such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) are set from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured so that whether or not the point is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the progress content. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are related to each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

In this control example, a small area for displaying points is specified based on the effect pattern of the main effect. For example, as described above, a plurality of operation patterns (each of a plurality of characters moves) as the main effect. If the pattern) is configured to be configurable, point display may be performed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218 (b), display processing is executed so that the small area Dm31 overlapping the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping the character Dc2 are displayed in advance so that the main effect is produced. The points corresponding to the operation pattern set as may be displayed. In this case, the value of the points (number) displayed when the character Dc1 which is the ally character moves and the value (number) of the points displayed when the character Dc2 which is the enemy character moves are different. It is advisable to execute the display settings in.

With this configuration, it is possible to associate the operation pattern in the main effect with the value of the points to be displayed, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

As described above, in this control example, when each display content of the point effect is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, a display point command and a display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 has been executed, each command is executed when the point display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode of the indicator is changed and displayed. It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

Therefore, when the command related to the display data when the frame button 22 is operated and the command related to the display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output each time, and a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since it is not necessary for the display control device 114 to perform a process such as rewriting the display data, the control load can be reduced.

In this control example, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them are set as common display commands. , The sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to output to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the point effect in the third control example, when the mode transition is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed, the display for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the mode, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

Further, the display mode similar to the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode indicating the high reference value is displayed. If this is the case, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating a high reference value. Therefore, when the display mode is such that the player is notified that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode transition is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In this control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given, the display mode is memorized so that it can be discriminated between the high standard and the other two stages, but it is divided into three or more stages. The display mode may be stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition and the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the meaning is the same as the display mode before the mode transition. The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode with, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is displayed based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. This makes it possible to raise the expectation of the player to shift to the mode.

Of course, the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example may be used in combination with the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example described above. Four modes may be set as in the third control example, and the configuration of the mode transition process of the present control example may be added, or the method of determining the displayed point in the present control example may be described in the second control described above. As in the example, it may correspond to the display content of the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Further, in the present control example, the configuration for determining the position where the point is displayed may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of effects.

Further, in the "normal mode A", the "privilege 1" given when the indicator P1 becomes MAX and the "privilege 2" given when the indicator P2 or P3 becomes MAX are expected to be big hits. Of the production contents of the third symbol variation production in which is set in stages, it is a privilege to notify that the stage is raised with respect to the production content currently being executed, and "privilege 1" is, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit. It may be a privilege to notify that a plurality of stages (two stages) are increased, and "privilege 2" may be, for example, a privilege to notify that the expectation of a jackpot is increased by one stage.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the expectation for the jackpot different depending on the content of the effect executed in the third symbol variation effect and the timing when the indicator reaches MAX, and the player pays close attention to the effect. It becomes possible to make it. In this case, it is advisable to make the timing when the indicator reaches MAX and the timing when the privilege is given different. As a result, when the indicator is set to MAX and it is confirmed that the privilege will be granted, the player can be made to predict which effect is being executed and the privilege will be granted while playing the game. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. In the first control example described above, it is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) in order to suggest and notify the content of the main effect of the fluctuation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is a sub-effect, has been described. This reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. This is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In this fourth control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the first control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the part is changed and the reach navigation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is described in a plurality of patterns. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the reach navigation effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the reach navigation effect. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach navigation effect is executed according to the variation time of the effect (main effect) executed by the predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) among the variation times of the special symbol. It is a sub-effect that allows the player to visually grasp and informs or suggests in stages. In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect (explanation of the effect of the main effect, the fluctuation time, and the expectation of a big hit) executed by the third symbol display device 81 using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In FIG. 219, 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 117 (b)), and it develops into super reach 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 20 seconds after that (that is, 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In addition, it shows the flow of the reach navigation effect when the variation pattern in which the main effect is further developed is selected.

As shown in FIG. 219, for 15 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol fluctuates at high speed) is displayed in the main effect, and then the reach effect (the two third symbols on the left and right are displayed). (The effect of stopping at the same number and changing only the third symbol inside) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, the main effect is a 30-second super reach effect (for example, the fluctuation of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the characters confront each other in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 163)) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, 20 seconds after the start of this super reach effect, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a ally character avoids the attack of the opponent character, or an unusual weapon The timing is set to generate an effect (for example, an effect of attacking the opponent's character using) or an effect indicating that the winning result is out of order (for example, an effect of being attacked by the opponent's character and going down). It is configured to make the player pay close attention to what kind of effect is executed at the timing.

At the timing when this super reach effect is displayed, the reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub effect in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). Since the detailed contents of this reach navigation effect are the same as those of the first control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect pattern of 20 seconds for the first reach navigation effect and 10 seconds for the second reach navigation effect is set, and the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (super reach effect is (Timing 20 seconds after being displayed) is configured to be associated with the timing of switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect.

In this reach navigation effect, similarly to the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above, the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle, and when the character reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, this time. As an effect suggesting that the result of the main effect is a big hit, the character "chance" is displayed, or the index attached to the notification unit Dm4c that is rotated and displayed can be switched (point B and point). C).

Then, when the production branch timing of the super reach effect, which is the main effect, that is, the timing (point D) where 20 seconds have passed since the super reach effect is displayed is reached, the super reach effect continues to develop in the main effect. At the same time, the reach navigation production is switched from the first reach navigation production to the second reach navigation production. At this time, since the second reach navigation effect is set in half the period (10 seconds) with respect to the period of the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), the second navigation effect is the time used in the first navigation effect. It starts from half the point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). Then, among the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) passes through the guidance display unit Dm4e again (point E) through which the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) can pass in the second reach navigation effect, and various types are obtained. The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation effect ends (point F) in accordance with the result display timing of the super reach effect (stop display timing of the third symbol).

In this way, among the third symbol variation effects that notify the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the third symbol, it is a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) with a high expectation of a big hit. By executing the reach navigation effect, which is a sub effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect, the player can visually grasp the progress of the mode of the main effect, and it is possible to notify or suggest in stages. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the content displayed in the small area Dm4 when an example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described. FIG. 220 (a) is a schematic view showing the display contents displayed at the point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect, and FIG. 220 (b) shows the point D shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. FIG. 220 (c) is a schematic view showing the display contents displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. The parts described in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display content of the point C during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. 220 (a). As shown in FIG. 220 (a), in the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit Dm4d, a “chance” with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed and guidance is provided. When passing through the display unit Dm4e, "chance" is not displayed and "x" is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of expectation that the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e have won the jackpot during the reach navigation production, the notification contents of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e and the production of the main production are combined this time. Since the lottery result of the special symbol change can be predicted, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220 (b), the display content of the point D during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 220A, the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) starts from a position half of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit Dm4e again during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, by setting the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect to pass the character Dm4b again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display unit without discomfort. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed and a "chance" is displayed. In this way, when switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect, the effect is set so that the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit that passed in the first reach navigation effect again, thereby producing the first reach navigation effect. Because the player will pay attention to the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect will be set so as to pass through the guidance display unit where the highly expected notification (“chance”) was not given. , The effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the same data can be efficiently reused in the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes again may be provided. .. In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the character Dm4b from getting bored early in the game, and the first reach navigation can be suppressed. Suppresses the production that lowers the expectation of the jackpot when the second reach navigation production is started from the position where the guidance display section where the notification (“chance”) with high expectation of the jackpot is given in the production can be passed. can do.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described.

FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example has a second internal level selection table 222ba, an effect scenario storage area 222bb, and an effect scenario selection table 222bc added to the ROM 222 in the first control example. The differences are the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. The second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting the internal level based on the hit / fail determination result of the pachinko machine 10, and is relative to the internal level selection table 222aa used in the above-described third control example. The difference is that the winning / failing determination process based on the winning information stored on hold is not executed.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is "hit" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "2" is selected as the internal level, and when it is "150 to 198". Is selected as the internal level "3". Then, when the hit / fail determination result is "off" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "1" is selected as the internal level, and when it is "150 to 198", it is internal. "2" is selected as the level.

As a result, about 25% of the internal level when the hit / fail judgment result is "hit" is set to "3", about 75% when the hit / fail judgment result is "hit", and when the hit / fail judgment result is "miss". It is possible to set about 25% of the above to "2" and about 75% of the cases where the hit / fail determination result is "missing" to "1". By setting the internal level in this way and executing the effect corresponding to this internal level, it is easier to set a plurality of jackpot expectations for the effect as compared with the case where the effect is executed only corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result. Will be possible.

In this control example, the internal level is set to 3 stages, but the number of internal level stages is not limited to this, and may be set to 4 or more stages. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level in which only about 1% of the case where the hit / fail judgment result is "hit" is set and the effect corresponding to the internal level is executed, it is rarely displayed. The production can be provided to the player. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario storage area 222bb. The effect scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of effect scenarios for the reach navigation effect are stored, and is referred to when selecting the effect scenario in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later. This is the area where the scenario is stored.

As shown in FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb is used as a scenario pattern of the effect scenario as an expectation display that is notified (displayed) by the guidance display Dm4d (first point) and the guidance display unit Dm4e (second point). Both the guidance display unit Dm4d and the guidance display unit Dm4e are used as the return positions of the character Dm4b when the high-expectation "chance" or the low-expectation "x" switches from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. A return position "1" which is a passable position or a return position "2" which is a position where only the guidance display unit Dm4e can pass is set.

Specifically, in scenario 1, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation production, the return position is returned to the return position "1", and the first point "x" is displayed during the second reach navigation production. This is a scenario in which "chance" and the second point "chance" are displayed. In scenario 2, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation production, and the return position is up to "1". Returning, it is a scenario in which the first point "chance" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation production, and in scenario 3, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation production. In this scenario, "x" is displayed, the vehicle returns to the return position "1", and the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, it is easy to facilitate a plurality of scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation effect and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation effect is different, and the scenario is set corresponding to the above-mentioned internal level. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the production according to the jackpot expectation.

Similarly, the display modes shown in FIG. 223 (a) are set for scenarios 4 to 12. The "super" displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation effect of scenario 11 indicates a display in which the expectation of a big hit is much higher than the "chance" display (for example, "super hot"). ..

In this control example, scenarios 1 to 12 are used as the scenario patterns for the reach navigation effect, but more scenarios may be used. Further, the type of the character Dm4b and the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above.

Further, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect to standardize the display data used for the effect, but the display data is standardized by other methods. Also, for example, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect when the second reach navigation effect is started may be displayed side by side. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a according to the moving direction of the character Dm4b, the display area in which the reach navigation effect is executed can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a of one route is used with respect to the moving direction of the character Dm4b, but a time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of routes may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to set the scenario pattern so that the route in which the character Dm4b moves differs between the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect. As a result, the content of the reach navigation effect can be made more diverse.

Next, the effect scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario selection table 222 bc. This effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referred to when selecting an effect scenario in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 of FIG. 224), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 223 (b), the effect scenario selection table 222bc selects each scenario based on the internal level, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Is set to.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 129", the scenario "5" is selected and " In the case of "130 to 198", the scenario "4" is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "2" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "3" is selected.

Further, when the value of the internal level is "2", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "8" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "10" is selected. If the internal level value is "2", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "9" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "1" is selected.

When the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the effect counter 223f If the value is "66-198", the scenario "12" is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "11" is selected.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the second internal level selection table 222ba described above based on the hit / fail determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. The area. The second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) at the internal level determined in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario (FIG. 224). 224 S2153), it is initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed instead of the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141), and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. The reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is to execute the reach navigation effect, and is an effect mode of the reach navigation effect. Is determined.

When the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. , The variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2151). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the effect of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112). It is a production performed in the central part of (see).

After finishing the processing of S2151, then, the internal level is determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then the internal level and the effect scenario selection table 222bc are displayed. Based on the above, an effect scenario is selected and set in the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

Then, when the process of S2153 is completed, the processes of S2107 and S2108 are executed in the same manner as the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, a modified example of the display mode of the reach navigation effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. 225 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the modified example 1 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 225 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the modified example 2 of the fourth control example, FIG. 226. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 3 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. FIG. 226 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. In addition, this modification 1 to 3 is a modification of the display mode used in the reach navigation effect, and the control content uses the configuration described in the above-mentioned first control example or fourth control example. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225 (a) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a in the second reach navigation effect. By doing so, the display data used for the production can be diverted.

Next, FIG. 225 (b) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the second modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the second reach navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the effect that the character Dm4b continuously moves is executed. .. In this case, the guidance display units Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of places for notifying the expectation of the jackpot increases to four. As a result, a maximum of four "chance" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high will be displayed, and the player can be widely notified of the jackpot expectation.

In this modification, the guidance display units Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. For example, the first reach navigation effect is executed according to the progress of the second reach navigation effect. The character Dm4b may be scrolled and displayed in the moving direction (rightward from the viewpoint of FIG. 225 (b)) so that the area is erased. As a result, the effect of this modification can be executed without expanding the area of the small area Dm4.

Further, in this case, only the display results of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed by the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the guidance display unit Dm4f. And Dm4g may be replaced with the display, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation effect.

Next, FIG. 226 (a) shows the contents of the reach navigation effect of the modification 3 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the reach navigation effect of this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a branched into two paths is used, and the first path and the second path finally reaching the first notification unit Dm4c1. A second path to reach the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Of these, when the character Dm4b moves on the first route, it passes through the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves on the second route, it passes through the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4f on the way. ..

When the reach navigation effect is executed in this modified example, either the first path or the second path is moved in the first navigation effect, and the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2 is reached. Then, it is returned to the return position set at the position before the branch point where the first path and the second path branch, and the second navigation effect is executed.

Then, in the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves on either the route in which the character Dm4b has moved in the first navigation effect or the route in which the character Dm4b has not moved in the first navigation effect. As a result, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display result on the guidance display unit Dm4e that the character Dm4b has passed in the first navigation effect is changed in the second navigation effect. It becomes possible to make it.

Further, when a different route is selected between the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, it is possible to display the display result on the three guide display units Dm4d, dm4e, and Dm4f as the reach navigation effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), as a result of selecting the first route in the first navigation effect, a "chance" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed in the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. In this state, when the second route is selected as the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route as shown in FIG. 226 (c), and the jackpot expectation is high. A "chance" is displayed to inform you that it is high. If different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation effect is currently in the second navigation effect. "Development" is displayed to indicate that it is inside. This allows the player to easily grasp the current situation.

Further, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, for example, in the first navigation effect, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is "x", the second navigation effect is produced. The display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e may be changed to "chance".

That is, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is "x" in the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect is started from the return position shown in FIG. 226 (b), the player is notified. The effect mode of the second navigation effect is an effect mode in which the same route as the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in which "x" is displayed in the first navigation effect is changed to "chance". In some cases, or when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e remains "x" and the display result of "chance" is displayed on the guidance display unit Dm4f. It is possible to expect both of them.

In this case, it is preferable to set the second navigation effect to be more advantageous to the player if the second navigation effect moves on a different route from the first navigation effect. Specifically, the probability that "chance" is displayed as the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed from "x" to "chance". It is preferable to set it so that the probability that the jackpot is won is higher when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is displayed as "chance" than the guidance display unit Dm4e. As a result, the player can be expected to select a route different from the first navigation effect as the route selected in the second navigation effect, and the reach navigation effect can be continuously watched. It will be possible.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a for guiding the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) routes, and the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) is used. , The route expected by the player can be changed by the second navigation effect.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the path in which the character Dm4b moves by the reach navigation effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this modification, the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position) is described as one place (the position before the route branches), but the return position is the same as in the above-described fourth control example. May be provided in plurality. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guidance display unit Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guidance display unit Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the route (passing guidance display unit) to which the character Dm4b moves in the second navigation effect changes depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) and the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position).

Further, in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two paths, but it may be branched into more (three or more) paths, or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Further, a specific position may be set in the middle of the route in which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another route when passing through the specific position. As a result, the reach navigation effect can be made more versatile.

In addition, in this modification, a plurality of routes are displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach navigation effect is executed. For example, the route in which the character Dm4b moves during the first navigation effect. Only (for example, the first route) is displayed, and a plurality of routes (first route and second route) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. May be good. With this configuration, the player is not notified in advance (during the first navigation effect) what kind of route the second navigation effect will take, so that the player can predict the effect. , The interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the content of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (the effect explanation of the main effect, the fluctuation time, and the expectation of a big hit) is sub-produced. By displaying using, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (the timing 20 seconds after the super reach effect is displayed) is associated with the timing of switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. Of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) that notifies the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the third symbol, a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect) with a high expectation of a big hit. By executing the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect (effect branch timing), which is the main effect (or special reach effect), the player can visually grasp the progress of the mode of the main effect. It becomes possible to notify or suggest in stages, and it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by notifying the degree of expectation that a jackpot is won by a plurality of guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation production, the notification contents of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e and the production of the main production are combined this time. Since the lottery result of the special symbol change can be predicted, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by setting the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect to pass the character Dm4b again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display unit without discomfort. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect again, the guidance (“chance”) with high expectation is not given in the first reach navigation effect. Since the player pays close attention to the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect is set so as to pass through the display unit again, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes again may be provided. .. In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the character Dm4b from getting bored early in the game, and the first reach navigation can be suppressed. Suppresses the production that lowers the expectation of the jackpot when the second reach navigation production is started from the position where the guidance display section where the notification (“chance”) with high expectation of the jackpot is given in the production can be passed. can do.

Further, since the same data can be efficiently reused in the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the fifth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. In the second control example described above, as a continuous slot effect, in a slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), a slot that is executed next depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. It was configured so that the production mode of the production was set.

On the other hand, in this control example, detailed control is added for the dynamic display (rotation display) mode and the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. It differs in that.

In this fifth control example, with respect to the second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the part is changed and the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228, a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols in the slot effect can be set, and the types of slot effects to be executed (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened). Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect (slot effect, extension slot effect) and the remaining time of the operation valid period of the frame button 22.

FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol in a slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols "A" are stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols inside are dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, when the player presses the frame button 22 and the pseudo symbols "A" on the left, middle, and right are lined up in a row, the pseudo symbol "A" is acquired. As described in the second control example described above, in the continuous slot effect, as a result of executing the slot effect a plurality of times, a plurality of types (3 types) of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" are acquired. In that case, it is notified that the player has won a privilege (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (b) to 227 (e), another example set as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbol can be set, and the pseudo symbol can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes. Therefore, during the slot production for the player. It is possible to urge the frame button 22 to be pressed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the operation effect (slot effect) of operating the frame button 22.

FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic view showing an example in which the number of reels is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), in this control example, as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo symbol used for the slot effect is displayed is set to one can be set. There is. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed in the limited display space.

In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but the number of reels may be reduced from the normal number of reels, and the number of reels may be set to two. Further, in this control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is enlarged and displayed. However, a dynamic display mode in which only the number of reels is reduced without being enlarged may be used. In this case, in the vacant area (the area where the left and right reels are usually displayed), the display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (for example, the timing at which the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row). It is preferable to execute the display or the display of the degree of expectation in which the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row by pressing the frame button 22). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that encourages the player to press the frame button 22.

FIG. 227 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (c), in this control example, among the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, the dynamic display mode for enlarging the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed can be set. doing. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

In this control example, the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed in a larger size than the other symbols so that the player can easily grasp it. However, for example, the other symbols are reduced and displayed relatively. The pseudo symbol "A" may be a dynamic display mode that is easier to see than other symbols. As a result, the pseudo symbol "A" can be easily visually recognized without changing the dynamically displayed area.

FIG. 227 (d) is a schematic view showing an example in which the symbol arrangement of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (d), in this control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, if the symbol arrangement of the reel (middle reel) for displaying the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is different. It is configured so that the dynamic display mode can be set. Specifically, among the dynamically displayed symbols, a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is increased can be set. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

In this control example, the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is increased so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols "A". Besides, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not the target of the stop display this time, that is, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, the pseudo symbols "B" and "C"), the relative The number of pseudo symbols "A" may be increased. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel is reduced, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols that are dynamically displayed (rotated).

FIG. 227 (e) is a schematic view showing an example in which the dynamic display speed (rotation speed) of the reel (middle reel) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (e), in this control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed. It is configured so that a dynamic display mode in which (rotation speed) is reduced can be set. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be slowed in the vicinity of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and further, the period during which the reel goes around can be shortened.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the reel is rotated by a predetermined number (for example, 2 laps), and thereafter (for example, the 3rd lap) is described above. The dynamic display speed may be slowed down as described above. As a result, the player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (the period during which the reel makes two laps) can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and the frame button. It is possible to encourage the operation of 22.

As described above, in this control example, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol can be displayed in various dynamic display modes, so that the player is motivated. Can operate the frame button 22.

In each of the above-mentioned dynamic display modes, only the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is displayed with a higher brightness than the other symbols, or the display mode is changed to emphasize the edge of the symbol. This may make it easier for the player to understand.

In addition, the frame button 22 is operated even though the number of rotations of the reel has reached a predetermined number (dynamic display as if the reel has rotated a predetermined number of times) or a predetermined period has passed since the slot effect was started. If this is not the case, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. As a result, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Next, the stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, but in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a hit. Is set so that three types of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" can be acquired by multiple slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is determined. In the case of deviation, the number that can be acquired from the three types of pseudo symbols in the multiple slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect is set to be any of 0 to 2.

Therefore, if the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is incorrect, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not stopped and displayed on the line even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. Stop control is performed. Specifically, a symbol different from the pseudo symbol that is the stop display target is set before and after the pseudo symbol that is the stop display target, so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is the stop display target. When the frame button 22 is aimed and operated, the stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed one before or one after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing so, it is possible to display the disengaged stop display mode without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the stop control described above, by changing the start position of the dynamically displayed reels without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels, the player does not feel uncomfortable. The stop control for displaying the off-stop display mode is also feasible. Next, the above-mentioned stop control will be described with reference to FIG. 228.

FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol arrangement and a stop position of a reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in a slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a), a place where a pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is not set as a symbol array (a pseudo symbol not to be stopped and displayed this time is set). The parts that are marked) are a continuous pattern array. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, and one of them is a symbol array in which a pseudo symbol "A" is set (see FIG. 228 (b)).

By using the reels with such a symbol arrangement, the stop control that displays the off stop display mode without giving a sense of discomfort to the player by simply changing the start position and dynamic display speed of the reels in each slot effect is also possible. It is made feasible.

This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228 (b). FIG. 228 (b) is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a). As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in this dynamic display mode, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed this time is set in the array 4 as the symbol array of the reels that are dynamically displayed, and other than that. Is set to a pseudo symbol "-" different from the stop display target this time.

Then, in the dynamic display mode using this reel, the rotation start position 1 where the dynamic display of the reel is started is the arrangement 1 of the symbol array, and the rotation start position 2 which is the arrangement 9 of the symbol arrangement. Is set. Two types of speeds, "high" and "ultra-low", are set as the speeds of the reels that are dynamically displayed. This reel speed "high" is specifically set at a speed at which the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 0.7 seconds, and the reel speed "ultra-low" is concrete. Is set at a speed at which the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 1.2 seconds.

That is, when the slot effect in which the operation valid period (button operation valid period) of the frame button 22 is set to 6 seconds is executed, 9 to 10 symbols move when the reel speed is "high". It becomes an effect, and when the reel speed is "ultra-low", an effect of moving five symbols is executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo symbol that is dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period without changing the symbol arrangement by simply changing the position where the dynamic display of the reel is started or the reel speed. Therefore, it is possible to set various dynamic display modes without increasing the types of symbol data, and it is possible to reduce the amount of production data.

Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b). When the rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that either the reel speed “high” or the reel speed “ultra-low” is set. A dynamic display mode capable of displaying the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed is executed. In this case, the reel speed "ultra-low" (one symbol is displayed) has a longer period in which the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed than the reel speed "high" (the period in which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds). If the period is 1.2 seconds), the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time.

Further, when the rotation start position 2 is set, when the reel speed "high" is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period are in the range of the array 9 to the array 5, so that the stop display is displayed. It is a dynamic display mode that can display the target pseudo symbol "A", and when the reel speed "ultra-low" is set, the symbols that are dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period are in the range of array 9 to array 2. Therefore, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed in a dynamic display mode.

As a result, if the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is incorrect, the dynamic display in which the reel speed is set to "ultra-low" is started from the rotation start position 2 to execute the dynamic display in which the pseudo symbol "A" is not displayed. It becomes possible to do. Further, when executing such stop control, it is preferable that the symbols set other than the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target are the same symbol. As a result, whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in the slot effect this time is the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed is set to other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the dynamic display contents of the symbol.

Further, when the reel speed is "ultra-low" and the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed (a dynamic display mode (). Dynamic display mode (advantageous to the player), and when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed (disadvantageous to the player). Dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or unfavorable to the player simply by grasping the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reel is started in the slot effect. Can be prevented.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.

FIG. 229 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example differs from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cc, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. The display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the reels of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are stored, and is described in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the display mode to be selected is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, a plurality of display modes (display modes 1 to 9) having different rotation speeds (dynamic display speeds) and symbol arrangements are stored in the display mode storage area 222ca as dynamic display modes in the slot effect. Has been done. As a result, when the continuous slot effect is executed in this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns as the dynamic display mode executed in each slot effect.

This rotation speed indicates the period during which the symbol being dynamically displayed is displayed in the display area where the slot effect is displayed. In this control example, when the rotation speed is "high", one symbol is for 0.7 seconds. It is set to be displayed. Further, when the rotation speed is "low", one symbol is set to be displayed for one second. Further, at the rotation speed "ultra-low", the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the rotation speed of the reel in three stages in this way, in the dynamic display of each slot effect, it is possible to set a dynamic display in which the player can easily discriminate the pseudo symbol and a dynamic display in which it is difficult to discriminate. It will be possible. Therefore, different effects can be executed even in the dynamic display mode using the same symbol arrangement.

Further, by providing the reel rotation speed in three stages, it is possible to make the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect different. For example, when the period of one slot effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 6 seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed "high", and the rotation speed " At "low", 6 pseudo symbols can be displayed, and at the rotation speed "ultra-low", 5 pseudo symbols can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol that is the stop display mode of this time is displayed depending on the rotation speed of the reel.

Specifically, in the display mode 1, a pseudo symbol whose rotation speed is "high" and whose symbol arrangement is a stop display target (indicated by a "circle" in FIG. 230) and a pseudo symbol which is not a stop display target. (Indicated by "x" in FIG. 230) are set to be displayed alternately, and in the display mode 2, the rotation speed is "low" and the same symbol arrangement as in the display mode 1 is set. Is to be done.

The display mode 3 has the same rotation speed as the display mode 1, and the pseudo symbol (displayed with a “circle” in FIG. 230) whose symbol arrangement is the stop display target is not a stop display target (pseudo symbol). In FIG. 230, two "x" (indicated by "x") are set to be displayed side by side, and further, the pseudo symbol (indicated by "star" in FIG. 230) to be stopped and displayed is emphasized (enlarged, It is set to be displayed by emitting light, etc.). In the display mode 4, the rotation speed is "low", and the same symbol arrangement as in the display mode 3 is set.

In the display mode 5, the rotation speed is "ultra-low", and the pseudo symbol of the stop display target is displayed in the array 4 as the symbol array, and the pseudo symbol other than the stop display target is displayed in the other arrays. In the display mode 6, the rotation speed is "ultra-low", the pseudo symbol of the stop display target is displayed in the array 11 as the symbol array, and the other arrays are the pseudo symbols other than the stop display target. Is set to be displayed.

It should be noted that the display mode 5 and the display mode 6 use the same symbol sequence data, and are display modes in which the positions at which the dynamic display is started are different. That is, in the display mode 6, the dynamic display is started from the sequence 5 shown in the display mode 5. The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described with reference to FIG. 228 described above is executed.

In the display mode 7, the rotation speed changes in the middle, the rotation speed is "low" during the period when the arrangements 1 to 6 of the symbol array are displayed, and the rotation speed is low during the period when the arrangements 7 to 11 are displayed. It becomes "high", and as a symbol array, pseudo symbols that are not stop display targets and pseudo symbols that are stop display targets are displayed alternately in arrays 1 to 6, and pseudo symbols that are not stop display targets are displayed in arrays 7 to 11. It is set to be displayed.

In this way, the rotation speed is slowed down in the range (arrays 1 to 6) where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed, and the rotation speed is set to the range (arrays 7 to 11) where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed. By increasing the speed, the speed of the dynamic display can be changed to attract the player's interest, and by lengthening the period during which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed, the player is enthusiastic. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In addition, since the rotation speed is increased in the range (arrangement 7 to 11) where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not displayed, it is possible to shorten the period of one revolution of the reel, and one slot effect period (arrangement 7 to 11). The range (array 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed can be dynamically displayed multiple times during the period (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), and the player can enthusiastically display the frame. The button 22 can be operated.

In the display mode 8, the rotation speed changes as the symbol arrangement goes around, and the rotation speed becomes "high" in the first lap and "low" in the second and subsequent laps, which is the same as the display mode 7. The display mode is set to be displayed, and in the display mode 9, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is highlighted by rotating the symbol array, and the rotation speed is "high" in the first lap. It is set to display the pseudo symbol "star mark" emphasizing the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed in the second and subsequent laps, which is the same symbol arrangement as the display mode 7.

In this control example, the above-mentioned nine types of display modes (display modes 1 to 9) can be set as the dynamic display modes executed in the slot effect, but the types of display modes are this. It is not limited to, and more display modes may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cc. The display mode selection table 222cc is a table that is referred to when selecting a dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is described in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 231 (a), the display mode selection table 222cc has a hit display mode selection table 222cc1 and a disengagement display mode selection table 222cc2, and the display mode selection table 222cc has a special symbol. Based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected.

In this way, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol. Therefore, by grasping the effect content of the continuous slot effect, the special symbol can be a big hit. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not he has won.

FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit display mode selection table 222cc1. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f by the hit display mode selection table 222cb1. The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 1" as the normal slot effect, and "display" as the first shortened slot effect. In "Aspect 2", when "Display mode 2" is set as the second shortened slot effect and "Display mode 2" is set as the extension slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", it is set as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1" is "display mode 2" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 2" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 4" as a second shortened slot effect, and "display" as an extension slot effect. When "Aspect 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "Display mode 1" is used as the first slot effect, "Display mode 8" is used as the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is used. When "display mode 4" is set as "display mode 5" as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 5" is set as the extension slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as the effect, "display mode 9" as the normal slot effect, "display mode 4" as the first shortened slot effect, and "display mode 7" as the second shortened slot effect, as the extension slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

FIG. 231 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the disengagement display mode selection table 222cc2. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f by the disengagement display mode selection table 222cb2. The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 1" as the normal slot effect, and "display" as the first shortened slot effect. When "Aspect 1" is set as "Display mode 2" as the second shortened slot effect and "Display mode 2" is set as the extension slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", it is set as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1" is "display mode 2" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 2" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 4" as a second shortened slot effect, and "display" as an extension slot effect. When "Aspect 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "Display mode 1" is used as the first slot effect, "Display mode 2" is used as the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is used. When "display mode 7" is set as "display mode 6" as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 6" is set as the extension slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as the effect, "display mode 4" as the normal slot effect, "display mode 8" as the first shortened slot effect, and "display mode 9" as the second shortened slot effect, as the extension slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

As described above, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all the slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effect, in the continuous slot effect. Regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect to be executed, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. The stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting the stop mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and the slot effect is provided in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. If it is determined (S2034: Yes in FIG. 233), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 232 (a), the stop mode selection table 222cc for hitting and the stop mode selection table for disengagement 222cc2 are set in the stop mode selection table 222cc, and the table corresponds to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct. The stop mode is selected with reference to.

FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit stop mode selection table 222cc1. The hit stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting stop patterns having different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "2" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "0" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "2" is set, and the number of established symbols "2" is set as an extension slot effect.

Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "2" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "1" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "1" is set, and the number of established symbols "1" is set as an extension slot effect.

In this way, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. As a result, the player is notified that he / she has won the prize.

Further, in this control example, since a plurality of stop patterns of each slot effect are provided when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the current continuous slot effect is hit when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit during the execution of the continuous slot effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is aware of whether or not the continuous slot effect has been executed.

FIG. 232 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2. The disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting stop patterns having different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "0" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "0" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "0" is set, and the number of established symbols "0" is set as an extension slot effect.

Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "0" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "1" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "0" is set, and the number of established symbols "0" is set as an extension slot effect.

As described above, in this control example, regardless of whether the hit / fail judgment result is a hit or a miss, the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect has the same stop mode, so that the continuous slot effect starts. Immediately after the game is played (at the end of the first slot effect), the player knows whether or not the continuous slot effect this time is a continuous slot effect executed when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. Can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cc are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cc described above. In the display mode storage area 223ca, the selected display mode is set in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) (S2071 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is set. Information regarding the display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238) and is stored when the continuous slot effect is completed. Is initialized.

The stop mode storage area 223 cc is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the stop mode selection table 222 cc described above. The display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set in the stop mode storage area 223cc (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is set. A display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851, S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238) and is stored when the continuous slot effect is completed. Information about is initialized.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-mentioned second control example in that the variation display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 233. In the variation display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

When the process of S2006 is completed, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is displayed based on the display mode selection table 222 kb. It is selected and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

When the processing of S2071 is completed, the stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222 cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223 cc (S2072). Then, in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, the processes of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to 2011 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 234 to 238, various processing during the production of the slot effect processing (see FIG. 174) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. Will be explained.

First, the process 2 during the initial slot effect will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first slot effect processing 2. When the process 2 during the initial slot effect is executed, the processes S4701 to S4707 are executed in the same manner as the process during the initial slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. Then, when the processing of S4707 is completed, next, a display slot stop effect command for the set stop mode is set (S4751), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is issued. Set (S4752), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even when it is determined that the current button press valid period is not (S4701: No), S4710 is the same as the process during the initial slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. ~ S4712 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal slot effect processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal slot effect processing 2. When the normal slot effect during process 2 is executed, the processes S4801 to S4803 are executed in the same manner as the normal slot effect process (see FIG. 176) in the second control example described above, and the slot effect counter is executed in the process of S4803. When it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is waited for end. The state is set (S4807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. (S4852), and the slot effect state is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809).

When the process of S4809 is completed, next, a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second shortened slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this process is terminated.

Next, the first shortened slot effect processing 2 (S4608) will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608). When the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 are the same as in the first shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above. Execute the processing of.

After finishing the processing of S4904, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223 cab is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223 ca is set. The corresponding display slot effect command is set (S4952), and this process ends.

Next, the second shortened slot effect processing 2 (S4610) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610) is executed, first, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed in the same manner as in the second shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above. When the processing of S5002 is completed, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223 cab is set (S5051), and the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223 ca is supported. The display slot effect command to be displayed is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and this process is terminated.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension slot effect processing 2 (S4612). When the extension slot effect during process 2 (S4612) is executed, the processes of S5101 and S5102 are executed in the same manner as the extension slot effect process (see FIG. 179) in the second control example described above, and then the stop mode is stored. A display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223 cab is set (S5151), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223 ca is set (S5152). ), Set the slot effect state to the end waiting state (S5104), and end this process.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol is displayed in various dynamic display modes. Since it is configured so that it can be displayed with, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Further, even during one slot production, the dynamic display mode is changed when a predetermined condition (the number of laps of the symbol array displayed on the reel or the lapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied, so that the player can use it. On the other hand, the operating means (frame button 22) can be operated more enthusiastically.

As a plurality of dynamic display modes, the number of reels to be dynamically displayed may be changed. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed in the limited display space. Further, the size of the pseudo symbol may be changed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

In this case, the pseudo symbol to be relatively stopped and displayed may be a dynamic display mode that is easier to see than the other symbol by reducing the display of the other symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize a predetermined pseudo pattern without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. As a result, the player can easily grasp the predetermined symbol. Further, by reducing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not stop display targets), the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased. In this case, since it is possible to reduce the total number of dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols that are dynamically displayed.

Further, as a dynamic display mode, the symbol arrangement of the reels that are dynamically displayed may be changed to set a range in which predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) are concentrated.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed in the slot effect can be changed. As a result, it is possible to set a dynamic display in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is easy to grasp and a dynamic display in which it is difficult to grasp even if the symbol arrangement is the same. Can be executed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be slowed within the range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is displayed, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time without changing the period for displaying the predetermined symbol arrangement.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reels to be dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the number of reels reaches a predetermined number (for example, two laps), and thereafter (for example, the third lap) is dynamically displayed as described above. You may try to slow it down. As a result, the player who has not operated the operating means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (the period during which the reel makes two rounds) can easily grasp the predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed). It is possible to urge the operation means (frame button 22) to be operated.

Further, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the effect content of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect Based on this, it is possible to predict the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not. Therefore, there is an effect that the production content of the continuous slot production can be interested.

In this control example, each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect) that may be executed in the continuous slot effect is dynamically performed in advance. Since it is configured to set the display mode, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. Can be done.

Further, in this control example, the same stop mode is obtained in the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect regardless of whether the hit / fail judgment result is a hit or a miss. Therefore, immediately after the continuous slot effect is started (first time). (At the end of the slot effect), it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the continuous slot effect this time is a continuous slot effect executed when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. ..

In this control example, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are preset, but when the slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is determined. (When the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect), the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of the slot effect may be set.

Further, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the initial slot effect is being executed are also at the same timing as the other slot effects. You may set it.

<6th control example>
Next, the sixth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. This control example is a detailed explanation of the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above. The combined pressing effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the compound pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the compound effect executed based on a plurality of special symbol variations are configured to be executed. It differs in that. Further, a detailed explanation is added about the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the compound pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the executed pressing effect.

In this sixth control example, with respect to the second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. It differs from the point where the part was changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 239, a rear image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic view showing an example (“mountain” stage) of the rear image data stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. 239 (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example (“sea” stage) of rear image data stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

In this control example, the stage shown in FIGS. 239 (a) and 239 (b) can be selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241. During a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change of the special symbol, a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set, and the game is played during that period. When a person operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is switched.

Further, in this control example, the effect corresponding to the displayed stage is executed. Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 during the period during which the stage can be changed (for example, 5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started) to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute a new effect, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the combined pressing effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of the combined pressing effect in this control example. In the combined pressing effect of this control example, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals with respect to the parts overlapping with the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol change is executed. Period is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous striking effect is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation 1 (60s) is 12 seconds remaining to the time when the remaining 2 seconds is left.

When the player executes a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the number of repeated hits is 50 times or more) on the frame button 22 during this continuous hitting effect, the background (stage) executed in the next special symbol variation is set. It is configured so that the operation mode to be changed is changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 (b) and 241 (c).

FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode in which the background of the special symbol change being executed can be changed as the background change operation mode, and FIG. 241 (c) is executed as the background change operation mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation mode which can change the background of the next special symbol variation. First, in FIG. 241 (b), a rear image corresponding to the currently selected background (“sea” stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub display area Ds is small. Stages (“sea” stage and “mountain” stage) that can be selected as the background selection screen are displayed in the area Ds2, and the currently selected stage is displayed larger than the unselected stage.

Then, below the main display area Dm, "The background changes by pressing a button" is displayed as a background change notification display for notifying the player that the current period is a period in which the background can be changed, and next to it. , A display imitating a "button" indicating that the current operation is valid for the frame button 22 is displayed.

As a result, the player can easily grasp that the background can be changed, and the player can select an arbitrary background.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, an effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the end of the special symbol change (for example, 5 seconds until the end of the special symbol change) (for example, a continuous hit effect). May be executed. In this case, as a result of the player enthusiastically operating the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is operated even after the next special symbol change is started, and the background is unintentionally changed in the next special symbol change. There was a problem that it would end up.

If this problem occurs, for example, in a state where an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations is executed, the player cannot see the effect that the player was looking forward to. There was a risk of dissatisfaction with the player.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to prevent the above-mentioned problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol change ends) is performed (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol change ends). When it is determined that the continuous striking operation) has been executed, the background change operation mode executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode.

Here, the above-mentioned specific background change operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). As shown in FIG. 241 (c), this specific background change operation mode is different from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241 (b), and even if the frame button 22 is operated, the special symbol change currently being executed is caused. It is configured so that the background does not change until it finishes. Below the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Select the background of the next change by pressing a button" is displayed as a display for notifying the player that the current is a specific background change operation mode. It is displayed, and in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the selection content indicating the background to be displayed in the next variation is displayed.

In this way, the situation in which the player is dissatisfied by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change. Can be suppressed from occurring.

In this control example, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been executed for the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special symbol change ends, the frame button 22 is executed in the next special symbol change. Although the operation mode of the effect of operating (hereinafter, referred to as a frame button operation effect) is changed, other configurations may be used.

For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol change exceeds a predetermined number of times, the mode of the frame button operation effect in the next special symbol change may be changed, or this time. The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol change of 1 and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the mode of the later frame button operation effect may be changed based on the determination that the operation content of the previously executed frame button operation effect is the predetermined operation content.

Further, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed. It is configured so that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only when the above-mentioned problem can actually occur, but it is not limited to this, and it is executed in this special symbol change. Based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds), the next It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation. As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being executed for the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol change is incorrect even though the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol change from starting and unintentional background change being executed while the is being operated (pressed) multiple times.

As described above, in this control example, a plurality of frame button operation effects (repeated hitting effect of special symbol variation 1 and background change effect of special symbol variation 2 in FIG. 240) executed across a plurality of special symbol variations are used. On the other hand, the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation content during the frame button operation effect to be executed before.

In addition, as in the case of the second control example described above, the frame button operation effect executed before is being performed for the plurality of frame button operation effects (composite press effect) executed during one special symbol change. It is configured so that the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation content.

Returning to FIG. 240, the combined pressing effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a compound pressing effect in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed is executed. This composite pressing effect is the same as the combined pressing effect executed in the second control example described above (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect in each frame button operation effect executed in the compound pressing effect will be described with reference to FIG. 242.

FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the compound pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the compound pressing effect is executed, the pressing effect 1 is first executed. Similar to the second control example described above, this pressing effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 (after the effect period is 12 seconds and the operation valid period is 5 seconds after the start of the effect). 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157 (b)).

During the pressing effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (a timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation valid period). As the determination content, based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (operation 3), and when the number of repeated hits is small (50 times or less), "weak continuous hit" and the repeated hits are determined. The automatic continuous striking function is executed by the "strong continuous striking" that is determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) and the operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more in the pressing effect 1. "Long press" determined to be, "No operation" determined when the frame button 22 is to be operated even once during the pressing effect 1, and an unnecessary frame button operation is executed for the pressing effect 1. It is determined to be in five types of "other operations" that are determined to be present.

Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1, the mode of the pressing effect 2 which is the frame button operation effect to be executed next is set. Specifically, when the pressing effect 1 is determined to be "weak continuous hitting", the pressing effect 2 is set to "timing pressing effect" (see FIG. 158 (a)), and when it is determined to be "strong continuous hitting". Is set to "continuous hitting effect" (see FIG. 243 (a)) in the pressing effect 2, and when it is determined to be "long press", "timing release effect" (see FIG. 158 (b)) is set. When it is determined that there is no operation, the "timing pressing effect" is set in the pressing effect 2 as in the case where it is determined as "weak continuous hitting" described above, and when it is determined that there is "other operation", pressing is performed. A “timing push effect (difficulty)” (see FIG. 243 (b)), which increases the success difficulty of the above-mentioned “timing push effect”, is set in the effect 2.

In this way, by setting the mode of the pressing effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1, for example, the frame button exceeds a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the pressing effect 1. A player who has pressed 22 (a player who is good at continuous striking operation) can be enthusiastically participated in the frame button operation effect by continuously executing the effect of repeatedly striking the frame button 22.

In addition, for a player who is executing the automatic continuous striking function in the pressing effect 1 (a player in a state where the frame button 22 is continuously pressed), an effect of releasing the button instead of pressing the button is performed. By executing, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the current button operation state (state in which the button is pressed), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the effect.

Further, as a penalty, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the press effect 2 to succeed for the player who is performing an unnecessary frame button operation for the press effect 1.

Then, when the pressing effect 2 is completed, the continuous hitting effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the operation valid period is 5 seconds from the start of the effect) is executed in the same manner as the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above (FIG. 159 (b). )), The compound pressing effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), the continuous striking effect of the pressing effect 2 executed when it is determined to be "strong continuous striking" in the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed by the press effect 2 in the combined press effect. The same elements as those of the compound pressing effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243 (a), when the continuous striking effect is started by the pressing effect 2, "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment column, and it is suggested that the display mode of the meter display unit D1 changes. "Maybe the meter may penetrate !?" is displayed. Further, a "continuous hit" indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is a continuous hit effect is displayed between the meter display unit D1 and the small area Dm5.

In the continuous hitting effect executed by the pressing effect 2, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is set based on the game result of the combined pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol, as in the pressing effect 2 of the second control example described above. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159 (a)), and specifically, when the number of times the frame button is pressed exceeds 20 times during the period (3 seconds) in which the pressing effect 2 is executed. The display of the meter display unit D1 changes based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol that satisfies the operating conditions and the compound pressing effect is executed. For example, if the special symbol wins the jackpot as a result of the winning / failing judgment, and the special symbol wins the jackpot in the winning information stored on hold, the meter display is shown in FIG. 159 (a). The meter of part D1 is extended.

In this way, for the player who has executed a sufficient continuous striking operation in the pressing effect 1, the continuous striking operation can be continuously executed in the pressing effect 2, and further, the continuous striking operation is executed based on the continuous continuous striking operation. Since the effect mode is different between the pressing effect 1 and the pressing effect 2, the player can be enthusiastically operated on the desired frame button 22.

In this control example, the effect mode is changed based on the number of repeated hit operations on the frame button 22, but for example, the number of repeated hits (operation conditions) for which the effect mode is changed is set to a plurality of operation conditions. It may be configured to be decided by lottery. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation conditions in the pressing effect this time, so that the frame button operation can be positively executed until the end.

The timing pressing effect (difficulty) of the pressing effect 2 executed when it is determined to be "other operation" in the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed by the press effect 2 in the combined press effect. The same elements as those of the compound pressing effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the timing push effect (difficulty) is the display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge with respect to the timing push effect (see FIG. 158 (a)) of the second control example described above. The difference is that the position is different and the moving body D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the success difficulty (difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the center of the target Db3) with respect to the normal timing pressing effect. This makes it difficult for a player who does not intentionally participate in the compound pressing effect to succeed in the timing pressing effect (difficult to satisfy the operating conditions), and the effect displayed when the operating conditions are satisfied (special). It is possible to make it difficult to execute (the effect of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol).

The method of increasing the difficulty of success is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, while the timing pressing effect is being executed, the target Db3 is moved at high speed in the timing gauge to make the pressing timing difficult to understand. , The display of the target Db3 may be temporarily erased, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or contracted to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, as a condition for setting the timing pressing effect (difficulty), the operation determination result and the pressing effect 2 are started other than the case where the operation determination result in the pressing effect 1 is determined to be "other operation". When the operation status is different from that at the time, for example, in the pressing effect 1, the frame button 22 is pressed when the pressing effect 2 is executed even though "long press" is set as the operation determination result. The timing push effect (difficulty) may be set even when it is determined that there is no such effect.

Further, in this control example, the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is executed for the player who is determined not to intentionally participate in the compound pressing effect. For example, the operation content for the frame button 22 in the pressing effect 1 is executed when the operation content is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the number of repeated hits is 7), and the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is successful. In some cases (when the operation conditions are met), a player who notifies the lottery result of a special symbol, displays a specific effect (image or video), or provides information that the player can accumulate. It may be configured to give a privilege that is advantageous to the user.

<About the electrical configuration in the 6th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 244, in the RAM 223 in this control example, a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a checking flag 223dc, and a press count counter 223dd are added to the RAM 223 in each of the above-mentioned control examples. It differs in that it is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, "sea" stage, "mountain" stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22. This background information storage area 223da is used when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation valid period, which is the operation period in which the background can be changed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). , Background information based on the operation content is stored, and when the checking flag 223dc is set to ON in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is used for display based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation. When it is on, it indicates that the frame button 22 is operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the frame button 22 is operated. Indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. When it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) that the operation change flag 223bad is input to the frame button within 5 seconds (valid period before the end) until the special symbol change ends (valid period before the end) ( It is set to on (S6810: Yes) in FIG. 247 (S6811 in FIG. 247).

Then, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that the first frame button operation is valid (S6802: Yes in FIG. 247), and the checking flag 223dc is set to off. If determined (S6803: Yes in FIG. 247), it is set to off (S6805 in FIG. 247).

The checking flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether or not an effect of changing the background of the next change (see FIG. 241 (c)) is being executed as a background change effect, and when it is on, the background of the next change is changed. Indicates that the effect to be performed is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the effect of changing the background of the next fluctuation is not being executed. This checking flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804 in FIG. 247). In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when the display background command is set (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to off after the display background command is set (S2083).

The pressing count counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of operations of the frame button 22 executed during the pressing effect 1 of the combined pressing effect. When it is determined in the auto pressing effect setting process 2 that the pressing effect 1 is being performed (normally being pressed), the pressing number counter 223dd is added one by one (S4510 in FIG. 246) and pressed. It is referred to when determining whether the number of times pressed during the effect 1 has reached the predetermined number of times (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246), and when it is determined that the number of times the button has been pressed has reached the predetermined number of times (50 times) (FIG. 246 S4552: Yes), the value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Further, although not shown, the value of the counter is initialized to 0 even at the timing when the pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp device 113 in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. In this control example, for the second control example described above, the variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the automatic pressing effect setting process (FIG. 173). The difference is that the auto-press effect setting process (see FIG. 246) is executed instead of (see), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 247) is explained in detail, and other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When this variation display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and then various processes are executed. The variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed based on the acquired fluctuation pattern are set. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to 2033 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

After finishing the processing of S2040, it is next determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and when it is determined to be set to ON (that is, during the previous special symbol change). (When the effect of changing the background is executed by the next special symbol change) (S2081: Yes), the display background command is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da (S2081: Yes). S2082).

Then, the checking flag 223dc is set to off (S2083), and then the processes S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. End the process.

With this configuration, the third special symbol change is started at the timing when the next special symbol change is started, based on the information in which the background of the next special symbol change is set (information set in the background information storage area 223 da). The background (“sea” stage, “mountain” stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

Next, the automatic pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the auto pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410). This auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is a case where the auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is normally pressed (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246) with respect to the auto-pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. The processing content is different.

When the auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed in the same manner as the auto-pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S4510 that the normal pressing period is reached (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246), a display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing count counter 223dd is added by 1. (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and if the value of the press count counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552: No in FIG. 246). ), This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4522, when the value of the pressing count counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552: Yes in FIG. 246), the pressing effect scenario is then changed to non-automatic pressing 2 (4553), and the pressing count is changed. The value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this process is terminated.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1707) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. In that case (S6801: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), then the current is the first frame button operation valid period, which is the period in which the background can be selected. (S6802). In the process of S6802, when it is determined that the first frame button operation valid period is (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S6803), and it is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no flag (set to off) (S6803: No), then it is determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to on (S6804).

If it is determined in the processing of S6804 that the operation change flag 223db is set to on (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to off (S6805), and the checking flag 233dc is set to on. (S6806), the process proceeds to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processes of S6804 to S6806 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6807.

In the process of S6807, it is determined whether the confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation is an operation of the frame button 22 while the effect of setting the background of the next fluctuation is being executed, and it is said that there is a confirmation operation (the frame button 22 is operated) in the process of S6807. If it is determined (S6807), the information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this process is terminated.

Here, the process of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). If the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background of the next fluctuation is being executed, the display is switched to the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. The enlarged background display (“sea” or “mountain”) in this small area Ds2 becomes the background to be shifted when the next fluctuation is started. That is, in the processing of S6808, when the confirmation operation is executed once for the background information currently set (in the current fluctuation) (the "mountain" stage in FIG. 241 (c)), the transition is made in the next fluctuation. The background information corresponding to the "sea" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background to be used, and when the confirmation operation is executed twice, the background information corresponding to the "mountain" stage is used as the background to be transferred in the next fluctuation. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 247. In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag is not set on (set to off) (S6804: No), it is for display corresponding to the next background of the currently set background. A background command is set (S6809), and this process ends.

The process of S6809 is in a state where both the operation change flag 223db and the checking flag 223dc are set to off during the first frame button operation valid period, that is, a normal background change effect (FIG. 241 (b)). This process is executed when (see) is executed, and the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

In the process of S6802, if it is determined that the current period is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the period before the end (S6810). The pre-end period is a period indicating that the remaining period until the end of the special symbol variation is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and when it is determined that it is not the pre-end period (S6810: No). ), When this process is terminated and it is determined that the period is before the end (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, a continuous striking operation) is performed during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends). ) Is executed, the background change operation mode executed in the next special symbol change is changed to a specific background change operation mode, which causes dissatisfaction to the player. Can be suppressed from occurring.

Further, by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change, a situation occurs in which the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to suppress this.

It should be noted that the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in this special symbol change and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol variation based on the setting in. As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being executed for the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol change is incorrect even though the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol change from starting and unintentional background change being executed while the is being operated (pressed) multiple times.

In this control example, when the pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect is determined to be "long press", the timing release effect is executed in the pressing effect 2, but for example, the player. May be configured so that all of the combined pressing effects can be executed while the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. The effect executed by the pressing effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the pressing effect 2 executed when the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1 determines “long press” as the combined pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player presses and holds the frame button 22 and reaches the operation determination point while the auto continuous hitting function is being executed in the pressing effect 1, "auto timing is set by pressing and holding the button" in the comment column. "Masu" is displayed, and next to it, a schematic diagram imitating a timing gauge and an expectation level indicating the rate at which timing is set are displayed.

In this case, during the pressing effect 1, the operation timing of the timing pressing effect is changed in the timing gauge displayed in the comment column while the effect of raising the meter of the meter display unit D1 is executed by executing the automatic continuous striking function. The lottery effect is executed.

Then, the auto timing is set in the period until the pressing effect 2 is started, and in the timing pressing effect (see FIG. 158 (a)) executed in the pressing effect 2, the frame button 22 is operated at the set auto timing. The same effect as when it was done is executed. With this configuration, the player can execute the continuous hitting effect and the timing pressing effect simply by continuously pressing (holding down) the frame button 22.

In the above-mentioned example, the degree of expectation for which the auto timing is set may be set randomly or may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the degree of expectation may or may not be notified to the player. Further, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (until the pressing effect 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance. May be good.

For example, two timings for determining the operation content of the pressing effect 1 are provided, and when it is determined that "long press" is performed at the earlier determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed and before the subsequent determination timing. The auto timing setting result may be notified to the player. With this configuration, if the auto timing setting content is bad, the operation content can be changed (for example, a continuous striking operation) from there, and a normal timing pressing effect can be executed as the pressing effect 2.

<7th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. In the seventh control example, when the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at a short interval (10 seconds in this control example) with respect to the second control example described above, the interval (10 seconds). In this control example, it is configured to execute an additional effect for 10 seconds). Specifically, when the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) is started after the pressing effect (first pressing effect) is completed and a short interval (for example, 10 seconds) is opened, 1 It is configured to execute an additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 between the second pressing effect and the second pressing effect. As a result, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect.

Here, when the first pressing effect is completed, the second pressing effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) even though the player releases the frame button 22. , The player has to move his hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may make it impossible to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. Therefore, it is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the second pressing effect is completed, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the flow in which the additional effect is set in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing a flow in which additional effects are set. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a plurality of operation effects are performed by the third symbol variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (The effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is configured to be configurable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for the special symbol variation 1 (special symbol variation with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is changed to the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts). The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the period of ~ 30 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the special symbol fluctuation), and the third fluctuation pattern (the special symbol fluctuation It is configured so that the third symbol variation effect is set separately for the variation pattern) corresponding to the period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start.

Here, in recent years, in order to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage, it is required to increase the types of the effect patterns of the third symbol variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Was there. Therefore, the applicant divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into a plurality of periods as in the control example, and creates a series of effect patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period. I thought about the process to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to create the same type of effect pattern with a smaller amount of data than when each series of effect patterns is stored. Therefore, a larger amount of effect patterns can be created by using the same amount of data when a series of effect patterns are stored, the amount of data used for the third symbol variation effect can be reduced, and other effects (for example, an accessory) can be created. It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, privilege effects displayed during jackpots, etc., and it is possible to set various effects within the limited data capacity, allowing players to set various effects. It had the effect of suppressing early boredom of the game.

However, when creating a series of effect patterns by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, when an operation effect is set in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each of the continuous variation patterns. was there. Furthermore, among the continuous fluctuation patterns, the operation effect is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation pattern that is executed first. When the operation effect is executed in the first half of the variation pattern to be executed next, an effect pattern in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is created.

Further, by setting a long period of the operation effect executed in at least one variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns, the period in which the player is enthusiastically played the game is continued, and the player can play the game. It is conceivable to suppress getting bored early, but when such a configuration is used, it becomes easy to create an effect pattern in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Met.

As described above, this control example solves a problem that occurs when a process capable of creating a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is executed.

In the first variation pattern, the operation effect for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 (“variation B”) is performed, and in the second variation pattern, the operation effect is 25 seconds (“SP2”). However, in the third variation pattern, an operation effect (“SSP2”) having an operation validity period of 10 seconds can be set.

Specifically, the "variation B" that can be set as the first fluctuation pattern has an operation valid period (10 seconds) 17 seconds after the first fluctuation pattern is started (after the special symbol fluctuation is started). It is set, and the operation valid period ends after 3 seconds. In the third symbol display device 81, after the third symbol fluctuates at high speed in the first 17 seconds and the left and right third symbols stop at the same number, the operation effect suggests the expectation of a big hit ( The operation valid period (10 seconds) is executed, and the effect of notifying the player of the result of the operation effect to the player is executed in the remaining 3 seconds.

"SP2", which can be set as the second fluctuation pattern, is the operation effect to be executed next for 3 seconds after the end of the first fluctuation pattern (after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the special symbol fluctuation). A display explaining the effect content of the operation valid period (23 seconds) is executed, and then the operation valid period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation valid period ends after 4 seconds. In this "SP2", the operation valid period is set as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variable (color change, (Changes in comments, etc.), the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be changed (color change, brightness change, change in presence / absence of lighting), or a drive provided in the pachinko machine 10. The drive mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change in presence / absence of drive, change in drive speed, change in drive range). Therefore, the player changes various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period of time (23 seconds in this control example).

"SSP2", which can be set as the third fluctuation pattern, is the operation effect to be executed next for 4 seconds after the end of the second fluctuation pattern (60 seconds after the start of the special symbol fluctuation). A display explaining the effect content of the operation valid period (10 seconds) is executed, then the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and 16 seconds after the operation valid period elapses, that is, after the special symbol change is started. It ends after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during the operation valid period is executed. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the special symbol is the period during which the operation valid period is not set (from 15 seconds after the start of the third variation pattern to the end). Period) is used.

Then, when "fluctuation B" is set in the first fluctuation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second fluctuation pattern, the operation validity period set in "variation B" and "SP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid period and the operation validity period is 6 seconds. This 6-second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed. When "SP2" is set in the second fluctuation pattern and "SSP2" is set in the third fluctuation pattern, the operation validity period set in "SP2" and "SSP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid period is 8 seconds. This 8 second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed.

Then, the remaining period until the operation valid period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "variation B" is set to "SP2" is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (10 seconds) set in "variation B" is within 4 seconds, the additional effect is executed. It will be. Further, the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is set to "SSP2", and the remaining period until the operation valid period (10 seconds) is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (25 seconds) set in "SP2" is within 2 seconds, the additional effect is executed. Become.

In this way, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set are executed, additional effects are added based on the operation content (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated) of the previously executed operation effect. By using the configuration for determining whether to execute, the problem when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set is executed (that is, the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of not operating the frame button 22 are repeated in a short period of time. As a result, the operational burden on the player increases, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player cannot concentrate on the game).

As described above, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set are executed, the operation content of the operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated) to be executed before is executed. ) Is used to determine whether to execute the additional effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set are set at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the additional effect may be executed at a predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251 the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an operation effect when "SP2" is set as the second fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 250 (b) is a diagram between "SP2" and "SSP2". FIG. 250 (c) is a schematic view showing an example of a normal display in which the "additional effect" is not executed during the period in which the set "additional effect" can be executed, and FIG. 250 (c) shows the case where "SSP2" is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation effect in.

As shown in FIG. 250 (a), during "SP2", the valid period notification unit S1 (a diagram imitating the frame button) that notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is set. The period display unit M1 indicating the operation valid period in "SP2" is displayed, and the remaining period (a in the figure) of the operation valid period is displayed by the period display unit M1. Then, in the comment column, the characters "press the button" that urge the player to operate the frame button 22 are displayed.

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the character "chance" is displayed in the comment column as the operation result as shown in FIG. 250 (b). Since the timing shown in FIG. 250 (b) is the timing when the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), the valid period notification unit S1 and the period display unit M1 display. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), "SSP2" is started, and the valid period notification unit S1 (a diagram imitating the frame button) notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is reached. ) And the period display unit M2 indicating the operation valid period in "SSP2" are displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display unit M2. In addition, the characters "continuous hit" indicating the operation content in "SSP2" and the characters "set the meter to MAX" indicating the effect content are displayed.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (c), when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is in the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). Since the display of the valid period notification unit S1 for notifying the fact, the display of the period display unit M2 indicating the operation valid period, and the display for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 are not performed, the player once The operation of the frame button 22 will be stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250 (c) is displayed. If such a display (directing) is executed in a short period of time, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the motivation for playing the game is reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-mentioned problem occurs by executing the additional effects during the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). It is restrained from being lost. Next, the display (effect) content of the additional effect will be described with reference to FIG. 251.

FIG. 251 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. , FIG. 251 (c) is a schematic diagram showing a further different example displayed as an additional effect in this control example.

In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), with respect to the display content shown in FIG. 250 (b), an additional valid period notification unit Sa for notifying the operation valid period set by the additional effect, and an addition indicating the additional operation valid period. The difference is that the period display unit Ma is displayed, and the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation valid period is displayed by the additional period display unit Ma. By executing the additional effect in this way, the operation valid period of "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250 (a)), and then the operation valid period of "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250 (c)). ), Since it is possible to continuously notify the player that the operation is valid for the period up to), the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and the motivation for playing is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (a), the display mode (display form and display position) of the additional valid period notification unit Sa for notifying the operation valid period is the same as the display mode of the valid period notification unit S1 or S2. , It does not give a sense of discomfort to the fact that the additional effect is being executed. Further, as an additional effect, the player operates the frame button 22 to display the additional comment for the comment displayed by the operation effect of "SP2". Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The displayed effect (operation effect) does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), only the additional period display unit Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation validity period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 (b) and 251 (c).

FIG. 251 (b) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of “SP2” shown in FIG. 250 (a) is continuously (extended) displayed. As shown in FIG. 251 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the period display unit M1 indicating the operation valid period of "SP2" is displayed in a state where there is no remaining period, and next to it ( The additional period display unit Ma is displayed on the left side in FIG. 251 (b). As a result, when the remaining period a decreases in "SP2" (moves to the left side of the period display unit M1) and the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, an additional effect is produced. When it is started, the additional period display unit Ma can be displayed, and it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the operation effect executed by the additional effect is an extension of the operation effect of "SP2". ..

Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also added because the effect of rewriting (updating) the characters of "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" is executed. It is possible to recognize that the operation effect executed by the effect is an extension of the operation effect of "SP2".

FIG. 251 (c) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of “SSP2” shown in FIG. 250 (c) is displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251 (c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display unit M2 indicating an operation valid period of "SSP2" is displayed, and next to it (from the viewpoint of FIG. 251 (b)). The additional period display unit Ma is displayed on the right side). As a result, the remaining period b decreases in the additional effect (moves to the left side of the period display unit Ma), and when the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, of "SSP2". When the operation valid period is started, the remaining period of the period display unit M2 can be displayed so as to decrease, and the operation effect executed by the additional effect is the operation of "SSP2" for the player. It is possible to recognize that the production is being executed in advance.

Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also an effect in which the display form of the meter, which is increased by the operation effect of "SSP2", is changed (for example, the color of the meter is changed or the effect around the meter is changed. By making it variable, an effect that suggests that the meter becomes MAX in the operation effect of "SSP2") is executed, so that the additional effect and the operation effect of "SSP2" are more related to each other. Can be recognized as.

<About the electrical configuration of the 7th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from the second control example described above, and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that the content of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

FIG. 252 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting a detailed variation pattern according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110. Has been done. Specifically, the first variation for selecting the effect mode (first variation pattern) for the period of 30 seconds from the start of the variation (that is, the period from 0 second to 30 seconds after the start of the variation). The pattern selection table 222a1, the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the effect mode (second fluctuation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation. A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the effect mode (third variation pattern) for the period until the elapse has elapsed, and an additional effect selection table 222a4 for determining the effect mode of the additional effect are provided.

In this control example, the first to third fluctuation patterns and additional effects are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the main control device 110, and the fluctuation patterns are combined. Perform one variation effect based on. For example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and one fluctuation is made based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Perform the production. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the main control device 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and the second fluctuation is selected from the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. A pattern is selected, a third variation pattern is selected from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, an additional effect is selected from the additional effect selection table 222a4, and one based on the selected first to third variation patterns and the additional effect. Perform a variable effect of.

Although not shown, when a fluctuation time other than the above-mentioned fluctuation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time is displayed. Will be selected. For example, when the short deviation (variation time 7 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in which the variation pattern of 7 seconds is defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 252 (b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of the variation) will be described. FIG. 252 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252 (b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of the variation) corresponds to the value of the first effect counter 223f1. Is stipulated.

Specifically, the variation A, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the first effect counter 223f1. Although not shown, a plurality of types of effect modes of variation A are defined, and variation A is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variation A, so that the player's interest can be improved.

With respect to the value "100 to 198" of the first effect counter 223f1, the variation B, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. Although not shown, a plurality of types of the effect mode of the variation B are defined as in the variation A, and the variation B is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variation B can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from the start of the variation to 31 seconds to 60 seconds) will be described. FIG. 252 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252 (c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the effect mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the variation is defined corresponding to the value of the second effect counter 223f2. There is.

Specifically, the variable SP1 which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the second effect counter 223f2. As with the variation A, the variation SP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variable SP1 can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

With respect to the value "100 to 198" of the second effect counter 223f2, the variable SP2, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. As with the variation B, the variation SP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variable SP2 can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from the start of the variation to 61 seconds to 90 seconds) will be described. FIG. 252 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252 (d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the effect mode from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of the variation is defined corresponding to the value of the third effect counter 223f3. There is.

Specifically, the variable SSP1 is defined as an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed for the value "0 to 99" of the third effect counter 223f3. As with the variation A, the variable SSP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variable SSP1 can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

For the value "100 to 198" of the third effect counter 223f3, the variable SSP2, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. As with the variation B, the variable SSP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variable SSP2, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Although the details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. By these independent counters, each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern with a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern with a period of 31 to 60 seconds, period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) is used as a detailed fluctuation pattern. Since the effect mode in the third variation pattern) is selected, the variation of the effect mode can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

Here, in each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern having a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern having a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and a third fluctuation pattern having a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds). When the pressing effect of pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, when the pressing effect is executed in the period of 0 to 30 seconds and the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, the pressing effect executed first. If the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in (pressing effect executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds), the pressing effect (a period of 31 to 60 seconds) is performed with a short interval after pressing the frame button 22. The pressing effect) is executed. In this case, even though the frame button 22 has been pressed in the first pressing effect and the hand is released from the frame button 22, the second pressing effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, the player moves his / her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may make it impossible to concentrate on the game.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variable effect and the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow, the first pressing effect ends. During the period from the later to the start of the next (second) pressing effect, an additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is selected and executed. As a result, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect, so that the second pressing effect can be performed. It is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the end, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

Here, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

The additional effect selection table 222a4 is used to select an additional effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first pressing effect when the pressing effect is continuously executed in the above-mentioned one variation effect. It is a table of.

As shown in FIG. 253, an additional effect is defined when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect are a specific combination (when the pressing effect is continuous). When the frame button 22 is pressed late in the first pressed effect among the continuous pressed effects, the period from the end of the first pressed effect to the start of the next pressed effect. The specified additional effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation patterns (first to third fluctuation patterns) of each fluctuation period in one fluctuation production do not form a specific combination (when the pressing effects are not continuous), the additional effects are not specified and are added. No production is performed.

Specifically, first, a case where the first fluctuation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (no pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (that is, 60). The pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect regardless of whether the variation effect is completed in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)". Since there is no additional effect, no additional effect is specified and no additional effect is executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (without pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" and "variation SSP1". (No pressing effect) ”, since the pressing effect is not continuously executed in one variable effect, no additional effect is specified. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so that the additional effect 2 is added. It is stipulated.

If this additional effect 2 is specified, the additional effect 2 will be executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the pressing effect executed in the second variation pattern. Since the additional effect 2 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player can continue to use the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. The operation can be executed.

Next, a case where the first fluctuation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (without pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (that is, 60). The pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect regardless of whether the variation effect is completed in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)". Since there is no additional effect, no additional effect is specified and no additional effect is executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" and "variation SSP1". In either case of "(without pressing effect)" or "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern. Additional effect 1 is specified.

Further, if the third variation pattern is "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern. Therefore, in this case, , In addition to the additional effect 1, the additional effect 2 is specified.

If the additional effect 1 is specified, the additional effect 1 is executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the pressing effect executed in the first variation pattern. Since the additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to use the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed. The operation can be executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the second control example described above in that the content of the effect counter 223f is changed and that the validity period storage area 223ea is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is used to select the first fluctuation counter 223f1 used to select the first fluctuation pattern described above, the second fluctuation counter 223f2 used to select the second fluctuation pattern, and the third fluctuation pattern. A hanging third fluctuation counter 223f3 is provided (see FIG. 254 (b)).

The valid period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not the effect is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (that is, the period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is valid), and is a frame. The period during which the button 22 is effective is set by the value of the elapsed time (ms) from the start of the variation effect. This valid period storage area 223ea is used for the pressing effect to be executed when the variation pattern command for executing the pressing effect is set in the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031: Yes in FIG. 256). The period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257), when an additional effect is set (S6854: Yes in FIG. 257), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 according to the additional effect becomes effective. Is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). Although not shown, the contents of the valid period storage area 223ea are cleared when one variation effect is completed.

Next, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the second control example described above in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

The additional effect data storage area 233n is an area for storing the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. The additional effect data storage area 233n is set to the received command when it is determined in the variation pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes). Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when the execution of the additional effect is determined at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is on), the data is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. The effect data is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the additional effect is executed.

The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined. If it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined, and it is turned off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 has not been decided. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to on when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6903). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1, it is referred to (S3851: Yes) (S3852), and the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is turned on. When the determination is made (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined. If it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and it is turned off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has not been decided. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to on when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6902). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2, it is referred to (S3855: Yes) (S3856), and the value of the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is turned on. When the determination is made (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. In this control example, for the second control example described above, the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the frame button input monitoring -The difference is that the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed instead of the effect process (see S1707 of FIG. 137), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 256. In the variation display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, when a variation pattern in which the pressing effect is executed is set for the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above (S2031). : Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid according to the pressing effect to be executed is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In this seventh control example, the pressing effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed, and the processing corresponding to those effects is not executed. However, the pressing effect in the second control example is not executed. , Slot effect, and point effect may be executed, and processing corresponding to those effects may be executed. As a result, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the variation display setting process 6 (S1712), first, the processes S2001 to S2003 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (that is, the variation pattern received from the main control device 110) is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a (first variation pattern selection table 222a1 to third variation pattern selection table). The selection is made based on 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and a display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

When the processing of S2006 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S2031. In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is to execute the pressing effect (S2031: Yes), each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091 is selected. The operation valid period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the valid period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute the pressing effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process of S2007 Move to processing.

When the processing of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed as in the second control example, and this processing is completed.

Next, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 257. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707), the frame button pressing command is set based on the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period of the frame button 22. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period of the pressing effect, the period until the next pressing effect is started is determined, and the period until the next pressing effect is started is short. When it is determined (10 seconds or less in this control example), an additional effect command is set to execute the additional effect.

Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the valid period storage area 223ea, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid (frame button operation valid). It is determined whether or not it is a period) (S6851). If it is determined in the process of S6851 that the frame button operation is not valid (S6851: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6851 when it is determined that the frame button operation valid period is (S6851: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801).

If it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6801: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the processing of S6801 (S6801: Yes), the display frame button pressing command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to S6853. Transition. The display frame button pressing command set in the process of S6852 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display frame button pressing command, the display control device 114 determines a period in which the command is set (for example, a pressing effect period in the second variation pattern) from the received command, and produces an effect according to the period (for example, the period of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). For example, the comment display effect (see FIG. 250 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S6852 is completed, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853). In the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is not the period in which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6853, when it is determined that the current period is the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in order to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, S6854 Move to processing.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less. In the process of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), an additional effect command for display is issued in order to execute the additional effect. After setting (S6855), the valid period storage area 223ea is updated (S6856) based on the pressing valid period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processes of S6855 and S6856 are skipped and this process is performed. To finish.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 260. In this control example, the command determination process 4 (FIG. 258) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) for the second control example described above, and the variation pattern command process (FIG. 146). The point that the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 259 (a)) is executed instead of (see (a)), the point that the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) is added, and the pointer update process. The difference is that the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the command determination process 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 258. In the command determination process 4 (S2502) in this control example, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) is replaced with the variation pattern command for the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above. The difference is that the process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) is executed and the additional effect command process (see FIG. S259 (b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

In the command determination process 4 (S2502), first, the processes S2601 to S2604 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example. If it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command in the process of S2604 (S2605: Yes), the variation pattern command process 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (a). In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) in this control example, when there is additional effect data for the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) in the second control example described above, additional effect data is added. The difference is that the data is stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

In the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751). When additional effect data is set as the variation pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when the pressing effect is continuously set (selected) in the first variation pattern to the third variation pattern. Is.

In the processing of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes), the additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to additional effect 1 or additional effect 2) is input. , It is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process proceeds to S2701.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751 when it is determined that the received variation pattern command does not have additional effect data (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2701.

When the process shifts to the process of S2701, the processes of S2701 to S2706 are executed and the main process is terminated in the same manner as in the second control example described above.

In this way, when a variation pattern command that may execute an additional effect is received, the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n in advance. When executing (displaying) an additional effect, the additional effect can be executed (displayed) without delay. Not limited to this, the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect may be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n only when the additional effect is executed. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to store the effect data in the additional effect data storage area 233n, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example.

In the process of S2612, if it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the additional effect command has been received (S2639). If it is determined that the additional effect command has been received in the process of S2639 (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (b). This additional effect command process (S2640) is a process executed when an additional effect command indicating execution of the additional effect is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901).

In the process of S6901, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and this process is performed. To finish. As described above, the additional effect 1 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern.

By setting the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 to ON by the process of S6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to be (displayed).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this process is terminated. .. As described above, the additional effect 2 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern.

By setting the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 to ON by the process of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed at the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to be displayed).

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2639 that the additional effect command has not been received (S2639: No), the process of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Next, the details of the pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 260. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined for the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the second control example described above, and the update timing of the additional effect (in each variation pattern). The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the pressing effect), and the other points are the same.

In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), first, the pointer 233f is added by 1 (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether or not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern) is determined (S3851). ).

In the process of S3851, when it is determined that the update timing of the additional effect 1 is (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). In the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case when the additional effect 1 is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed early or is not pressed). Or, the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), the additional effect 1 is executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). Since it takes less than 10 seconds to start), the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to off. (S3854), this process is terminated.

In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten with the area in the display data table buffer 233d in which the display data executed one second later is stored as the head. As a result, the additional effect 1 can be executed (displayed) from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (1 second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and may be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed according to the change.

When it is determined in the process of S3851 that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). Whether or not it is determined (S3855).

In the process of S3855, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the case when the additional effect 2 is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed early or is not pressed). Or, the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), the additional effect 2 is executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). Since it takes less than 10 seconds to start), the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to off. (S3858), this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S3855 that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the processes of S3802 to S3806 are executed and the present process is terminated in the same manner as in the second control example described above.

In this way, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect is overwritten (updated) in advance in the display data table buffer at the update timing of each additional effect. The production can be executed (displayed) without delay. Not limited to this, it is of course possible to update the display data table buffer at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed. The data table buffer 233d may be overwritten (updated).

Further, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of each additional effect, and then whether or not the additional effect is executed (whether or not the additional effect flag is on) is determined. It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the additional effect is executed (that is, when the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is the update timing of the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed with a predetermined interval, an additional effect is set for the interval between them, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, a plurality of operation effects can be continuously performed by performing processing so as to delay the start timing of the operation effect to be executed first by a predetermined interval. It may be executed, or may be configured to perform the process so that the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later is advanced by a predetermined interval.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting an additional effect between the plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned additional effect after the end of the operation effect to be executed later, or to set a long period of the effect for displaying the result of the operation effect.

<Modified example of the 7th control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. In the above-described seventh control example, a case where a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol change effect executed for one special symbol change has been described, but in this modified example, continuous special symbol changes are performed. A case where a plurality of operation effects are set so as to straddle will be described. The same elements as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, a flow in which the additional effect in this modification is set will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing a flow in which additional effects are set across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set for a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the special symbol change is started. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22.

Then, when the first fluctuation pattern "variation A" and the second fluctuation pattern "SP2" are set as the fluctuation patterns of the special symbol fluctuation 1 (60 seconds) (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is 27. The operation effect is executed in a period of 2 to 4 seconds (23 seconds). In the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), since the end of the special symbol variation is the end timing of the second variation pattern "SP2", the end timing of the operation valid period of the "SP2" in the special symbol variation 1 and the special symbol variation The period between the start timing of the operation valid period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

Even in this 5 seconds, the same control as in the 7th control example described above is executed, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display contents of the additional effect 3 displayed in this modification will be described.

FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining the display contents of the additional effects when a plurality of operation effects are set across continuous special symbol fluctuations, and FIG. 262 (a) is an example of the display contents in the normal background change effect period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. FIG. 262 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262 (c) shows the display contents in the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), in this modified example, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed as in the sixth control example described above. Since the display content is the same as FIG. 241 (b) of the sixth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), an additional validity period notification unit Sa that notifies the validity period set by the additional effect 3 and an additional period display indicating the additional operation validity period are displayed. Part Ma is displayed, and the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation valid period is displayed by the additional period display unit Ma. Then, the characters "Get a new background with MAX" explaining the content of the game in the additional effect 3 and a meter that can be changed by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, the background that cannot normally be selected can be selected in the background change effect. Become.

FIG. 262 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the background change effect when a new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. As shown in FIG. 262 (c), normally, two types of "sea" stage and "mountain" stage could be selected as the background (see FIG. 262 (a)), but the new background was acquired by the additional effect 3. , The "River" stage is displayed selectably.

As described above, in the present modification, the additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed in the same manner as in the above-described seventh control example even in the plurality of operation effects set to straddle the plurality of special symbol fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the frame button executed by the player across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the additional effect 3, the condition that the meter is MAX may be the case where the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol variation 2 is set in advance. (So-called look-ahead), and the determination result may be a predetermined result (for example, a big hit). Moreover, you may combine both of them.

Further, the additional effect used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control example additionally sets both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operation validity period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 may be changed, and the operation validity period of the frame button 22 may not be changed.

Next, a case will be described in which only the effect mode is changed without changing the operation valid period of the frame button 22 as an additional effect with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic view showing a display content in which the display of the additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation valid period is deleted from the display content of FIG. 251 (a) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. 263 (b) shows an additional period display unit Ma indicating an additional operation valid period and a display in which the display of the period display unit M1 is deleted from the display contents of FIG. 251 (b) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. FIG. 263 (c) is a schematic view showing the contents, and FIG. 263 (c) shows the additional period display unit Ma and the period display unit M2 indicating the additional operation valid period from the display contents of FIG. 251 (c) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

As shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (c), since the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is not changed as the additional effect, the period during which the additional effect is executed is a period in which the operation valid period is not set. Therefore, the period display units M1 and M2 indicating the operation valid period and the additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation valid period are not displayed.

However, as an effect mode, the operation display unit Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the valid period notification unit Sa shown in FIG. 251 as a notification for urging the player to operate the frame button 22, so that the operation is effective. During the period between the period and the operation valid period (operation invalid period), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the frame button 22.

In this way, by executing the notification (display of the operation display unit Sb) for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 as the effect mode without changing the operation validity period as an additional effect, the player is notified. Therefore, it is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 over a plurality of operation validity periods, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of stopping it are frequently repeated. ..

As the effect mode of the additional effect in this case, it is preferable to use an effect mode in which the display mode is changed based on the player operating the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. As a result, although it is actually the operation invalid period, the player can be made to think that the display mode is changed based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22.

Specifically, as an effect actually executed during the operation valid period, an effect in which an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251 (a) or an effect shown in FIG. 251 (b). The operation of the frame button 22 is such that the content of the comment is changed in the middle based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the meter is accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251 (c). Regardless of this, it is preferable to execute the pseudo-effect mode that is executed in a pseudo manner.

As a result, it can be made to think that the display mode is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22. Further, the timing at which the display mode of the pseudo-effect mode described above changes may be switched based on the operation content (operation interval and number of operations) for the frame button 22 executed during the actual operation valid period. As a result, it can be made to think that the effect mode during the operation invalid period is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<8th control example>
Next, the eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, various effects are configured as an operation effect in which the player operates the frame button 22. This control example differs in that the effect mode control when the operation effect in each of the above-mentioned control examples is executed is different.

Specifically, control is executed to change the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated, based on the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect. With this configuration, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period is the predetermined time or less (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the operation valid period is the predetermined time. The effect mode in which the amount of change in the effect mode (meter increase amount, numerical value increase amount, etc.) based on the operation of the frame button 22 is larger (larger) than in the above case (for example, more than 5 seconds) is executed. So, you can enjoy the operation production to the end.

Further, in an operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (that is, a long press operation) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the remaining period of the operation valid period is a predetermined time or less (for example, 5). When it becomes (seconds or less), the period for determining that the long press operation has been performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). With this configuration, it is possible to experience the change in the effect mode based on the long press operation even at the end of the operation effect, so that the operation effect can be enjoyed to the end.

In this eighth control example, for each of the above-mentioned control examples, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. It differs from the changed point. Other points are the same as each control example described above. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of each control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the operation effect in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 (a) and 264 (b). As shown in FIG. 264 (a), a display mode is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 during the variable display of the third symbol. Then, a remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the symbol that imitates the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is configured to be variable based on the decrease in the remaining time. In this control example, the period of the remaining time is set as the red display color, and when the remaining time decreases, the remaining time is variably changed to white (the part displayed in red decreases). See FIG. 264 (b)).

Further, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, a long press of the frame button 22 indicates that the control (discrimination) is automatically performed in the same state as the continuous hitting. The characters are displayed. An indicator whose color changes based on repeated hits of the frame button 22 is displayed at the upper part of the display area. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the scale is set to the degree of expectation that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is a hit. When the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit and the color is changed (variable from white to red) to the place where the scale of the indicator is larger, the player does not win the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is changing. You can expect it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 264 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed and held (the frame button 22 is pressed continuously for 3 seconds or 1 second), the frame button 22 is pressed and held on the symbol imitating the frame button 22. The characters "automatic continuous hitting" are displayed to indicate that the detection is made and the state of repeated hitting is automatically set. In this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 determined to be long-pressed is variably set according to the remaining time when the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 has been pressed continuously for 3 seconds, the setting determined to be a long press is changed to the frame button 22 continuously for 1 second. When is pressed, it is switched and set so that it is determined to be a long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed and held after the remaining time is running low, more indicators can be stored and the button effect can be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held is changed depending on the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of variable indicator is increased or the speed of variable is increased. It may be configured. Further, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less) and the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value at which the indicator is variable or a predetermined value (for example, scale MAX) If the effect to be displayed up to is selected, the indicator may be variably displayed up to the scale 1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, regarding the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707), which is one of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time (frame button operation valid period) is a value larger than 0 (S7031). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is added by 1 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW press counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the long press determination value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the long press judgment value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is added by 1 within the range of the effect value set in the fluctuation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. Set the display command (S7042). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value (S7040: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. Is determined (S7043). When it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW pressing counter (not shown) is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S7044). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after being pressed, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, and the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is added by 1. Update. Then, when the value exceeds the long press determination value, the SW indicator is set to be variable. The amount of variation of the SW indicator is preset for each variation pattern, and is set to represent the degree of expectation of the hit / fail determination result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator regardless of whether the player presses and holds the button or hits the button repeatedly. Further, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, the player can be shown the effect of changing the indicator even when the SW effective time is short. The speed at which the indicator is varied may be set to increase depending on the value of the SW effective time.

The SW pressing counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a counter for measuring the number of times of pressing) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player executes the long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

In the state where the player continuously presses the frame button 22, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds) has been reached is determined by the pressing period determining means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determining means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You may.

By providing the press count measurement counter and the press period measurement counter in this way, it is possible to independently control the press operation (continuous press operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22.

Next, a modified example of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) described above, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is pressed and held. By shortening the long press judgment value (shortened from 3 seconds to 1 second), which is a value for determining that the device is used, long press operation is performed even when the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is short. When (automatic repeated hits) can be executed, and when the long press judgment value is shortened, the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is short by increasing the speed at which the SW indicator is changed. The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that can be variably set in advance) by the long press operation (automatic continuous hitting) executed in.

On the other hand, in this modification, if the long press operation (auto continuous hitting) is executed in the state where the long press judgment value is shortened, the long press operation (auto) when the long press judgment value is not shortened. The difference is that the value of the SW press counter is configured to be added more than the repeated hits).

In this modified example, when a long press operation (automatic repeated hits) is performed while the long press judgment value is shortened, a large amount of the SW press counter value is added (the interval between automatic repeated hits is short). However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), A large number of SW press counter values due to automatic repeated hits may be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266) of this modification will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, as in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above, S7031 to S7037 The process is executed. Then, in the process of S7073, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7051), not 1 second. When it is determined to be (3 seconds), the processes of S7038, S7041 and S7042 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S7051 when it is determined that the time is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is added by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is added by 2. S7053), a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S7037 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the same as the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. The processes of S7043 and S7044 are executed in the above, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this modified example, when the remaining period of the SW valid period (button operation valid period) is less than or equal to a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held. The value (time) to be used is shortened (reduced from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter added by the automatic repeated hit operation is added more than usual. did.

As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that can be variably set) by the long press operation (automatic repeated hits) that is executed when the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is short. be able to.

Further, unlike the eighth control example described above, since the value added to the SW pressing counter is configured to increase, the value of the SW pressing counter can be associated with the value of the SW indicator, and the control load can be associated with each other. It also has the effect of being able to reduce.

The SW pressing counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a counter for measuring the number of times of pressing) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player executes the long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

In the state where the player continuously presses the frame button 22, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds) has been reached is determined by the pressing period determining means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determining means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You may.

By providing the press count measurement counter and the press period measurement counter in this way, it is possible to independently control the press operation (continuous press operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22.

As described above, the configurations described in each control example may be appropriately combined, and in particular, each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example and each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the fourth control example are combined. Alternatively, each configuration of the combined pressing effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configuration of each pressing effect of the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or described in the second control example. Each configuration of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example is combined with each configuration of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example, and each configuration of the point effect described in the second control example is described in the third control example. It may be combined with each configuration of the point effect.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaced in a linear displacement on the base member, and a contact member formed so as to be in contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is the base. It has a first member rotatably arranged on the member, a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and can be linearly displaced on the first member. The base member includes a second member to be arranged, the base member includes a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. Game machine A1.

Here, a game machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed of the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57166). In this case, for example, a displacement member that is being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member to displace the contact member together with the displacement member, or a contact member is arranged at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , When the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper). Are known.

However, the above-mentioned conventional configuration has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the contact member while ensuring the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is a second member. Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the one member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased as compared with the first member. The speed can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the effect of the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, since the displacement member brings the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, into contact with the contact member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and the displacement member and the contact member are suppressed from being damaged. can do.

As a form of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a pinion gear arranged on the base member is meshed with a rack gear formed on the first member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to base the first member. The base member is displaced linearly with respect to the member, or the tip of the arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member and the arm body is rotationally driven to rotate the first member. An example is one that is linearly displaced with respect to.

Further, the contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the second member is linearly displaced in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the projecting direction. , The second member may be the one performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In either case, the first member, which has a slower displacement rate than the second member, is brought into contact with the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the contact, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A game machine A2 characterized in a direction that allows displacement.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is in contact with the displaceable direction of the contact member. Since the direction is such that the displacement of the displacement member is allowed, the contact member can escape while receiving the displacement of the displacement member, so that a cushioning action can be exerted, and as a result, the displacement member and the contact member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member in the game machine A2.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is in contact with the game machine A3. At that time, the escape operation of the contact member can be smoothly performed. Therefore, the cushioning action can be reliably exerted, and damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A3 includes a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member, so that the device as a whole is compact. It can be changed. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. As a result, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement increases, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, by also using one of the guide members, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

A game machine A5, characterized in that, in any of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member, so that the displacement member hits the contact member. It is possible to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, so that the displacement member is brought into contact with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position of the displacement member with the target position, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the member (the contact member functions as a stopper). By arranging the displacement member in a non-contact position and not contacting the two, the number of contacts is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to the contact is reduced, and the life of the members is improved. Can be planned.

In any of the game machines A2 to A5, a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is By engaging the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member. Since the structure is such that the vehicle is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is increased, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the displacement may be hindered.

In this case, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the effect of the effect due to the displacement.

The direction of pushing back the displacement member means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member comes into contact with the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized by being displaced.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member is among the displacement members. Since it is in contact with the first member of the displacement member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be improved. That is, since the contact member is in contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, an auxiliary force acts from the contact member to the displacement member (first member). (That is, the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state starts to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) is longer. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

In the game machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member. The gaming machine A8 characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, it is possible to quickly and linearly displace the displacement member from the stopped state, and after the start of the linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect of effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force to push back the displacement member by the contact member is strengthened to cause displacement. The initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, so that the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. You can increase the speed.

The large (small) gear ratio means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one rotation is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation is reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slow. That is, it has been impossible in the past to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member and increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, this compatibility is possible for the first time.

<Concept of the invention using the lower united unit 600 as an example>
It includes a driving means, a displacement member driven by the driving means and formed so as to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member with which the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that at least a component of the velocity components of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members can be displaced between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and a contact position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. The game machine to be formed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position are displaced in a direction close to each other, and the pair of displacement members are integrated at the contact position. The production is performed to form a single character.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated, and the posture becomes unstable, for example, they are bounced off each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, it takes a long time to integrate the pair of displacement members to form one character, which increases the time. The effect of the production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so that the displacement member is located at the first position. It is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement is performed until the vicinity of the first position is reached. Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, the time required to integrate the displacement member with the contacted member to form one character can be reduced, and the extension can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the contacted member may be a member stopped at the first position, or may be a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the contacted member is arranged in the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displacement member is placed in the first position with respect to the contacted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state. It may be abutted), and is arranged at the first position substantially at the same time as the displaced member (that is, the displaced member and the abutted member in the displaced state are abutted at the first position). It may be.

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position and a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position. , A form combining these is exemplified.

Further, the decrease of the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is reduced but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes 0, and This is intended to include a case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

The game machine B1 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means has a speed component of the displacement member in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the transmission means reduces the velocity component of the displacement member at least in the direction toward the contacted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the drive means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

As the state in which the drive state is constant, for example, if the drive means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. To. However, changes in state during transient response during start and stop shall be ignored.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a displaceable base member, and the transmission means is located at a position separated from the rotary base rotatably connected to the base member by a predetermined distance. A connecting member having a connecting tip portion that is formed and rotatably connected to the displacement member is provided, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base portion in a direction that brings the connecting tip portion closer to the first position. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

According to the game machine B3, a connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip portion of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base portion. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated with the rotation base as the center of rotation in the direction in which the connecting tip is brought closer to the first position, the first position (that is, the contacted member) of the velocity components of the displacement member. The component in the direction toward the direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. As described above, since the transmission means inserts a connecting member between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means is transmitted. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a base member in which the displacement member is displaceably arranged, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guide groove. A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is a component of at least a velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the contacted member. However, the gaming machine B4 is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B4, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guided portion to be guided along the guide groove. Of the velocity components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means The structure of can be simplified.

A game machine B5, wherein any one of the game machines B2 to B3 is provided with an interposition member which is displaceably connected to the base member on one side and displaceably connected to the displacement member on the other side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B3, one side is displaceably connected to the base member and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. , The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the intermediate member can be caused to act on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be in a form in which the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposition member are combined. As a result, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In the game machine B5, the interposition member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support on one side and the other side.

According to the game machine B6, one side and the other side of the interposition member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the interposition member is on one side. The other side is displaced by an arc-shaped locus with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Therefore, such an arcuate displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the intermediate member member. As a result, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. A game machine B7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B7, in any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means has such that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. Since it is formed in, it is possible to more reliably suppress the generation of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

In the game machine B7, the transmission means is characterized in that, among the velocity components of the displacement member, a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to have a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member has a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in the direction away from the contacted member at the first position, the displacement member is contacted when the displacement member displaced at the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Can be released from the contacted member, whereby the generation of impact can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, if the value is negative in the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc. Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value) can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the generation of impact.

In any of the game machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the contacted member and a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacting member are provided, and the above-mentioned The contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmitting means is a speed component of the contacted member in a state where the driving state of the second driving means is constant. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that at least a component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, so that the effect of bringing the pair of members into contact with each other is produced. The effect of can be enhanced. For example, by displacing the contacted member and the displacement member in a direction close to each other and abutting (coalescing) them at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the game machine B9, a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacted member is provided, and the second transmitting means is at least one of the velocity components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the generation of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. it can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the contacted member and the displacement member from repelling each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of the contacted member and the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, it is covered until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time required to integrate the contact member with the displacement member to form one character is reduced for both the contact member and the displacement member, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means reduces the velocity component of the contacted member at least in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position in a state where the drive state of the second drive means is constant. Since this can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, the control of the second driving means can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

The contacted member, the second driving means, and the second transmitting means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement members, the driving means, and the transmitting means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposition member in the game machine B5 or B6 may be intervened between the base member and the contacted member.

<Concept of the invention using the protruding unit 700 as an example>
A first transmission means and a second transmission that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the first member and the second member, respectively. In a gaming machine provided with means, the first transmission means has a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the driving means, and the first driving loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means can be formed, and the second transmitting means has a second predetermined section in which the driving means is loaded with a second driving force. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmitting means is the first. 1 In the state of forming a predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section at least a part of the first predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmitting means and the first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-53858). According to such a game machine, since the two members (first member and second member) can be displaced by the driving means of 1, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the configuration in which the member 2 is displaced by the driving means 1, the driving force for driving both is overlapped, so that the load on the driving means becomes large and the durability thereof is lowered. It was. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (first member and second member) are alternately displaced (one by one), the load of the driving means is reduced, but the state in which both the two members are displaced cannot be formed. The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the first transmission means can form a first predetermined section and a first suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than that of the first predetermined section, and the first suppression section can be formed. In a state in which the two transmission means can form a second predetermined section and a second suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than the second predetermined section, and the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section. In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, at least a part of the second predetermined section is the first. 1 The transmission means forms the first suppression section, that is, when one is relatively high load, the other is relatively low load, and when the other is relatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the drive means can be distributed, the load of the drive means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), and it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are both displaced. Therefore, while reducing the load on the driving means, It is possible to improve the effect of production.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member, and the first member or the first member or A cam rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member is provided, and in the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is determined by the first predetermined. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member in a section or a second predetermined section.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which the pin portion of the crank member slides and which imparts a displacement to the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member is measured by the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member.

According to the game machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the center of rotation to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the center of rotation of the crank member). The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member per unit can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member can be changed. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is performed while enhancing the effect. In the section, the load of the driving means can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity, and the first suppression section or the first suppression section or the first. 2. In the restraint section, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the weight of the first member or the second member is used to obtain the first. The load of the driving means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the driving means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

Further, in this way, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the own weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the cam member and the cam rubbing member are interlocked, or the crank member and the crank rubbing member When the load of the driving means is changed as in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the drive means can be changed while maintaining the speed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means gives a displacement to the first member by being rubbed against a cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member. The second transmission means includes a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion, and a crank thereof. The cam member and the cam member are provided with a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and a crank rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so that a space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately is provided. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the displacement deviation of the first member and the second member and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, and the first member or the second member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a non-transmission section for maintaining the two members in a stopped state can be formed, and displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transfer the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, so that the first member or the second member is in the stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the driving means becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force, so that the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. In places where it is difficult to displace smoothly, the driving force of the driving means is not transmitted to the first member or the second member, and a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state is provided. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to give momentum, and after the momentum is given (that is, through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each of the non-transmission sections. A game machine C7 characterized in that.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form a non-transmission section at the same time, and after passing through each of these non-transmission sections, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time, the driving means can idle with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. A game machine C8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member Has a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, so that when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect by avoiding being in a state.

In any of the game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides are provided, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to give a displacement to the first member or the second member. The non-transmission section is a section provided with the crank rubbing member and the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed concentrically with the rotation center of the crank member, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. If so, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. , The pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin part reaching a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. When sliding toward, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means The load of is excessive. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member displaced so as to be slidable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member, the slide member can be rotated. The conversion means includes a rotating member arranged in the base member and a conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into a rotational motion of the rotating member. The converting means is such that the slide displacement is the rotation of the rotating member. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is possible to form a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, a game machine including a base member, a slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236802). Further, there is also known a game machine in which a rotating member and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member are provided on the slide member. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to rotate a rotating member arranged on the slide member while sliding displacement (linear motion) of the slide member, and it is possible to produce an effect that combines linear motion and rotary motion. Can be done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are arranged on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member and a conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational motion of the rotating member are provided. The rotating member can be rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced by that amount to drive the slide member (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load of the driving means for causing).

In this case, according to the game machine D1, the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. Therefore, only the form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the slide member is slidably displaced while the rotating member remains non-rotating. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotary movement) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. D2 is a gaming machine D2 comprising a pinion gear, and a releasing means formed on the base member so as to be able to release the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear.

According to the game machine D2, the conversion means are a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member and a pinion gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Further, since the conversion means includes the releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to form not only a form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also a form in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotating. The number of combinations of member motions (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, the releasing means is arranged on the base member, and it is not necessary to dispose the means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. .. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means rotates at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain a mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by being released.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to rotate at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain the rack gear. Since the meshing with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. At least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. , When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, such meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to displace at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby causing the rack gear and the pinion gear to come together. Since the meshing is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction after the release, and when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. A gaming machine D6 comprising a pinion gear and a part of the rack gear in which teeth are missing.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member when the pinion gear passes through the tooth-missing portion of the rack gear. .. That is, according to this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, while the teeth of the rack gear. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the missing portion, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by the inertial force.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped. The form in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of the sliding member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game machine D6, the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear are released by missing a part of the teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to dispose of the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D6, the tooth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear is characterized in that the rigidity is higher than that of the other teeth.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion collide with the teeth of the pinion gear that have passed through the missing portion of the rack gear, so that where they are easily damaged, the rigidity is increased to improve durability. be able to.

As a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a form for increasing the tooth width of the tooth is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration of the meshing property with the pinion gear.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. The one-way clutch includes a pinion gear and a one-way clutch disposed in a rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation is cut off. A game machine D8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that the state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the state of blocking the transmission of rotation can be changed. Therefore, by changing the one-way clutch to the state of blocking the transmission of rotation, the slide displacement rotates. It is possible to form a state that is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, not only the one-way clutch is in a state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also, for example, the one-way clutch is in a state of blocking the transmission of rotation of the rotating member. The slide member is slid and displaced while it is not rotating, or the one-way clutch is changed from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. It is possible to form a form in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued by its inertial force while the is stopped.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is non-rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the rotating member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped, and the number of combinations of the slide member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be determined. Can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and displaced on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. D9 is a gaming machine D9 comprising an operator operated to change between a state in which the clutch is allowed and a state in which the clutch is blocked, and the operator is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and being arranged on the slide member are provided. , The displacement of the displacement member can be combined in addition to the motion of the slide member and the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion), and the number of combinations thereof can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operator of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can have both the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the slide member with a means for operating the operator of the one-way clutch, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operator operated to change a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation transmission is blocked, and the base member is used when the slide member is slidably displaced. The gaming machine D10 includes an engaging portion located on the displacement locus of the operator, and the operator is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, the base member is provided with an engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the slide member is slidably displaced, and is engaged when the slide member is slidably displaced. Since the operator is operated by the joint, it is not necessary to dispose of a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the operator) on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole is increased accordingly. Can be lightened. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

The position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the displacement locus of the operator described above. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement locus, or may be in the middle of the displacement locus.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member that is slidably displaced on the base member and a second driving means that applies a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the allowable state to the regulated state or from the regulated state to the allowable state. As a result, the position where the rotating state of the rotating member is changed when the sliding member is slidably displaced and the position where the rotating member is rotated while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped are set according to, for example, a gaming state. It can be changed, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated according to the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operator can be operated and the position where the operator cannot be operated due to the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched when the slide member is slidably displaced, and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched. That is, a form in which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed and its effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be arranged on the second slide member or may be arranged on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably arranged on the base member, and the second sliding member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member, and a shielding / opening means capable of forming an open state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding / opening means is provided. A first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the first member, and a second rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the first member are provided with a second member having and displaced linearly in the first member, and a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first-side pinion gear. The shielding state is formed by linearly displacing the two members to one side, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. A game machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a shielding / opening means capable of forming a shielding state for shielding a predetermined region of the base member and an open state for opening a predetermined region is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the predetermined region is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. (Forming a shielded state) On the other hand, by rotating each rotating plate 90 degrees and turning the thick portion (side surface) to the front, a gap is provided between each rotating plate and a predetermined area is opened (opening state is formed). ) What is disclosed.

However, according to the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating plate in a state of being rotated by 90 degrees and having the plate thickness portion (side surface) facing the front remains in the predetermined region. However, there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to the thinning in order to secure the strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-like body having the same area as a predetermined area is displaceably arranged, and the plate-like body is displaced (arranged) to a predetermined area to shield (shield) the predetermined area. On the other hand, a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined area is opened (a state is formed) by retracting a plate-like body from a predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area) is also known. There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if the plate-shaped body is retracted from the predetermined region, the predetermined region can be completely opened.

However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-shaped body retracted from the predetermined area. There was a problem that it became necessary and caused an increase in size. Further, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the plate-like body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the game machine E1, the shielding opening means includes a first member rotatably arranged on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a pinion gear thereof. A second member having a second rack gear to which the first pinion gear is meshed and linearly displaceable to the first member, and a base rack gear formed on the base member to which the first pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to one side. By doing so, an open state is formed.

That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to reduce the size by reducing the space for evacuation.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined region or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined region can be shortened, and the shielded state and the open state can be quickly switched.

The shielded state in which the predetermined region is shielded does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and the region is open to a part of the predetermined region. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined area is opened does not have to be the state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined area is covered by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state, in other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielded state.

In the game machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion that is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion that is connected to the main body portion, and the second member is the said. A second main body portion having the second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and being supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second displacement portion connected to the second main body portion. The gaming machine E2 is provided, wherein the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first main body portion in which the first member is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the first displacement portion connected to the main body portion are provided. In addition, the second member is connected to a second main body portion which has a second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the second main body portion thereof. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side because the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside a predetermined region with the second displacement portion. Only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body portion and the second main body portion from passing outside the predetermined region and their loci overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and a part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined region. The entire surface of a predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the shielding opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first member is a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. Since the first main body is provided with a structure in which the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear, the structure for linearly displaces the first member is small. Can be changed. That is, among the spaces required outside the predetermined region of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear thereof. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a third side rack gear to be meshed with the third member and a third member which is disposed linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear. And a third member having a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, so that the second member is provided with the linear displacement of the first member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is linearly displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced to, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. It is possible to reduce the size by suppressing the space for arranging the member, the second member and the third member.

In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member) in this way, it is compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superimposing the three-divided ones than by superimposing the two-divided predetermined areas.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member, and the second member is linearly displaced from the second member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region or from the retracted position. The time required for arranging in a predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state can be performed more quickly.

In the game machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner, and a third main body portion thereof. The gaming machine E5 characterized by having a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first member is first. Only the loci of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body, the second main body, and the third main body from passing outside the predetermined region and their loci overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical idea (relationship of the third member with respect to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be extended to provide a game machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member, ..., And an nth member.

That is, the shielding opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. By expanding the configuration in which the second member is provided with a third member that is linearly displaceable, the shielding opening means is rotatably arranged on the nth member and meshes with the base side rack gear. An nth side pinion gear to be formed and an n + 1 member having an n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the nth member may be further provided ( However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member is connected to a third main body portion which has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the third main body portion thereof. Expanding the configuration including the third displacement portion, the n + 1 member has the n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an n + 1 displacement portion connected to the n + 1 main body portion thereof may be provided (however, n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means has a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. It is characterized by including a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced. The game machine E6.

According to the game machine E6, the shield opening means is a case where the third member displaced linearly on the second member and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. A third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displaces the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the following effect is produced.

That is, by linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and at the same time, a shielding state can be formed. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. It is possible to reduce the size by suppressing the space for arranging the member, the second member and the third member.

In this way, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member), it is compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area is smaller when the predetermined area is divided into three parts than when the predetermined area is divided into two parts.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the speed of the second member is increased and the third member The linear displacement of is at least faster than that of the first member. The time required to retract the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or to arrange the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the shielding state and the open state can be switched. It can be done quickly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as examples>
In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to reach the overhanging position. The gaming machine F1 is arranged, and the second member is arranged at the overhang position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least a rotational displacement.

Here, a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, respectively (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533) is known. In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the overhanging position and brought close to each other or brought into contact with each other, thereby associating (integrating) them with each other. , The effect of making the player visually recognize as one character is performed.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the overhang position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they move to the overhang position. There is a risk of mutual interference during displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and the displacements of the second member must be staggered. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first member is arranged in the overhang position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from interfering with each other during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, the time until the character is formed can be shortened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position by being displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the second member is displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, so that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, so that it has a curved shape. Can form a trajectory of. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

The game machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member so that the second member is displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. A game machine F3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, thereby causing rotational displacement and linear displacement. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position, and the position of the second member at the retracted position is free. The degree can be increased. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhang position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not the movement to the overhang position, but the second member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, as a result, the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the overhanging position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

The game machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device arranged in the game area, and a retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position and vertically long at the retracted position.

Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the effect is sufficiently produced. I can't show it. That is, while the game area is formed vertically, the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed, and the arrangement space of the members is large. It is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order for the second member not to protrude into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture in the overhanging position, while being arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the size of the second member can be increased accordingly, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position. Can be made larger.

The game machine F3 is characterized by including a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position can be made larger. .. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is retracted to such an area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a third member is provided so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the third member is the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the first member and the second member are provided because the third member displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position is provided. At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the effect of the production can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the first member and the second member at the overhang position, it does not come into contact with the first member and the second member at the overhang position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of the damage due to the impact at the time of contact. , Since it is not in contact with the first member and the second member, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the first and second members of the starting lineup at the overhanging position, and the effect of forming the character can be enhanced. ..

The game machine F6 is characterized in that the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to a side having the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

Here, if the positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member in the front-rear direction are different, the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction becomes larger and larger by that amount. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to the side having the same front-rear direction as the first member and the second member, and thus the whole (first member). And the front-rear direction dimension as the total of the second member and the third member) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the third member is increased to ensure its rigidity. can do.

The game machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the game machines F1 to F7 includes a contacted member which is arranged on the first member and a part of the second member is in contact with the first member at an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is abutted at the overhanging position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

The contacted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly in contact with the first member and the second member when they are arranged at the overhanging position, or the first member and the contacted member may be formed. When the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, it may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when both are closer than the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is in a state where the contacted member is separated from the first member. A game machine F9 characterized in that it is placed in an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the contacted member is the first member of the first member. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position in a state of being separated from the member, it is possible to ensure reliable contact with the second member at the overhanging position. Further, at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by the amount that the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member.

In the game machine F9, the game machine F10 is characterized in that after the first member is arranged at an overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction close to the first member.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in the direction close to the first member, so that the second member A space can be formed for the member to be displaced. That is, when the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is kept away from the first member to exert a role of receiving the displacement of the second member, and then to the first member. The contacted member can be displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position, and the contacted member is the first member. A game machine F11 characterized in that it is in a state of being close to.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is hit at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in a state of being close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that amount.

In the game machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the contacted member is maintained in a state of being close to the first member until the first member is arranged at an overhanging position. ..

According to the game machine F12, in addition to the effect of the game machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until it is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contacted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect of the effect.

In any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact is made. Along with this, the gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set.

According to the game machine F13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member hits the contacted member. When they are in contact with each other, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the second member is in the reference position. When the contacted member is displaced beyond the above and is brought into contact with the contacted member, the contacted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set in accordance with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member is brought into contact with the second member in the other set, the impact of the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the other set may be received only by the first member. It can also be received by the second member in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member due to the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set is the displacement in the other set. A structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member by being transmitted to the contact member, and the displacement of the contacted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, and the displacement thereof is transmitted to the first member. A structure in which the first member is displaced along with the transmission so that the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member together with the first member, or a structure in which these are combined. Is exemplified.

A game characterized in that any of the game machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at an overhanging position and is formed so as to be periodically displaced. Machine F14.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F13, the periodic displacement member includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be in contact with the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. Since periodic displacement is possible, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement members are shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displaces the first member and the second member, respectively. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or may be separated from each other (non-contact).

In the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member.

According to the game machine F15, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member. A member (periodic displacement member) arranged on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated by the member on the front side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to convey the force of the vibration to the player.

In the game machine F14 or F15, the game machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is determined. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they are vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the portion formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 700, and the lower united unit 800 as examples>
A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, the first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and the first effect mode is formed. When each displacement means is arranged at an overhang position, in a gaming machine in which a second effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group, the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means are described. The gaming machine G1 comprising a means for both displacement means of one of the second groups.

Here, from the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and from the plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. A gaming machine including the second group of the above is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this game machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) with one character (first). While making the player recognize it as an effect mode), when each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhang position, each displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) with another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect of making the player recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each of the displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhanging position, so that each of the first groups The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to the overhang position. By arranging them, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each displacement means of the second group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger character can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required for forming the plurality of characters also increases, and the displacement means are evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the displacement is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since it is provided with a means for both the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means of one of the second group, a plurality of means (third). The total number of displacement means required to form the effect modes 1 and 2) can be reduced, and each displacement means can be increased in size. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the game machine G1, the combined means has a different position between the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode. A game machine G2 characterized by being said to be.

Here, if the combined means are arranged at the same overhang position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) common to the production mode is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means arranged at the same position (overhanging position), the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the combined means forms the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since the overhanging position is different from the overhanging position, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed from being inhibited. Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the combined means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be used. Differences (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means is characterized in that the posture when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different. Game machine G3.

Here, if the combined means have the same posture in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, it is common to the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) of the above is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means of the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode of.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means has a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode. Since the posture is different from that of the above, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest. .. In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by allowing the combined means to have different postures between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement). It is possible to easily form the installation position).

In the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at an overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means are moved back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means in the first group. The gaming machine G4 characterized in that the directional positions are different and at least a part of them overlap in a front view.

Here, the combined means has different overhang positions or (and) different postures depending on whether the first effect mode is formed or the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position or (and) posture) tends to vary accordingly. In this case, in the structure in which the dual-purpose means abuts on one displacement means at the overhanging position (at least a part of the dual-purpose means coincides in the front-rear direction position) While a gap is formed between the displacement means and the displacement means, when the arrangement position or posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the first group Since the position in the front-rear direction is different from that of at least one of the displacement means and at least a part of the displacement means overlaps with each other in the front view, even if the stopped state (extending position or (and) posture) varies. It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the dual-purpose means. That is, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient due to the partial overlap in the front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the dual-purpose means and the single displacement means, and the positions in the front-rear direction are different. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent one of the displacement means from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined means.

In the game machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. A game machine G5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G5, in the game machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are in contact with each other, one of the displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the combined means tends to vary in the stopped state (overhanging position or (and) posture), and the combined means is used at the extending position when forming the first effect mode. , In a structure that is in contact with one displacement means (at least a part of the positions match in the front-rear direction), if the arrangement position and posture of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, there is a gap between the two displacement means. Is formed and the association (unification) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, the configuration of the game machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is different). (Partially overlaps) is particularly effective.

In the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is located on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that one of the displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view with respect to a portion in contact with each other.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is more than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view, for example, one displacement means or (and) another displacement means. When a deviation occurs in the target position of the above and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap can be shielded by the combined means to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means is hindered, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, whereby rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. The overhanging position of the combined means that is displaced in the embodiment and arranged when forming the first effect aspect, and the overhanging position of the combined means that is arranged when forming the second effect aspect. Are in different positions, and the posture of the combined means when forming the first effect mode and the posture of the combined means when forming the second effect mode are different. A game machine G7 characterized by.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linearity are linear. Since the displacement is combined with the displacement, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means. The means can be positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see them, and the position in the front-rear direction of one displacement means and the combined means can be made closer to each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily associate (integrate) one displacement means and the combined means so that the player can recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In the game machine G8, in a state where the displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged at a position where the linear base member and the linear base member overlap in front view. A game machine G9 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of the game machine G8, in a state where one of the displacement means and the dual-purpose means in the first group is arranged at the retracted position, one displacement means and the linear base member Since they are arranged at overlapping positions in the front view, when one displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position in order to form the first effect mode, one displacement means is linear. It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they do not overlap the linear base member in front view. Then, while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position where the other displacement means overlaps the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that at least the region where the other displacement means overlaps in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means are in front of the linear base member. The other displacement means are arranged at positions that do not overlap in view, and while the other displacement means and the dual-purpose means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they overlap the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member. In order to form the first effect mode, at least the region where the other displacement means overlap in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view. And when the straight base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the straight base member.

The game machine G10 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. The gaming machine G11 is characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base member is arranged in a region where the displacement means overlaps in a front view at a retracted position.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect of the game machine G10, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual-purpose means can be synchronized with each other, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the dual-purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be improved. Therefore, the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the combined means can be formed in a large size, and the character formed at the overhanging position can be made larger. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the combined means material is retracted to such an area. While setting the position, the combined means can be formed in a large size.

In this case, since the displacement means of one of the linear base members is arranged in the area where the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the front view at the retracted position, the other area of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged). The anteroposterior dimension of the area) can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
An effect mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, a display means capable of displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and a plurality of stages of information on the display means. When the stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information by the stage information display means for displaying, the stage information variable means for changing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information variable means. A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, and a switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. And, a game machine H1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of effect modes can be set as the effect modes displayed on the display device, and when a specific effect mode is set, a predetermined score is given to the player. Some effects are performed based on the cumulative value of the given points (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-215579).

In such a conventional game machine, points are given only in a specific effect mode, so that all the accumulated points obtained when the player shifts to another effect mode are discarded, so that the player can discard the points. There was a problem that the motivation to get a score was reduced and the game got tired early. In addition, in order to reliably execute the effect using the given score, it is necessary to fix the effect mode to a specific effect mode from the time the score is given until the effect based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production became monotonous.

On the other hand, in the game machine H1, one of a plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display means. A plurality of stages of stage information are variably displayed on the display means by the stage information variable means, and when the stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information, a specific effect is produced by the specific effect executing means. Is executed. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means is switched by the switching means to the display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, even if different production modes are set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set production mode. Therefore, even if the production mode shifts, the stage information is continuously used. It becomes possible to execute the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine H1 has a stage information storage means for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information display means switches the display mode when the switching means switches the display mode. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the stage information is displayed based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the following effects are played. The stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored by the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display means based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

As a result, even when the display mode is switched by the switching means, it is possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means. Therefore, even if different production modes are set, it is possible to continuously execute the production using the stage information, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The display mode corresponding to the effect mode is, for example, the identification information that can identify the score to be given, the numbers, characters, symbols used in the currently set effect mode, and the characters appearing in the effect mode. It is conceivable to use a display mode using. In addition, it is conceivable that the image accompanying the identification information that can identify the score to be given is displayed in a display mode using an image corresponding to the motif (for example, the sea or mountain) used in the currently set production mode. Be done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in the display mode corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is changed while the effect for displaying the stage information is being executed, the variable effect mode is changed. The stage information can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, at least predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that different production modes are set in a state where the predetermined stage information is displayed. Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display predetermined stage information in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the stage information is displayed is being executed.

In the game machine H2 or H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information that is close to the predetermined stage information.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, at least the approximate stage information that is close to the predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that the approximate stage information is displayed. Even if different production modes are set and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the approximate stage information in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, if the effect mode is switched while the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is displayed is displayed, the stage information that does not approximate the predetermined stage information is displayed, and the game There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in a person's willingness to play.

Here, as the approximation stage information in the game machine H4, for example, when an indicator capable of displaying the stage information in 7 stages is used, the stage information indicating the 7th stage (MAX) is set as the predetermined stage information and approximated. It is advisable to set the stage information indicating the sixth stage as the stage information.

A plurality of such approximation stage information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the predetermined stage information. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort when different display modes are set and the display mode is switched.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the effect mode setting means has a specific effect mode setting means for setting a specific effect mode when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. A game machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effect is played. That is, when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode.

As a result, it is possible to switch the effect mode according to the displayed stage information, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be enhanced.

Here, if the game machine H3 has a configuration, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the effect mode is switched in the state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

Further, if the game machine H4 has a configuration, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the effect mode is switched in the state where the approximate stage information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

In the game machine H5, the step information display means displays the predetermined step information as the step information when the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means. Game machine H6 to play.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H5, when a specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means, the stage information display means displays predetermined stage information as stage information. ..

As a result, when a specific stage information is displayed, a specific effect mode is set, and when the display mode is switched, the predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, in the effect of displaying the stage information, it is possible to expect the player to switch the display mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Here, if the game machine H3 has a configuration, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the effect mode in the state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, if the game machine H4 has a configuration, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the predetermined stage information can be switched by switching the production mode in a state where neither the predetermined stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, when the expectation of the jackpot is low in the production in which the stage information is displayed. Is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the step information variable by the step information variable means, and the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means. The gaming machine H7 is characterized by having a variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the following effect is played. That is, the variable amount of the stage information that is variable by the stage information variable means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is generated. It is displayed by the variable information display means.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the variable amount in which the step information is variable by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, since the variable amount in which the stage information is variable is displayed as variable information corresponding to the currently set production mode, the variable information is displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player even if the production mode is switched. It has the effect of being able to.

The variable information displayed based on the variable quantity may be information that specifically indicates the variable quantity, information that suggests the variable quantity (for example, information such as large variable quantity or small variable quantity), and further, a plurality of variable information. If the stage information of is displayed, it may be information indicating the stage information to be variable among a plurality of stage information.

Further, the timing of displaying the variable information may be appropriately set based on the displayed variable information. For example, when displaying the information concretely indicating the variable amount as the variable information, the step information variable means. It is preferable to display the variable information after the step information is changed by. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the mode in which the stage information is variable, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when displaying information suggesting a variable amount or information indicating a step information to be changed as variable information, it is preferable to display the variable information before the step information is changed by the step information variable means. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to how the stage information is specifically changed after grasping the displayed variable information, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H7, a variable information differentiation means that differentiates the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display that displays the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means. The gaming machine H8 comprising: a display timing setting means for setting the timing.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the following effects are played. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is differentiated into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiation means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to display the variable information for changing the stage information in a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as a method of differentiating variable information by the variable information differentiation means, when the variable information displays a specific numerical value (for example, a score), the numerical value (score) is displayed as a plurality of numerical values (small score). ), And if the variable information is a display that suggests the variable content of the step information (for example, the variable degree or the variable target), divide it so that the suggested content is displayed step by step. Just do it. As a result, the player can continue to pay attention to the effect in which the stage information is variable, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when displaying the variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, there is a high expectation that the variable information (stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information) which is advantageous to the player. Variable information) should be displayed later. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect can be executed while giving the player a sense of expectation until the end.

In the game machines H1 to H8, the effect mode setting means has a setting regulating means for restricting the setting of a predetermined effect mode according to the set effect mode. Game machine H9.

According to the game machine H9, it is regulated by the setting regulating means that a predetermined effect mode is set according to the set effect mode, so that various effects can be executed by using a plurality of effect modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate the switching of a predetermined effect mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching means, it is possible to suppress the setting of the effect mode in which it is difficult to convey to the player that the effect of displaying the stage information is continuously executed. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the game machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the setting condition when any of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, and the effect mode is set in the plurality of setting conditions. On the other hand, it has a priority setting means for setting a priority, and when a plurality of the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is based on the setting condition having a high priority set by the priority setting means. The gaming machine H10, characterized in that it sets an aspect.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H9, the following effect is played. That is, when any of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the effect mode is set based on the setting conditions. Then, priorities are set for a plurality of setting conditions by the priority setting means, and when a plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is produced based on the high priority setting conditions set by the priority setting means. The mode is set.

As a result, the effect mode is set based on the setting conditions having a high priority, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature J group> (Production display position setting)
A display means having a display area, a first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period, and a predetermined first effect on the display means while the first effect executing means is being executed. In a gaming machine provided with a second effect executing means for executing the second effect, the second effect executing means is the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. The gaming machine J1 characterized in that the second effect is executed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a device that executes an effect of displaying points showing a predetermined value on a display device and gives a privilege effect when the points reach a predetermined number (for example). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-179176).

In such a conventional gaming machine, a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and there is a problem that the mode in which points are displayed becomes monotonous. In addition, if the points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying the points on the display device, the display of another effect executed on the display device and the display of the points overlap, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, a predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing means on the display means having a display area for a predetermined period, and the second effect is executed while the first effect executing means is executed. The effect executing means executes a predetermined second effect on the display means in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect.

As a result, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first effect being executed, and it is possible to prevent the first effect and the second effect from being displayed in duplicate. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine J1, the second effect executing means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display areas in the display means, and the second effect when the second effect is executed. (1) The gaming machine J2 having a region variable means for varying the allowable region based on the display mode of the effect.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the following effects are played. That is, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display areas in the display means. Then, the permissible area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

This makes it possible to change the permissible area for executing the second effect based on the display area where the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since the second effect can be executed in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine J2 has a first effect determining means for determining a main display area in which a main image is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means. The area variable means is characterized in that the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed is changed based on the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2, the following effects are played. That is, among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means, the main display area in which the main image is displayed is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed is changed based on the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means by the area variable means.

This makes it possible to change the permissible area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the main image is displayed in the first effect. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

In the game machine J3, the area variable means sets the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means as a prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to execute, and allows other than the main display area. A game machine J4 characterized in that it is an area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means is set as a prohibited area in which it is difficult to execute the second effect by the area variable means. Then, the area other than the main display area is set as the allowable area by the area variable means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display area in which the main image of the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed from overlapping, and the effect of the effect from being lowered. effective.

In the game machine J3, the first effect determining means determines a specific subject display area in which the subject image is not displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period, out of the display areas determined to be the subject display area. The gaming machine J5 having a discriminating means, wherein the area variable means uses a display area determined to be the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area discriminating means as the permissible area.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, among the display areas determined to be the main subject display area, the specific subject display area in which the main image is not displayed after a predetermined period of time is determined by the specific subject display area determination means, and the display determined to be the specific subject display area The area is set as an allowable area by the area variable means.

As a result, as the display area for executing the second effect, the display area after the lapse of a predetermined period can be set as the allowable area. Therefore, it is possible to give a range to the timing of executing the second effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines J2 to J5, a value information setting means capable of setting a first value information showing at least a predetermined value as the second effect and a second value information having a value higher than the first value information. And a permissible area setting means capable of setting the permissible area to a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area, and the second effect executing means is the first permissible area. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the value information is set to be displayed in the first permissible area and the second value information is set to be displayed in the second permissible area.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J2 to J5, the following effect is played. That is, as the second effect, the first value information showing at least a predetermined value and the second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowable area is set by the allowable area setting means. It is set to a first allowable area and a second allowable area different from the first allowable area. Then, the second effect executing means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

As a result, the value information can be displayed in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the value information showing different values can be displayed in different small areas, for example, even when the same value is displayed in total, the first value information is displayed a plurality of times in the first allowable area. A plurality of display methods can be set such that the second value information is displayed or the second value information is displayed only once in the second allowable area. Therefore, since the player sees the place where the value information is displayed and the value information displayed on the display means while paying close attention to the number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. There is.

In any of the game machines J1 to J7, the display image creating means for creating the display image displayed on the display means is provided, and the display image creating means has at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed. And the second layer on which the second effect is displayed are combined to create the display image, and the first composition process of superimposing the first layer on the front side of the second layer. The gaming machine J8 is characterized in that it executes a second compositing process for transmitting the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J7, the following effect is played. That is, the display image displayed on the display means is created by the display image creating means by synthesizing at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed and the second layer on which the second effect is displayed. .. Then, the first layer is superposed on the front side of the second layer by the first composition process, and the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer is transparent by the second composition process. Will be done.

As a result, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display means at the same time, which has the effect of reducing the control load.

In the game machine J8, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed for each of the plurality of small areas. The game machine J9.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J8, the following effects are played. That is, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

As a result, it is not necessary to change the display content of the second layer according to the area for displaying the second effect, and the display area corresponding to the transparent display area of the first layer of the second layer can be obtained. Only the displayed second effect is visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display means at the same time, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic K group> (Change the production navigation in the middle)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the above-mentioned effect and a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the effect executed by the effect executing means It is displayed by a period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of the effect, a progress information display means for displaying progress information indicating an elapsed period since the specific period is started, and the progress information display means. Specific effect mode information display means for displaying specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode given to the player when the progress information satisfies a predetermined condition, and the progress displayed by the progress information display means. The gaming machine K1 comprising: an effect mode variable means for varying the specific effect mode information based on the information.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a time gauge for displaying the progress of the production is provided to display the progress of the production to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6280). In such a conventional game machine, the player predicts the lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter and plays the game, but even if the fluctuation ends in the middle of the meter or reaches the end of the meter, from there. Furthermore, since the production continues, there is a problem that the motivation to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter is reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine K1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the privilege granting means gives the player a privilege. The effect is given and the effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the specific period information indicating the specific period of the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed by the period information display means, and the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period is displayed by the progress information display means. .. Further, specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode given to the player when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by the specific effect mode information display means, and the progress information is displayed. The specific effect mode information is changed by the effect mode variable means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

As a result, the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode given when the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period satisfies a predetermined condition can be changed based on the progress information. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode showing the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the effect mode changing means changes the pseudo specific effect mode in the specific effect mode information.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, the following effects are played. That is, the specific effect mode display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode showing the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode, and the specific effect mode is displayed. Of the information, the pseudo-specific effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means.

As a result, the pseudo-specific effect mode that is pseudo-displayed based on the progress information is variable, so that the player can gaze at the displayed content based on the progress information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the expectation that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result is expected to be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies the specific display condition. The gaming machine K3, which has a degree display means, is characterized in that the specific effect mode information can be changed when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, the expectation that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result is displayed by the progress information display means. When the progress information satisfies the specific display condition, the expectation display means can display the progress information. When a specific display condition is satisfied, the specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode variable means.

As a result, it is possible to execute both the expectation degree display and the change of the specific effect mode information at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine K4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines K1 to K3 has a specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined effect mode is given as the specific effect mode.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K3, when a predetermined effect mode is given as a specific effect mode, the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. , It is possible to set a specific period according to the production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine K4 is characterized by having an extension period information display means for displaying the extension period extended by the specific period extension means by using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display means. Game machine K5.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4, the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extension period information display means using at least a part of the specific period information. There is an effect that the amount of display data for displaying the extension period can be reduced.

In the game machine K4 or K5, using at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means, the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is used. The gaming machine K6, characterized in that it has an extension progress information display means for displaying.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is extended by using at least a part of the progress information. Since it is displayed by the information display means, there is an effect that the amount of display data for displaying the elapsed information of the extension period can be reduced.

Any of the game machines K4 to K6 has an expectation display conversion means capable of converting the expectation displayed by the expectation display means when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. A game machine K7 characterized by.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation displayed by the expectation display means is converted by the expectation conversion means. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the specific period is extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines K7, the specific period information used when the extension period information display means displays the extension period includes the specific display for the expectation degree display means to display the expectation degree. The establishment period in which the condition can be satisfied is included, and when the extension progress information has passed the establishment period by the extension progress information display means, the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means. A game machine K8 characterized by this.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effect of the game machine K7, the following effects are played. That is, when the extension period is displayed by the extension period information display means, the specific period information including the establishment period in which the expectation degree display means can satisfy the specific display condition for displaying the expectation degree is used. When the extension progress information elapses from the establishment period, the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means.

As a result, when the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation degree display displayed during the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is executed. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to display to the player that the degree of expectation is converted in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means moves on the time gauge. A game machine K9 characterized in that it displays a body.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K8, the following effect is played. That is, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating the period as specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a moving body moving on the progress information time gauge.

As a result, the time gauge makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the specific period, and the player can easily grasp the progress information according to the movement status of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine K9, the expectation degree display means is for displaying the expectation degree when the establishment condition is satisfied when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the extension period information display means. Displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge. A game machine K10 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine K10, the establishment condition is satisfied when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation degree is displayed by the expectation degree display means. Then, the extension period is displayed by using a part of the time gauge by the extension period information display means. Further, the extension progress information is displayed by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge by the extension progress information display means.

This makes it possible to display the extension period using the time gauge and the moving body. Therefore, the extension period can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, since the display data for displaying the specific period can be diverted as the display data for displaying the extension period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

In the game machine K9 or K10, the game machine K11 is characterized in that the time gauge has a plurality of paths through which the moving body can move.

According to the game machine K11, in addition to the effect of the game machine K9 or K10, since the moving body has a plurality of movable routes, the player is made to predict which route the moving body will move. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through a branching position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of paths. Game machine K12.

According to the game machine K12, in addition to the effect of the game machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of paths. , When the specific period is extended, the player can predict which route the moving body will move again. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Variable each production mode of continuous slot production)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an effect execution means that can execute an effect based on the operation on the operation means, and a display means that displays an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means. The effect executing means executes a specific effect capable of executing at least an operation effect for which an operation valid period for determining that the operation to the operation means is effective is set a plurality of times within a specific period. The present invention is characterized by having an effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of another operation effect based on information on an operation for at least one of the operation effects executed during the specific effect. The game machine L1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and by operating the operating means, an effect of aligning a predetermined pattern is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223651).

In such a conventional game machine, a valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set, and by operating the operating means within the valid period, only a specific effect is executed, and the game is monotonous. Therefore, there was a problem that the game got tired early.

On the other hand, in the game machine L1, the effect based on the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means is used as the display means. Is displayed. Further, a specific effect capable of executing at least an operation effect for which an operation valid period for determining that the operation on the operation means is valid is set a plurality of times within a specific period is executed by the effect executing means, and is specified. The effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode variable means based on the information regarding the operation for at least one of the operation effects executed during the effect.

Thereby, in the specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, the effect mode of the other operation effect can be changed based on the operation content to the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine L1, the effect mode changing means is characterized in that the operation valid period of the other operation effect is variable.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the operation validity period of other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means, so that it is possible to provide various effects to the player. , There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the effect mode changing means is characterized in that the number of times of the other operation effect is variable.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means, so that it is possible to provide various effects to the player. , There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the operation effect executes a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period. The gaming machine L4 is characterized by having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by a plurality of the operation effects in a specific effect are in a predetermined combination.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effect is played. That is, a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period is executed as an operation effect, and a symbol that is stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation effects in the specific effect is predetermined. In the case of a combination, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the individually stopped and displayed symbols of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage during the period when the specific effect is being executed.

In any of the game machines L1 to L4, the operation timing determining means for determining the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation valid period set in the operation effect is provided, and the effect mode variable means is the said. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means in one operation effect.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L4, the following effect is played. That is, the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation valid period set in the operation effect is determined by the operation timing determination means. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means in one operation effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode of the other operation effect depending on the operation timing of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine L5, when it is determined by the operation timing determining means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started. , The gaming machine L6, characterized in that the number of times of the other operation effect is increased.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L5, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined by the operation timing determining means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started, the number of times of the other operation effect is increased by the effect mode variable means. Will be increased.

As a result, it is possible to increase the number of operation effects by operating the operation means at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the operating means, which has the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect.

In the game machine L5 or L6, the effect executing means can execute the other operation effect a plurality of times, and after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started by the operation timing determining means. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period, the first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation effect of the first operation effect is enabled by the operation timing determination means. When it is determined that the operating means is operated within a predetermined period after the period is started, it is determined that the operating means is operated within the predetermined period after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started. The gaming machine L7, characterized in that the operation effect is executed the same number of times as in the case.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L5 or L6, the following effects are played. That is, when another operation effect is executed a plurality of times by the effect execution means, and it is determined by the operation timing determining means that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started. In addition, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect execution means. Then, when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of the first operation effect is started, the operation valid period of the first operation effect is started within the predetermined period. The operation effect is executed the same number of times as when it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

As a result, even if the operation means cannot be operated within a predetermined period in one operation effect, one operation can be performed by operating the operation means within the predetermined period during the first operation effect to be executed next. It is possible to execute the same number of operation effects as when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period in the effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of operation effects for a player who does not notice that the operation effect has been executed or who cannot operate the operation means at an early stage because he / she pays too much attention to the operation effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines L1 to L7, the effect executing means produces a normal effect in which the operation valid period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period of the one operation effect. A game machine L8 characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L7, the following effect is played. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period of one operation effect, the effect execution means executes a normal effect in which the operation valid period is not set.

As a result, the player's motivation to play is reduced by repeatedly executing the operation effect for the player who did not operate the operation means during the operation valid period, that is, the player who does not like the operation effect. It has the effect of being able to suppress.

In any of the game machines L4 to L8, the game machine L9 is characterized in that the more the number of times of the operation effect executed by the effect executing means is, the more easily the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines L4 to L8, the more the number of operation effects executed by the effect execution means, the easier it is for the privilege granting means to grant the privilege, which is motivated by the player. It is possible to operate the operating means, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<Characteristic M group> (Change the mode of slot production based on the remaining period of operation validity period)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period for which an operation for the operation means is effectively determined, and an effect execution means that executes an effect for which the operation validity period is set. In a gaming machine having a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A dynamic display effect is executed in which a predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed from the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed by displaying and operating the operation means when the operation validity period is set. When the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode and dynamically displayed. A game machine M1 characterized by being.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and by operating the operating means, an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-). No. 223651).

In such a conventional game machine, a valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set, and by operating the operating means within the valid period, only a specific effect is executed, and the game is monotonous. Therefore, there was a problem that the game got tired early.

On the other hand, in the game machine M1, the operation validity period for which the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation validity period setting means, and the effect of setting the operation validity period is executed. It is executed by the means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed by the effect executing means in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and a plurality of identifications that are dynamically displayed by operating the operation means when the operation validity period is set are set. When a dynamic display effect that stops and displays a predetermined identification information from the information is executed and the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period changes. It is displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed changes depending on the remaining period of the operation validity period in which the operation on the operation means is effective, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. Will be. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine M1, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period, and is the remainder of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect. When the remaining period determining means for determining the period and the remaining period determining means determine that the predetermined remaining period is determined, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M2 having a dynamic display mode variable means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M1, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined by the effect executing means, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determining means. To. Then, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is a predetermined period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, since the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches a predetermined remaining period, it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation valid period in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.

The game machine M1 or M2 has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode has the plurality of said. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the specific identification information among the identification information has a dynamic display mode that makes it easier to identify than the other identification information.

According to the game machine M3, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification among the plurality of identification information is executed as the variable dynamic display mode. It becomes a dynamic display mode in which the information is easier to identify than other identification information.

As a result, the specific identification information on which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is stopped becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It becomes possible to increase. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine M3, the effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect executing means executes the dynamic display effect during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed when the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects satisfies a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is the dynamic of the above 1. The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the display effect.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M3, the following effects are played. That is, the effect executing means executes the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination of the above satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, the variable symbol satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1. To. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the operating means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines M2 to M4, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is executed, and the remaining period determining means sets the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M2 to M4, the following effect is played. That is, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period during which the dynamic display effect is executed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means according to the remaining number of operation valid periods.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of operation valid periods, so that the player is enthusiastically operated by the operating means during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines M1 to M5, the sequence information storage means for storing the sequence information in which the plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined sequence, and the sequence information stored in the sequence information storage means are used. It has a start position setting means for setting a start position of dynamic display, the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is provided by the operation valid period setting means. Within the set operation valid period, the first start position where the predetermined position of the sequence information is easily displayed on the display means and the second start position where the predetermined position of the sequence information is difficult to be displayed on the display means. A game machine M6 characterized in that and can be set.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M5, the following effect is played. That is, the sequence information in which a plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined array is stored by the sequence information storage means, and the start position of the dynamic display using the sequence information stored in the sequence information storage means is the start position setting means. Is set by. Then, predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the sequence information. Within the operation validity period set by the operation valid period setting means, the first start position in which the predetermined position of the array information is easily displayed on the display means and the second start position in which the predetermined position of the sequence information is difficult to be displayed on the display means. Is set by the start position setting means.

This makes it possible to execute a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is easily displayed on the display means and a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is difficult to be displayed, using the same sequence information. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of the display data for executing the dynamic display can be reduced.

A game machine M7, wherein in any of the game machines M1 to M6, the effect executing means includes a dynamic display speed variable means for changing the speed of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M6, the speed of the dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display speed variable means, so that the predetermined identification information is displayed within the operation valid period. Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature N group> (The next button effect is determined based on the content of the button operation)
An operating means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation when the operating means is operated, a discriminating means that discriminates a signal output by the signal output means, and a discriminating means thereof. An operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a discrimination result determined by the discriminating means during the period during which the operation effect executing means is executing the operation effect mode. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within a period in which the determination means for determining the above and the predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed are satisfied, the operation effect mode is described. The gaming machine N1 is characterized by having an execution control means for switching and executing the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode based on a determination result by the determination means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using the operation buttons, an operation of actually pressing the operation button and an operation of automatically executing the continuous striking operation by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period of time. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

In such a conventional game machine, in an operation effect (for example, a continuous hit effect) in which the operation button needs to be operated a plurality of times, the operation button is actually pressed a plurality of times or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. , It was said that you can enjoy the operation effect by automatically executing the continuous hit operation, but when the operation effect is executed multiple times in succession, during the operation effect that is executed first There is a problem that the operation to the executed frame button may be executed in the operation effect to be executed later, and the effect of the operation effect to be executed later is lowered.

Further, in the conventional game machine, as an operation effect for operating the operation buttons, for a player such as the above-mentioned operation effect (continuous hitting effect) or an operation effect for operating the operation button at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing push effect). Some have an operation effect that allows different operations. In this case, if the timing push effect is executed after the continuous hit effect is executed, the timing push effect is started while the operation (continuous hit operation) executed during the continuous hit effect is continuously executed. , There is a problem that the operation buttons are operated without aiming at a predetermined timing during the timing pressing effect, and the effect of the timing pressing effect is lowered.

Further, in the conventional game machine, since the effect is generally executed based on the variation period of the special symbol, in order to execute a plurality of operation effects within the limited period of the variation period of the special symbol. It was necessary to shorten the interval at which a plurality of operation effects were executed. Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it cannot be solved by a simple method of lengthening the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine N1, when an operating means that can be operated by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and discriminated by the discriminating means. A predetermined operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. During the period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect execution means, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, the execution control means determines the determination result by the determination means. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to a specific operation effect mode and executed.

As a result, if the second operation effect mode is executed within the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed. It is possible to switch the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode based on the operation content of the operation means performed by the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation for the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine N1, the determination means differs from at least the first determination result and the first determination result of the determination result determined by the determination means during the period during which the first operation effect mode is being executed. It is determined based on the second determination result, and when the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained, the execution control means determines the first determination result as the specific operation effect mode. A game machine N2 characterized in that it executes a corresponding operation effect mode.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N1, the following effects are played. That is, during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means as a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result. .. Then, when the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained, the execution control means executes the operation effect mode based on the first determination result as a specific operation effect mode.

As a result, as the second operation effect mode, it is possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. Therefore, when the operation effect modes are continuously executed, the effect is not reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the operation can be enhanced by making the operation effect modes continuous.

In the game machine N2, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means has the said specific operation effect mode. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N2, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined as the first determination result that the operation of the operation means is executed a plurality of times by the determination means, and the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times as a specific operation effect mode. Be done.

As a result, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect mode, the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, even if the player continuously operates the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for the game can be suppressed. ..

In the game machine N3, the operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operation means is operated and the number of times measured by the operation number measuring means are determined during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. It has a number-of-times determination means, and the determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means. A game machine N4 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N3, the following effects are played. That is, during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the number of times the operation means is operated is measured by the operation number measurement means, and the number of times measured by the operation number measurement means is determined by the number determination means. .. Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines the first determination result and the third determination result different from the first determination result.

As a result, it is possible to switch the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operation means is operated during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed.

In the game machine N4, when the determination means determines that the determination result of the number of times determination means is more than a predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the first determination result. ..

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determination means is more than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the first determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation effect mode. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, there is an effect that the state in which the player is enthusiastically operating the operating means can be continued.

In the game machine N4, when the determination means determines that the determination result of the number of times determination means is less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the third determination result. ..

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determination means is less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the third determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated less than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is provided as the second operation effect mode. It can be prevented from being executed.

In the game machine N2, the determination means determines as the first determination result that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period, and the execution control means has the specific operation effect mode. The game machine N7 is characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N2, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined as the first determination result that the operation of the operation means is continuously executed for a predetermined period by the determination means. Then, the execution control means switches to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated as a specific operation effect mode.

As a result, when the player continuously operates the operation means for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, the operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated is executed as the second operation effect mode. .. Therefore, even if the player continuously operates the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for the game can be suppressed. ..

In any of the game machines N1 to N7, the execution control means has a notification means for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed, and the notification means executes the second operation effect mode. The gaming machine N8 is characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the time.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines N1 to N7, the following effect is played. That is, the notification means notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the execution control means by the time the second operation effect mode is executed. As a result, even when a specific operation effect mode is executed as the second operation effect mode, the player can execute the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the game machine N8, the determination means executes the determination while the first operation effect mode is being executed, and the notification means is the first after the determination by the determination means is executed. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed until the operation effect mode of 1 is completed.

According to the game machine N9, in addition to the effect of the game machine N8, the following effects are played. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination of the determination means is executed, and the specific operation effect mode is determined between the execution of the determination and the end of the first operation effect mode. The notification means notifies that the execution is performed.

This has the effect of reliably notifying that a specific operation effect mode is executed by the time the second operation effect mode is started.

In the game machine N8 or N9, an aspect display means for displaying the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means, an operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode, and an operation content display means. The gaming machine N10 is characterized in that the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode by the operation content display means.

According to the game machine N10, the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means.

As a result, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed, so that the player can execute the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In any of the game machines N1 to N10, the operation effect executing means enables execution of a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A game machine N11 characterized by being.

According to the game machine N11, the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed is executed by the operation effect execution means. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to perform an effect in which the operating means can be operated in a short period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine N11 has an effect result display means for displaying the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means, and the effect result display means has the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode. The gaming machine N12, characterized in that the effect result is displayed based on the operation effect mode of the above.

According to the game machine N12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N11, the following effects are played. That is, the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the effect result display means. Then, the effect result is displayed based on the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode.

This makes it possible to create an effect in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are associated with each other, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic P group> (Change the interval between automatic repeated hits)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation of the operation means, a signal discrimination means that discriminates a signal output by the signal output means, and a signal thereof. When the discrimination result by the discrimination means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means for setting the first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the signal discrimination in the state where the first effect mode is set. When the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect every first period and the first effect mode are executed when the determination result by the means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition. In addition, a period variable setting means for variably setting the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means to a second period different from the first period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. A game machine P1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, a continuous hit operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364). Issue).

In such a conventional game machine, in an effect in which the operation buttons need to be operated a plurality of times (for example, a continuous hit effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hit effect simply by continuously pressing the operation button. However, in the operation effect other than the continuous hit effect (for example, the timing push effect), the automatic continuous hit operation is executed, which impairs the operation effect other than the continuous hit effect, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the game machine P1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the output signal is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Then, when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies the first condition, the first effect mode in which the specific effect is executed by the first setting means is set, and the first effect mode is set. When the discrimination result by the signal discriminating means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect every first period. Further, when the first effect mode is executed, the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means by the period variable setting means is set to the first period based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. Is variably set in a different second period.

As a result, it is possible to make the interval of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means different. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects using the operation means while the specific effect execution means is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine P1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the privilege granting means that grants the privilege to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result. A gaming machine P2 having a game machine P2, wherein a predetermined variable condition is satisfied based on the result of discrimination of the discriminating means.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine P1, the following effects are played. That is, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination result is a predetermined determination result, the privilege granting means grants the privilege to the player. Then, a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the determination of the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the determination means according to the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to a specific effect executed based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine P1 or P2 is characterized in that the game machine P1 or P2 has a notification means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal discrimination means.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, the signal discriminating means notifies the notification means that the second condition is satisfied, so that the player operates the operation means and the second condition is satisfied. When the conditions are satisfied, even if the execution period in a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the game machine P3, the game machine P4 is characterized in that the notification means guides an execution period set by the period variable setting means.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3, the notification means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means, so that the player is informed of the timing when the next specific effect is executed. It becomes possible to guide. Therefore, even if the execution period in a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In any of the game machines P1 to P4, the validity period setting means for setting the validity period for effectively determining the operation of the operation means, and the remaining period for determining the remaining period of the validity period set by the validity period setting means. It has a discriminating means, and the signal discriminating means determines that the second condition is satisfied when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first discriminating period, and the remaining period. When the remaining period is determined to be a predetermined period by the determination means, the determination period variable means for varying the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period is provided. Game machine P5.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P4, the following effect is played. That is, the valid period for effectively determining the operation of the operating means is set by the valid period setting means, and the remaining period of the valid period is determined by the remaining period determining means. When the operation means is continuously operated for the predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period. The first discrimination period is changed to a second discrimination period shorter than the first discrimination period by the discrimination period variable means.

As a result, when the remaining period of the valid period for which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined becomes a predetermined period, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a specific effect changed in the second period, which makes the game more enjoyable. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine P5, the game machine P6 is characterized in that the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determination means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period.

According to the game machine P6, the remaining period determination means determines a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period as a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the valid period is short, the identification is changed to the second period. It is possible to execute the effect of, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced until the end of the valid period.

<Feature Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
An operating means that can be operated by the player, a discriminating means that determines that the operating means has been operated, and a valid period setting means that sets a valid period for which the operation of the operating means is effectively discriminated by the discriminating means. An operation notification means for notifying a player of an operation notification mode for operating the operation means, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means, and an operation effect execution means. When at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the first valid period and the second valid period are specified. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized by having a notification control means for notifying the operation notification mode of the above by the notification means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

Since a plurality of operation effects are executed in such a conventional game machine, it is possible to increase the chances for the player to operate the operation buttons and increase the motivation to play, but the plurality of operation effects are frequently set. If this is done, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button, which causes a problem that the motivation for the game is reduced.

Further, in the conventional game machine, a valid period in which the operation of the operation button can be accepted is set, and if it is within the valid period, the effect based on the operation of the operation button is executed, and it is not the valid period, that is, the invalid period. For example, since it is configured so that the effect based on the operation of the operation button is not executed, when the player operates the operation button multiple times, a part of the multiple operations is performed during the invalid period. However, there is a problem that the production is not executed even though the operation buttons are operated, and the motivation for playing is reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine Q1, the valid period is set by which the discriminating means determines that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated, and the operation of the operating means is effectively discriminated by the discriminating means. The operation notification mode that is set by the means and causes the player to operate the operation means is notified by the notification means. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means.

Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the notification control means straddles the first valid period and the second valid period. The notification means is notified of a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions, a specific operation notification mode is notified across the first valid period and the second valid period, so that a plurality of operation notification modes are notified. It is possible to notify that the validity period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the operating means between the first valid period and the second valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In this case, as a predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period, it is desirable that the set interval is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such a condition, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing can be further suppressed.

Further, as a method of determining whether or not the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions, a method of determining the actual period may be used, or a plurality of operation effects are predetermined. A method of determining that the combination is set may be used.

Further, as an operation effect in the game machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the game machine, a drive mode of a driven object provided in the game machine, and an output from a voice output device provided in the game machine. It is conceivable that the sound mode is to be output and the light emitting mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game machine. As described above, the effect to be executed based on the determination of the operation on the operating means may be recognized by the player who operates the operating means.

In addition, the operating means in the game machine Q1 may be any as long as it can be operated by the player. A sensor device, a dial device that can be rotated by a player, a lever device that can be operated by a player in front, back, left, and right can be considered.

The game machine Q1 is characterized by having a notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, so that the first validity period And a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the second validity period can be set based on the operation effect executed during the first validity period or the second validity period.

This has the effect of being able to inform the player of a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the first valid period and the second valid period in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect, which is executed when the first validity period is set. A game machine Q3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, the notification mode setting means provides the first operation effect to be executed when the first validity period is set as the specific operation notification mode. Since the extension effect mode based on this is set, it is possible to make it appear that the first validity period continues until the second validity period is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In the game machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means provides a pre-effect mode based on the second operation effect, which is executed when the second validity period is set as the specific operation notification mode. A game machine Q4 characterized by being set.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2 or Q3, a second operation executed when a second validity period is set as a specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the pre-effect mode based on the effect is set, it is possible to make it appear that the second valid period is continuously set with the first valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can further suppress a decrease in the motivation to play by frequently repeating the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q4, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated. A game machine Q5 characterized by having a pseudo-effect execution means to be executed.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q4, the following effect is played. That is, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means is simulated by the pseudo effect execution means.

As a result, the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, so that the player can be made to appear that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuously set, and the operation buttons can be displayed. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing can be further suppressed by frequently repeating the act of operating and the act of not operating.

As a pseudo operation effect in the game machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the effect mode is variable. As a result, the operating means is operated by the player who continuously operates the operating means during the period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the invalid period is actually set. It is possible to make the player think that the production mode is variable, and there is an effect that the motivation for playing can be increased.

Further, according to the configuration provided with the game machine Q3, it is possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed in the first valid period is extended, and the player can perform a pseudo operation effect. It has the effect of being able to provide a more understandable effect.

Further, according to the configuration including the game machine Q4, the pseudo operation effect is executed so that the operation effect executed in the second valid period is continuously executed in the first valid period. This has the effect of providing a more understandable effect to the player.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means determines the specific operation notification mode based on the determination that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination means during the first valid period. A game machine Q6 characterized in that it is notified by the notification means.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are played. That is, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode based on the determination that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination means during the first valid period.

As a result, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, a specific operation notification is given. The aspect is not notified. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a player who does not like the operation effect from being unnecessarily notified of a specific operation notification mode, so that there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed.

Even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, the above-mentioned problem, that is, Since the problem of reducing the motivation to play due to the frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means does not occur, the player's motivation to play is motivated even if a specific operation notification mode is not notified. It does not decrease. Rather, it is possible to reduce the processing for notifying a specific operation notification mode, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect executed in a normal state.

As a predetermined operation condition in the game machine Q6, for example, it is preferable to set as an operation condition that the operation means is operated a plurality of times during the first valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is enthusiastically operating the operating means from losing his or her willingness to play. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first valid period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined remaining period (for example, within 5 seconds remaining). A state in which the fact is set as an operating condition, or a means for determining the period until the second valid period is started is provided, and it is determined by the means that the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds remaining). It may be set as an operation condition that the operation means is operated by. Even in such a configuration, there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed by frequently repeating an act of operating the operating means and an act of not operating the operating means.

In the game machine Q6, the discriminating means has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the operating means is operated, and the operation number measuring means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first valid period. The gaming machine Q7, characterized in that the above-mentioned operating conditions are satisfied when the above is performed.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q6, the following effects are played. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated by the operating number measuring means of the discriminating means is measured. Then, the operation condition is satisfied when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

As a result, when a predetermined number of operations are executed during the first valid period, a specific operation notification mode is notified. Therefore, for example, when the operation effect of repeatedly hitting the operation means is executed during the first valid period, the player who is enthusiastically operating the operation means is notified of the specific operation notification mode. It becomes possible to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who is enthusiastically operating the operating means from frequently stopping the operation of the operating means, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, according to the configuration provided with the game machine Q5, the player is made to execute the pseudo operation effect by executing the operation effect in which the effect mode is frequently changed as the operation effect to be simulated. On the other hand, it has the effect of suppressing giving a feeling of strangeness. Further, it is preferable that the pseudo effect executing means can execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the effect mode is changed, and the operation effect is set based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation number measurement means. ..

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Machine Q8.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Until the end of the first validity period, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the second validity period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect due to the player grasping the operation effect to be executed later.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under the predetermined conditions, the first valid period and the said first valid period. A gaming machine Q9 characterized by having a valid period changing means for changing the valid period so as to be continuous with the second valid period.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are played. That is, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the valid period is such that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuous. The validity period is changed by the changing means.

As a result, when a plurality of valid periods are set, it is possible to make the plurality of valid periods continuous valid periods. That is, since the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period can be eliminated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to the effect not changing even though the operating means is operated. It has the effect of being able to.

Here, to make the valid period of the game machine Q9 continuous means to set a period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the effect is not variable even though the player operates the operating means. The validity period may be changed so that the first validity period and the second validity period are actually connected, or the first validity period and the second validity period may be changed. There may be a period shorter than the period required to determine that the operating means has been operated.

In the game machine Q9, the game machine Q10 is characterized in that the validity period changing means additionally sets a period between the first validity period and the second validity period to the validity period.

According to the game machine Q10, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q9, the validity period is additionally set in the period between the first validity period and the second validity period by the validity period changing means. As a result, a plurality of valid periods can be made continuous without changing the first valid period and the second valid period, so that there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In the game machine Q9 or Q10, the game machine Q11 is characterized in that the validity period changing means delays the start of the first validity period.

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q9 or Q10, the start of the first validity period is delayed by the validity period changing means. As a result, since the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, it is not necessary to set a new valid period, and there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any of the game machines Q9 to Q11, the game machine Q12 is characterized in that the valid period changing means accelerates the start of the second valid period.

According to the game machine Q12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q9 to Q11, the start of the second valid period is accelerated by the valid period changing means. As a result, since the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, it is not necessary to set a new valid period, and there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any of the game machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has a validity period display means for causing the display means to display the operation notification mode, and is based on the fact that the validity period is changed by the validity period changing means. The gaming machine Q13 is characterized by having a valid period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the valid period display means.

According to the game machine Q13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q9 to Q12, the following effect is played. That is, the operation notification mode is displayed on the display means by the validity period display means, and the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display changing means based on the change of the validity period by the validity period changing means.

As a result, it is possible to display to the player that the validity period has been changed by the validity period changing means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the game machine Q13, the game machine Q14 is characterized in that the valid period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the elapse of the first valid period.

According to the game machine Q14, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display changing means based on the elapse of the first validity period. As a result, the player grasps the content of the operation effect (operation effect in which the second validity period is set) to be executed later before the first validity period has elapsed, and the effect is reduced. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where it happens.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q14, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and a privilege grant that grants a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The means and the period effect executing means for executing the period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the discriminating means, and the period effect executing means executes the compound effect in which a plurality of the valid periods are set. A gaming machine Q15, which is possible, wherein the notification control means notifies the notification means of the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the discrimination means.

According to the game machine Q15, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are played. That is, when the result of the determination executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Then, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the period effect execution means executes a composite effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set as the period effect for a predetermined period.

As a result, it is possible to execute a composite effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q14, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and a privilege grant that grants a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The notification control means includes means and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of determination by the discriminating means, and the notification control means is executed first among the continuous period effects. When the first valid period set in the first period effect and the second valid period set in the second period effect executed later are set under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine Q16, characterized in that the notification means is notified of the specific operation notification mode.

According to the game machine Q16, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are played. That is, when the result of the determination executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Further, the period effect for a predetermined period is executed by the period effect executing means based on the result of the determination by the discriminating means. Then, of the continuous period effects, the first valid period set in the first period effect executed first and the second valid period set in the second period effect executed later. When is set under predetermined conditions, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set across a plurality of period effects, the act of the player operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means are frequently repeated. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in motivation to play.

In the game machine Q16, a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of discrimination information based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the discrimination information stored in the discrimination condition storage means. The gaming machine, characterized in that, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

According to the game machine Q17, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q16, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of discrimination information based on the establishment of the discrimination condition is stored by the discrimination condition storage means, and the plurality of stored discrimination information is determined by the prior judgment means. Then, based on the determination result of the pre-determination means for the second period effect, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when the first valid period and the second valid period are set across the first period effect and the second period effect, the preliminary determination corresponding to the second period effect to be executed later is performed. A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A game machine Z1 in any of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop is performed. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
113 Voice lamp control device (operation valid period setting means, effect executing means, remaining period determining means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display mode variable means)
S4606 Dynamic display mode variable means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, Yu skills who can be displayed the progress of the effect of the gaming machine is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-6280

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, further improvement of interest has been required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the player is notified. The first period of the effect period executed by the effect execution means, which comprises a privilege granting means for granting a privilege and an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of determination by the determination means. A period mode display means capable of displaying a first effect period mode for indicating the above and a second effect period mode for indicating a second period different from the first period, and the period mode display means for displaying the first effect period mode. 1 When the effect period mode is displayed, the first remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the first period, which is changed based on the progress information since the first period is started, is displayed in a predetermined order. When the first remaining period information suggesting means that can be suggested in the above and the first remaining period information suggested by the first remaining period information suggesting means satisfy the first condition, the first effect period mode is referred to as the second. When the second effect period mode is displayed by the mode switching means capable of switching to the effect period mode and the period mode display means, the mode is changed based on the progress information since the start of the second period. The second remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the second period is suggested by the second remaining period information suggesting means that can suggest in the same variable mode as the predetermined order and the second remaining period information suggesting means. It has a specific effect mode display means capable of displaying a specific effect mode when the second remaining period information is satisfied with the end condition, and the period mode display means is at least one of the second effect period modes. The unit is displayed using the first effect period mode, and the mode switching means increases the remaining period of the first period indicated by the first remaining period information at the time when the first condition is satisfied. By doing so, the first effect period mode is switched to the second effect period mode .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege of giving a privilege to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A first of the effect periods of the effect executed by the effect executing means, which includes an giving means and an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the result of determination by the discriminating means. A period mode display means capable of displaying one effect period mode and a second effect period mode for indicating a second period different from the first period, and the period mode display means can be used to display the first effect period mode. When displayed, the first remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the first period, which is variable based on the progress information since the first period was started, can be suggested in a predetermined order. When the first remaining period information suggesting means and the first remaining period information suggested by the first remaining period information suggesting means satisfy the first condition, the first effect period mode is changed to the second effect period mode. When the second effect period mode is displayed by the switchable mode switching means and the period mode display means, the second period is changed based on the progress information from the start of the second period. The second remaining period information suggesting means capable of suggesting the second remaining period information for indicating the remaining period in the same variable mode as the predetermined order, and the second remaining period information suggesting means suggested by the second remaining period information suggesting means. It has a specific effect mode display means capable of displaying a specific effect mode when the remaining period information satisfies the end condition, and the period mode display means displays at least a part of the second effect period mode. 1 The effect period mode is used for display, and the mode switching means increases the remaining period of the first period indicated by the first remaining period information at the time when the first condition is satisfied. 1 The effect period mode is switched to the second effect period mode .

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of Yu technique.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper united unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the upper united unit. It is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is a front schematic diagram of the drive arm in the retract rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position and the extension rotation position. It is a partially enlarged front schematic view of the drive arm when it is rotated from a retract rotation position to an extension rotation position. It is a front view of the upper united unit and the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a protruding unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a protruding unit. It is a front view of a base member and an elevating base. It is an exploded front perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is a front view of the elevating base and the rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body arranged in the first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the elevating unit, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 1st state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 2nd state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 3rd state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the 1st state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the second state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the third state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state, (c). ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in the united state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 65 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 66 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are meshed with each other, and (b) is a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are disengaged. It is a schematic view of the slide unit viewed from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of a front view of the slide unit in a state where the counterclockwise transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are in mesh with each other, and (b) is a schematic view in which the accommodating member is displaced and under the main body base member. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state which the meshing of the side 1st rack gear and a transmission gear was released. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of the base member in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the base member are meshed with each other, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state. It is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the left slide member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member in the state after the switching plate is operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state after the switching plate is operated in the front view. is there. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). (A) is a front view of the elevating unit according to the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an operating unit in the combined state. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIb-CIIb of FIG. 101. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state where the drive body is arranged in the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a state in which the drive body is arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section in the first control example, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a variable winning device in the first control example. It is a top view of. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram showing the area division of the display screen when the reach navigation effect is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and (d) is the schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the navigation effect selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first navigation effect selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second navigation effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing for display executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the numerical command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a V executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a resident execution executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the combined pressing effect in the second control example is started, and (b) is the time when the effect setting timing D3b is reached in the combined pressing effect in the second control example. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the timing pressing period Db1 is reached in the combined pressing effect in the second control example, and (b) shows the timing pressing period Db1 in the combined pressing effect in the second control example. It is a figure which showed another example at the time of arrival. (A) is a diagram showing an example when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing pressing period in the compound pressing effect in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example in the compound pressing effect in the second control example. It is a figure which showed an example at the time when it reached the 2 consecutive hit period Dc. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the continuous slot effect executed in 2nd control example. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in the second control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode" in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the "sugoroku mode" in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of the point effect in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario in the second control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press pressing scenario in the second control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the compound pressing scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the character selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning character selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the character selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the point selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit point selection table, and (c) is a deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the point selection table schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the first slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the normal slot production executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st shortening slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 2nd shortening slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during extension slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a pressing command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a length executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the push command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an auto-press start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the auto press end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the release command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pressing scenario table in the first modification of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the first combined pressing scenario schematically. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second compound pressing scenario. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the frame button control device in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of each effect executed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically each mode used for the point effect in 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode A" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "sugoroku mode" in the third control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of the "bingo mode" in the third control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which a character is displayed in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which points are displayed in the third control example. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of layers are synthesized in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the number-of-times selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table in the third control example. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation number selection table in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the used score selection table in the third control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the final display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the final second display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the final 3rd display mode selection table in 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the character display selection table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the display data table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the transfer data table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the drawing list in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect initial setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the point effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the indicator command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing another example of the layer on which the character is displayed in the third control example, and (b) is another example of the layer on which the points in the third control example are displayed. Is a diagram schematically showing, and FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing another example in which a plurality of layers are synthesized in the third control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the reach navigation effect executed in the 4th control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect in the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 2nd internal level selection table in 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect scenario storage area in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect scenario selection table in the fourth control example. It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 1 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 2 of the fourth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 3 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in the continuous slot effect in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example, and (b) is a timing showing the flow of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example. It is a chart. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the display mode storage area in 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the hit display mode selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table for deviation in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the stop mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the hit stop mode selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table for disconnection in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the initial slot effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the normal slot effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st shortening slot production process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 2nd shortening slot production executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the extension slot production process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. (A) and (b) are examples of schematic views of the display mode of the rear image in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the compound pressing effect executed in 6th control example. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the background change operation mode of the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing a button operation content and an effect mode executed in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams which show an example of the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto-press effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the pressing effect 2 in the compound pressing effect executed in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow which the additional effect is set in 7th control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing a display example displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing a display example of an additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is the 2nd variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example, (d) is the content of the 3rd variation pattern selection table in the 7th control example schematically shown. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the additional effect selection table in 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the effect counter in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. (B) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 7th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow which the additional effect is set in the modification of the 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an additional effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (C) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example. (A) to (c) are schematic views which show the modification of the additional effect. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the effect in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a sphere. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when it is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (expanded state) makes it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441,475,476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are moved to the retracted positions, respectively. In the displaced state, from the state shown in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the right slide member 450, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the overhanging positions. In FIG. 9, the state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the overhanging positions from the state shown in FIG. 7 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a slide unit 400, an upper uniting unit 500, a lower uniting unit 600, The projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are rotatably housed.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 is arranged with a horizontally long base member 410 having a rectangular shape in the front view, which is arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the upper end portion of the base member 410 is slidably displaceable. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and each slide member 430 is independently placed in the left-right direction (base member) on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. It is formed so that the effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be in contact with each other. However, in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are in contact with each other, they are damaged. A restraining structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

A rectangular horizontally long guide member 419 in front view is arranged in a posture parallel to the base member 410 in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are arranged. When is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are guided by sliding between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower end sides of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper uniting unit 500 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 510 in front view arranged in front of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 displaceably arranged in the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower uniting unit 600 includes a front view substantially L-shaped base member 610 and a lower base member 610 arranged on the left side portion and the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. The lower displacement member 640 is provided so as to be displaceable.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back surface side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is displaceably formed between the retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and the overhanging position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When overhanging to the overhanging position, the side surfaces (upper contact portion 533 and lower contact portion 643) of both displacement members 530 and 640 are brought into contact with each other (combined).

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced in the directions close to each other come into contact with each other, an impact may be generated and the posture may become unstable such as being bounced off each other. In the present embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of such contact is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projecting unit 700 has a horizontally long rectangular base member 710 in front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and an evacuation unit 700 arranged so as to be able to move up and down in the base member 710. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720 are provided, and the elevating base 720, together with the rotating member 730, is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and the rear case 300. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated) from the overhanging position overhanging the opening 301a toward the front side.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that is displaced (slide displacement) in the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 that is swingably arranged in the rotating member 730, and the projecting member 735. It includes a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swing member 732.

The protrusion unit 700 drives the protrusion member 735 and the swing member 732 by the drive motor 763 of 1. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the projecting member 735 and the driving force required to drive the swing member 732 overlap, which may increase the load and reduce the durability of the drive motor 763. In the embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such a structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500, and an elevating member 820 arranged so as to be able to elevate on the base member 810. The elevating member 820 is formed so as to be displaceable (elevated) between the retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and the overhanging position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure in which the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 10 to 12 show a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450).

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 410. The member 420, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. It is mainly provided with a drive mechanism for making the vehicle run.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, in the base member 410, a plate-shaped projecting plate portion 411 is horizontally projected from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the projecting plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420). The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the side), and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod-shaped body having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. By doing so, both slide members 430 and 450 are held slidably. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 extend along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 is a second member in which a first member 431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably arranged on the first member 431, and the first side pinion gear 432 are meshed with each other. A front-view rectangular horizontally long second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a front-view rectangular vertically long base member 434 hanging downward from the tip side of the second member 433, and a rotatable base member 434 on the front side of the base member 434. 435, a displacement member 436 that is possibly arranged on the back side of the rotating member 435, and a transmission that transmits the motion (slide displacement) of the base member 434 to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435. The gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. , Sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear to which the left drive gear 471 described later is meshed with, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. To.

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably arranged (shafted) on the first member 431, and the arranged portion of the first side pinion gear 432 (front side of the first member 431). A front-view rectangular plate-shaped cover 431b is disposed of the vehicle. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the first member 431 is acted on by the base side rack gear 412 along with the slide displacement. Then, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is displaceably arranged (connected) to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the tip side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. It is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, the second member 433 is engraved with the second side rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the slide displacement of the first member 431, it is affected by the first side pinion gear 432 (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is affected. The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into a linear motion by the second rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the second member 433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state of being faster than the first member 431. Can be done.

The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. To.

The right slide member 450 is rotatable toward the front side of the front view rectangular horizontally long rack member 451 and the front view rectangular vertically long base member 454 hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451 and the base member 454. To transmit the motion (slide displacement) of the rotating member 455 to the rotating member 455, the displacement member 456 displaced on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and the base member 410 of the base member 454 to the rotating member 455. The transmission gears 457a to 457f of the above are mainly provided.

The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. As a result, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the drive gears 471 and 472, respectively. A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 to which a drive shaft is connected to each of the pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 rotationally drive the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby passing through the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid and displaced independently of each other.

A cover member 416 is arranged on the front surface of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471 and 472 and the pinion gears 473 and 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. .. Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 is a back side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front side arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434a. A base member 434b is provided, and transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (shaft support) between facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. A shaft support hole 434b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 434b.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the head and the transmission gear 437f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 435a of the rotary member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 437f can rotate the rotating member 435.

The rotating member 435 includes a rotating shaft 435a and a supporting shaft 435b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 437f, the rotating member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 435b, the displacement member 436 from the support shaft 435b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 435. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotating member 435, the rotating shaft 435a can be displaced along the relief hole 436b and is displaced from the rotating member 435. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 435 with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in which the front view shape has a larger dimension in the length direction than the dimension in the width direction, and is a position that is substantially the center in the length direction and the width direction. The rotation shaft 435a is arranged on the. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed by dividing the rotating member 435 into substantially two at the center in the length direction thereof. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435, making it difficult for the player to see. Can be done.

Further, since the drive motor 441 is arranged on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the rotating member 435. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (the state where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435), the rotating member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the 435 substantially coincides with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in a state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visibly overhanging to the side of the rotating member 435). The position of the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of the overhang of the displacement member 436. As a result, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 projects laterally to the rotating member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When it is located on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the above-mentioned rotating action due to the weight of the structure causes the displacement member 436. It can assist the rotation. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435 (rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is brought close to (matches) with the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. As a result, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435) is stopped. When it is located on the side of the structure, the rotation of the structure can be easily stopped by the weight of the structure described above. As a result, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. The transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (shafted) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the head and the transmission gear 457f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 455a of the rotary member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the base member 410 from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 457f can rotate the rotating member 455.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 457f, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 455b, the displacement member 456 from the support shaft 455b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 455. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotating member 455, the rotating shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b and is displaced from the rotating member 455. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 455 with the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in which the front view shape is larger in the length direction than the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is provided on one end side in the length direction. The drive motor 461 is arranged on the other end side as well as being arranged. Further, since the displacement member 456 is arranged on the rotating member 455 on the side opposite to the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 The position of the center of gravity can be arranged at a position eccentric to one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, at the start of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. By locating it on the side, the weight of the structure can be caused to act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. As a result, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure is used as resistance. It can be made to act to make it easier to stop the rotation of the structural value. As a result, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Further, as will be described later, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). By locating the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure acts as a resistance and exerts a buffering action due to the rotation of the structure value. Can be made to.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid displacement. Note that FIGS. 17 and 18 show a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left slide member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side of FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the first member 431 moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a (FIG. 11). 17 (a) Slide displacement toward the right side (direction closer to the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side are arranged so as to face each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slidably displaced together with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is acted on the second side rack gear 433a, so that the second member 433 Is slid and displaced in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, catches up with the first member 431 and is second with respect to the first member 431. The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the positive direction, and the first member 431 is further to the right with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 17A, the direction closer to the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 18A, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is at the right end of the movable range (FIG. 18). (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the overhanging position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. Due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (left side in FIG. 18A, in the direction away from the right slide member 450). ..

Also in this case, the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431, as in the case described above. As a result, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, precedes the first member 431 with respect to the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extending direction (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is extended more than the total length at the overhang position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the opposite direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is at the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17). (A) The position farthest from the left and right slide members 450), that is, the overhanging position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is arranged on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position, and the detected portion is detected by the detection sensor. When is detected, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position.

On the other hand, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped at the overhang position, the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after starting the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the overhang position is cumulatively added. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the overhanging position) has a portion overlapping with the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect.

However, if the movable ranges are overlapped in this way, it is caused by variations in component dimensions / assembly, variations in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) based on tolerances, or poor control (for example, poor control). Due to the occurrence of (error of cumulative addition of the number of drive steps), the left slide member 430 slide-displaced to the overhanging position may come into contact with the right slide member 450, resulting in damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to suppress damage while ensuring the effect of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, the second member is formed by the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. The 433 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435) which is visible to the player on the second member 433. Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the effect of the slide displacement can be ensured.

On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 brings the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). , The impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is made to stand by (stop) closer to the retracted position than the overhanging position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the overhanging position. When the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 is pushed by the left slide member 430 in the direction of slide displacement, and the two are slid and displaced in an integrated state. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to weaken the impact of and suppress damage to both.

The right slide member 450 is arranged on the base member 410 so as to be slidable, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, when the right slide member 450 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is separated from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18A). FIG. 18A has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side), and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can be slidably displaced is the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the left slide member 430. It is considered to be the direction that allows the slide displacement of.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (relieved backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Therefore, a buffering action can be exerted (see FIG. 18B). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the directions of slide displacement between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel, so that when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 The escape operation can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert a buffering action and easily suppress damage to both.

Further, in this case, by sharing the sliding rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the directions of slide displacement of both members are parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. .. That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The space is increased by that amount, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the sliding rod member 420 of 1 in both the sliding rod members 430 and 450, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (on the right side in FIG. 18A), and is not different from the left slide member 430. It can be placed at the position of contact. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-mentioned variation and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper), while the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position with the target position. Therefore, by arranging the right slide member 450 at a position where it is not in contact with the left slide member 430, the number of contacts can be reduced and the fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, the left slide member 430 is provided with both members 431 and 433 separately in order to accelerate the speed of the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between the 433a, and the number of parts and the sliding portion are increased, so that the weight and the driving resistance are increased. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial velocity when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the slide displacement may be hindered.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be in contact with the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the contacted state (FIG. 18 (a). ) It is formed so that it can be slidably displaced to the left). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. As a result, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid and displaced from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be increased to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430. (The first member 431 is pushed back), so that the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

That is, the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431, which has a slower slide displacement speed than the second member 433 of the left slide members 430, and pushes back the first member 431. Therefore, the right slide member 450 The speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after the time when the auxiliary force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (that is, after the left slide member 430 in the stopped state starts to be pushed back). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450) can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be improved.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational driving force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion to slide-displace the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio and the rotational driving force of the right drive motor 476 are converted into linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a). The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the direction of slide displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means that the amount is large.

As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily slid and displaced quickly from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force of the right slide member 450 to push back the left slide member 430 is increased. The initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased by that amount. The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect due to the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (delayed). That is, both the smooth initial operation of the left slide member 430 and the increase in the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation are compatible. However, by adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, which was not possible in the past, such compatibility has become possible for the first time.

Next, the detailed configurations of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

FIG. 19A is a front view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper united unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper uniting unit 500 is connected to the base member 510, the rack member 520 displaceable in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. It includes an upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for sliding displacement of the rack member 520.

The base member 510 includes a front view rectangular horizontally long back base 511 and a front view rectangular horizontally long front base 512 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back base 511, and the back base 511 and the front base. The rack member 520 is housed in a slide-displaceable manner between the facing surfaces (internal space) of 512.

The back base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member projecting to the front side. A support shaft 511c inserted into the guide groove 522 of the 520 is provided.

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced due to the slide displacement of the rack member 520, the upper displacement member 530 The posture (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521, which is a front view circular hole for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It includes a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 carved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

The support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extension direction of the guide groove 522 is the extension direction of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of slide displacement of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 projecting from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511, and the guide pin 532 is the back base 511. It is a columnar body having a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. .. Further, the upper displacement member 530 is formed with an upper contact portion 533 on its side surface. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is on the side surface opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (tip side). It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 to which the drive shaft is connected to the pinion gear 542. Be prepared. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced along the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

Next, the operation of the upper uniting unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are front views and rear views of the upper uniting unit 500, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 23 (a), when the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are on one end side of the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b. It is located on the right side of FIG. 23), and the upper displacement member 530 forms a horizontal posture and is arranged in a state of being hidden behind the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the connecting shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connecting hole 511a and the guide pin 532 is displaced in the guide hole 511b as the rack member 520 slides. As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), the upper displacement member 530 is tilted diagonally (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) in the horizontal direction by being guided along the above. Displaced to. That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further obliquely tilted (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and displaced in the horizontal direction, and FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (c) and FIGS. As shown in 23 (c), a vertical posture is formed in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhanging position (first position).

Next, the lower coalescing unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower united unit 600. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower uniting unit 600 has a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. The drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, the lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, the connecting arm 650 to connect the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and the drive arm 630 are attached. It includes an urging spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the drive arm 630.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a projecting base portion 611 projecting from the front at the lower end of the substantially L-shape and projecting from the front at the upper end portion of the substantially L-shape. It is provided with a connecting shaft 612 to be formed. The projecting base 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position protruding from the front of the base member 610 (raised toward the front side), and is along the edge portion at the lower end of the base member 610. Be thrust.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

Since the back side of the back side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding base portion 611 of the base member 610, the amount of the protruding base portion 611 is increased. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back surface side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position is formed so as to be able to be accommodated in such a space, the outer shape of the lower uniting unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

In the drive arm 630, a plurality of teeth are engraved along the shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and the outer peripheral surface of the columnar portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As a long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at an end opposite to the gear portion 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 projecting from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. It is a columnar body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connecting arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 by rotating the drive arm 630.

The lower displacement member 640 is formed with a lower contact portion 643 on its side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is formed from a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side separated from the overhanging direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface oriented substantially orthogonal to the virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 includes connecting holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connecting holes 651 and 652 are provided with the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. Are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion is changed to the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as an arc shape at the center.

The urging spring 660 is a metal torsion spring, and one leg extending from the winding portion is engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg is engaged with the drive arm 630 to engage the drive arm 630. Is urged in the direction of rotation from the retracted position to the overhanging position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the displacement member 630 to be displaced. The 640 is urged in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 27A) to displace the 640 from the retracted position to the overhang position. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the overhanging direction can be smoothly performed.

The drive mechanism is arranged in front of the transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, the drive shaft is connected to the transmission gear 671a, and the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). It is provided with a drive motor 672 to be installed. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the head and the transmission gear 671c is at the tail. The gear train (gear train) of 1 is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c acts on the gear portion 632, so that the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Next, the operation of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower uniting unit 600, showing a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the state where the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 27 (a) counterclockwise rotation direction). It is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "retract rotation position"), and is in a tilted posture in which the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631) is inclined downward toward the tip side (connecting hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the directions connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 are substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is on the leftmost side (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27 (a)), and the vertical position is the lowest. It is arranged at a position (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the vertical direction, the lower side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640. Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27 (b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further driven as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view. Along with being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position.

In the overhanging position, the drive arm 630 is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as “overhanging rotation position”) that is maximally rotated clockwise in the front view (FIG. 27 (c) rightward rotation direction). In the rotation position, the drive arm 630 is arranged at a position where its tip side (connecting hole 633) crosses the vertical line passing through the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted most upward. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27 (c)), and the vertical position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest from the retracted position in the vertical direction, slightly downward from the upper side of FIG. 27 (a).

Here, the displacement speed of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a front schematic view of the drive arm 630 at the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extension rotation position. Further, FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the overhanging rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the overhang rotation position. In the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position, and the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal posture. The rotation position (the imaginary line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction) is called the "horizontal rotation position", and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position in which the drive arm 630 is in an upright posture (a posture in which the virtual line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a "vertical rotation position". The overhang rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29 (c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29 (d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. Corresponding to 630, FIG. 29 (e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

The drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, and therefore the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period from the stopped state until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation is sufficiently small and there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) and 29 (b), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The tilted posture is positioned below the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the arc shape of the connecting hole 633) The tangential speed in the displacement locus) is maximized at the horizontal rotation position, with the upward speed component (speed Vv) gradually increasing. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed upward thereof is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The tilting posture is set so as to be positioned above the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is further displaced upward as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, so that the speed V of the connecting hole 633 goes upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to 0 at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed of the downward displacement member 640 is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (d) and 29 (e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The speed V of the connecting hole 633 is increased because the connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture so as to be positioned above the hole 631. It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. As will be described later, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (merges) with the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from being repelled by the upper displacement member 530, and to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (a) to 29 (d), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is set. While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is the velocity component Vh toward the right in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). Gradually increased.

As a result, in the lower displacement member 640, the vicinity of the connecting hole 633 is displaced to the left in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is inverted at the rotation position, and in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), it is displaced toward the right (direction toward the retracted position).

That is, after the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at one end on the leftmost side (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It can be gradually displaced horizontally in an accelerated state toward the direction. As a result, it is possible to bring out the action of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction, and to give a dynamic feeling to the action of the lower displacement member 640.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased (range of angle θ1), the vertical velocity component Vv is increased while the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle). In the range of θ2), since the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, the above-mentioned operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 is made stronger for the player. You can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines) the upper displacement member 530, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). ), In the configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, the effect of the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction can be increased, so that the lower displacement member is displaced in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the displacement in the upward direction. The effect of 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be ensured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 640, the connecting arm 650 is attached to a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) separated upward from the connected portion (driving arm connecting shaft 641) of the drive arm 630. Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right as the rotation centered on the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. .. Therefore, as described above, when the motion of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is exhibited, the motion of bending and stretching is increased by the amount of the horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650. The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Further, when the lower displacement member 640 is produced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) is increased to produce the effect. Can be easily secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contact (coalescence) operation at the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden behind the base member 510 to the tip side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved locus, and is arranged at the overhanging position in a state in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward in a vertical posture. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowermost position, and is stretched by the drive arm 620. Placed in the out position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the overhanging position are united in a state where the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 are in contact with each other. As a result, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the evacuation position.

Here, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, they are repelled in a direction in which they are separated from each other by the impact generated at the time of the contact. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speeds of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 are slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, it takes time for both displacement members 530 and 640 to be integrated to form one character. Is bulky and stretches, which hinders the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640. Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being repelled in the direction of being separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Further, since the downward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually reduced in the section (range of the angle θ2) from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the lower displacement member 640 as a whole is reduced. It is possible to secure the velocity component Vv that goes upward. Therefore, the time required to integrate the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 to form one character can be shortened, and the extension can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the tip (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connecting portion (connecting hole 633) is used. ) Is drawn to draw an arc-shaped locus to gradually reduce the upward speed component Vv. Therefore, the downward speed component Vv of the downward displacement member 640 is reduced to keep the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the overhang rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the overhang position where the lower displacement member 640 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the overhanging position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position (range of angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is in the downward direction (direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent both displacement members 530 and 640 from being repelled in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize their postures.

Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 is a negative value. With the configuration, even if the position of contact (coalescence) is displaced due to dimensional tolerance / assembly tolerance or control variation in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to easily bring the displacement member 640 into contact with the upper displacement member 530 within a range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the projecting unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projecting unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and shows a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

The projecting unit 700 refers to the base member 710, the elevating base 720 rotatably arranged on the base member 710, the rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. It mainly includes a drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720.

First, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 has an insertion hole 711 opened as a circular hole in the front view at substantially the center in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 projecting from the front, and projecting from the back surface. It is provided with two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the back support shafts 713 and 714, respectively. ..

The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the rear base 721 and the front base (FIGS. 34 and FIG. See 35). The rear base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 at a predetermined interval by the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is located between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably housed (arranged).

One side of the back base 721 in the width direction is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged on the front surface of the base member 710, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the base end rail and the tip rail to be relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL, the elevating base 720 can be moved up and down with respect to the base member 710 along the vertical direction.

The back base 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. The sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slid along the sliding groove 721a to raise and lower the elevating base 720 (rear base 721). To.

The connecting arm 719 has a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevating base 720 (rear base 721) projecting from the front at an end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ) Is provided with a sliding pin 719b slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a and a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support holes 719a and the sliding pin 719b. .. The drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719c via the collar C. As will be described later, the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven so that the connecting arm 719 is rotated around the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 is a drive arm 771 in which the rotation shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and the rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the tail transmission gear 772d is connected, and the transmission gear 772a at the head of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and the drive is arranged in front of the base member 710. It is provided with a motor 773.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 772d is the head of the transmission gear 772d. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the lowermost position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21 (a)), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. It is transmitted from the gear 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33A) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33 (a)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (overhang position) (FIG. 21 (c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extending position) (see FIG. 21 (c)), the rotational driving force is the leading transmission gear. It is transmitted from 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (c)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowermost position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a)). )reference).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. In addition, the rotating shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the back base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b arranged on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the curved rack gear 731b. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 781a causes the rotating member 730 to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 is the transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in a state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center of the curved rack gear 731b in the circumferential direction, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of slide displacement of the projecting member 735 (the direction of projecting or immersing when appearing and descending) as the vertical direction. It is arranged at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "center rotation position") (see FIG. 36 (b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 uses the rotation shaft 731a as the rotation center. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36B). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36 (c)) (see FIG. 36 (c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated on the rotating shaft. It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36C) with 731a as the center of rotation. As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36 (a)) after passing through the central rotation position (see FIG. 36 (a)). ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the protruding member 735 appears and disappears from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swing member 732 that is swingably arranged in front of the back base 731, and the swing members 732 and the back base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between the two, a front base 734 disposed in front of the back base 731, a projecting member 735 disposed slidably on the back of the front base 734, and a front base. A drive mechanism for displacementing (sliding displacement and swinging) the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the 734 and the back base 731 is provided.

The back base 731 is formed in the shape of a container having a substantially circular front view with the front open, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is missing, and the bottom is formed from the part where the outer peripheral wall is missing. A part of the wall protrudes upward. On the back surface of the rear base 731, as described above, the rotating shaft 731a pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the curvature meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35) are curved. A rack gear 731b is arranged.

Further, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotation shaft 732a of the swing member 732 and the tip of the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 are slidably inserted into the back base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e through which the slide pin 733b of the intermediate member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 731c, with one end side and the other end side. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swing member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swing member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and the axis of the rotation shaft 731a is positioned on an extension line in the extension direction, and the slide hole 731e and the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 described later Formed in parallel. A pair of shaft support holes 731c and guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to a virtual line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The rocking member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an acted shaft 732b formed as a columnar shaft body, and the base end sides on which the rotating shaft 732a and the acted shaft 732b are arranged face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 731c of the back base 731, and the actuated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into the working hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the back base 731. Will be done.

The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the rotating shaft 732a from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is formed by the rotating shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between them. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is the acted shaft 732d and the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between the 731d and the action hole 733a.

The interposition member 733 is a plate-shaped portion interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swing member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the elevating and lowering (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposition member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732, and the pair is oriented in a front view C shape. It is arranged line-symmetrically.

As will be described later, when the interposition member 733 is raised (sliding displacement upward), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b upward, and the swinging member 732 lifts the tip end side thereof. When the interposition member 733 is lowered (sliding displacement downward) while being swung (rotated), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 is moved downward. It is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down the tip side.

The slide pin 733b is a columnar portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the back surface of the interposition member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the line of symmetry of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the intermediate member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along a horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the intermediate member 733) so as to project from the front surface of the intermediate member 733. The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b is slid on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). The intermediate member 733 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) according to the change (increase / decrease) of. That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the drive body 761, the interposition member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposition member is pushed up. The 733 is lowered by its own weight.

An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in a state of being elastically extended, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the intermediate member 733. That is, the lowering of the interposing member 733 (sliding displacement downward) is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the own weight of the interposing member 733). As a result, as will be described later, the rocking member 732 can be swung (rotated) quickly in the tilting direction (direction in which the tip is lowered).

The front base 734 is a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the back base 731. A slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted is formed in the front base 734. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731.

The projecting member 735 is a long plate-like body that is slidably displaced on the back surface side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a columnar portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the front of the projecting member 735. , Are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735, and the sliding pin 761c of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is slidably inserted. To. Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

An urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735.

The drive mechanism for displacement (slide displacement and swing) of the projecting member 735 and the swing member 732 is a drive body 761 rotatably arranged in front of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the drive body 761. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 762a to 762e to which the tail transmission gear 762d is connected to the 761a, and the transmission gear 762a at the head of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 731. It is provided with a drive motor 763.

The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is a portion formed as a disk cam in which a curved surface corresponding to the rotation position of the drive body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is formed. By sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intermediate member 733, the intermediate member 733 is driven (sliding and displaced). Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761 and acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 as described above to project. Drive the member 735 (slide displacement).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the drive body 761. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 762a is the head of the transmission gear 762e. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the trailing transmission gear 762e. The drive body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

When the drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swing member 732 moves downward on its tip side due to its own weight. It is oscillated (rotated) in the direction of displacement to (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the position of the sliding pin 761c in the vertical direction is raised. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the projecting member 735 is raised (sliding displacement upward) (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposing member 733 is raised, so that the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the working hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and shakes. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces its tip side upward.

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (sliding displacement downward).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

40 (a) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. is there. In addition, in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the sliding wall 733c and the protruding member 735 of the intermediate member 733 are slid in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. Hole 735b is schematically illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) is in contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from the position P1 to the position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has its bottom surface (the lower surfaces of FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)) in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the interposition member 733, FIG. 40). It is formed in a straight line along (a) and 40 (b) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is moved from the top to the maximum when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously lowered to the lower side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side of the sliding hole 735b (right side in FIG. 40 (a)) to a predetermined range, and the other end of the sliding hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed from a straight portion 735b2 extending in a range up to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is formed by being curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the drive body 761 in a state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. Further, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is located on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the drive body 761 slides from the drive body 761. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, so that the protruding member 735 is maintained in the state of being stopped at the lowermost position.

The rotation position where the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position (that is, the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is set to the "predetermined rotation position". ".

The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40A and 40B). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that the driving body 761 is in the second rotation position due to the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2. When it is rotated toward, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40B), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is predetermined on the straight portion 735b2. It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and then enters the straight portion 735b2, and the end (sliding) of the straight portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end side of the moving hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40 (a)), the direction is changed at the end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). As a result, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, showing a transition state when the protruding member 735 is slidably displaced and the rocking member 732 is swung. Note that in FIGS. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically shown. Further, in FIG. 41 (a), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position, and in FIG. 41 (b), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged in the predetermined rotation position is shown in FIG. 42 (a). 42 (b) shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at a rotation position between a predetermined rotation position and a second rotation position, and FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. Will be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) (that is, the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position and the protruding member 735 is located at the lowermost position. Will be done. When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from this state, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter, as shown in FIG. 41 (b) (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

When the drive body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41 (b)) is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is further increased as shown in FIG. 42 (a). By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid upward by pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is reduced to the radius R2, which is the minimum diameter, as shown in FIG. 42 (b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and the swing member 732 is further rotated by its own weight, and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position when the straight portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the drive body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) (that is, the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position), FIG. 42 (a) ), The cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40B), so that the interposition member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Along with this, the swing member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid downward by pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the operation of rotating the swing member 732 in the direction of raising its tip is also continued. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position when the straight line portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. 41 (a). As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position accordingly. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the position is at the lowermost position (that is, FIG. 41 (b). ) Is maintained in the stopped state.

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the member 2 (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by the drive motor 763 of 1.

Here, in the conventional product, when the two members are displaced by the one drive motor, the driving forces for driving the two members are overlapped, so that the load on the drive motor becomes large and the durability thereof decreases. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (cam portion 761b and the intermediate member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swing member 732 lowers the tip of the swing member 732. The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) is increased by raising the tip of the swing member 732 (the drive body 761 is first rotated from the second rotation position). It can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section to be rotated to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 is a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the drive body 761 is secondly rotated). The load of the drive motor 763 in the section where the drive motor 763 is rotated from the position to the first rotation position) is driven in the section where the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward (the section where the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). It can be smaller than the load of the motor 763.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and the first transmission means has a relatively high load. Can make the second transmission means a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and its durability can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), and a state in which the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 are both displaced can be formed, so that the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. While trying to improve the effect, the effect of displacement of both members 732 and 735 can be improved.

Further, the first transmission means displaces the swing member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. It is displaced, and swings per unit displacement of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the drive body 761) according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced while suppressing the load of the drive motor 763.

Further, it is a section for reducing the load of the drive motor 763 (in the first transmission means, a section for lowering the tip of the swing member 732 (a section for rotating the drive body 761 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). In the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is gravitationally driven by the displacement of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735. It is formed by having a displacement component downward in the direction, that is, by utilizing the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from becoming complicated. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced. Further, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the displacement speed of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily kept constant, and the drive motor 763 can be increased accordingly. The burden can be suppressed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are arranged separately. Space for this can be eliminated, and the size of the rotating member 730 can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement deviation of the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. Can be enhanced.

Here, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is started, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load on the head becomes large, the initial speed may become slow and the effect of the effect may be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) is formed from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be increased by that amount, so that the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be used. The upward slide displacement can be started smoothly.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering the tip thereof (see FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b)). Therefore, when the swing member 732 is swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swing can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the momentum to the rotation of the drive body 761, so that the upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, in this way, the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, so that both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. This can be avoided and the effect of displacement can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b and the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the drive body 761. By giving momentum to the member, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the drive body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 but at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1). Positioned (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 42 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the amount of upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the drive body 761 suddenly increases. The load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 is arranged on the horizontally long rectangular base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500 and on the base member 810 so as to be able to elevate. The elevating member 820, the drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820, the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force for the rotation of the drive motor 891, and one end of the base member 810 are pivotally supported. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around a shaft support by the rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is displaceable by the displacement of the link member 850, and a slide member 860 thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 870 that transmits the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed through the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B) in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 protruding in a columnar shape on the back surface side. It is formed mainly with and.

Each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813 is a hole through which each of the sliding pins 861, 862, 863 of the slide member 860, which will be described later, is inserted to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860, and is the direction of gravity (FIG. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that opens long in the 43 (b) vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811 and 812, 813 are formed side by side, and a sliding hole 811 is formed in the central portion, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. .. In other words, a sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 to be described later and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844, and are formed on the shafts of the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole to be formed through.

The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted through a through hole 851 formed through one end of the link member 850, which will be described later, to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a columnar shape.

As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is arranged on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-like body on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is internally fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train formed by connecting gears 844 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 can rotate to shaft support pins 814 to 816 protruding toward the back surface of the base member 810. It is supported by. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, the driving force thereof is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving the drive motor 891.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back surface side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850, which will be described later, and is formed so as to project at a distance at which the tip thereof overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 that penetrates circularly at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 that penetrates in a long hole shape at the other end in substantially the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850, and the through hole 851 and transmission. It is mainly provided with a connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole for inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 inside to rotatably support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so as not to fall off because the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted into the through hole 851 and the collar C3 is inserted from the back side and fastened with a screw or the like. Will be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 of the link member 850, an annular portion 852 projecting in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 43B). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap, and each of the transmission gears 840 The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 843 to 844.

Further, a torsion spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by laminating a wire made of a metal material on a cylindrical spiral, and can apply an urging force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion wound over the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the spirally wound state of the torsion spring SP1 is broken, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied to the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can suppress the spiral state from collapsing and stabilize the urging direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for arranging the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the urging direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can be done.

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 protruding from the front side of the link member 850 in a hook shape, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 protruding from the back side of the base member 810 in a hook shape. Engage. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and apply an urging force to the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation axis.

The connecting side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844a can be displaced by sliding inside the connecting side sliding groove 853. As a result, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof. Is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 through which the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 is inserted can be inserted into the inside of the transmission side sliding groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected to each other via the base member 810. Therefore, the slide member 860 arranged on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid and displaced by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 arranged on the back side of the base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the length dimension in the gravity direction is set to be smaller than the length dimension in the gravity direction of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. As a result, the overall outer shape of the elevating unit 800 in front view can be reduced.

The slide member 860 has a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed to protrude from the back surface side in a columnar shape, a plurality of slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding to the front side. It is mainly provided with two columnar protrusions 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, and can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pins 862 and the sliding pins 862 The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back surface side of the base member 810 with screws or the like.

Therefore, the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and the sliding holes 813 formed through the base member 810 in a straight elongated hole shape, so that the slide member 860 is inserted. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810 and is slidably connected to the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 in the elongated hole direction. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, so that the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which the protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape long in the gravity direction and have a width dimension in the lateral direction. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusions 871a to 871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member arranged on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with racks 872 extending in the direction of gravity and arranged in pairs on the target and rack gears on the racks 872. Each pinion gear 873 is mainly provided with a second slide member 871 arranged between the pinion gears 873.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, the rack 872 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the central portion of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and is meshed with a pinion gear 873 described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid and displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is also displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 includes an upright portion 871e formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view and bent toward the front side at a lower end portion, and rack gears 871d engraved on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. It is mainly provided with a plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c that project in a columnar shape on the back surface side.

The erecting portion 871e is a wall portion to which the elevating member 820 described later is fastened to the elevating tip surface thereof, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw inside the elevating member 820 and fastening the elevating member 820 to the tip portion thereof penetrates. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

Further, the upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging the decorative member 830 described later in the gap, and is a gap forming portion in the front-rear direction of the decorative member 830. The vertical dimension is set to be larger than the thickness of. As a result, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a tooth contact surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on both the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and each slide from the back side of the slide member 860 to the tip end side of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is made rotatable with respect to the slide member 860, and is held slidably along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, and the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid-displaced along with the rotation. Therefore, since the second slide member 871 slides and displaces with respect to the slide member 860 in the direction of gravity, the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 and slides. The displacement distance can be made larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed from becoming small.

As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that projects toward the back surface side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the upright portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the upright portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened through the fastening hole 821a. As a result, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are arranged on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that regulates the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, whereby the transmission member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape imitating the title or logo of the game machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of interest by emitting light from the title, logo, or the like on the player side.

Next, the movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. 49 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. FIG. 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is arranged on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position. It is a state in which it is located at the lowermost position and is arranged below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 that can be placed at the end farthest from the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and a reference numeral of the virtual line KS3 is given. ..

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a), when the elevating unit 800 is located in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side on which the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). Is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in a state of being positioned upward. Therefore, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also in a state of being positioned upward.

Further, in the first state, the virtual line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 and the protrusion 844a for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850. The position is orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 connecting the intermediate position of the connecting side sliding groove 853 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the link member 850 from being displaced by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the elevating unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a) and the driving force for rotation acts on the drive motor 891, as described above, the gears 184 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate. The driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted into and connected to the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, which is connected by inserting the sliding pin 861 into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, is slidably displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to its displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slidably displaced. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52 (b), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. It is said that it is in a state of being. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward from the first state with respect to the base member 810.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the second state.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830. Therefore, the title and logo of the game machine formed on the decorative member 830 can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the elevating member 820 is adjacent below the decorative member 830, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state to the third state of the initial position, it is possible to display a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 of the elevating unit 800 are combined in front of the game area. it can.

Further, in the third state, the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are located at the descending ends of the sliding holes 81 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by each of the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 of the transmission gear 840. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gear 844 from being damaged.

Next, the united state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operating unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 200 on the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53.

In the combined state shown in FIG. 53, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800. The 820 is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing each member (elevation base 720, rotating member 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (protruding unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern (elevation unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) is formed. It can be visually recognized by the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the game machine 10.

In addition, each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating the wings of an animal, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in a bow shape, and the elevating unit 800. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of the game machine.

Further, as described above, since the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 435 in the combined state (overhanging state). The pattern (character) of 1 can be formed by combining 455, the elevating member 820, and the decorative member 830.

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also other movable units (protruding unit 700 and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be combined with and used as one display surface. As a result, a plurality of display forms can be formed by making the displacement states of the movable units (elevating unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) arranged in the operating unit 200 different, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, a part of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is attached to the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 54). It is placed in an overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The elevating member 820 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 54) of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed to include a protrusion unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are displaceably formed at the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and the elevating member 820 is formed. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 of the three movable units can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the elevating member 820 in consideration of damage due to the impact at the time of contact. And since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later elevating member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the starting rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhanging position, and an effect is produced when forming a pattern (character). Can be enhanced.

Further, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced, if the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 is attached to the protruding member 735. It is possible to suppress contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are movable and united in the space at the center of the game machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surfaces thereof. There are game machines that collide with each other and coalesce. However, when the side surfaces collide and coalesce, the collision tends to form scratches on the collision surface. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is easily impaired.

Further, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to slow down the speed of the collision, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the accessory is increased. It has gone down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the movable unit is provided. The sides do not collide with each other when they are displaced and combined in the central space of the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and prevent the design of the movable unit from being impaired.

Further, when the movable units are displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined, the side surfaces of the movable units do not collide with each other, so that the speed of displacement can be made constant when the combined displacement occurs. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the uniting operation of the characters, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the elevating unit 800 and the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 are two-stage racks (the elevating unit 800 is a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871. The slide unit 400 is configured via a first side pinion gear 432 between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13), and thus the conventional one-stage. The speed of displacement operation can be improved compared to the rack of the type (a form consisting of only a rack and a pinion). Therefore, by increasing the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) can be improved. As a result, the time during which the player can visually recognize the union operation can be shortened, so that the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the dimensions in the front-rear direction increase and the size increases. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes a second slide member 871 formed so as to project to the side having the same front-rear direction position as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, the whole (elevating member 820, rotation). The front-rear direction dimension of the member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine 10 in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the elevating member 820 is increased to increase its rigidity. Can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a position protruding toward the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. It is arranged at an overlapping position. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same positions in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 53 left-right direction), the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 It is possible to reduce the width of the bulge in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference with and (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be prevented from intersecting with the displacement locus, so that the second slide member 871 and the rotating member 871 can be separated from each other. It is possible to suppress collision during displacement (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, the displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. 55 to 58 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 55 to 58 sequentially show the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the projecting unit 700 sliding displacement of the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed in the middle of displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating member 720.

As described above, in the slide members 430 and 450, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced as they are slid and displaced. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotating members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. (Fig. 57, center position in the left-right direction) is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle.

Here, the first member and the second member, which are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (overhanging) position, are provided, and the first member and the second member are displaced to the united position, respectively. There is a gaming machine that makes the player visually recognize as one character by associating (integrating) the first member and the second member with each other or bringing them into contact with each other.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, if the structure is such that the first member and the second member are displaced to the united (overhanging) position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they are displaced to the united position while being displaced from each other. May interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. , The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 in a linear displacement, so that the elevating base 720 is arranged at the united position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400. Since the 455 is arranged at the united position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the united position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the displacement of the elevating base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the locus. That is, with respect to the displacement locus on the straight line of the elevating base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720, and the rotation locus is united (overhanging). ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease as it is displaced to the position.

As a result, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be made into a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevating base 720. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set as a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that linearly displaces the elevating unit 700. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 deviate from each other, the trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 do not intersect each other, so that the members can be prevented from interfering with each other. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened. The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 becomes a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape of the slide unit 700 is linearly displaced in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720. Is increased, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be increased in size.

As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the coalescing (overhanging) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the united position.

That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the united (overhanging) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation is moved to the united position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the projecting unit 700 instead of moving, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when only the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced, the position of the rotating shaft is fixed. Therefore, when the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the end of the rotating members 435 and 455. In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, the end portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft is only rotationally displaced, so that it is difficult to set a large displacement distance of the elevating base 720. Further, when the rotation axis of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the center of the rotating members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotating member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotating member is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position. , It is difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating shafts of the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed at the center positions of the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating shafts are formed on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated by combining linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is referred to as the posture at the combined position. Can be specified independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotated and displaced between the retracted position and the united position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the overhanging position. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 are combined with the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position by the amount of the linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the longitudinal direction of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position (position where the base members 434 and 454 are arranged outside) is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space at the retracted position. On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), by rotating, the direction is substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the retracted position can be increased, and in the combined position, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be projected from the central portion of the game board 13.

Further, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged in the central portion of the game machine 10 (operation unit 200), as the size of the third symbol display device 81 increases. , The space on both the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in a configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully exhibited. That is, the game area is formed vertically, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed. , It is difficult to secure the arrangement space for the members. Therefore, in order for the rotating members 435 and 455 to not protrude into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position, while they are arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged by that amount, and as a result, they are formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the united position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, the evacuation space for the rotating members 435 and 455 to retract is reduced to secure the space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the game machine 10, and at the combined position, the evacuation space is moved to the central portion of the game machine 10. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably connected to the base members 434 and 454 so that the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protruding unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the projecting unit 700 during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size together with the projecting unit 700 at the united (overhanging) position. The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member 435 is in such an area. The rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size while setting the retracted positions of, 455.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swing member 732 is in a state of being displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that the swing member 732 can be brought into close contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by abutting on the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swing member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swing member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swing member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected to each other, the player can visually recognize the state in which each movable unit is integrated (combined state), and can give a hobby by the displacement of the accessory.

Further, since the swing member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swing member 732. The gap (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

As a result, it is possible to secure a displaceable space when the rotating members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) are in the combined state. As a result, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) can be further rotated, and the variation of the displacement mode in the combined state of the operating unit 200 can be increased. ..

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the swing member 732 is kept away from the rotating member 730 to exert a role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455, and then. Displaces the swing member 732 in a direction close to the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. The displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 produces an effect. Can be enhanced.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining each operation unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of each operation unit is combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by forming the rotating members 435 and 455 into a shape imitating a bow, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow is formed. It is possible to form a state in which the bow is pulled by an arrow or a state in which the arrow is released from the bow and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (opposite side of the arrowhead) of the arrow, and the elevating member 820. Is the central portion of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show transition states when the stop position of the left slide member 430 shifts in the excess direction and the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 collide with each other.

Further, in FIGS. 59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 will be described, and when the right rotating member 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the left rotating member The 435 is considered to be the same as the case where the operating unit 200 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center position in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are originally due to poor control, rattling of each member, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor, as shown in FIG. 59 (a). It was not stopped at the stopped position in the combined state, and there was a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 collided with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700. Therefore, there is a risk that the swing member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with each other and the parts are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged with respect to the elevating base 720, and is therefore shown in FIG. 59 (b). As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 with respect to the elevating base 720, not only the variation of the displacement mode of the projecting unit 700 can be increased, but also the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other. It can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The rocking member 732 arranged in pairs with the rocking member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to alleviate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force for the rotating member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rotating member 730 is further rotated.

That is, two sets of the swing member 732 and the rotary member 435 (rotary member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotary member 435 (rotary member 455) is brought into contact with the swing member 732 in one set, the contact is made. With the contact, the swing member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is formed. When the swing member 732 is displaced beyond the reference position and abuts on the swing member 732, the swing member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set in accordance with the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the other set. The impact can be received not only by the rocking member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the rocking member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 07 (b)) than the rotation axis, so that the rotating member 455 (rotation) When abutting on the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotational moment acting on the axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) can be applied. ) Can be used to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730. Therefore, it is not necessary to supply electric power to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730, so that the driving energy can be suppressed.

Next, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 60A and 60B show transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 deviate in the excess direction, the swing member 732 and the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with each other, and the swing member 732 or the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with each other. Was in danger of being damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-mentioned third operation at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to alleviate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 or each of the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Further, in this case, the impact when the rocking member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for projecting the projecting member 735. Therefore, the drive motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735. The load can be reduced. That is, the impact when the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, whereby the drive body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third operation may be allowed to wait a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 shift in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the drive that displaces the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735. The rotational resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacementing the rocking member 732.

Further, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front views of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700. Note that FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the gap between each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 is the gap of the rotating member 730 when the displacement of the third operation is performed. The swing member 732 is increased by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be further displaced as compared with the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61B, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be rotated by further sliding-displace the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 toward the central portion of the game machine 10. It can be displaced toward the center of the game machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further give a sense of unity to the united (overhanging) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second united state of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second united state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 62 to 64 show transition states in which each movable unit of the operating unit 200 projects to the position of the second united state. Further, FIG. 62 shows the operation unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 in the second united position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second united position. However, each is illustrated.

Further, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operating unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. ) And the elevating member 820) at the united (overhanging) position will be referred to as the first united state below. Further, in the first united state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the first effect mode. It can be recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is arranged in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (position shown in FIG. 17A) and the upper united unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22 (a)). The lower united unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A) at the position shown in). In the formation of the second united state by the operating unit 200, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slidably displaced to the central portion of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by being displaced downward and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 being displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper union unit 500 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower union unit 600 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A). By being displaced to the positions shown in FIG. 27 (c), the second united state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second united state, each movable unit of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, and lower united unit 600) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the second effect mode. It can be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second production mode is, for example, a pattern (character) that imitates Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the part forming the body portion of the Pegasus is the lower united unit 600, the part forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper uniting unit 500, and the part forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second united state, the base member 434 displaced so as to be slidable is displaced to the overhang position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the end of the slide. That is, the base member 434 in the first united state and the base member 434 in the second united state are arranged at different distances that are slidably displaced from the retracted position. Further, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged can be different between the first united state and the second united state.

Further, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is moved from the retracted position in the first united state and the second united state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently due to the difference in the slide displacement distance. In the present embodiment, the rotation angles (postures) of the rotating member 435 are arranged in different postures by about 180 degrees about the rotation axis in the first united state and the second united state.

As described above, the operating unit 200 is a tension of each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of each operating unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700 and elevating unit 800). By the displacement to the protruding position, each member can be united to form one pattern (character).

That is, as the first effect mode, the operation unit 200 simply combines each member into the central space of the operation unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) to form one pattern (character). Instead, as a second effect mode, each member can be combined in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, and the like. Can be made to. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, it is possible to show the player various productions and give them a hobby.

Here, a first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units formed displaceably between the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and displaceably formed between the retracted position and the extended position. A game machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

According to this game machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the overhanging positions, each movable unit of the first movable unit group is associated (integrated) with one pattern (integrated). While making the player recognize the character) as the first effect mode, when each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged at the overhang position, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is associated with each other. (Integrated), another pattern (character) is made to be recognized by the player as a second effect mode. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is arranged at the overhanging position. A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group of the above, and in the second gaming state, each of the first movable units is retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is retracted. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the overhanging position, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form the plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the movable unit is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united) of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700 and elevating unit 800) Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower united unit 600) is also used as a movable unit, the movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) production modes are correspondingly used. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. Since it is also used as a part of the above, the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, a space is created in the evacuation space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (a space other than the central space in the evacuation state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), and each movable unit (slide). The unit 400, the upper united unit 500, the lower united unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the evacuation unit 800) can be enlarged.

Further, since each member of each movable unit (rotating member 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) can be enlarged, the first The pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode can be enlarged.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. ), And if they are arranged at the same position in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, they are movable in common in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is used, which hinders the interest.

Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the members (rotating member 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is a united (extended) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a united (extended) position arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since the position is different from the position (out position), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the interest is hindered. Can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being hindered.

Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at different positions (extending positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be increased. It is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from.

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first united state and the second united state, the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to see this, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the rotating members 435 having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the first effect mode are used. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the rotating member 435 when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress that the interest is hindered. Further, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 is arranged in a different position and in a different posture (rotation angle) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that both the first effect mode and the second effect mode are used, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode is in a state in which either the position or the posture arranged in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is different. There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, but the rotating member 435 is the first effect. Since both the arranged position and the posture are different between the mode and the second effect mode, the player is informed that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first united state and the second united state. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably arranged on the base member 434 which is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Further, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) and the entire body can be recognized by the player as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be transformed into. For example, even if there is an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member is in such an area. The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of the 435.

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in the region so that the rotating members 435 of the base member 434 are overlapped with each other in the front view at the retracted position. Therefore, the other regions of the base member 434 (conversion mechanism) The size can be reduced in the front-back direction of the area where is not placed. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second united state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600. 67 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 65 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIb. 68 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb.

It should be noted that FIGS. 65 (a) to 66 (b) show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second united state in order. 65 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65 (b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, and FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. The slide unit 400 in the retracted state is shown in the figure.

Further, the displacement from FIG. 65 (a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second united state, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. Further, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66A, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. It is done by. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacement of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second united state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper uniting unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by chain lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), in the retracted state (state in which the upper united unit 500 is arranged in the retracted position), the upper displacement member 530 is housed inside the base member 510. The lower uniting unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of a front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and a back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the back side as described above. A step portion 434b2 recessed on the back surface side is formed on the lower side (lower side of FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is the entire back surface. By denting to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, since the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is formed by being recessed on the back surface side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the gap below the lower uniting unit 600 can be increased. The displacement member 640 can be arranged.

Further, since the thickness of the base member 434 on the lower side in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the first state (the state shown in FIG. 65B) described later, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, on the upper side of the base member 434 above the step portion 434b2, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13), which are transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotating member 435, can be arranged by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said that.

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected to the base member 410 so as to be slidable and hangs down, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction (FIG. 65 (a) left-right direction) toward the upper side. Where it is easy, the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, so that the deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

Further, at the retracted position (position in FIG. 65A), the back surface side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower uniting unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower united unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower uniting unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 connected above the lower displacement member 640 are where the upper end portion is likely to fall in the front-rear direction. The upper end of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower unit 600 in the retracted position in the front-rear direction can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 is slidably displaced to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the rotating member 435 is rotated by the displacement of the base member 434 by a predetermined amount, so that the rotating member 435 and the lower uniting unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower unit 434 can be positioned below. The position may be such that the united unit 600 does not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the front view, the area K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600 does not overlap with the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. The lower displacement member 640 of the portion is arranged.

As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is likely to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is an upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) separated from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 (rotational driving force). It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 530 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced to the second state, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper uniting unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotating shaft 435b of the rotating member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start the displacement, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the overhang position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 630. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 when it is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 is rotated downward and displaced as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction (center portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B) of the operating unit 200. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced while the base member 434 is slide-displaced to the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side of the front surface of the base member 434. Then, when it collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so that the base member 530 is displaced when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. It is possible to suppress collision with the side surface of the member 434.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68A, in the second state between the first state and the second united state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further laterally oriented than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right side (right side in FIG. 66A). Therefore, the rotating member 435, which is rotationally displaced (in conjunction with) according to the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. As a result, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65 (b)) of the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (FIG. 66 (a) left-right direction) is increased by sliding displacement of the base member 434, and the width of the region K2 is increased by rotating the rotating member 435 (FIG. 66 (Fig. 66)). a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

As a result, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the displacement is performed from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be arranged on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to prevent the upper contact portion (533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the base member 434 in front view while being displaced from the first state to the second united state, so that the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to a position where the second united state is formed. It is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 before the displacement.

Further, since the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see the upper displacement member 530. The displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily see the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

As shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second united state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower united unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 68B) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower uniting unit 600.

As a result, the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged at close positions so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stopped states. The structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, the rotating member 435 If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, while if the arrangement position or orientation of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper uniting unit 500 is formed. The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the united state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protruding unit 700) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , Elevating unit 800) movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit is viewed from the front. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member of the above, even if the stopped state (extension or posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member. It can be easier to maintain sex. That is, by partially overlapping in the front view, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between each movable member of each movable unit and the position in the front-rear direction. By making the difference, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent each movable member of each movable unit from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship of each movable unit with each movable member in the combined state.

Further, in the second effect mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other and arranged, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper contact portion 533. The upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second united state.

That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (overhanging) state can be placed at the same position. Since the pattern (character) formed in the second production mode can be easily visually recognized by the player because it can be integrated and easily visually recognized by the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and the upper displacement member is placed at the stopped position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode. In the structure that abuts on the 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position and the posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 and they are associated (integrated). ) Is inhibited.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other. Therefore, if the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member When the arrangement position or posture of the 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the state of being in contact with each other are displaced from each other, not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, but also the position is displaced. Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other at the united (overhanging) position, the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

Further, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side of at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. The rotating member 435 makes it difficult for the player to see the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

Next, the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment have been described. The 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. It is composed.

The main body base member 2480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board on the lower edge portion. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with protruding portions 2481 on the lower surface side of both end portions in the longitudinal direction.

The protruding plate portion 411 is engraved with a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 with the slide displacement of the first member 431 on the upper surface side.

As described above, the projecting portions 2481 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. The protrusion 2481 is recessed with a circular bearing hole 2481a into which the shaft portion 2486 of the rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed through the protruding portion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game machine) of the main body base member 2480 in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 toward the outside, and the axial centers formed at both ends are concentrically formed.

The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485, a rotation portion 2487 having a substantially circular shape and a predetermined thickness is formed, and the shaft portion 2486 of the axial body is formed outward in the longitudinal direction from the axis of the rotation portion 2487. Is formed to protrude.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up.

The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are formed concentrically with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2488, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed to be smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2488 and arranged in the main body base member 2480.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmission member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a is meshed with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in the front view) of the main body base member 2480.

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotary transmission member 2485, and the axis is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotation shaft of the rotary drive motor 2489 is inserted into the through hole 2481b of the protruding portion 2781, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protruding portion 2488.

Therefore, by applying the rotational driving force to the rotary drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with the transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a transmits a driving force to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, the rotating member 435 can be driven to rotate as the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces.

The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a transmits the drive to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed to include a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the back surface side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension as the tooth portion (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges into a shape that gradually decreases toward the central portion of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness increases toward the back surface side. The distance dimension in which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 to the back surface side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. It is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 viewed from the front in the state where the teeth are released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 73 (a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located downward (lower side of FIGS. 72 and 73), it transmits to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. A state in which the gear 2437a is in mesh with the gear 2437a is formed.

Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when a rotation driving force is applied to the rotation drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotation transmission member 2485 upward on the back side, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Tooth.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 changes to the rotation transmission member 2485. Displaces upward as the rotation of. As a result, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be formed so as not to rotate.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430, and the slide of the left slide member 2430. The second drive state in which the displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the left slide member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is stopped to rotate. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by the inertial force.

As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotary movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor that applies a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 increases. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotary drive motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410 forms a second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member 435. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for rotationally driving the rotary member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 provided with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 to transmit the left rotation. When the mesh between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when the second drive state in which the mesh is released is switched to the first drive state in which the gears are engaged, the gears cannot be engaged and the side surfaces are engaged with each other. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not be meshed due to collision.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second drive state in which the teeth are released to the first drive state in which the teeth are engaged, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the teeth portion of the transmission gear 2437a. it can.

Further, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the back surface side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the inclined surface that is gradually reduced. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is released.

It is preferable that the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment has its axis formed on a flat surface on the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are suppressed from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and an accommodating member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board) on the lower surface side, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side in the vertical direction.

The accommodating member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge to the front side of the game machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Further, the housing member 3490 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. As a result, the accommodating member 3490 can be arranged inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the protruding wall 3491 on the lower side of the accommodating member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the protruding wall 3491 on the upper side of the accommodating member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the accommodating member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the accommodating member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495. The diameter is formed smaller than the diameter of.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides and displaces the accommodating member 3490 up and down by its drive, and by applying electric power, a shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion thereof is inserted. It is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of the cylinder.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the accommodating member 3490 with its shaft portion inserted inside the insertion hole 3481c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced vertically, and the accommodating member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced vertically. That is, the accommodating member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the accommodating member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 75B is a schematic view of the accommodation member 3490. Is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a front view in a state where the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. 76 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the accommodating member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 76A, when the accommodating member 3490 is located above, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is large. It is arranged in a sufficiently secured state, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing between the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, when the accommodating member 3490 is located below, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is arranged in a state of being smaller than the distance dimension L1 and the main body. The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in a disengaged state (distance dimension L1> L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides with respect to the base member 3410, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so that the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, it is possible to form a form that does not rotate even if the left slide member 430 is displaced.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. It is possible to switch between the 1st drive state and the 2nd drive state.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly meshed with each other.

That is, when the tooth portions of the transmission gear 437a and the tooth portions of the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, if the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a state of being out of phase, the left rotation transmission rack gear While the tooth surface of 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other, the transmission gear 437a is engaged while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. Therefore, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phases, and the gears can be smoothly matched.

Next, the slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge portion. .. On the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

The counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed so as to be located on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notched portions 4413a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both end portions and the central portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a include a small tooth 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed so as to be located on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notches 4414a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch 4414a include a small tooth portion 4414b whose outer shape is smaller than that of the non-adjacent teeth.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view of the base member 4410. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit 4400 in the state where the meshing of a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and a transmission gear 437a is released. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIG. 78A, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates counterclockwise. It forms a state of being in mesh with the transmission rack gear 4413.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is moved. A state in which the teeth are disengaged from the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

That is, the rotating member 435 can be rotated along with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. .. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is caused by its inertial force. Can be continued by.

Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for disengaging the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so that the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. This can be prevented and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a passing through the notch portion 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly engaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 not provided with the small tooth portion 4413b, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, if the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth There is a risk that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 will mesh with each other and the teeth cannot be engaged.

In this case, when the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are formed to have a smaller outer shape than the other teeth, the rotation phases of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the teeth from engaging with each other and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase thereof. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly performed.

Next, the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment have been described. The 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed through the axis of the transmission gear 5437f in a circular shape, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. A plurality of rollers 5439d arranged in the above, a cage 5439e for holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the cage 5439e and switching the phase of the rollers 5439d with respect to the cam surface are mainly provided. ..

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in an elongated hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding from the front side of the displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. ..

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a front view before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81 (b) is a left view after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawings are simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in a state where the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. It is bitten by the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotating member 5435, the position of the protruding portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is changed to the rotating member 5435 due to the displacement. Displace with respect to. As a result, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displace the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 5430 is slid-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating, and the one-way clutch is used to stop the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. By changing the state in which the 5439 allows the transmission of rotation to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, a third driving state is formed in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the displacements of the displacement member 5436 can be combined in addition to the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435, the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment have been described. The 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. To.

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to the operator 6438 described later. To.

The operator 6438 is formed in a vertically long rod-like body having a rectangular front view. In the operator 6438, a connecting pin 6438a projecting forward is formed at the lower end portion, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed slightly above the central portion in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole to be inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 protruding rearward from the back side of the back surface side base member 434a in a columnar shape, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operator 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back surface side base member 434a in a state of being rotatable about the axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter dimension is formed to be smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the operator 6438 rotates about the through hole 6438b while the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes and the one-way The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back surface side base member 434a, and the other end is locked to the operator 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always urged in the clockwise rotation direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis in the front view. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in the driving state (the state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435) when no external force is applied to the operator 6438.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in the state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84 (b) is the slide unit in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the 6400 from the front. 85 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are shown by broken lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), in a state where no external force is applied to the operator 6438, the operation operator 6438 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Placed in.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 slides and displaces, and the other end of the operator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side of the front view on the side (upper side) comes into contact with the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

When the left slide member 6430 further moves to the end portion after the side surface of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the base member 6410, the operator 6438 is displaced around the through hole 6438b in the counterclockwise rotation direction in the front view.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430. By changing the one-way clutch 5439 from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the left slide member 6430 is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by its inertial force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment have been described. The 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which the second slide member 7460, which will be described later, is arranged is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged to face the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462. The shaft portion 7436 to be formed, the roller 7465 arranged with the shaft portion 7436 inserted, and the drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461 are mainly provided. Tooth.

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the tooth surface 7461a of the gear is formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction in the front view.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding the roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed on the side surface in the vertical direction, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw to the set hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7436 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is formed to be larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7436 is sandwiched and held by the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7436 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. ..

The outer shape of the roller 7465 is formed into a columnar shape, and a shaft hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the axis thereof. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7436 inserted through the shaft hole and is arranged between the two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member for applying a driving force that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to slide and displace the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged in the front is decorated (display of a pattern or the like) on the plane arranged in the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can be made visible to the player by sliding displacement from the position where it overlaps with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to the position where it does not overlap.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position before displacement of the operator 6438, and the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. The only difference is that no urging spring is arranged between the 6434a2 and the 6434a2, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slidably displaced, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right side.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced so that the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87B), the left slide member 7430 The rotating member 5435 can be rotationally moved with the displacement of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the operator is urged downward by the slide displacement while urging the roller 7465 downward. The 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operator 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincide with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is changed to the roller 7465. It comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displacement allows the operator 6438 to be rotated around the through hole 6438b while urging the roller 7465 to the right.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged so as to be tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Will be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the neutral position on the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Further, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is rotated to a state of being tilted to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is in contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Get in touch. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is tilted to the left side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89A, the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Further, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 is blocking the rotation transmission as described above. The rotation can be continued by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the sliding displacement is performed.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 are In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 can be continued by its inertial force to form a third driving state.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third driving state (for example, waiting until the time when the inertial force stops acting), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435. It is possible to form a second drive state in which the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. .. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is It is possible to change the position where the permissible state is changed to the regulated state or the permissible state is changed to the regulated state. As a result, the position where the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, and the position where the rotating member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. However, the second slide member 7460 is displaced due to the displacement. Since the role of performing the effect and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are combined, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched by displace the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is arranged in either the left-right direction of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to either the left-right direction in the state where the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacement, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without sliding the left slide member 7430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied by the displacement of the left slide member 7430. The first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating. Two drive states can be formed.

Next, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding-displace the left slide member 8430 along the sliding rod member 420. ..

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 8433. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably arranged on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 having a rectangular laterally long front view having a third side rack gear 8445a to which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed. , 8446, which is a horizontally long base member with a rectangular shape in front view, which hangs down from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the slide displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second member 8433 is engraved with the second rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the slide displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably arranged in the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the third member 8445 is engraved with the third side rack gear 8445a on the lower surface thereof. Further, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is acted on by the second side pinion gear 8433d, so that the third member 8445 becomes the second member. It is displaced relative to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 is fitted with the second side pinion gear 8433d. It is possible to apply the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, and show a transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. 94 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 94 (a), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is arranged inside the first member 8431 and the second member 8433. A third member 8445 is arranged inside the.

In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is arranged in front of the base member 8434. Will be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slide-displaced, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid-displaced without interfering with each other. .. Further, the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the central portion of the game board (in FIG. 93A, the base member 8410 An area where the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446 overlap each other) can be secured.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left. The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side are arranged facing each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both of the 433a, the driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with exercise. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged to face each other in a posture parallel to each other, and teeth are provided on both of the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 is interposed in the combined state, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with the third member 8445, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93B, the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged so as to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433, leaving a part of overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface on the left side of the base member 8431b hung on the first member 8431 and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8434 hung on the second member 8433 are substantially in the front-rear direction. They are placed in the same position. Further, the side surface on the left side of the base member 8434 hanging on the second member 8433 and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8446 hanging on the third member 8445 in the front-rear direction are arranged at substantially the same positions in the front-rear direction. To.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Next, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is hung on the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is hung on the first member 431 and the second member 8433. A base member 9434 hanging from the base member 9434 is arranged. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding-displace the left slide member 9430 along a sliding guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 9431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 9433. Mainly provided with 9434, a slide rail 9443 arranged on the base member 9434, a rectangular vertically long base member 9446 connected to the slide rail 9443, and a freely deformable thread-like wire 9444. It is composed of.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the left side of the front view on the upper end side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431b1 extending in the upward and downward directions is formed inside the concave groove. It is formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the second member 9433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433, the second member 9433 , The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c whose upper end side is cut out in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. Further, on the base member 9434, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the base member 9434 in a state where the expansion / contraction direction is the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described later, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for holding the third member in a slidable manner, and is formed of two plates and the plates of each other are slidably displaceable. Further, the slide rail 9443 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) inside, and is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The base member 9437 is slidably arranged with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back surface side to the slide rail 9443.

The base member 9437 is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the right side of the upper end portion when viewed from the front, and a columnar connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the concave groove. Will be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displace the base member 9437 with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, a fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connecting path for connecting one end and the other end located between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. (See FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid displacement. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). It is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are located at different positions in the front-rear direction. Placed in. Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced without interfering with each other. The space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the urging force of the slide rail arranged between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move to the left with respect to the base member 9434. Although a sliding force acts, the wire 9444 connects the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, so that the base member 9434 causes the base member. It is possible to prevent the 9446 from sliding to the left with respect to the base member 9434.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is a combination of the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. It is possible to maintain a state in which the 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are overlapped in the front-rear direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated to rotate the left pinion gear. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Is provided, so that the second member 9433 can be provided with a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 9400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 by the amount that the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state of being faster than the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened, and the shielding state and The open state can be switched quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b in the front view and the right side of the base member 9434 in the front view. The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the side surface of the base member 9434 on the left side in the front view and the side surface of the base member 9446 on the right side in the front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, so that the third member 8445 is arranged above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. You don't have to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be reduced, and the space for arranging the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

Next, the elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. 99 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 10800. Is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the united (extending) position has been described. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 10800)) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in a united state. The same as in each of the above embodiments. The same reference numerals are given to the parts of, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed by including an elevating member 10820 which is arranged so as to be elevated on the base member 810. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is mainly provided with a protrusion 821 projecting to the back surface side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to project from the back surface side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, and is an elevating member. It is formed so as to project from the back surface side of the 10820. The left-right dimension of the engaging portion 10822 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than that of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed so as to protrude toward the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the united state, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 10822 (see FIG. 102 (a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 is provided with a through hole 10822a which is formed so as to project in a rectangular shape from the back surface side of the elevating member 10820 and penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 in the top view. As a result, when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102 (b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is an operating unit 10200 in a united state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 of FIG. 101. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 in the CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, each rotating member 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is brought into contact with the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

The engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension is reduced as the outer shape thereof is directed downward in the rear view. That is, the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99B) of the engaging portion 10822 are formed so as to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction toward the lower side.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the back surface side of the projecting member 735 so that the projecting distance increases toward the lower side, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be in contact with each other. ..

Therefore, the engaging portion 10822 allows the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 to be in contact with each other, so that each movable unit (elevating unit 10800, slide) in the combined state can be brought into contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700) from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of each movable unit in the combined state, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

More specifically, the elevating member 10820 is displaced (vibrated) up and down at a relatively small distance by repeatedly acting a relatively small rotational drive on the drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 in a reciprocating manner.

In this case, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99B) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822, so that the left and right side surfaces are in contact with each other. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 101) of the operating unit 10200.

At the united (overhanging) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment in a direction in which the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 due to the center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operating unit 10200. .. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455, which are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820, can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is displaced repeatedly periodically, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be displaced repeatedly periodically.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700, since the inclined portion 10735a is brought into contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, the elevating member 10820 is given a periodic and repeated displacement, so that the inclined portion 10735 The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the above. Therefore, the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a periodically displaces the distance at which the projecting member 735 is pushed forward (to the left in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, the elevating member 10820 is displaced repeatedly periodically, so that the protruding member 735 can be displaced repeatedly periodically. Therefore, the driving energy can be suppressed because it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763,475,476.

That is, at the united (overhanging) position, the elevating member 10820 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 is formed so that it can be displaced periodically. The rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating member 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. .. Further, in this case, the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by abutting each other, and a mechanism for periodically displaces the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated from each other (non-contacting), the elevating member 10820 may be subjected to periodic displacement without being affected by each other. it can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

Further, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners from each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they are vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the portion of one character formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably arranged with respect to the base members 434 and 454, due to the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820, the rotating members are arranged in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis. The rotating member 730 can be arranged to periodically repeat the operation of being pushed out in the front-rear direction due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

Further, since each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 is directly connected to the displacement (vibration) driving source, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the projecting member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the projecting member 735 is transmitted via each of the rotating members 435 and 455, and thus is transmitted to the projecting member 735. Where the driving force is reduced, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the displacement (vibrating) driving source, so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Further, the elevating member 10820 is arranged on the side closer to the player because the position in the front-rear direction at the united (overhanging) position is arranged in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by the elevating member 10820 on the front side, which is easy for the player to see, as a vibration source, it is possible to easily transmit the force of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the drive body 11761 in a state where the drive body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) shows the drive body 11761 in the second rotation. It is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged at a position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the drive body 761 is lowered so that the intermediate member 733 is lowered with the rotation of the drive body 761 that displaces the projecting member 735 to the overhanging position (the state of protruding from the rotating member 730). Although the case where the 761b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the interposition member 733 is generated as the driving body 11761 displaces the protruding member 735 to the overhanging position (protruding state from the rotating member 730). The cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 is formed so as to rise. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is attached to the sliding wall 733c in a state where the drive body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) on the abutted cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted on the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) on the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from the position P1 to the position P2.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is moved from the bottom to the top. It is continuously raised to the upper side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the intermediate member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. Along with this, the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, the displacement mode will be described when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 104 to 107 sequentially show the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united (overhanging) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 104.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upwardly displaced, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operating unit 200 at the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operating unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, and the amount of extension during the extension operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the protruding unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves to the base. It is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the member 810. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip of the swing member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in a state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until it is arranged in the coalescing (overhanging position), and thus rotates in the middle of the displacement to the coalescing position. It is possible to prevent the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swing member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (elevating member 820, rotating member 435, 455, and rotating member 11730) is formed, and enhance the effect.

Further, since the tip of the swing member 732 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating member 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating member 435 and 455 can be formed large. Therefore, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730) and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700 and elevating unit 800) is formed by being united (character). ) Can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in the direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the united (overhanging) position, the tip of the swing member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730, so that the elevating member 820, the rotating member 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering) The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to be in contact with the base member 410.

In this case, the base member 410 is provided with the contacted portion, and the contacted portion is arranged at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and each component is provided. When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 and the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is brought into contact with the first member 431. It is brought into contact with the member (that is, the contacted member functions as a stopper that regulates the displacement of the left slide member 430). By bringing the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the contacted member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) which is the contact target (member with which the first member 431 is abutted) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). The case where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) should have at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

As described above, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) When they are brought into contact with each other, the above-mentioned parallel displacement component can cause the contacted object to be retracted (released), and a buffering action can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displace the contact object in the direction opposite to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( It is possible to assist the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state).

The contact target does not have to be driven by the driving means. Instead of being driven by a driving means, or in addition to being driven by a driving means, it is formed so as to be urged by an urging means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, etc.). Is also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with the left slide member 430, the urging means is elastically deformed so that the above-mentioned cushioning action can be exerted and the elastic recovery force thereof is increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the case where the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are arranged to the overhanging positions substantially at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is placed in the overhanging position first, and then the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the overhanging position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 hits the upper contact portion 533 in the stopped state. It may be touched). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the upper displacement member which is the object of contact with the lower displacement member 640 (the object with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (combined) at the overhang position). Although the case where the 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact target may be a stationary object (non-displaceable object). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in the lower uniting unit 600 is set to the overhanging rotation position has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited.

For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position may be the vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is set as the overhanging position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be in contact with the upper displacement member 530 at the overhanging position. You may.

Alternatively, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the overhang position is set to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotation position). It may be a rotated rotation position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and at the extension position, the lower displacement member 640 is the upper displacement member. It may be formed so as to be in contact with 530.

In any of these configurations, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened and the bounce can be suppressed by changing (decreasing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower united unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a columnar guide pin is projected from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove into which the guide pin can slide is provided. An example is a structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position by extending to the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

In the case of such a structure, at least a component in the displacement (velocity) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target (the target with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (merged) at the overhang position) is. The shape of the guide groove is set so that it decreases at least in the vicinity of the overhanging position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the bounce is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, only the lower uniting unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper uniting unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be done. In this case, the lower united unit 600 that is turned upside down may be arranged as the upper united unit 500.

In the first embodiment, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the drive state (power supply) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant. ) Has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive state (power supply) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased or decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). You may increase or decrease the speed). For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least one of the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the other party is reduced in the vicinity of the overhang position. An example is a mode in which the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are reduced. It should be noted that the target for reducing the supplied power may be only one of the drive motors 543 and 672, or both.

In the first embodiment, in the protruding unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intermediate member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 come into contact with each other is the rotation of the drive body 761 in the front view. Although the case where the vehicle is located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the above-mentioned position where the bottom surface and the cam surface abut is passed through the rotation center of the drive body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 732 are provided so that the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the projecting member 735. When the weight of the member 733 acts on the drive body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the swing member 732 and the intermediate member 733. It is preferable that the weights of the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 are formed so as to act on the drive body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weights of the swing member 732, the intermediate member 733, and the projecting member 735.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the projecting unit 700 has been described, but it is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of this predetermined range is preferably set according to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swing member 732 is started can be matched with the timing at which the displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 has a displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (velocity) component. ) The case where the load of the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming it so as to have a displacement (velocity) component in the upward direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 The cam shape (cam diameter) in the above and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761) may be combined to make the load of the drive motor 763 uniform.

That is, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively large, the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is applied. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is relatively large, the sliding hole 735b is slid. The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c is relatively small.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735 in the projecting unit 700 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 may be acted as an urging force in the direction of raising (sliding displacement upward) the projecting member 735. In this case, due to the synergistic effect of the sliding hole 735b described above with the curved portion 735b1, the initial velocity when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the left side of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulging portion in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced. In this case as well, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to smoothly perform the tooth engagement when switching from the second drive state in which the teeth are released to the first drive state in which the teeth are released.

Further, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, since bulging portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive meshed from the second drive state in which the teeth are released. Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portions on both sides of the gears to be meshed with each other, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400. Although the case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described above, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430 and 430 are extended from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) (the position on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced to the position of the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small teeth formed in a small size to increase the rigidity thereof. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a may be formed to be large to increase the rigidity thereof.

Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. This can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 6411a that displaces the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 has been described in the slide unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a is provided on the back case 300. It may be formed in the above and arranged so as to be in contact with the operator 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on the member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400. The case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are retracted (positions on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced from the overhanging position (position at the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the roller 7465 that displaces the operator 6438 is arranged on the second slide member 7640 in the slide unit 7400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operator 6438 is not necessarily limited to this. The roller 7645 is arranged on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 arranged on the base member 7410. There may be.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the second member 8433 is formed with respect to the first member 8431. The relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, but the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is not necessarily limited to this. The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is formed to be smaller or larger than the outer shape, so that the distance at which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 are displaced relative to the second member 8433. It may be formed differently from the distance.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, when the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 are slidably displaced to the effect region K in the slide units 8400, 9400, the effect region The case where K is made invisible has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part or all of the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 may be used. , It may be formed from a light-transmitting material so that a part or all of the effect region K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surface on the left side of the base members 8431b and 9431b in the front view and the side surface on the right side of the base members 8434 and 9434 in the front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surface on the left side of the base members 8434 and 9434 and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8446 and 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction has been described. The side surface on the left side of the front view of the members 8431b and 9431b and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8434 and 9434 may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the mode in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other is controlled and dimensioned. The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both are closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where they constantly collide with each other.

In this case, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member, so that the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swing member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the drive motors are quickly stopped at the united (overhanging) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436 and 456 arranged in the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated to the opposite side of the first embodiment. You may overhang.

In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 at the united position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the united (extending) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated from each other. Although the case where the rotating members are arranged in the state has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arranged in the abutted state. .. In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 are arranged in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating members 820 are displaced and formed at the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. , The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 absorb the impact when colliding with the swinging member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotating member 730 is connected to the transmission path for transmitting the drive for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is attached to the base member 710 where it is difficult to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720. By rotating the members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when they come into contact with the swinging member 732. Therefore, the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 can be easily absorbed.

In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion of the rotating member 435 with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. Although it is arranged on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is the entire contacted portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the. Further, it may be arranged on the front side of the region beyond this.

In this case, since the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be made invisible to the player by the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 are combined into one pattern. It can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

<First control example>
Next, the first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central region of the game board 13, and a first winning opening 64 is provided below the variable display device unit 80. Further, in the area on the right side of the game board 13 (hereinafter, referred to as the right area) on which the ball launched so as to jump over the variable display device unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flows down, a through gate 66 is provided. The second winning opening 140 and the open state in which the ball can enter the second winning opening 140 attached to the second winning opening 140 and the closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state are changed. The electric accessory 140a, the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a attached to the specific winning opening 65a and the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. A variable winning device 65 that is variable to the above is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the lottery result. The third symbol display device 81 executes variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Then, when the variable display of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a big hit game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), so that the player aims at the right area of the game board 13 (hereinafter, , This is referred to as a right-handed game.) The ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player can obtain many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal game state in which the jackpot game is not executed, a game is performed in which the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64, and in the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed, the right-handed game is variable. We will aim for the winning device 65. Therefore, by making the area where the ball is launched different according to the game state, it is possible to make the player feel that the game is being played.

Further, the variable winning device 65, in which the opening operation is executed during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, but the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which the ball that has entered can pass, and the ball that has flowed down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state (hereinafter, the probability variation state) is a game state in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. Is given).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right-hand region unit (not shown) in which a ball that is launched by a right-handed game and passes through a through gate 66 provided in the right-side region of the game board 13 flows into the pachinko machine 10. There is. The right region unit is provided with a croon in which three discharge holes through which the sphere can pass are formed as a distribution means for distributing the inflowing sphere into a plurality of paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in this croon, a ball that has passed through one discharge hole flows down the first path and is guided to the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball that has not entered the second winning opening 140 is guided to a specific general winning opening (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the other two discharge holes among the three discharge holes formed in the croon flows down the second path and is guided to the variable winning device 65. Then, the ball that has not entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is discharged from the second path as it is, passes through the first out port 71, and is discharged from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10.

With this configuration, for example, during a jackpot game, a ball that can enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening and a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are simultaneously generated. Since it is possible to make the ball flow, it is possible to complicate the flow of the ball during the jackpot game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, if the prize ball is paid out for the entry into the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening, the winning ball may be paid out for the entry into a plurality of winning openings during the jackpot game. Since this is possible, the number of prize balls that the player can obtain during the jackpot can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Further, an effect based on the balls that have entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game may be executed. For example, the number of balls that have entered the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game exceeds a predetermined number. It is good to execute the production based on. In this case, a jackpot with a long period in which the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot that is difficult to win in the specific winning opening 65a) can increase the number of balls entering the specific general winning opening. There is an effect that a privilege can be given to the player even if a state in which it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a occurs during the jackpot game.

In addition, during the jackpot game, it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a, that is, during the period when the variable winning device 65 is closed (opening period, interval period, ending period), the ball enters the specific general winning opening. It may be configured so that the effect is executed based on the entry of the ball. As a result, the player can be made to execute the game of continuously firing the ball during the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine from being lowered.

As described above, in addition to the effect based on the ball entering the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game, the effect (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game. For example, by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot game, it is possible to enter a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a specific general winning opening at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3: 1). In the case where a distribution member for sorting the ball is provided, if it is determined that the ball did not enter the specific general winning opening during the jackpot game or one round game during the jackpot game, that effect. May be notified. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage the case where the jackpot game is not executed by the normal right-handed game or the abnormality of various devices (distribution members, etc.) provided on the game board 13.

In addition, the ball can pass in the middle of the path until the ball that has flowed into the right area unit (not shown) reaches the Kroon as a means for changing the drop position in order to make the position where the ball falls into the Kroon indefinite. A moving member having such a path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate in a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left-right direction (left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by a motor (not shown), and the timing at which the ball flows into the moving member. The position where it is discharged (the position where it falls on the croon) can be changed. In this way, by providing the moving member which is the drop position changing means above the croon which is the sorting means, it is possible to complicate the movement of the ball on the croon. The moving speed of the moving member described above may be set to such a speed that when a continuously launched ball falls on the croon, the falling position is separated by 10 mm or more. By setting in this way, it is possible to suppress damage to the device due to collisions and bounces between balls that have continuously fallen on the croon. Further, even if the separation distance between the croon and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has fallen first and a ball that has fallen later interfere with each other to cause ball clogging. It will be possible.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a croon-shaped mechanism is used as the distribution means, but it may be configured so that the spheres can be distributed to a plurality of paths. For example, the spheres that flow down next depending on their own weight. A flow path switching member that switches the flow direction of the sphere may be used, or a switching member that electrically switches the flow path of the sphere may be used. Further, in this control example, a moving member is used as a drop position changing means so that the position where the ball falls on the croon does not become a fixed position. However, a configuration capable of changing the drop position of the ball may be used, for example. The croon itself may be moved.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned probability variation state is established, while the variable winning device during the jackpot game. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 at 65, it is in a normal gaming state aiming at the first winning opening 64.

Here, in the probabilistic state in this control example, as described above, the probability that the result of the lottery of the special symbol will be a big hit is high, and the lottery in which the ordinary symbol in which the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 66 is the winner. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time until the lottery result of the special symbol and the normal symbol is confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the variable time) is also set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation state in this control example is set so as to continue until the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a lottery result other than the jackpot 100 times in a row after the end of the big hit game, and the lottery of the special symbol is 100 times. It is set to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state after the game is not a big hit in a row. By setting a limit on the duration of the probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player in this way, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can win a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it. The period during which the probability change state continues may be set to other contents, for example, it may be continued until the next big hit is won, or at the same timing as the special symbol lottery is executed. A transition lottery may be performed to shift the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state. Further, the period during which the probabilistic state continues may be set in time.

Further, in the probabilistic state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a, which is driven to be released when a hit is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 66, is the normal gaming state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the probability change state is such that the ball is placed in the second winning opening 140 more than the opening pattern set during the normal gaming state. It is set so that the open period during which the ball can enter is extended.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to execute the right-handed game in the probabilistic state, and to efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning opening. Has been done. Therefore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the probabilistic state, the right-handed game may be continuously executed, and the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

<About the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game projecting into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 109 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 109 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110 (b).

As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning opening 140 side. It is configured in. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second winning opening 140 while hitting right, and the game method is changed to left hit immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 109 (a) is a sectional view taken along line La-La shown in FIG. 109 (b). As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 110, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 110A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 110A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. To. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Will be done.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured so that it is impossible to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. There is. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 110B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 13th round is won in the 13th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the winning ball as a privilege to the player (15 for one ball winning in this embodiment). (Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 111B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, combinations of predetermined main symbols indicating small hits (for example, on the effective line L1, the combinations of the main symbols are "3" and "4" in order from the left symbol row Z1. "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the present embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Further, in this control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to differ depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, when the same reference numerals are given in the description of each effect described later, it indicates that the displays or areas have the same function, and the places (display forms) where the displays or areas are arranged are different. Will be described with the same reference numerals.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a display mode of the effect executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol, and is shown in FIG. 112 (a). ) And FIGS. 113A to 113C are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. This reach navigation effect allows the player to visually grasp the progress of the mode of the effect (main effect) executed by the predetermined fluctuation pattern (super reach or special reach), and gradually notifies or suggests it. It is a production (secondary production). In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect (explanation of the effect of the main effect, the fluctuation time, and the expectation of a big hit) executed by the third symbol display device 81 using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Next, the reach navigation effect will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. It is reduced to a small area Dm5 and displayed in a variable manner, and the main effect based on the variable pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, is executed in the small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

In this small area Dm4, as an image constituting the reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, a character Dm4b as a moving display unit visually indicating the progress of the main effect, and the main effect A notification unit Dm4c for notifying at least a part of the effect result and guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e for guiding at least a part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating a period during which the main effect is executed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is a movement display unit, advances from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. The notification unit Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b moving in response to the main effect executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the notification content is notified to the notification unit Dm4c. Is stopped and displayed. In this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as the period display unit for indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, but other display may be used, for example, a predetermined finished product (for example, building). The structure may be such that the process of creating (things and dishes) can be displayed.

The character Dm4b is a movement display unit that moves according to the progress of the main effect, and is displayed so as to move from the left side to the right side on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. By moving the character Dm4b on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed in this way, the player can predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. In the figure shown in FIG. 112 (a), only an image imitating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b, but in reality, a plurality of character images having different speeds of moving on the time gauge Dm4a are stored. It is controlled so that the length of the time gauge Dm4a and the selected character are set based on the length of the selected main effect (the length of the fluctuation time).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying the sub-effect on the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of fluctuation patterns (main effects) having different fluctuation times. It should be noted that the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect executed by changing the display mode (for example, color) of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display unit, and the effect associated with the character is a big hit. , Or it may be configured to suggest the progress destination of the main effect depending on the display mode of the selected character. As a result, it is possible to have both a function of notifying the progress of the main effect and a function of suggesting the result of the main effect, and it is possible to execute an effect display having a high effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the production result of the main effect, and a rotation display (see FIG. 112B) that rotates in the left-right direction on the small area Dm4 is performed. The notification unit Dm4c is configured so that an index indicating the effect result of the main effect can be displayed on both sides thereof, and the effect result of the main effect is displayed by the index stopped and displayed in the small area Dm4 when the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped. Is notified.

In this pachinko machine 10, as an index for notifying the production result of the main production, "V" which is an index indicating that it is a big hit, "x" which is an index indicating that it was out of order, and "x" of the main production "Development", which is an index indicating that the production is continuously executed, and "?", Which is an index indicating that the production result of the main production is not notified, are set, and two of these indexes are set. An index is selected, and an index of 1 (for example, "V") is displayed on one side of the notification unit Dm4c, and another index (for example, "?") Is displayed on the multi-sided side.

With this configuration, for example, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed while the "V" index and the "x" index are displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the character Dm4b is notified. When it reaches the part Dm4c, it will be notified in advance that there will be no further development, that is, the production time of the main production this time (the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main production) will be grasped in advance. Therefore, it is possible to display the main effect that is easy for the player to understand. If the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed while the "V" index and the "development" index are displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, a big hit occurs when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c. Since it will be notified in advance that either the main effect will be further developed or the main effect will be further developed from there, the player expects a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c). However, you can see the main production with confidence.

In this control example, a configuration that can be grasped by the player by rotating and displaying a plurality of indexes is used, but a plurality of indexes may be grasped by the player using other configurations. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of indexes are switched and displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indexes are simultaneously displayed on the notification unit Dm4c and the index to be selected in this production is deleted with the passage of time is used. You may.

The guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, the guidance display suggesting the effect content of the main effect of this time is executed. When the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the character "chance" is displayed or rotated as an effect suggesting that the result of the main effect of this time is a big hit. The index attached to the notification unit Dm4c is switched. In this way, by providing the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle stage where the main production is in progress, it is possible to notify the player of information based on the result of the main production step by step. On the other hand, the display content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can always be watched.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the guidance display unit can notify the guidance display suggesting the result of the main effect and the guidance display suggesting the period of the main effect at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. Therefore, there is an effect that the information notified to the player on the guidance display unit can be diversified. Although the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two guidance display units, one may be provided or three or more may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 (b) and 113 (a) to 113 (c), a display mode at each timing of the above-mentioned reach navigation effect will be described. FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation effect is started, and FIG. 113 (a) shows the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect. FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the reach navigation effect is further continued, and FIG. 113 (c) is a diagram showing after the main effect is continued in the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of.

First, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the reach navigation effect is executed, a movement display is executed in which the character Dm4b moves from the left side to the right side (from the start point to the end point) on the time gauge Dm4a. In addition, the notification unit Dm4c executes a rotation display that allows the player to visually recognize the indexes displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c. By executing the reach navigation effect in this way, the player is informed of the production period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect in the middle stage of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance (before the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed).

Further, in FIG. 112 (b), the character Dm4b has a chance to be below the guidance display unit Dm4d! !! "Is displayed. This is a display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, and is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4c as described above. In this way, by providing the guidance display unit Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, at what timing the display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit is executed for the player. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display content of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c can be changed when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, for example, at the timing when the reach navigation effect is executed, two indexes of "V" and "x" are displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, but at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d. It is possible to switch the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c to the display of two indexes, "V" and "development". By changing the display content of the notification unit Dm4c at a predetermined timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d) in this way, it is possible to diversify the production content of the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, for the game. It has the effect of suppressing getting bored early.

Next, a case where the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). As shown in FIG. 113A, when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped, and the index “?” Displayed on one surface of the notification unit Dm4c is changed to the small area Dm4. Stop is displayed. When the index of "?" Is displayed, next, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the character Dm4b is blown off and returned to the point where the guide display unit Dm4d on the timing gauge Dm4a is provided. To.

The index "?" Displayed by the notification unit Dm4c is an index that prevents the player from grasping whether the main production ends or continues at this timing. If the main production this time does not develop, FIG. 113 After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b getting up. On the other hand, when the main effect of this time is developed and further continued, the character Dm4b rises as shown in FIG. 113 (c), and the reach navigation effect of moving on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (display mode of the peripheral effect of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can grasp that the reach navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

The position where the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113B is returned is determined based on the period of the main production after the development. Specifically, if the time it takes for the character Dm4b to move on the time gauge Dm4a and reach the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time of the main production after development (the remaining period of the main production is 10 seconds), the time. It is returned to the center position of the gauge Dm4a. With this configuration, it is possible to display the reach navigation effect corresponding to the main effect after development using the moving speeds of the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b corresponding to the main effect before development. It is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing a certain reach navigation effect.

Further, it is possible for the player to predict the period of the main effect after the development depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. In this pachinko machine 10, when a lottery of a special symbol is won, a long fluctuation time is easily selected. Therefore, the closer the character Dm4b is to the starting point side of the time gauge Dm4a, the more the jackpot is returned. It has the effect of making you think that you have won the game and improving the interest of the game. Further, when the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c is "?", The character Dm4b is returned to the player because the player is not notified whether or not the main effect of this time is developed. After confirming the position (after predicting the effect period when it develops), the effect of whether or not the character Dm4b stands up will be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the reach navigation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect used in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player in advance of information about the main effect, which is an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, to the player. There is an effect that the main production can be watched in a state where the progress destination of the main production is predicted. Further, by displaying the information about the main effect step by step, the player can continuously pay attention to the effect, which has an effect that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach navigation effect used in this control example is such that various other effects are displayed. For example, in the above-mentioned reach navigation effect, a character imitating a rabbit is used as a movement display unit, but as other characters, a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed. In this way, when selecting a character to be used in the reach navigation effect from a plurality of characters, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content of the main effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the display contents of the main production and the sub production related to each other, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a comfortable production. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the character is displayed in the reach navigation effect which is a sub-effect before the character is displayed in the main effect. As a result, the content of the main production can be grasped in advance by looking at the reach navigation production, which has the effect of further enhancing the production effect.

Further, the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed in response to the main effect before the development and the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed in response to the main effect after the development may be different. .. As a result, the period of the main effect after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, so that the period of the main effect after development can be easily grasped. Has the effect of being able to suppress.

Further, the degree of expectation that the main effect develops may be indicated depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, even if a region with high development expectation and a region with low development expectation are provided on the time gauge Dm4a, and the character Dm4b is returned to the region with high development expectation, the main production is developed with high probability. Good. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the position where the character Dm4b is returned, which has the effect of further enhancing the effect.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the random number counter C1 per first acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is either "0 to 9". If it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the sphere wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first is 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random number value "0" is for low probability. It is stored in the random number table for the first time. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are duplicated values. A random number value that is a big hit may be set so as not to be. If there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot of the special symbol is changed by changing the random value that becomes the jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 29", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the type is not limited to one, and two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 140.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns of jackpot A. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown, the voice lamp control device 113 also has a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, and more detailed fluctuations correspond to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern commands output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. In this control example, the normal symbol is also set to a high probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, and the normal symbol is also set to the low probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. Is stipulated to be. That is, there is no gaming state in which the special symbol has a low probability and the normal symbol has a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol is hit. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of winning random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 140. Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is only "1 second x 2 times". It will be released, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117.

FIG. 115A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) is a table in which the values of random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols are defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

In the first random number table 202a, a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at a low probability, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol are displayed. A jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is provided, and the number of determination values (random numbers) for each jackpot is different. In this way, by making the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected respectively according to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Has been done. Specifically, in the special symbol 1, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the jackpot A, "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the jackpot B, and the jackpot in the special symbol 2. The value (0 to 99) of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value of A.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not it is in the probability change state). However, in the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, the determination of whether or not the probability change state is reached is not executed).

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the distribution of the jackpot type differs between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. In the special symbol 1, 50% of the jackpots are selected as "big hit A", and in the special symbol 2, the jackpot is selected. Of these, "big hit A" is configured to be 100% selected. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which the lottery is executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 140 as described above, and the lottery is hardly executed in the normal game state, and the second The lottery is executed in a probable state in which the ball is likely to enter the winning opening 140. In this control example, if the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times without a big hit after the transition to the probabilistic state, the game transitions to the normal gaming state. By continuing to win the jackpot again until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times, it is possible to repeatedly execute the game in the probabilistic state. Therefore, the player will enthusiastically play the game in order to win the next big hit as soon as possible even after the transition to the probabilistic state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (c). FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device (not shown) is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117 (c)). At least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117 (d)) is specified.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 117 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 117 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description will continue. FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, probability change It has at least an effective flag 203q, a probability variation effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a probability variation counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on winning a prize is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 (with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting winning) into the second winning opening 140. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning opening 140 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 122).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the first special symbol N1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the number of holdings of the variable display in the first special symbol N2) is , The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the hold ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

The voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the balls at the through gate 66. Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 66 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S603: FIG. 126: No).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probabilistic switching switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown, it is set to off based on the probability variation counter 203t being set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. You may configure 203h to formally turn on and return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again while the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). .. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this control example, the voice "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the attention of the player. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1302 in the notification processing (see FIG. 133) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is urged to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic gaming state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable prize is won before the start of the 13th round. By notifying the device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 12 rounds, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read the code. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot is A or B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round and the abnormality processing described later can be executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In this control example, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds. In this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1507 of FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual state, and the jackpot B is obtained. It is also possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round is started, the next round game is executed until the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, and a new round game is executed. There is no chance of winning a prize.

If the number of winnings and the number of dischargeds do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When this probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. Indicates that no time has passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball may pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false detection of passing through a magnetic sensor due to radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls winning in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. The probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when drawing a special symbol. (S213 in FIG. 123), 1 is subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (S221 in FIG. 122).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 127) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, decorative lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the other device 228, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and various other data and programs necessary for controlling the game. ..

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (disengagement, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect information used in the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table used to set the reach navigation effect to be executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach navigation effect will be briefly explained. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach navigation effect is an effect that suggests and informs the content of the main effect of the fluctuation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), and is a small area Dm4 (FIG. 112). This is a sub-production performed in (see). This reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. This is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

In the above-mentioned reach navigation effect, the character Dm4b is set to be able to move on the time gauge Dm4a multiple times. Among them, the effect related to the first movement is the first navigation effect, and the effect related to the second transition movement is the second navigation. Set as a production. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured so that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, and by combining the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b. It is configured so that various production patterns can be set.

The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table that is referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected for the remaining fluctuation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, so when super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, , The remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and when special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect The fluctuation time is 60 seconds.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "100 to". If it is "199", a 30-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and "70 to". If it is "199", a 30-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect.

In this way, by configuring the first navigation effect so that the effect patterns at different times can be selected, the remaining variation time when selecting the second navigation effect, which will be described later, can be made different, so that the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect can be selected. Can be set more complicatedly. Furthermore, when the special reach with high expectation that the lottery of the special symbol is won as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set (when the remaining fluctuation time is 60 seconds), the super reach is set. Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the rate of setting the variation pattern of 30 seconds as the first navigation effect is larger than that (when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds), the player is the first. Isn't this change developing into a special reach by looking at the progress of the production navigation? You can play the game while predicting.

In the first navigation effect, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used, and a 20-second effect pattern and a 30-second effect pattern are set by changing the movement speed of the character Dm4b, which is a movement display unit. It is possible. Specifically, in the 30-second effect pattern, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b, and in the 20-second effect pattern, a character imitating a rabbit is set. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the moving speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set a plurality of effect patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of the reach navigation effect. be able to.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed according to the movement speed on the time gauge Dm4a, only by looking at the character displayed in the reach navigation effect. Although the jackpot expectation is predictable, the same character may be used and the movement speed may be set to be different. With this configuration, only the player who has experienced the reach navigation effect multiple times can understand that the movement speed of the character of the reach navigation effect this time is different from the movement speed of the character of the previous reach navigation effect. , There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced for a player who has been playing for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the moving speed of the character Dm4b is set so as not to be changed in the middle during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. Not limited to this, the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be changed in the middle during the first navigation effect. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table that is referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining variation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and is the remaining time storage area 223h. The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected based on the remaining fluctuation time stored in the effect counter and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds, that is, super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, 20 in the first navigation effect. When the effect pattern of seconds is selected, the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds, so "second 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. In this second time, the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end point of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113 (a)), and then the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again. It shows that the production starts (see FIG. 113 (b)). In this control example, it is possible to set up to the third movement effect.

Next, when the remaining fluctuation time is 30 seconds, that is, when special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, when the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, 3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation effect is the second. "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the 2nd navigation effect, and if it is "7-9", "2nd 30 seconds" is selected as the 2nd navigation effect.

Then, when the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd 10 seconds, 3rd 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation effect. "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect, and if it is "7-9", "2nd 30 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect.

As explained above, when setting the effect pattern for the reach navigation effect, it is possible to easily create a complex effect pattern by making it possible to select the effect period separately for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect. Can be done. Further, in this control example, when selecting the effect pattern of the second navigation effect, only the last digit value of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. As a result, it is possible to independently select a plurality of effect patterns in one process by using one effect counter, so that the processing load when setting the effect pattern can be reduced. There is an effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. At least a type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and the winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved spheres corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved sphere number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 138). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. A detailed description will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 used for advance notice effect and various lottery. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round has been executed in a jackpot game. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223 g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining fluctuation time referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the reach navigation effect. In the remaining time storage area 223h, when the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the fluctuation time based on the acquired fluctuation pattern is set (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is performed. It is updated to the remaining fluctuation time after the setting (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when the setting of the reach navigation effect is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using the remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol by dividing it into a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, information indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 60 seconds is first set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, as the first effect, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having an effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds. Then, when the effect pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the effect pattern of the first effect, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining variation time. After that, it becomes possible to select the second effect by using the remaining period based on the remaining fluctuation time. This has the effect of reducing the processing when selecting the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach navigation effect in which the variation pattern is selected stepwise. In the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the variation pattern is set (S2101 in FIG. 141), and then selected. The effect pattern of the first navigation effect is set (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then the selected effect pattern of the second navigation effect is set (S2106 in FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It controls the variable effect) and the advance notice effect.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. There is. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115. Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (not shown) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when the incoming ball is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the "city stage", the rear surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", and the rear surface C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the 81, and the image controller 237 displays the image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the back image horizontally from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki and the helmet Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to command-related displays, round effects, and demo effects are available.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal symbol start port 66, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second winning opening 140 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 140, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, the player notifies that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery will be a big hit of the special symbol, so that the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will definitely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to a game information-related command, one display related to a jackpot-related command, and one display data table corresponding to a round effect and a demo effect are stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame are defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back type also describes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. Specify the image content to be drawn and create a drawing list described later. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of program activation and execution, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, in the example of FIG. In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, a drawing list to be described later is created, and transfer data is transferred. From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. , The added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 109) (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 111B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 111 (b) see S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. Generates a drawing list, which will be described later, that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. Generates a drawing list, which will be described later, that describes the drawing instructions. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list described later, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 111 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. Is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created. Add to list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transferred data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 111 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, it is performed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting a display area (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) for prohibiting the display of the character symbol and the point symbol during the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed in the point effect. .. In the point effect, the period during which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed is set a total of three times, so that the first to third prohibited areas are set according to each period (first to third periods). A storage area of 223 m is provided. As a result, different prohibited areas can be set in each period, so that the variation of the production can be increased.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is other than the demo display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115A). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 135. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S216: Yes), set an opening scenario for a specific winning opening based on the big hit type (S217), and then set the start of the big hit (big hit such as 16 rounds). (Setting) is executed (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is different (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221). Then, when the above-described processing of S218 or S221 is completed, a stop command is set (S219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302).

When the value of the probability variation counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, when the current state is the probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special value for high probability. Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116A) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when the current state is not the probability variation state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. Since it is a (low probability gaming state), it is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116 (a)). The lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A or jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 140 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (125, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so it is acquired by the processing of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 116 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 116 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 140 The opening period of the electric accessory 140a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S617), and shift to the process of S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 140 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 125, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 126 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 129, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 129), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 122) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 124) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command, the notification command, and the error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 123) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 127 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S98 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S801) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 129). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 122) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1101. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1102, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the round number round number command is set (S1105), and this process is terminated. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has been started is set as a round number command. Then, each time a round number command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the round number command is added so that the current number of rounds can be grasped. This has the effect of reducing the amount of command data output from the main control device 110. The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including the round number information of the newly started round may be set. By doing so, even if a problem occurs in the data related to the number of rounds on the voice lamp control device 113 side (data stored in the memory is deleted due to a power failure or the like), the latest round is started every time a new round is started. Since it is possible to receive the round information of, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1006). When it is determined that the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is reached (S1006: Yes), the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to off (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off just in case in the processing of S1009. In this control example, the start timing of the ending effect is set to be after the waiting time elapses (3 seconds in this control example) after the game of the final round ends (opening / closing door 65f1 is closed), but the game of the final round ends. Immediately after that, the ending effect may be executed. In this case, the abnormal processing for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1010) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202). If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t (S1203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game is determined. You can play the game with interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. In the process of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), the notification process is executed (S1011). Here, the details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1301). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The end timing of the 12th round is determined depending on whether it is detected that 10 balls have been won or that 30 seconds have passed in the 12th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 12th round is reached (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the S1305 process, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter for 2 seconds in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 12th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, by providing a notification counter 203 m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 12th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), the notification command is set. (S1304). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1401). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the opening / closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is added and updated by 1, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j is executed. Set. After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). After that, the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1411). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1414). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to on (S1415). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change It can be controlled so that the game is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is ON (S1416). If the probabilistic valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation effective flag 203q is set to off (S1419). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being illegally passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 130. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1013). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality processing (S1013), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501). If it is outside the round validity period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1506: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prize counters 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if the jackpot is B.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value 0 (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1511), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1716 (see FIG. 137) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1716. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1714 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1714. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the data shifts to S1608.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the decorative lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1611) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1609 is that when the processing of S1608 is reached via the processing of S1604 to S1606, the processing of S1604 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1701 this time was executed (S1701), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1702 to S1811 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1712 and the command determination process of S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the decorative lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without notifying the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. It also monitors the input of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

When the process of S1710 is completed, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In the process of S1712, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to the process of S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 138, S1711), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1804). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the process of S1808, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1808 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1808. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to the process of S1811. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of S1811 as it is.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

When it is determined that the notification command output from the main control device 110 has been received by the process of S1811, the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected. , Set the display command for notification.

Next, the jackpot-related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S1810). This jackpot-related process (S1810) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related process, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1901). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1902), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S1903). When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S1903 (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223 g (S1904). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223 g (S1905), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1906). If it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S1906 (S1906: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this processing is performed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S1906 that the ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not the V-pass command has been received (S1909). In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, and an effect suggesting that the probability change game state is given is executed. A display V effect command is set (S1910), and this process ends.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2007 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 138). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the acquired variation pattern type is the variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004: Yes), then the reach navigation effect setting process is executed (S2005). The details of the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but when the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for setting a reach navigation effect (sub-effect) that guides the main variable effect (main effect) executed in.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2004, when the acquired variation pattern type is not the variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, that is, the acquired variation pattern type is out of alignment or the variation pattern type corresponding to normal reach (S2004). : No), based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Here, the above-mentioned reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), the player is informed of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type and the effect content (expectation degree, effect period) of the main effect. A sub-effect to be performed is set.

When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. The fluctuation pattern is set in the temporary storage area 223i (S2101). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the effect of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112). It is a production performed in the central part of (see).

After finishing the processing of S2101, the remaining time storage area 223h is then set based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S2102). In this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), a process of stepwise setting a sub-effect based on the variation time corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired this time by this processing is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to the special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this processing.

Although not shown, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect (sub-effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, so the fluctuation pattern type with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds is set in the area 223h, a process of subtracting 30 seconds, which is a sub-effect non-executable period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119 (b), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f. The first navigation effect period is set based on the value, and the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the set first navigation effect period. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the first navigation effect is 60 seconds and the acquired effect counter 223f value is "80", the first "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the effect pattern information corresponding to the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i.

After finishing the processing of S2103, the remaining variation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining fluctuation time for which the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, should be set is calculated. Specifically, when the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected while the remaining time storage area 223h is set to "60 seconds" as the remaining fluctuation time, the remaining time storage area 223h is processed by this process. The remaining fluctuation time of is updated to "30 seconds".

Then, it is determined whether the residual variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is larger than 0 (S2105), and if it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 (S2105: No), the reach navigation effect is produced. The setting is completed, and the process proceeds to S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period in which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is performed only by the first navigation effect. It will be set. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern type acquired this time is the fluctuation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to the super reach, and the remaining fluctuation time is set to "30 seconds" in the remaining time storage area 223h. This corresponds to the case where the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected in.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2105, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the remaining time storage area 223h is larger than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation effect is selected from the second navigation effect selection table, and the variation pattern is selected. Update to temporary storage area. This second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119 (c), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f. Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when the second navigation effect is selected is 30 seconds, and the value of the last digit of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". In this case, the effect pattern information of "2nd time 10 seconds" and "3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period "30 seconds", and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

As described above, the second navigation effect is configured to generate an effect pattern using the remaining variation time after setting the first navigation effect. Therefore, rather than setting the effect pattern for all the periods in which the reach navigation effect can be set, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the second navigation effect period, and the effect pattern is set for each. By combining after setting, it is possible to diversify the production pattern of the reach navigation effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

In this control example, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the other period, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), an effect pattern that does not use the entire remaining variation period can be selected, and the residual variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h after executing the process of S2016. It is preferable to configure so as to determine again whether is 0 (S2105). As a result, it is possible to set the reach navigation effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time after the second navigation effect is set by the same process as the process for setting the second navigation effect, and the process can be simplified.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 141. When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of S2105 (S2105: No) or when the processing of S2106 is completed, then, the fluctuation pattern for display is based on the information of the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area. Set the command (S2107). Here, the information stored in the variation pattern temporary storage area includes a display variation pattern command corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the process of S2101, and a sub-effect. Corresponds to the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the process of S2103 that constitutes the reach navigation effect, and the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the process of S2106. This is a display variation pattern command.

When the processing of S2107 is completed, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information regarding the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this processing is completed. ..

In this control example, the main effect and the sub effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 executed based on the acquired variation pattern are set as one display variation pattern command and output. Although the configuration for reducing the number of commands is used, the display main effect variation pattern command and the display sub-effect variation pattern command may be output as separate commands. As a result, for example, the display control device 114 can display the main effect on the layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub-effect can be displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed. By operating the frame button 22 by the player, it is possible to easily execute control such as displaying or erasing the sub-effect.

Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to easily perform control such as outputting an additional command for the sub-effect and switching the effect pattern of the sub-effect while the main effect is variablely displayed. Specifically, it is used for the sub-effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22 executed during the period from the execution of the main effect to the execution of the sub-effect (30 seconds in this control example). It is possible to change the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) and the content of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 142) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2302. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2302 and S2302, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2301 to S2305 may be executed without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 142. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 154 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2205, the interrupt permission is set (S2206). After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 (a). FIG. 144 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 (b). FIG. 144 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. The command determination process (S2502) is executed in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, and then the display setting process (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150.

In the display setting process (S2503), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505), which are determined in the task process (S2504), are used. , A drawing list is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the process of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2509) is executed to display the S2504. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2603).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2706), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2702e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2704, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the processing of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display variable type command (S2606: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2803), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2504), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2803, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2802.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the processing of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the jackpot is hit. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the above-mentioned jackpot-related command process for display (S2609), which is one process of the command determination process (see S2502 and FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The details will be described. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command (S2901). S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3005), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3105), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 147. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3201). S3204). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3205), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. In the processing of S2905, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and the display is performed. If there is a V effect command for display (S2907: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot related command process ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S2908) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the V effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 147. If it is determined that there is no display V effect command in the process of S2907 (S2907: No), the display jackpot related command process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the rear image change command is determined. If there is (S2610: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). FIG. 150A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3903) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S3401). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3402), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3401 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3402. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3402 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. In the processing of S2610, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and there is an error command. If (S2612: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3501). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3502). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the error frame command processing, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3501, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the processing of S3502 is determined, and the error type is set to the error type. The process is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3502 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

In the processing of S2601 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), The processing of S2602 to S2613 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 146 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2701. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3601: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3602 to S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3602), S3603 to S3604 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3603). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3604).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3701).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604) or in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3603: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3605.

In S3605, the pointer update process is executed (S3605). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3801, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3803), and if it is a demo display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3805), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3803: No). S3806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 151 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3606 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S3609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set to (S3610), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2504), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3615, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off instead of on (S3609: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S3617) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3618). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3621), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the processing of S3616, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2509), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. The process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the details of the transfer setting process (S2505) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 154 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3901 (S3901: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3902), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (b). FIG. 154 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4001: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4002). In the process of S4002, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4002 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4002: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4003. Further, as a result of the processing of S4001, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4003.

In the processing of S4003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4003: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4003 (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4103) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

Further, in the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4102: No), the processes of S4103 and S4104 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4106).

In the process of S4106, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4106 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4107. Further, as a result of the processing of S4105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4105: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4107.

In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4108), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4107: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4109). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4109: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S4110), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4111). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4113, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The discrimination in the processing of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4113 (S4113: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4114). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4114, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2505) (S4201). That is, in the processing of S4201, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2504). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S4202 (S4203). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. In the first control example described above, a gaming machine in which a reach navigation effect is executed as an effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect proceeds by the operation of continuously pressing (striking) the frame button 22 and the operation of pressing the frame button 22 at the right time. The compound pressing effect to be performed and the slot effect to stop the pseudo symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 by pressing the frame button 22 are continuous slot effects for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example). , A predetermined value (point) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a point effect in which a specific effect (reach effect) is executed is executed by accumulating a predetermined number of the points. As a result, various effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In this second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed with respect to the first control example. The difference is that the changed point, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the effects executed in this control example, the combined pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing an example at the time when the composite pressing effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157 (b) shows the executing composite pressing effect at the effect notification timing D3b. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the compound pressing effect is reached, and FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the compound pressing effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1. It is a figure which showed another example at the time when the compound pressing effect during execution reached the timing pressing period Db1, and FIG. 159 (a) operated the frame button 22 during the timing pressing period of the compound pressing effect during execution. FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing an example at the time when the compound pressing effect being executed reaches the second continuous striking period Dc.

This compound pressing effect is a pressing effect in which three pressing effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left of the main display area Dm is based on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22 in each pressing effect period. The effect of accumulating the meters of the meter display unit D1 displayed on the side is executed. When a predetermined amount of meters are accumulated in the meter display unit D1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

When the compound pressing effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the pressing effect corresponding to the first continuous striking period is executed. The third symbol display device 81 displays the meter display unit D1 described above, a button display D2 that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding the combined pressing effect. A comment column is displayed in the area below the main display area Dm to guide the contents of the effect in characters.

The meter display unit D1 is a display unit that finally displays the effect result of the combined pressing effect, and is controlled so that the meters are accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each pressing effect (see FIG. 157 (b)). .. Then, the comment "accumulate the meter" is displayed on the meter display unit D1 as a comment for encouraging the player to participate in the game. In the meter display unit D1, "V" is displayed at the right end of the meter at the initial stage, and the special symbol jackpot was won as a privilege that is advantageous to the player by accumulating the meters up to this "V". Is notified. Further, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the compound pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159 (a)). When the meter area is extended as shown in FIG. 159 (a), "VV" is displayed at the right end thereof, and the benefit that the player is further advantageous by accumulating the meter up to this "VV" (for example, 2). It will be notified that (winning) will be given to the jackpot.

The benefits given by the combined pressing effect are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, an image that is not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, or is collected by the player. Value information (points) may be given. Further, the display mode displayed by "V" and "VV" is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the conditions for granting the privilege to the player are visually displayed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage for the privilege given when the "V" is reached and the privilege given when the "VV" is reached, and different benefits are set so as to be given. Just do it.

The button display D2 is a display unit for notifying the player of the operation content for the frame button 22, and is schematically for causing the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit during the first continuous hitting period shown in FIG. 157 (a). The display and the comment "Continuous hit !!" are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the button display is blinked. It is highlighted by enlarging or enlarging it, and when the player is operating the frame button 22, it is changed to a display that is not highlighted by enlarging or erasing it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game guidance display to the player from being excessively displayed. Further, even when the period in which the player does not operate the frame button 22 elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the button display D2 may be changed to a display that does not emphasize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button from being continuously highlighted, and it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

The effect gauge D3 is a display unit showing the overall flow of the compound press effect, and the compound press effect is chronologically displayed from the left side to the right side of the effect gauge D3 (from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 157 (a)). it's shown. The effect gauge D3 is divided into a first continuous hit period Da, a timing push period Db1, and a second continuous hit period Dc in the order in which the pressing effect is executed, and is currently displayed according to the position of the moving body D3a moving on the effect gauge D3. It is configured so that the player can grasp the situation of. In this way, in the composite pressing effect in which the pressing effects with different operation methods of the frame button 22 are continuously executed, the game is performed by displaying the entire composite pressing effect and the status of each pressing effect so that the player can grasp the situation. It is possible to perform an effect that is easy for people to understand.

Further, since the moving body D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the entire period of the combined pressing effect based on the moving state of the moving body D3a. ..

Further, in the effect gauge D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first continuous striking period Da. The effect notification timing D3b notifies in advance the content of the pressing effect executed during the timing pressing period Db1 executed after the first continuous hitting period Da has elapsed. When the moving body D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the compound pressing effect, the guidance of the pressing effect to be executed in the next pressing effect period is displayed in the comment column described later. As a result, the mode of the pressing effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) is suddenly changed during the compound pressing effect, and a problem such as an unintended operation is suppressed. When the effect notification timing D3b is reached, the player's operation status with respect to the frame button 22 may be determined, and the effect mode of the next press effect period may be set.

In the comment column provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the compound pressing effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157 (a), a comment is displayed stating, "Press and hold the button to execute automatic repeated hits." In the automatic continuous hitting, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit by the player performing a predetermined operation (long pressing operation for 2 seconds or more) during the pressing effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22. It is a control process. By executing this automatic continuous striking, it is possible to entertain the continuous striking effect even for a player who has difficulty pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

Next, a case where the combined pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (b). When the combined pressing effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period is started while continuing the pressing effect by the first continuous hitting period Da. Specifically, the timing gauge Db2 in which the region of the timing pressing period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the target to be targeted by the timing pressing effect is displayed in the timing gauge. Then, in the comment column, "Aim at the center of the x mark and press the button ..." is displayed as a part of the game guidance of the timing pressing period Db1 which is the next pressing effect period.

The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by extending the same period as the timing pressing period Db1. Therefore, it is displayed that the moving body D3a moves on the timing gauge Db2 at the same time as the time when the moving body D3a moves on the timing pressing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, it is possible to set the speed at which the moving body D3a moves faster than the speed at which the moving body D3a moves on the effect gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying any one of the plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, the moving speed of the moving body D3a can be made different. With this configuration, the player is notified of the period of the combined pressing effect by using the effect gauge D3 and the moving body D3a that moves on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed. There is an effect that the production of the timing display can be diversified without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 when the effect notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing push effect executed this time, and it is possible to facilitate the timing. There is.

In FIG. 157 (b), the target Db3 for which the frame button is operated in the timing pressing effect is displayed in the center of the timing gauge Db2, but the displayed position is moved to the end of the timing gauge Db2 and the timing is pressed. The difficulty level of the production may be set. Further, the target Db3 may be configured to move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of target Db3s may be displayed.

Next, a case where the compound pressing effect reaches the timing pressing effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) and 158 (b). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example in the case where the automatic continuous striking is not executed when the timing push effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts moving from the left end of the timing gauge Db2 toward the right. As described above, since the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the region of the timing push period Db1 is extended, the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing pushing period Db1 and the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing gauge Db2. The time it takes to do this is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length approximately eight times as long as the timing push period Db1, the speed of the moving body passing through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing push period Db1. It is about 8 times the speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, the target Db3 indicating the timing of pressing the frame button 22 in the timing pressing effect is blinking and highlighted. Further, in the comment column, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed as a timing pressing effect and a diagram schematically showing pressing the frame button 22 are displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic continuous striking is executed when the timing push effect period is reached. The difference from FIG. 158 (a) described above is that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to indicate that the automatic continuous hitting is in progress, and the comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment column is The point is that it has been changed to "Hanase". That is, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the player has reached the timing pressing effect while pressing the button, and therefore cannot perform the act of pressing the button in that state.

Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic continuous hitting is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing pressing effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment column is changed from "press". In addition to changing to "Hanase", the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing pressing effect is released from the pressed timing (the timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) (the operation signal of the frame button 22). Change to the timing when is turned off). As a result, in the compound pressing effect, even if the timing pressing effect is executed in the state where the automatic continuous hitting operation is performed in the previous pressing effect (first continuous hitting effect Da), the effect is executed without causing any trouble to the player. can do.

In the timing pressing effect period Db1 described with reference to FIG. 158 (a) or FIG. 158 (b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving body D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158 (a)). When the pressing operation and the releasing operation in the case of FIG. 158 (b) are performed, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the moving body D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment column. A comment of "perfect !!" is displayed to inform that the frame button 22 is often operated. Further, the meter display unit D1 is extended and displayed as a privilege of succeeding in the timing pressing effect, and a comment column to that effect is notified.

Even at this timing, the moving body D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. As a result, the progress of the combined pressing effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3 while the result of the timing pressing effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2. Therefore, there is an effect that both the result of the timing pressing effect and the progress of the combined pressing effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, a case where the timing push effect period Db1 elapses and the second continuous striking period Dc is reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). When the second continuous striking period Dc is reached, the display for repeatedly striking the frame button 22 is executed as in the first continuous striking period. The difference from the above-mentioned display of the first continuous striking period is that the game result of the timing push effect is displayed in the area of the timing push period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the meter display unit D1 shows the game result of the timing push effect. The point is that the benefits based on it have been granted. Since the other display contents are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second continuous hitting period elapses, the combined pressing effect result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the combined pressing effect this time is notified. This ends the compound pressing effect. As described above, in the combined pressing effect of the present embodiment, as the operation of the frame button 22, the continuous pressing operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 and the timing pressing of operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner are performed. The timing pressing effect for performing the operation is set to be executed continuously, and the result of the entire combined pressing effect is determined based on the result of each pressing effect. Therefore, in order to make the result of the effect sufficient, it is necessary to execute a plurality of types of frame button operations, so that there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, since it has an automatic continuous striking function for assisting the continuous striking operation, it is possible to facilitate the player to operate the frame button. Here, if a player who is executing the auto-continuous hitting function during the continuous-hit effect enters the timing-pressing effect while pressing the frame button 22, the frame button is automatically hit immediately after the timing-pressing effect is started. The problem that the situation of pressing 22 occurs has surfaced. Therefore, a period in which the automatic continuous striking function is valid and a period in which the automatic continuous striking function is disabled are provided, and the auto continuous striking function is disabled during the timing pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed due to automatic repeated hits during the timing pressing effect, and there is an effect that an effect unintended by the player can be generated.

Further, the above-mentioned solution alone prevents an erroneous pressing due to the automatic repeated hitting for a player who has entered the timing pressing effect while the auto continuous hitting function is being executed, that is, the frame button 22 is being pressed. There was a problem that it was not possible to participate in the timing push production. Specifically, when the same timing pressing effect as usual is executed only by disabling the automatic continuous hitting function, a game having a content such as "press the button at the right time" for the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. There was a problem that the guidance was displayed, the player was confused by the displayed contents, and could not enjoy the timing push effect.

Therefore, in this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing when the timing pressing effect is executed, and when the automatic continuous striking function is set to ON, the content of the timing pressing effect is timely. Changed to change to the effect of releasing the button. As a result, the player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released at the right time, and can participate in the production of executing the operation of the frame button 22 at the timing. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this control example, the pressing effect is switched while the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is continued in the compound pressing effect, but the operation invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid while the pressing effect is switched. May be provided. In this case, it is advisable to notify the player of the content of the next pressing effect within the operation invalid period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous display of the information display regarding the pressing effect being executed and the information display regarding the pressing effect being executed next, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. There is an effect.

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, the continuous slot effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous slot effect executed in this control example. This continuous slot effect is an effect in which the slot effect in which the pseudo symbol that is rotated and displayed is stopped and displayed is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (30 seconds) when the player operates the frame button 22. , The result of the effect is displayed by combining the combination of the pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects that are executed a plurality of times. Specifically, it is a production in which a privilege (big hit game) is given to the player by stopping and displaying all combinations of predetermined symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) during the continuous slot production. ..

As shown in FIG. 160, when the continuous slot effect is executed, the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is first executed. This slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (2 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-) during the latter 5 seconds (between 8 and 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). 2) Then, after the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 has elapsed (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop of one row of effective lines). (Display), and then, the process proceeds to slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), and the second slot effect is executed.

On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operated) during the first 6 seconds (between 2 and 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). When 1-1) is performed, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed within 8 to 9 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). ) Is executed. Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect), the pseudo symbol is not displayed as a stop and the special slot effect is displayed as it is. To do.

This special slot effect is an effect in which the frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set, and an effect in which the pseudo symbol that has been rotated and displayed is stopped and displayed is executed regardless of the operation of the player. Any of the 1st to 3rd columns of the effective lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect ends.

The frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set in the above-mentioned special slot effect, even though the frame button operation valid period of 11 seconds is set in slot effect 1 (first slot effect). Since the player who does not operate the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, the purpose is to prevent the effect of operating the frame button 22 from being displayed again during the slot continuous effect. Is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In this control example, a special slot effect in which the rotation display of the pseudo symbol is automatically stopped is executed as an effect in which the frame button operation valid period is not set, but the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. It suffices if the effect to be performed is executed. For example, the slot effect may be terminated and a different effect may be executed.

Next, slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 12 and 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) operate the frame button 22. It is set as the valid period (BT) of the frame button operation to be valid. This slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is performed only when the frame button 22 is operated within a predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in slot effect 1 (first slot effect). It is a slot production to be executed.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed during (18 to 20 seconds) (stop display of one row of effective lines), and then the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is entered.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the extension slot effect is executed without stopping the pseudo symbol. This extended slot effect is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, and the frame button operation enables the operation of the frame button 22 for 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as the validity period (BT).

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) during the extension slot effect, after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). In the meantime, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of two effective lines), and the continuous slot effect ends.

Subsequently, the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) operate the frame button 22. It is set as the valid period (BT) of the frame button operation to be valid. This slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is a slot effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). is there.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed). The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines) during (28 to 30 seconds), and the continuous slot effect ends.

Further, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the continuous slot effect is executed after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed. The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines) within 28 to 30 seconds after that, and the continuous slot effect ends. In the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed is a predetermined combination depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated or not within the frame button operation valid period (BT) (2nd shortened slot effect). The ratios of "AAA", "BBB", and "CCC") are set to be different, and the above-mentioned predetermined combination is set to be stopped and displayed more easily when the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Finally, the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is effective for 11 seconds (between 17 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). The frame button operation valid period (BT) is set. This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is the latter 5 seconds (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot effect 1 (first slot effect). This is a slot effect that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the period.

When the frame button 22 is operated during the latter 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect). , The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of 1 or 2 effective lines) after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), and the continuous slot effect is displayed. Is finished.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first two seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation valid period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after 19 seconds have elapsed, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and the process shifts to the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) described above.

Further, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), the continuous slot effect is executed after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed. The pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines) within 28 to 30 seconds, and the continuous slot effect ends. In the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), when the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol becomes the effective line 1 row or 2 rows. It is set to be decided by lottery, and one of them is selected at a ratio of 1: 1.

Next, the display mode of the continuous slot effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 161. 161 (a) to 161 (e) are views showing an example of a display mode displayed in a continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161 (a), the first slot effect to be executed first among the continuous slot effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the initial slot effect, a pseudo symbol row having a plurality of pseudo symbols is rotated and displayed in three rows, and a frame button 22 for guiding the pressing of the frame button 22 is schematically below the pseudo symbol row. A guide map and a time gauge showing the effective operation period of the frame button are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, a history display unit for displaying a combination of predetermined pseudo symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) stopped and displayed in this continuous slot effect is displayed.

When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and the three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed (“AAA”), and the guide map and the time gauge are erased. Then, when the symbol displayed stopped this time is a combination of the predetermined pseudo symbols described above, "Get" is displayed at the corresponding position of the history display unit.

Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the first slot effect is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (c), and the normal slot effect is started. In this normal slot effect as well as the first slot effect described above, three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol rows that have been rotated and displayed are stopped and displayed. Is. The difference from the initial slot effect is that the stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol rows are stopped is selected as the stop display mode in which the effective lines are two rows as shown in FIG. 161 (c). Specifically, the left and right symbol rows of the three pseudo symbol rows are normally stopped 2 seconds after the slot effect is started, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the middle symbol rows.

Then, when the combination of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols, "Get" is displayed in the history display unit. Here, when all of "A", "B", and "C" displayed on the history display unit are acquired, a privilege (big hit game) is given after the continuous slot production is completed.

In this way, when the continuous slot effect is executed by the normal frame button operation, the slot effect (first slot effect and the normal slot effect) is performed twice, and three predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols are combined by the slot effect. The game characteristics to be acquired are provided.

On the other hand, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the first slot effect is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (d), and the first shortened slot effect is started. To. In this first shortened slot effect, as in the normal slot effect, three pseudo symbol sequences are rotated and displayed in the same manner as the first slot effect described above, and the player operates the frame button 22 to rotate and display the three pseudo symbols. This is an effect in which the rows are stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed (“BBB”) in one effective line. After that, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161 (e) is executed.

Since this second shortened slot effect is the same as the first shortened slot effect described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the player operates the frame button 22 according to the timing of the next operation. It is configured so that the effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured so that the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed as a combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and is further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of slot productions increases, the production result of continuous slot production is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 at an early stage, the slot effect can be executed three times, so that the last It is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is small, a plurality of predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols can be stopped and displayed in one slot effect, so that the player can see them. You can have expectations until the end.

For the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the first slot effect is completed, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal mode” is selected, and FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a “dice mode” selected. It is a figure which showed the display example of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the case.

Although detailed description of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is omitted, in this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a frame button operation for shifting the game mode is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the game mode. When the transition lottery is won), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to transition between two game modes (“normal mode” and “dice mode”) having different display modes.

The "normal mode" is a game mode in which the fluctuation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol reaches the reach, a predetermined character ("rabbit", "turtle", "hero") ) Is a game mode in which an effect in which any or all of the characters appear is executed. Then, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) for accumulating and displaying the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed, and one of the indicators (P1 to P3) is displayed. In any of P1, P2, and P3), when the accumulated points exceed a predetermined number (7 points), the player is given a privilege (reach effect).

On the other hand, in the "dice mode", the variation display of the third symbol is reduced in the small area Dm5, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player by the progress of the game (not shown) using the dice in the main display area. This is a game mode in which the effect of playing is executed. Then, as in the above-mentioned "normal mode", two indicators (P4 to P5) that are displayed by accumulating the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed, and one of the indicators (P4 to P5) is displayed. In P4 or P5), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points), the player is given a privilege (reach effect).

First, the point effect executed in the "normal mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a display example in the “normal mode”. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the "normal mode", three indicators are displayed, and "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" are associated with each indicator. This is because the points given to the player (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the point effect are set to the types associated with each character, and the types of points given to the player are set. Points are given to each indicator (P1 to P3) according to the above.

The characters "Rabbit", "Kame", and "Brave" associated with each indicator (P1 to P3) are the third symbol variation effect and the reserved symbol display (not shown) executed in the "normal mode". ), And the point type corresponding to the character is set so as to be easily displayed based on the character being displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect with the situation in which points are accumulated in the point effect. It is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be randomly determined. As a result, the points associated with the characters other than the characters displayed on the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Further, in this control example, one of a plurality of characters ("Rabbit", "Kame", "Brave") appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as a point effect, and the displayed character is the time point. It is set so that a high point is given when the character matches the character displayed as the main body of the third symbol variation display.

Further, the period for displaying the character as the point effect is set three times during one point effect, and points are set to be given at each timing. As a result, the progress of the third symbol variation effect (presence or absence of a main character or the type of the character) can be more related to the point effect, and the complex effect can be easily understood by the player. There is an effect.

In this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, it is associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Display objects (eg, "swords" associated with "heroes") may be used. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can play the game while predicting the presence or absence of relevance by comparing the display object displayed in the point effect with the content of the third symbol variation effect.

It should be noted that the point effect may be associated with something other than the third symbol variation effect, for example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or it is output from the voice output device. It may be associated with the voice of the character. By associating some kind of effect provided to the player with the point effect in this way, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

Further, in this control example, points are accumulated on the indicator at various timings during the fluctuation display of the special symbol (during the fluctuation of the third symbol), and the number of points is the maximum value (7th stage in FIG. 162). ) Is reached, at least an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the variable effect of the third symbol being executed at that time is executed.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy whether or not any of the indicators reaches the maximum value by the point production, and can execute the game while expecting the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

The mode in which points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

As described above, in this control example, the "normal mode" and the "dice mode" are set by the voice lamp control device 114, which is the effect mode setting means, as a plurality of effect modes. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process described later executed by the voice lamp control device 114. It should be noted that a plurality of production modes may be set so as to be possible by operating the frame button 22.

Then, indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as stage information of a plurality of stages, and the stage information is variably displayed by displaying points which are variable information on the third symbol display device 81. To.

Next, the point effect executed in the “dice mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a display example in the “dice mode”. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the "dice mode", two indicators imitating the dice are displayed, and the cumulative value of points is displayed by the dice roll. The two dice associated with each of the indicators are configured in the same display mode as the dice used by the "dice effect" executed in the "dice mode".

As described above, in the point effect of this control example, the indicator is displayed in the display mode related to the game mode being executed, so that it is possible to suppress the display that gives the player a sense of discomfort in each effect. be able to.

Further, in each game mode, the types of points accumulated by the point effect and the upper limit value are set to be different, so that different point effects can be enjoyed in each game mode. For the points given in the point production, the point reference value to be given is determined in advance, the point reference value is converted so as to correspond to the indicator display of the currently executed game mode, and the converted points are converted. It may be configured to be given to the player. This makes it possible to simplify the control of giving points.

Further, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, the points already accumulated in the indicator may be converted into points corresponding to the game mode of the transfer destination and displayed. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already assigned during the point production is stored in the storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 114 which is the stage information storage means, and the game mode It is preferable to convert the point reference value stored at the timing of the transition so as to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the transition destination, and control the display. As a result, the indicator display corresponding to the game mode can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic view showing a main display area Dm, and FIG. 163 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) given to the player by the point effect is based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. I have decided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point displayed in the main display area Dm from overlapping with the third symbol variation effect, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

First, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11 to 13, Dm21 to 23, Dm31 to 33) based on the coordinate axes. Has been done. The place where the point is displayed is determined in units of the divided small areas. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying the points in each small area unit is stored in advance, the small area in which the point display is executed this time is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect. , The point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when the point display is executed, only the process of determining the display location needs to be executed, and there is an effect that the process can be simplified.

A method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. For example, in the control of first determining the point display image to be executed in the current point display and then determining the small area to perform the point display. Good.

Further, in this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine, but it may be divided into more than that, and the point display is not executed in one small area, but a plurality of small areas. You may execute the point display using.

Next, a specific example of the point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (b). When the point display is performed while the effect shown in FIG. 163 (b) is being executed as the third symbol variation effect, first, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect and the small area not used are used. The area is determined, and as a result of the determination, a small area (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) that is not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, an allowable area that allows point display is set.

Then, an image related to the "hero" is displayed as a character indicating an indicator in which points are given to the selected small area Dm12 among the small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) set in the allowable area. Then, the display of 2 points is executed in the selected small area Dm11 among the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the image that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, two points of the indicator corresponding to the hero are accumulated among the indicators shown in FIG. 162 (a).

In this control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, the points that can be acquired by the player are higher than those of other images are displayed. It is set. Therefore, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect before the points are displayed with the character image that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, and whether or not the points that can be obtained in this point effect are high. Can be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to watch while expecting the continuation of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this control example, a character image is displayed in the point effect, and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing at which the point is displayed. In, points may be accumulated in the indicator corresponding to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect.

Further, for example, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the reason why the reserved image has changed is due to the point production or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the changed reserved image shows the expectation that it will be a big hit. It is possible to pay attention to the effect to be executed later.

As described above, the display location of the points is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and the points are further distributed based on the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. It is possible to perform point production that is easy for people to understand.

If there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, the points to be displayed can be selected based on the number of points given and the effect result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), if the points displayed this time are 1 point (low points) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order, the points can be displayed in the small areas Dm11 to Dm13. The points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy role "monster" as the subject of the third symbol variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special symbol is won. In the case of, it is preferable to display the points in the small area Dm11 near the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display the points. As a result, by grasping the points where the player displays the points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for this special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area where the point display is not performed, but for example, in one small area, the subject of the third symbol variation effect is set. When the ratio occupied by the image is calculated and the ratio is not more than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area capable of displaying points. As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167.

FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the pressing scenario table 222c, the character selection table 222d, and the point selection table 222e are added. Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the pressing scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), a normal pressing scenario 222c1, a long pressing scenario 222c2, and a combined pressing scenario 222c3 are set in the pressing scenario table 222c.

FIG. 165 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario 222c1. In the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the period during which the normal button pressing is effective (normal pressing period) is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). This is a scenario. The information of the normal pressing scenario 222c1 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the normal pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is the normal pressing period based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

In addition, the timing type is set for each period during which the button press is effective. By executing (displaying) the effect according to the timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

Specifically, in the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the normal pressing period is set as the pressing period type for the value "5001 to 9000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. "OK" is set as the timing type. Although the details will be described later, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the fluctuation display is started, and then 1 is added every 1 ms. Therefore, the period from 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the normal pressing period. Will be done.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored in the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the pressing effect is executed.

In the case of the values "0 to 5000" and "9001 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing is an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press pressing scenario 222c2. In the long press pressing scenario 222c2, the period during which the long pressing button pressing is effective (long pressing pressing period) is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display). This is the scenario that has been done. The information of the long press pressing scenario 222c2 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the long pressing pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and the long pressing pressing period is based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined to be.

Specifically, in the long press pressing scenario 222c2, the long pressing pressing period is set as the pressing period type and "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. There is. That is, the period from the start of fluctuation to 5001 ms to 12000 ms is determined as the long press press period. The long press pressing period is a period for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (long pressed) for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the long-press pressing effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the characters "long-press successful!" Is displayed) is executed based on the long-press operation performed during the long-pressing period.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored in the value "15001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the pressing effect is executed.

In the case of the values "0 to 5000" and "9001 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing is an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the combined pressing scenario 222c3. The compound pressing scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which a plurality of types of button pressings are valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display). The information of the compound pressing scenario 222c3 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the compound pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is various pressing periods based on the information of the set pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined. In this embodiment, only one type of compound pressing scenario is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the composite pressing scenario 222c3, the auto pressing period is set as the pressing period type and "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, the period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the auto pressing period. The auto-pressing period is a period for executing auto-pressing based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-press effect, based on the long-press operation performed during the auto-press period, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is pressed every second while the long-press operation continues (for example, the frame button). The effect of increasing the gauge by hitting 22 repeatedly) is executed.

For the value "12001 to 13200" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the auto is pressed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-auto pressing is in progress. "NG" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13201 to 13800" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the auto is pressed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-auto pressing is in progress. "OK" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13801 to 15000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the pressing period type when the auto is pressed, and the normal pressing effect is set when the non-auto pressing is in progress. "NG" is set as the timing type.

That is, when auto is being pressed, a release effect that is an effect of releasing the frame button 22 is displayed, and by releasing the frame button 22 during the period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of fluctuation, an effect based on the timing type of "OK" ( For example, the characters "Good timing!") Are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the characters "bad timing!") Is displayed.

When non-automatic pressing is in progress, the normal pressing effect, which is the effect of pressing the frame button 22, is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the period from the start of fluctuation to 13201 ms to 13800 ms, it is based on the timing type of "OK". The effect (for example, the characters "Good timing!") Is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the characters "bad timing!") Is displayed.

The automatic pressing effect is set for the value "1500 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value "20001" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 20001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the information of this "END" is acquired, and the end processing of the compound pressing effect is executed.

Next, the details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a hit character selection table 222d1 and a hit character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (b). FIG. 166 (b) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is the specified table.

Although not shown, the effect counter 223f has three types of independent counters, and when a character is selected in each period, the selection is performed using different counters. As a result, the variation of the characters displayed in the first to third periods can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the hit character selection table 222d1, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "50 to 100" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "Kame" is defined as the character corresponding to the value "101 to 149" of the effect counter 223f. As the character corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the effect counter 223f, "the same character as the type of point effect" is defined, and the character (hero, rabbit, turtle) who performs the main effect in the point effect is defined. The same character will be selected.

That is, in the point effect executed when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is easily displayed in the first to third periods, whereby the game Since the player plays the game with the expectation that the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is displayed in the first to third periods, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the contents of the off-character selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (c). FIG. 166 (c) is a table for determining the character to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is wrong, and the character corresponds to the value of the effect counter 223f. Is the specified table.

Specifically, in the disengagement character selection table 222d2, "hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 65" of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value "66 to 132" of the effect counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as the character, and "Kame" is defined as the character corresponding to the values "133 to 199" of the effect counter 223f.

Next, the details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a hit point selection table 222e1 and a loss point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, and the points correspond to the values of the effect counter 223f. Is the specified table. When selecting points in each period, the selection is performed using different counters, as in the case of character selection. As a result, the variation of the points displayed in the first to third periods can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Specifically, in the hit point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the value "0 to 2" of the last digit of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f. "2" is specified as a point corresponding to "3 to 6", and "3" is specified as a point corresponding to the last digit value "7 to 9" of the effect counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), "1" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "0 to 4" of the effect counter 223f in the detachment point selection table 222e1. "2" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "5 to 7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value "8 to 9" of the production counter 223f. It is stipulated.

Therefore, the hit point selection table 222e1 is configured to facilitate selection of higher points than the hit point selection table 222e2. That is, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, higher points are more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that high points will be displayed in the first to third periods of the point production, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 164, the description will be continued. FIG. 164B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example has a pressing effect flag 223j, a pressing effect scenario counter 223k, a pressing scenario storage area 223m, a slot effecting flag 223n, and a slot effect counter 223p with respect to the RAM 223 in the first control example. , The slot effect state 223q is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing effect in progress flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the pressing effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the pressing effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it is pressed. Indicates that the effect is not executed (displayed). This pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired variation pattern is the pressing effect (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170). S2031). Then, it is referred to in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) to determine whether or not the pressing effect is in progress (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to off at the end of the pressing effect (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the pressing effect is set. The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time it is determined in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) that the pressing effect is in progress (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 at the end of the pressing effect. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the pressing effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the pressed effect scenario counter 223k is added by 1 every 1 ms. Based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (elapsed time since the start of the variable display) and the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m described later, is the button pressing valid period? Whether or not it is determined.

The pressing scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the pressing scenario stored in the above-mentioned pressing scenario table 222c. In the pressing scenario storage area 223m, when the variation pattern for which the pressing effect is set is acquired in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), the pressing scenario corresponding to the set pressing effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button pressing is a valid period.

The slot effect in progress flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it indicates that the slot effect is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the effect is not executed (displayed). This slot effect in-progressing flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the acquired variation pattern is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172). See S2305). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to for determining whether or not the slot effect is in progress (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to off when the slot effect is terminated (see FIG. 174). See S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the slot effect is set. The slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) that the slot effect is being produced (S4601: Yes in FIG. 174) (S4603 in FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 every 1 ms. The values of the slot effect counter 223p are the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), the initial slot effect process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect process (see FIG. 176), and the first shortened slot effect process (FIG. 177). (See), the second shortened slot effect processing (see FIG. 178), and the extension slot effect process (see FIG. 179).

The slot effect state 223q is an area in which information indicating the state of the slot effect is stored, and during the first slot effect, the normal slot effect, the first shortened slot effect, the second shortened slot effect, and the extension slot effect. The corresponding value is stored. The slot effect state 223q is set to the initial slot effect when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the slot effect is set in the acquired variation pattern (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170). (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the initial slot effect processing (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect is set when the normal slot effect is selected (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and the first shortened slot effect is selected when the first shortened slot effect is selected. The effect is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and the special slot effect is set when the special slot effect is selected (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot effect processing (see FIG. 176), when the slot stop command for displaying the stop mode in which the two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second shortened slot effect is produced. The second shortened slot effect is set when the display slot effect command corresponding to is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the first shortened slot effect processing (see FIG. 177), when the second shortened slot effect is selected, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when the extension slot effect is selected. An extension slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178), when the slot stop effect command for displaying the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, it is set to the end waiting state (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the process during the extension slot effect (see FIG. 179), when the slot stop effect command for displaying the stop mode in which the two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to in order to determine which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and is cleared at the end of the slot effect (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 168. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, the work RAM 233 in this control example has a prohibited area storage area 233 m added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area of the display area composed of a total of nine areas in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into three vertically and three horizontally (see Dm11 to Dm31 and FIG. 163). Information indicating the above is stored, and the character symbol and the point symbol are controlled so as not to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, for example, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as information indicating the display area in the prohibited area storage area 233m, the information does not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, Select the character symbol (not displayed in Dm12 and Dm13) and the point symbol, and execute the point effect. Further, after the character symbol is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area in which the selected character symbol is displayed, and then the point symbol is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character symbol and the point symbol from being duplicately displayed in the same display area. When selecting a point symbol, if all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m, duplicate display is displayed by synthesizing (or reducing) the image data of the character symbol and the point symbol. It may be prevented, or one of the character symbol and the point symbol may not be displayed.

In the character ROM 234 in this control example, a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 are added to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table in which image data for displaying a character symbol in the above-mentioned point effect is stored. This character data table 234a3 stores the display information of the character symbol displayed in the first to third periods in the point effect, and is used as the character information of the received command in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186). The display information of the corresponding character symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The character symbol display information includes information about a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so that it is not selected. As a result, the character symbol can be prevented from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m. Therefore, for example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are displayed in duplicate. You can prevent it from happening.

The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying a point symbol in the above-mentioned point effect is stored. The point data table 234a4 stores the display information of the point symbols displayed in the first to third periods in the point effect, and is used as the point information of the received command in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186). The display information of the corresponding point symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The point symbol display information includes information about a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is a small area (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so that it is not selected. As a result, the point symbol can be prevented from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233 m. Therefore, for example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are displayed in duplicate. You can prevent it from happening.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, with respect to the first control example described above, the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) is changed so that the pressing effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732) are executed. The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169. In the main process 2, the processes S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S1710 is completed, the pressing effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to the process of S1711. Then, the command determination process is executed (S1711), the variation display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the process proceeds to the process of S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 170. The variable display setting process 2 (S1712) adds a process for executing a pressing effect, a slot effect, and a point effect to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example, instead of the reach navigation effect. It differs in that it does, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes S2001 to S2003 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and then the display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

When the processing of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether or not the set fluctuation pattern command executes the pressing effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired fluctuation pattern is set to the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is set to (S2033), and the process proceeds to S2007.

In the process of S2033, for example, if the acquired fluctuation pattern executes the normal pressing effect, the normal pressing scenario is acquired from the pressing scenario table 222c and set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, the button valid period can be adjusted to the display of the effect based on the press scenario storage area 223 m and the press effect scenario counter 223 k.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is not executed (S2031: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect is executed (S2034).

In the process of S2034, when it is determined that the set fluctuation pattern command executes the slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q. Is set to the first slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2034, when it is determined that the slot effect is not executed (S2034: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect is executed (S2037).

If it is determined in the process of S2037 that the set fluctuation pattern command executes the point effect (S2037: Yes), the point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to the process of S2007. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2037 that the point effect is not executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2007.

In the S2007 transition, the processes from S2007 to S2011 are executed and the present process is terminated, as in the first control example.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. is there.

In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S4301). Then, the first to third character information is determined based on the type of the point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying the character symbol in the three periods in which the character symbol set in the point effect and the point symbol are displayed. The first character information is the information of the character symbol to be displayed in the earliest of the three periods (the time elapsed since the start of the variable display is the shortest), and the second character information is the first period. It is the information of the character symbol to be displayed in the second period which is the next period of, and the third character information is the information of the character symbol to be displayed in the third period which is the next period of the second period.

As described above, the hit character selection table 222d1 is configured so that the same character symbol as a predetermined character can be easily selected in the point effect. As a result, when the character mainly displayed in the point effect and the character symbol displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, the player is expected to be a big hit after that. Can be done.

When the processing of S4302 is completed, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the hit point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4306. The first to third point information is information for displaying the point symbol in the first to third periods set in the point effect, similarly to the first to third character information described above.

As described above, the hit point selection table 222e1 is configured so that a point symbol having a higher point can be easily selected than the hit point selection table 222e2. As a result, many high-point point symbols are displayed in the point production, and the player can be expected to win a big hit thereafter.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301 when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is out of order (S4301: No), the first to third characters are based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the outlier character selection table 222d2. The information is determined (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the deviating point selection table 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

When the processing of S4303 or S4305 is completed, a display point effect command is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display point effect command, the display control device 114 receives the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the point effect based on the first to third point information. Is set, and the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the pressing effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. This pressing effect setting process (S1731) detects the pressing of the frame button 22 (normal pressing, long pressing, etc.) according to the pressing effect being executed (displayed), and displays and controls the command corresponding to the pressing. This is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

In the pressing effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is on (that is, whether or not the pressing effect is in progress) (S4401). If it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing flag 223j is off (S4401: No), it is not necessary to make settings related to the pressing effect, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4402 in order to execute the process related to the pressing effect.

In the processing of S4402, the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is added by 1 (S4402), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4403. Since the pressing effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the pressed effect scenario counter 223k is every 1 ms while the pressing effect is being executed. It is added one by one.

In the processing of S4403, the pressing of the frame button 22 whose current period is normal is based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k updated in the processing of S4402 and the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. It is determined whether or not it is the detection period (normal pressing period) (S4403).

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4404). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S4404 (S4404: Yes), a display pressing command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal pressing period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and the display pressing command corresponding to the timing type is set. As a result, when different effects are executed depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is possible to determine at what timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the pressing timing.

In the process of S4403, if it is determined that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the period for detecting the long press of the frame button 22 (long pressing period). (S4406). In the process of S4406, when it is determined that the current period is the long press press period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is long press (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or longer, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time.

If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 is long-pressed (S4407), a long-press display command indicating that the frame button 22 has been long-pressed during the long-press press period is set (S4407). S4408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed and held (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the current period is not the long press pressing period (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the auto pressing period (S4409). If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the current period is the auto-press period (S4409: Yes), the auto-press effect setting process is executed (S4410), and this process ends. Details of the auto-press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not the auto-press period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the release period (S4411). In the processing of S4410. When it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been released (whether or not it has changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state) (S4412). ..

If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been released in the process of S4412 (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released is set during the release period, and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the process of S4413 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4411, when it is determined that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), then whether or not it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (acquired based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k). Whether or not the pressing period type of the pressing scenario is "END" information) is determined (S4414).

In the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the pressing effect in progress flag 223j is set to off. Then (S4416), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: No), the processes of S4415 and S4416 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 173, details of the auto-pressing effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined that the auto-pressing period is determined in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172) will be described. .. This auto-press effect setting process (S4410) is based on the fact that the frame button 22 is long-pressed and pressed during the auto-press period, and the long-pressed period is the frame button at regular intervals (every 1 second). This is a process for transmitting a command indicating that 22 has been pressed to the display control device 114. That is, in the auto pressing effect, the frame button 22 is automatically (automatically) pressed by pressing and holding the frame button 22 for a long time.

In the auto-press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has been started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or longer, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has started. If it is determined in the processing of S4501 that the long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to the pressing scenario for auto pressing (S4501). S4502). Then, an auto-press start command indicating that the long press of the frame button 22 is started (auto-press is started) is set during the auto-press period (S4503), and this process is terminated. By changing the pressing scenario to the pressing scenario for auto pressing in the processing of S4502, the effect mode displayed thereafter is changed to the effect mode assuming that the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed. (For example, you can change the effect of pressing a button to the effect of releasing a button).

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has not been started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 is in progress (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed and held (S4504: Yes), the previous auto-pressing is executed during the period when the auto-pressing started by the long-pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. It is determined whether or not a certain period (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the execution of (S4505).

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has passed since the previous auto-press was executed (S4504: Yes), the display auto-press command is set (S4506), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous auto-pressing was executed (S4504: No), the processing of S4506 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is not in progress (S4504: No), then it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 is completed (S4507). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is not pressed continuously for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 is long pressed, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is completed. This prevents it from being mistakenly determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has been completed when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like. it can.

In the process of S4507, when it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is completed (S4507: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223 m is changed to the press scenario for non-automatic press. (S4508). Then, a display auto-press end command indicating that the long-press of the frame button 22 is completed (auto-press is started) is set during the auto-press period (S4509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is not completed (S4507: No), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510).

In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is manually pressed (continuously pressed) during the auto continuous striking period, so it is based on the timing type. A display press command is set (S4511), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S4510 that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. This slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

In the slot effect setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect during effect flag 223n is on (whether or not the slot effect is being produced) (S4601). In the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effecting flag 223n is off (S4601: No), it is a case where the slot effect is not executed (displayed), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effect in progress flag 223n is on (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, the value of the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 every 1 ms during the execution (display) of the slot effect. To.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603). In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), it means that the first slot effect (first slot effect) is executed in the slot effect. In order to execute the process in the first slot effect, the process during the first slot effect is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the processing during the initial slot effect (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 175. The initial slot effect in-process (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the initial slot effect of the slot effect. is there.

In the processing during the initial slot production (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is a valid button pressing valid period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 13000 (that is, between 2 seconds and 13 seconds after the start of the slot effect), it is determined that the button press is valid. To do.

When it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button pressing valid period is (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4702). If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4702: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S4701 (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). .. In the process of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button press valid period (between 2 seconds and 13 seconds) is early (from 2 seconds). Since the frame button 22 is pressed during (8 seconds) and the remaining effect time of the slot pressing effect is long, the process shifts to the process of S4706 in order to execute the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first shortened slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value from 2000 to 8000 (that is, a value of 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process of S4704 for executing the normal slot effect is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to the process of S4708.

In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4709), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

In the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4701: Yes), it is the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button pressing valid period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 13000 or less (S4710: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the initial slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the process during the normal slot effect (S4606).

This normal slot effect processing is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect processing (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is a valid button pressing valid period (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 17,000 to 28,000 (that is, from the start of the slot effect to the elapse of 17 seconds to 28 seconds), the button press valid period is determined. Determine.

In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4801 when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802).

If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4802: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803).

If it is determined in the process of S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during the execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then the effect. This is a case where it is possible to execute the second shortened slot effect in which the time is 10 seconds. In this case, a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), a slot effect state 223q is set as a second shortened slot effect (S4809), and a display corresponding to the second shortened slot effect is set. A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4804 in order to end the slot effect.

In the processing of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined to be an even number (S4804: Yes), a slot for displaying a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned. A stop effect command is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4804, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, and the process proceeds to S4807. Transition.

In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4807), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the normal slot effect, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is stopped and displayed, and then, in the second shortened slot effect, one symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition to the stop display in the slot effect, three symbols will be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed late, it is determined whether the two symbols are stopped or the one symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the value of the effect counter. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, there is a high possibility that the two symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the player can actively participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the first shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4607).

If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the first shortened slot effect is being set (S4607: Yes), the first shortened slot effect process is executed (S4608), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the processing during the production of the first shortened slot will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 177. The first shortened slot effect in-process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot effect of the slot effect. It is a process for.

In the process during the first shortened slot effect (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 12000 to 18000, it is determined that it is the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect.

In the process of S4901, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period in the first shortened slot effect is (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902).

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4902: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set as the second shortened slot effect. (S4904). Then, a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S4901: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906).

If it is determined in the process of S4906 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18000 or less (S4906: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press valid period in the first shortened slot effect. is there. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

When the processing of S4905 or S4908 is completed, the display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4909), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then whether or not the second shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4609).

If it is determined in the process of S4609 that the second shortened slot effecting process is set (S4609: Yes), the second shortened slot effect process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the second shortened slot effect in-process (S4610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178. The second shortened slot effect processing (S4610) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and corresponds to pressing the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the second shortened slot effect. It is a process for performing the process.

In the process during the second shortened slot effect (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid period in the second shortened slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the process of S5001, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S5001: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002).

If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5002: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is set. Set to the end waiting state (S5004), and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then whether or not the extension slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q is determined. Determine (S4611).

If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extension slot effect is being set (S4611: Yes), the extension slot effect process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

Here, the details of the extension slot effect processing (S4612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 179. The process during the extension slot effect (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is to perform a process corresponding to pressing the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the extension slot effect. It is the processing of.

In the extension slot effect in-process (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not the button press valid period in the extension slot effect is valid (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button press valid period.

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the button pressing valid period is not (S5101: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the button pressing valid period is (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102).

If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5102: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S5102: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is set. Set to the end waiting state (S5104), and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extension slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4613.

In the process of S4613, in order to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the slot effect, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613). If it is determined in the process of S4613 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28,000 or less (S4613: No), it is not the end timing of the slot effect, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot effect. Therefore, the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state. It is determined whether or not there is (S4614).

In the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the slot effect has already been stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. This is the case when a special slot effect is being executed. In this case, the display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped and displayed. In this case, in order to stop and display the effect mode in the slot effect and then end the slot effect, a display slot effect forced end command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

In the process of S4617, the slot effect during effect flag 223n is set to off (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) is different from the first control example in that the press effect-related command process, the slot effect command process, and the point effect command process are added. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 180. In the command determination process 2, the processes S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

Then, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the pressing effect has been received (S2631).

If it is determined that the press effect-related command has been received in the process of S2631 (S2631: Yes), the press effect-related command process is executed (S2632), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the pressing effect-related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

On the other hand, in the process of S2631, if it is determined that the command related to the pressing effect has not been received (S2631: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect command has been received (S2633).

If it is determined that the slot effect command has been received in the process of S2633 (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, in the process of S2633, when it is determined that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect command has been received (S2635).

If it is determined that the point effect command has been received in the process of S2635 (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the point effect command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command has not been received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed in the same manner as in the first control example (S2614), and the processing of S2601 is performed. Return to.

Next, the details of the pressing effect-related command processing (S2632) will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. The press effect-related command process (S2632) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (execution) the press effect.

In the pressing effect-related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not the display pressing command has been received (S5201). If it is determined that the display pressing command has been received in the processing of S5201 (S5201: Yes), the pressing command processing is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5203.

Here, the details of the pressing command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a flowchart showing the pressing command processing. This pressing command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display pressing command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the press command processing, first, the press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is used. Set (S5301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302).

Then, based on the pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5303). S5304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5305), the pressing command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the pressing effect-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201 when it is determined that the display press command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the display long press command has been received (S5203).

If it is determined in the process of S5203 that the long press command for display has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to the process of S5205.

Here, the details of the long press command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a flowchart showing a long press command process. This long press command process executes a process corresponding to the display long press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the long press command processing, first, a long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the long press command for display is determined, and the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5402).

Then, based on the long-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5405), the long press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the long press command for display has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the auto press start command for display has been received (S5205).

If it is determined that the display auto-press start command has been received in the process of S5205 (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

Here, the details of the auto-press start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (a). FIG. 183 (a) is a flowchart showing the auto-press start command processing. This auto-press start command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press start command processing, first, the auto-press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press start command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502).

Then, based on the auto-press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5505), the auto press start command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that the display auto-press start command has not been received (S5205: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press command has been received (S5207).

If it is determined that the display auto-press command has been received in the process of S5207 (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to the process of S5209.

Here, the details of the auto-press command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). FIG. 183 (b) is a flowchart showing auto-press command processing. This auto-press command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press command processing, first, an auto-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press command is determined, and the determined auto-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602).

Then, based on the auto-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5605), the auto press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

If it is determined in the process of S5209 that the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to the process of S5211.

Here, the details of the auto-press end command process (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (a). FIG. 184 (a) is a flowchart showing the auto-press end command process. This auto-press end command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-press end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press end command processing, first, the auto-press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press end command is determined, and the determined auto-press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the auto-pressed end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5705), the auto press end command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the display auto press end command has not been received (S5209: No), then it is determined whether or not the display release command has been received (S5211).

If it is determined that the display release command has been received in the process of S5211 (S5211: Yes), the release command process is executed (S5212), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the release command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a flowchart showing release command processing. This release command process executes the process corresponding to the display release command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the release command processing, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is used. Set (S5801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5803). S5804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5805), the release command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the pressing effect-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5211 that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), this process ends.

Next, the details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing slot effect command processing. This slot effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the slot effect command processing, first, a slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5902).

Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S5905), the slot effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

Next, the details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the point effect command processing. This point effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display point effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, the information of the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233 m (S6002).

Character data of the character symbol to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233 m set in the process of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command. The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the information of the prohibited area corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Point data of the point symbol to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233 m updated in the processing of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command. The table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

Then, by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6005).

Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6008), the point effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

As described above, the combined pressing effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player continuously executes different operation modes (continuous hitting, timing pressing) on the frame button 22, so that the player can produce the effect. It can increase the willingness to participate in the event. Further, when it is determined that the player has executed the auto-pressing function during the compound pressing effect, the pressing effect mode of the compound pressing effect to be executed is switched, so that the player is provided with an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort. Can be done.

In this control example, it is set so that the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at the right time (timing pressing effect) is executed after the pressing effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 (continuous pressing effect) as the compound pressing effect. If the auto-press function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous hit effect to the timing press effect, the above-mentioned timing push effect is configured to be switched to the release effect in which the button is released at the right time. Other configurations may be used.

For example, when the auto pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous striking effect to the timing pressing effect, the timing of the pressing operation during the timing pressing effect may be automatically determined, or the continuous striking may be performed. The production may be continuously executed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player who is executing the auto-pressing function.

Further, in the second control example, the normal pressing effect, the timing pressing effect, and the release effect are configured to be displayable as the combined pressing effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period in which the long press effect is executed may be provided as part of the compound press effect.

Further, in the second control example, the timing at which each pressing effect mode of the composite pressing effect is changed is the timing at which the pressing effect is switched, but the production mode of the next pressing effect is at the timing when the previous pressing effect is executed. May be decided. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the combined pressing effect.

Further, the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously accepted during the effect period of the combined pressing effect executed in the second control example, but an invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted is provided. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the compound pressing effect using the invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the period during which the compound pressing effect is being executed, which is easy for the player to understand. A production can be provided.

In the compound pressing effect described above in the second control example, the result of the compound pressing effect is displayed based on all the operation results for each pressing effect executed during the compound pressing effect. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play for each pressing effect. The method of displaying the effect result of the composite press effect is not limited to this, and the effect result may be displayed independently for each press effect executed during the compound press effect.

As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the player operates the frame button 22 according to the timing of the next operation. It is configured so that the effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured so that the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect result of the continuous slot effect is displayed as a combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect, and is further executed during the continuous slot effect. As the number of slot productions increases, the production result of continuous slot production is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can more enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 at an early stage, the slot effect can be executed three times. It is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game. Further, even if the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is small, a plurality of predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols can be stopped and displayed in one slot effect, so that the player can see them. You can have expectations until the end.

Further, for the player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the end of the first slot effect, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Absent.

In this second control example, the slot effect is used as a plurality of operation effects executed during the continuous effect executed for a specific period, but it is based on the operation result for one operation effect executed during the continuous effect. Therefore, as long as the effect mode and the number of times of other operation effects executed during the continuous effect can be changed, an effect other than the effect using slots may be used.

As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the point display location is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and is further displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Since the points are distributed based on the character, it is possible to perform a point effect that is easy for the player to understand.

If there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, the points to be displayed can be selected based on the number of points given and the effect result of the third symbol variation effect (lottery result of special symbols). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), if the points displayed this time are 1 point (low points) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order, the points can be displayed in the small areas Dm11 to Dm13. The points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy role "monster" as the subject of the third symbol variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special symbol is won. In the case of, it is preferable to display the points in the small area Dm11 near the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display the points. As a result, by grasping the points where the player displays the points, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery for this special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed in Dm12 of FIG. 163 (b)) may be changed to a display mode for guiding the point display location (small area) to be executed later. Specifically, it is preferable to use a display mode in which the point display location (small area) is guided by the character's line of sight.

Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area where the point display is not performed, but for example, in one small area, the subject of the third symbol variation effect is set. When the ratio occupied by the image is calculated and the ratio is not more than a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area may be determined as an area capable of displaying points. As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

The following configuration may be used as a configuration for setting the display location of the point effect based on the location where the third symbol variation effect is displayed. That is, on the display control device 114 side, when a command for displaying points is received, the points are controlled to be displayed in all the small areas, and the small areas other than the small areas in which the player actually visually recognizes the point display. Control may be performed to mask the point display displayed in the area so that the player cannot see it. With this configuration, for example, during the third symbol variation effect, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect moves to various small areas, and the prohibited area and the allowable area are interchanged. Case processing can be facilitated.

Further, as the same processing, the point display image layer for displaying the points is made to display points in all the small areas, and the effect display image layer that displays the third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer. Is provided, and a process of transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect to the effect display image layer may be executed.

Further, in the second control example, a small area in which the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as a prohibited area for prohibiting the point display, but a small area in which the other display is executed is a prohibited area. For example, a small area where game information such as a display of the number of holdings is displayed, or a pachinko machine 10 is provided and driven by satisfying a predetermined condition (predetermined fluctuation pattern selection). 3 In a gaming machine having a decorative accessory that covers a part (specific small area) of the front surface of the symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned specific small area when a predetermined condition is satisfied or an abnormality is detected when an abnormality is detected. In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area on which information is displayed, the predetermined small area when an abnormality is detected may be set as a prohibited area.

Further, in this second control example, a control example using the display area of one display device (third symbol display device 81) is described, but even if the same control is executed using a plurality of display devices. Often, for example, when a movable (rotatable) sub-display device is arranged at a predetermined position, it may be set in a prohibited area, and when it is arranged in another position, it may be set in an allowable area.

<First modification of the second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. In the first modification of the second control example, the contents of the ROM 203 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the second control example described above, and the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) is replaced. The difference is that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first modification of the second control example, three types of auto-pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are configured to be different in each auto-pressing period. As a result, for example, an effect that requires pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the button pressing period (continuous hitting effect), or pressing the frame button 22 only once at the right time during the button pressing period (timing pressing effect). Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

Further, in the first modification, an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the slot is rotated / stopped is executed three times is displayed as the slot effect, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the pressing of the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation effect, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes slower, and as the frame button 22 is pressed later, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes faster. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow and it becomes easy to align the target symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, the next The rotation speed in the rotation effect of is increased, and it becomes difficult to align the target patterns. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, and the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the first modification of the second control example>
First, the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 187. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modification is different from the second control example described above in that the content of the pressing scenario table 222c is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressing scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the pressing scenario table 222c in the first modification is different from the pressing scenario table 222c in the second control example described above, instead of the combined pressing scenario 222c3, the first combined pressing scenario 222c4 and The difference is that the second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first compound pressing scenario 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first compound pressing scenario 222c4. The first combined pressing scenario 222c4 is different from the combined pressing scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the pressing interval during the auto pressing period is different, and other points are the same. The same points will be omitted.

In the first compound pressing scenario 222c4, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the auto pressing period A (pressing interval 1 second) is set as the pressing period type for the value “5001 to 12000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. , The auto-pressing period B (pressing interval 0.5 seconds) is set for the value "1500 to 18000" of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k.

In this way, the player executing the auto-pressing function executes the auto-pressing function by making the pressing interval different from the auto-pressing period set in different periods depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. It is possible to prevent early getting bored with the production based on what is being done.

In this modification, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto pressing period, but other configurations may be used. For example, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the auto-pressing period is reached, one auto-pressing pattern is selected from the auto-pressing pattern selection table in which a plurality of auto-pressing patterns having different pressing intervals are stored, and the pressing interval is based on the selected auto-pressing pattern. May be set. With this configuration, even if the compound pressing effect based on the same compound pressing scenario is executed, the auto pressing functions having different pressing intervals are executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It is possible to suppress the storage.

Further, a predetermined auto-pressing pattern may be selected from the above-mentioned auto-pressing pattern selection table based on the determination result of the special symbol. Specifically, when an effect in which the degree of progress increases according to the number of times of pressing is executed, if it is determined that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is stored in the automatic pressing pattern selection table. It is preferable that the auto pressing pattern having the shortest pressing interval is selected from the existing auto pressing patterns. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of progress of the production when the discrimination result of the special symbol is won as a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is executing the auto pressing function predict the discrimination result of the special symbol according to the progress of the effect.

Further, it is preferable to notify the third symbol display device 81 of the pressing interval while the auto pressing function is being executed. As a result, the player can visually grasp the pressing interval of the auto pressing function executed this time.

Next, the contents of the second compound pressing scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (c). FIG. 187 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second compound pressing scenario 222c5. The second compound pressing scenario 222c5 is a period corresponding to the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) with respect to the above-mentioned first compound pressing scenario 222c4, and the values “12001” to “12001” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. The difference is that the auto-pressing period is set for "15000", and the other points are the same. The same points will be omitted.

In the second compound pressing scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the auto pressing period C (pressing interval 2 seconds) is set for the values “12001” to “15000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. .. By executing the automatic pressing function with a pressing interval of 2 seconds during the period in which the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) is set as the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) in this way, it is determined within a substantially predetermined period. It is possible to realize the situation where the button is pressed at the timing.

Specifically, for example, when the effect pressed by the auto-press function is executed at the timing when the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k during the auto-press period A is "14000", the press effect during the auto-press period C The next pressing effect is executed at the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is "16000", that is, at the timing 2 seconds after the previous pressing effect. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at the timing one second after the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)) is started.

In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during auto pressing, button pressing effects having different playability are suitably executed in the state where the auto pressing function is executed (while the frame button 22 is held down for a long time). It becomes possible.

Next, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 188. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that a press count counter 223r is provided, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The press count counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution (display) of the slot effect. The press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 in the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press valid period has arrived (FIG. 189). (See S6108). Then, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2 or less, the next rotation effect setting is executed, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Further, the button pressing valid period is set based on the value of the pressing count counter 223r.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modification is different from the above-described second control example in that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732). The slot effect setting process 2 (S1732) displays an effect mode in which the rotation effect in which the slot is rotated / stopped is executed three times as the slot effect, and stops the rotation of the slot based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Perform processing. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed early so that the number of rotations in each rotation effect is the same, processing is performed so as to slow down the rotation speed in the next rotation effect. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow, and it becomes easy to align the target symbols.

In the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect is being executed (displayed) by determining whether or not the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is on (S6101).

In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is off (S6101: No), it means that the slot effect is not executed (displayed), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101 when it is determined that the slot effect in-progress flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), the slot effect is being executed (displayed), so the slot effect counter 223p is added by 1 (1). S6102), the process proceeds to S6103.

In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing valid period (S6103). Specifically, the button press valid period is set by the process of S6115 described later. For example, when the press count counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is set. When the value is from 2001 to 8000 (that is, from the start of the slot effect to the elapse of 2001 ms until the elapse of 8000 ms), the button pressing valid period is set.

If it is determined in the process of S6103 that the button is not valid (S6103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button is valid (S6103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S6104 (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for stopping the rotating symbol in the rotation effect is set (S6105). , S6108.

If it is determined in the process of S6104 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the button pressing valid period (S6106). Specifically, when the press count counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000.

If it is determined in the process of S6106 that it is not the end timing of the button pressing valid period (S6106: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6106, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button pressing valid period (S6106: Yes), the display slot stop effect command is used to forcibly stop the rotating symbol in the rotation effect. Is set (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the process of S6108, the press count counter 223r is added by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

In the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), it means that the rotation effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times, so the next rotation effect is performed. The process proceeds to S6113 for setting.

In the process of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is the slot. The value of the effect counter 223p is 28,000, and the remaining time is obtained by subtracting the value of the current slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p, which is the upper limit of the time.

Set the display slot effect command of the display mode (S6114), which is the rotation speed of 10 rotations with the remaining time calculated in the processing of S6113, and set the button press valid period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r. (S6115), this process is terminated.

Specifically, in the processing of S6115, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p becomes a value of 12001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period, and the press count counter 223r. When the value of is 2, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 22001 to 18000 is set as the button pressing valid period.

On the other hand, in the process of S6109, when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed (or the button press is valid) in the final rotation effect of the slot effect. (The period has passed). In this case, the display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the press count counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), and the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112). This process ends.

As described above, in the first modification, in the slot effect in which the rotation effect is performed three times, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slower, and the target pattern is used. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes high, and it becomes difficult to align the target symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege that the target symbols can be easily aligned by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, and the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

In addition to the above-mentioned ones, the short length of the button pressing effective period to be set next may be changed according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the button pressing effective period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period may be extended in the next rotation effect. As a result, since the button pressing period is set longer in the next rotation effect, even if the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, there are many timings to stop the target symbol (that is, the chance increases). Can be given, so the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

<Second modification of the second control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modification, when the frame button 22 is pressed automatically, a pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, as opposed to the second control example described above. When the button 22 is pressed non-automatically, the difference is that the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a frame button control device 290 that outputs a pressing signal based on the pressing of the frame button 22. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second modification, the frame button control device 290 described above is in a state of being automatically pressed based on a predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for 2 seconds). During the automatic pressing, the pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals without operating the frame button 22. Therefore, even when the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, and the operation burden on the player can be reduced. Can be done.

<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the second control example>
First, the electrical configuration in the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration in the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second modification via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected by the processing of the MPU 291 and the detection result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, and stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Here, the details of the RAM 293 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an auto-pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (a state in which a pressing signal is output at regular intervals regardless of whether the frame button 22 is pressed), and is on. If is, it is determined that the auto-pressed state (auto-pressed), and if it is off, it is determined that the auto-pressed state (non-auto-pressed).

This auto-pressing flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 2 seconds or longer in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). The auto-pressed flag 293a is referred to in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) when it is determined whether or not the auto-pressed state is being pressed.

The pressing time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time when the frame button 22 is pressed. The pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is being pressed. Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the value of the press time counter 293b is added by 1 every 1 ms when the frame button 22 is being pressed. Then, when the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the auto pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is completed.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time while the auto is pressed. This period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, when the auto-pressing state is in progress). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms while the auto is pressed. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c is counted, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button pressing signal is voice lamp controlled. It is transmitted to the device 113. Since the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches the predetermined value (1000), the button press signal is signaled every time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, every time 1 second elapses). Will be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

By changing the above-mentioned predetermined value, it is possible to change the interval at which the button pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during auto pressing. For example, the predetermined value may be 500 or 2000, and the timing of changing may be the timing when a predetermined operation (long press again, repeated hits, other button presses, etc.) is executed, or the effect. It may be the timing when is switched. The timing at which the effect is switched may be notified from the voice lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<Regarding the control process by the frame button control device in the second modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the control process executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the MPU 291 (every 1 ms in this modification). This timer interrupt process is a process for detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating the pressing of the frame button 22 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. When the long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the auto press function is executed, and the press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (1 second in this modification). It is a process to do.

The timer interrupt process first determines whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S6201 (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressing time counter 293b is added by 1 (S6202), and the added value of the pressing time counter 293b is added. It is determined whether or not it is 2000 (S6203).

In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), it means that 2 seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed. Therefore, the auto-pressing flag 293a Determines whether or not is on (S6204).

In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), it means that the auto-pressing function is not executed. Therefore, in order to start the execution of the auto-pressing function, The auto-pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. Since the pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S6206 and the effect based on the reception of the pressing signal is executed by the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the automatic pressing is set for the player. It can be easily recognized. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to outputting a pressing signal, but notifies that the automatic pressing is set, and based on the notification, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set. You may.

On the other hand, in the process of S6204, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6204: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so that the execution of the auto-pressing function is terminated. In addition, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to off (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6212.

If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the press time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the processes of S6204 to S6207 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6212.

If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208).

In the processing of S6208, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 (S6208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output. The process proceeds to S6209 for output. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b is larger than 5 by the processing of S6208 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms), it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, the frame button 22 is short-term due to noise or the like. Even if it is determined that the button has been pressed for a while (for example, 1 ms), the press of the frame button 22 can be accurately detected.

The process of S6209 determines whether or not the value of the press time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the processing of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 is normally pressed, so that the pressing signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the press time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), it means that the frame button 22 is pressed and held, so the processing of S6210 is skipped. , S6211.

In the process of S6211, the value of the press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to the process of S6212.

In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). In the process of S6212, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212: Yes), it means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so the value of the period counter 293c is added by 1. (S6213), it is determined whether or not the value of the added period counter 293c is a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) or more (S6214).

When it is determined in the process of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the voice lamp control device 113 ( S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

If it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off in the processing of S6212 (S6212: No), it means that the auto-pressing function is not executed. Therefore, the processing of S6213 to S6216 is executed, and this is performed. End the process.

As described above, in the second modification of the second control example, the auto pressing function can be switched on and off by executing a predetermined operation (holding down the frame button 22). Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the frame button 22 in order to execute the auto pressing function, so that the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

In the second modification, the pressing signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the automatic pressing function is started. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic pressing is set. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to outputting a pressing signal, but notifies that the automatic pressing is set, and based on the notification, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect indicating that the automatic pressing is set. You may.

In the second modification, even when the auto pressing function is executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 is detected and the pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, even when the auto-pressing function is executed, the player can arbitrarily operate the frame button 22 to change the effect mode, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. .. Not limited to this, when the auto pressing function is executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected. Further, when the auto-pressing function is executed, the execution of the auto-pressing function may be terminated based on the fact that the frame button 22 is normally pressed. As a result, the execution of the auto pressing function can be easily terminated, and a gaming machine that is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

In the second modification, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the MPU process, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the voltage of the capacitor exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 5 V), it is determined that the capacitor has been pressed for a long time. You may.

<Other production examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be described. The same points as those used in the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Mission production>
In each of the above-described control examples, when a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the voice lamp control device 113, the mission effect is executed. This mission effect is an effect of giving a privilege (for example, a big hit) when a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect content executed thereafter satisfies the command.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a command content (first command information) and a commander (second command information). Then, the past command display can be stored as a command history. With this configuration, when the mission effect is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display will be displayed at the same time. Here, based on the relationship between the command display of this time and the command display of the past (previous), it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not the mission production of this time is successful.

Specifically, if the command display (first command information and second command information) of this time and the previous time are the same, it is suggested that the mission production of this time is likely to succeed, and if they are different, this time. It suggests that the mission production is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, if a part of the command display matches (for example, the commander who is the second command information matches), it is set to suggest that if the mission production progresses to the second half, the possibility of success is high. To.

In this way, since the contents of the past mission production and the current mission production are overlapped so that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the same production is repeatedly executed and the player gets tired of the game. It is possible to turn an easy situation into a situation where you can expect a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Furthermore, in this mission production, for example, when a command "Gather people" is displayed as the command content, if the result of the production is "0 people", the command fails, and "1 person" to "100 people" When the command is successful and the command is successful, the command achievement rate (for example, "1 person" is 1% of the command achievement rate and "100 people" is 100% of the command achievement rate) is set. By setting this command achievement rate, it is possible to set the degree of expectation of a big hit in more detail. In addition, if the command content of the first command information is the same and the commander of the second command information is different between the current command display and the previous command display, the production is configured so that the command achievement rate is inherited. Has been done. As a result, even if the effect of the same command content is repeatedly executed, the content of the effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the above description, the effect is executed based on the previous command display history and the current command display. For example, a means capable of storing a plurality of command displays displayed in the past is provided, and the effect is increased. A selection means for the player to select an arbitrary command display is provided. Even if the command display selected by the selection means is displayed on the display screen (third symbol display device 81) and the effect is executed based on the instruction display selected by the selection means and the instruction display this time. Good. In addition, the information corresponding to the past instruction display is displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 with a two-dimensional code so that the player can acquire the information, and the acquired information is used for the next time the game is executed. By making it possible to input to 10, the command instruction executed in the past (for example, the previous day) may be taken over and displayed.

<Chance up production>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, in order to show the degree of expectation that the changing special symbol has won the jackpot, a partial display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display or reach). The effect of changing the color pattern of the title name display, background color, etc.) to a different color pattern is executed. As a result, when a similar effect is executed, the player pays close attention to the effect while expecting which color pattern will be displayed in a part of the effect, and the player gets tired of the game early. It suppresses that.

However, since the above-mentioned partial display mode is displayed at various timings in one effect (for example, 60 seconds), the player does not notice the change in the partial display mode or sees the effect in anticipation. As a result, there was a problem that the player felt dissatisfied because the color pattern with high expectation of the jackpot was not displayed.

On the other hand, in each of the above-described control examples, when the effect is executed, the color pattern advance notification means capable of notifying the player in advance of the color pattern displayed in the current effect is provided. As a result, the player can grasp the color pattern provided in this production in advance.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a specific color pattern is automatically selected from a plurality of displayed color patterns as the color pattern advance notification means. As a result, the color pattern with a high expectation of big hit is displayed among the plurality of color patterns once displayed, and the color pattern is selected by the color pattern advance notification means in the expectation that the color pattern will be selected. It is possible to pay close attention to the production to be performed.

Further, the color pattern advance notification means can notify a plurality of color patterns based on the number of changes in the partial display mode described above. As a result, when a plurality of colors and patterns with high expectation for big hits are notified in advance, the player only has to pay close attention to the production, and suppresses the distrust of the game caused by having excessive expectations for each production. be able to.

Further, since the plurality of partial display modes described above have different jackpot expectations when they are changed to the same color pattern, which partial display mode is the color pattern previously notified by the color pattern advance notification means. You can watch the production while enjoying whether it is used for.

<Hold change production>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, an area (hereinafter referred to as a hold display area) in which information indicating the number of rights for executing the change of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as hold number information) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (Hereinafter referred to as execution information) and an area (hereinafter referred to as execution display area) in which information corresponding to the special symbol whose fluctuation is currently executed (hereinafter referred to as execution information) is displayed are displayed. Then, the so-called hold look-ahead effect, in which the display mode of the hold symbol representing the hold number information displayed in the hold display area by the number of symbols is changed based on the pre-read information of the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol. Is configured to be executable.

Conventionally, this hold look-ahead effect has been configured to change the display mode of the hold symbol when a new change of the special symbol is started. In this case, it was possible to entertain the player with the hold look-ahead effect if the hold number information of a predetermined number or more is displayed, but if the hold number is small, the effect is sufficiently entertained. There was a problem that it could not be done.

On the other hand, in the hold change effect of each control example described above, the time required for the hold symbol to move to the execution display area is used based on the pre-read information of the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol. The display mode of the reserved symbol is changed. As a result, even if the number of reserved symbols is small, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the reserved symbol at least by using the time until the change of the currently executed special symbol is completed.

Specifically, the hold symbol that is the target of the hold change (for example, the hold symbol displayed in hold 3) is changed to a character, and the hold symbol changed to that character is displayed in a predetermined hold display area (for example, hold 2 is displayed). When it is displayed (shifted) in the area to be displayed), the hold change effect is started (for example, the battle effect). Then, the longer the time until the pending change effect is completed, the more the pending change progresses.

That is, when the reserved symbol that is the target of the pending change shifts to the pending 2, the length of the pending change effect is based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed and the fluctuation time of the reserved symbol displayed on the pending 1. Is determined. As a result, even if the hold change effect is started in the state of hold 1, if the change time of the special symbol currently being changed is long, the hold change effect can sufficiently proceed with the hold change effect.

Further, the end of the hold change effect may be the timing when the hold symbol to be the hold change effect shifts to the execution display area, or may end before that.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, when the reserved symbol to be the pending change effect shifts to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for the look-ahead effect of the hold symbol displayed in the hold display area in the state where the hold symbol whose character image is the target of the hold change effect is displayed in the execution display area.

Specifically, the character whose pending symbol has changed, which is the target of the pending change effect, and the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area execute the above-mentioned battle effect. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol changes to a character while the number of pending symbols is small, that character is used for the later pending change effect of the reserved symbol, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In the above-mentioned battle production, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the combination of the characters to be confronted. Further, it is preferable to set so that the frequency of the hold look-ahead effect and the expected degree of the jackpot differ depending on the type of the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area.

<Button effect setting>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as a variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 114, a plurality of frame button operation effects in which the frame button 22 can be operated can be executed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set in each of the above-mentioned control examples (for example, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing). , The effect of notifying the player of the expectation of the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol, which is changing this time, by changing the color emitted by the plurality of light emitting units provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the voice lamp. By repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the fluctuation pattern set by the control operation 114, the decoration mode can be changed, etc.). As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem that the frame button effects are frequently executed and the action of the player to operate the frame button 22 becomes complicated.

On the other hand, a means for determining whether or not a plurality of various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, and a plurality of set frame button operation effects when it is determined that a plurality of frame button operation effects are set. When the interval discriminating means for discriminating the interval of the frame button operation effect and the interval discriminating means for the interval discriminating means make the interval of a plurality of frame button operation effects a predetermined interval, the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled even at the predetermined interval. A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. As a result, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set the period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 so as to straddle the plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated in the operation of the frame button 22.

As the interval determination means described above, specifically, a period during which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and an interval between the plurality of frame button operation effects is set based on the set period. A storage means for storing a combination of items to be discriminated and a combination of frame button operation effects in which the interval at which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed is less than a predetermined amount is provided, and a combination of frame button operation effects stored in the storage means is provided. There is something to determine whether or not is set.

Further, as the above-mentioned frame button operation effect setting means, specifically, a case where the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is set to be extended and a frame button operation executed later. There are cases where the operation validity period of the effect is set to be advanced, and cases where a new frame button operation effect is set.

When the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is set to be extended, the third symbol is displayed in such a manner that the operation valid period of the frame button operation effect executed earlier is extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation valid period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation valid period is predetermined. When the period (2 seconds remaining or 0 seconds remaining) is reached, the display that the operation valid period is extended may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not a new frame button operation effect has been set until just before the frame button operation effect that has been executed earlier ends. The button 22 can be continuously operated, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated in the operation of the frame button 22.

Further, the effect result of the frame button operation effect that has been executed earlier at the timing when the normal operation valid period is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is operated during the extended operation valid period. The display mode of the effect result of the previously executed frame button operation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

When setting the operation validity period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later to be advanced, the frame button operation effect itself to be executed later may be executed ahead of schedule, or the frame button operation effect to be executed later may be executed earlier. May be used as it is, and the operation valid period set ahead of schedule may be used as the preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when the frame button operation effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as the frame button operation effect to be executed later, the degree of the continuous hit operation may be displayed by executing the continuous hit operation during the preparation period. During the preparation period, the auto-striking function can be set to on.

Further, when a new frame button operation effect is set, the frame button operation effect that is not related to the frame button operation effect that is executed first or the frame button operation effect that is executed later is executed.

As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation valid period set in the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. By doing so, since the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated in the operation of the frame button 22.

As a method of setting the frame button operation effect, a plurality of frame button operation effects may be set when one effect is set, or each effect may be executed in close time. The frame button operation effect may be set. For example, it is expected that this special symbol will be a big hit by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 until the fluctuation of the third symbol based on the fluctuation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach). The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the degree is displayed by the emission color of a decorative lamp provided on the pachinko machine 10, and when a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) is set, the third symbol is a predetermined dynamic. When a pattern to be a display mode (for example, SP reach) is configured to be selectable from a plurality (for example, three) and a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display modes, 2 The interval at which the two frame button operation effects are executed may be set to a predetermined interval.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the operation is not limited to this, and for example, an operation of providing a proximity sensor that can be operated by the player bringing his / her hand close to it. The player can use the means, an operating means that reacts when the player touches it (detects changes in pressure sensitivity and capacitance), an operation that allows the player to tilt back and forth and left and right, and an operating means that can rotate. Any configuration may be used as long as it can be operated. Further, although the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operating means in the above contents, the operating means may be configured by using a plurality of devices.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned controls, a setting method of pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or longer is used as a setting method for automatically operating the operating means, but the setting method is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined method is used. The operation may be set when the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operating means is operated by a predetermined procedure. Further, a dedicated device for automatically switching to the state in which the operating means is operated may be provided.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 218. In the second control example described above, indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the indicators P1 to P5 are displayed. A point effect in which a specific effect (for example, SP reach) is executed when the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX) and a display mode of each indicator are changed in the point effect. The control of the point display for displaying a predetermined value (for example, a point) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the second control example described above will be described. In this third control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed with respect to the second control example. The difference is that the changed point, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the difference between the point effect executed in this control example and the second control example described above will be described. In the second control example described above, there were two types of modes used for the point effect (“normal mode” and “dice mode”), whereas in this control example, there are four types of modes used for the point effect (FIG. 195). It is different in that it is made (see).

Further, in the second control example described above, points are evenly allocated to each indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the "normal mode", whereas in this control example, the "normal mode A" is used. The difference is that the points are distributed differently according to the lottery result of the special symbol for each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in. Further, in this control example, a detailed description is added about the process related to the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram illustrating each mode used for the point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of the present control example is an effect performed while the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the display mode of the indicator is the same as the point effect executed in the second control example described above. It is a production that notifies the player that a privilege (a production with a high expectation of a big hit or a big hit) is given according to the player.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example is composed of four types of modes: "normal mode A", "normal mode B", "dice mode", and "bingo mode". In each of these modes, different indicators are displayed, and at the time of mode transition executed during point production, the indicators are displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator displayed in the mode before the transition. Is configured to. Specifically, it corresponds to the rabbit in the display mode (for example, "normal mode A") in which it is confirmed that the privilege 2 (for example, the effect with high expectation of big hit) is given before the mode shift of the point effect. When the indicator P1 is the maximum value (MAX) display mode), it is confirmed that the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is also given the privilege 2 (effect with high expectation of big hit) (for example, the display mode). In the "dice mode", the display mode indicating doublet) is displayed.

Specifically, it is confirmed that the display mode displayed by the indicator is given in a plurality of stages (privilege 1 display mode (big hit confirmed display mode), privilege 2 display mode (effect with high jackpot expectation is given). Display mode) and high standard display mode (display mode indicating a high standard state to which one of the benefits is given)) are configured so that they can be discriminated and memorized. The display mode corresponding to the stage of the mode is the initial display mode after the mode transition.

With this configuration, if a mode transition occurs during the point production, the player can easily grasp that the benefits acquired in the previous point production have not been lost, and the point production can be performed. By shifting to a different indicator inside, it is possible to diversify the production and prevent the player from getting bored early.

Here, the details of each mode used for the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 (a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode A" used for the point effect in the third control example. This "normal mode A" has the same display mode as the "normal mode" of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the "normal mode" described above will be described. , Other explanations are omitted.

In the "normal mode A", three indicators P1 to P3 are used as in the "normal mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, unlike the second control example described above, the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to the "hero" is set higher than that of the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to the "rabbit" and the "turtle". .. Specifically, the benefits given to the player when the indicator value reaches the maximum (MAX) are different, and the indicator values P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Kame" are different, respectively. When it reaches the maximum (MAX), it notifies that it will shift to the production (main production) with high expectation of big hit as privilege 2, and when the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to "Brave" reaches the maximum (MAX), it will be as privilege 1. , It is configured to notify that the changing special symbol has won the jackpot.

Further, as a display mode (high standard display mode) indicating a high standard state in which the privilege is almost granted, a display mode in which any of the indicators P1 to P3 shows the sixth stage is set. As a result, when the mode is changed when any of the indicators P1 to P3 is the display mode indicating the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode change is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. It will be.

When "normal mode A" is set as the point effect, the effect of displaying "rabbit", "kame", and "hero" is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the content of the main production and the display mode of the indicator in the point production are related to each other, and the main production (third symbol variation production) and the sub production (point production) can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, the "dice mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). FIG. 196 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a “dice mode” used for the point effect in the third control example. This "dice mode" has the same display form as the "dice mode" of the point effect explained in the second control example described above, and here, only the points different from the above-mentioned "dice mode" will be described. Other explanations will be omitted.

In the "dice mode", two indicators P4 and P5 that imitate the dice are used as in the "dice mode" used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, doublet), the player is set to be given a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). .. Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 show the same number (that is, a doublet display mode) is displayed, as a privilege 2, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is given, and the doublet display mode is given. In the case of "6.6", it is notified that the jackpot has been won as privilege 1.

In the "dice mode", the indicators P4 and P5 imitating the dice are rotated and displayed, and when the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotation display. It does not become a display mode showing numbers (that is, a non-doublet display mode), and a rotation display suggesting whether or not the number to be stopped and displayed increases in the doublet display mode is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-doublet display mode from being stopped and displayed after the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed once, so that the privilege given to the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

Further, in the "dice mode", the case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as the high reference display mode. For example, when shifting to the "dice mode" while the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", the indicator P4 The display mode is fixed to "5", and only the indicator P5 is rotated and displayed. As a result, even if the mode shift is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Further, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped and displayed at "5", "5.5" is stopped and displayed when the doublet display mode is displayed. Therefore, after the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed, it can be predicted that the doublet display mode "6.6" that notifies that the jackpot has been won is close, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the "dice mode" is set as the point effect, the effect using the dice is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the content of the main production and the display mode of the indicator in the point production are related to each other, and the main production (third symbol variation production) and the sub production (point production) can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be displayed (executed).

Next, "normal mode B" will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (a). FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode B" used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "normal mode B", one indicator P6 representing the whole as 100% is used, and the display mode of the indicator P6 is a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode indicating 50% or 100%). In some cases, the player is set to be given a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). Specifically, when the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 50% is displayed, the effect with high expectation of a big hit is given as the privilege 2, and the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 100% is displayed. In addition, as privilege 1, it is notified that the jackpot has been won.

Further, in the "normal mode B", a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as a high reference display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to "normal mode B" in the state where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in "normal mode A", the transition is performed after the transition. The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to a display mode showing 40%. As a result, even if the mode shift is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Next, the "bingo mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a “bingo mode” used for the point effect in the third control example. In this "bingo mode", a 9-square indicator P7 with numbers 1 to 9 is used, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point effect is erased (designated). The production is performed. Then, when the display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are aligned in a straight line is displayed, the player is set to be given a privilege (privilege 1 and privilege 2).

Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the indicator P7 has two lines aligned is displayed, as a privilege 2, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is given, and it indicates that the indicator P7 has three or more lines aligned. When the display mode is displayed, it is notified that the jackpot has been won as privilege 1.

Further, in the "bingo mode", a display mode indicating that one line of the indicator P7 is aligned is set as a high standard display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to the "bingo mode" in the state where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "normal mode A", the transition is performed after the transition. The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to a high standard display mode indicating that one line is aligned. As a result, even if the mode shift is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

As described above, the indicators used for the point effect in this control example have different display forms (appearance, number) and display modes (display modes for notifying the player to give a privilege). (P1 to P7) are used, and the effect of the monotonous point effect can be enhanced by shifting the mode during the execution of the point effect.

Further, even if the mode is changed during the point effect, the point effect after the mode change is executed in the display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode change, so that the player can easily understand the point effect. Can be done.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in a predetermined mode (for example, “normal mode A”), the display mode (for example, indicators P1 to P3) indicating a low reference value with a low expectation that the privilege is given is “4. 4.4 ”is the display mode), but by shifting to a different mode (for example,“ dice mode ”) while the display mode is displayed, the player can display the indicator after the mode shift. Is set to display a display mode (for example, a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4") indicating that a privilege (for example, privilege 2) is granted.

In this way, by shifting the display mode of the indicator indicating that the privilege is given to the player to a different mode, the privilege is given from the display mode showing the low reference value with a low expectation that the privilege is given. It is possible to change to a display mode (or a high standard display mode in which a privilege is given with high expectation) without discomfort.

Further, in the final stage of the point production (for example, the state in which the special symbol is changed three times during the point production), the expectation that the display mode is such that the privilege is given in the current mode is low (for example, "normal mode A"). Even if each indicator P1 to P3 is in a display mode showing a low numerical value in the above, a display mode (or a display mode in which the privilege is given from a display mode showing a low reference value with a low expectation that the privilege is given). Since there is a possibility of shifting to the mode shift to the high standard display mode) in which the privilege is given with high expectation, the player can enjoy the production to the end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point effect in this control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to start from "normal mode A", and the mode transition is executed when it is determined as a result of the mode transition lottery executed during the point effect that the mode shift is performed. (Hereinafter, referred to as the first mode transition). In addition to the mode transition determination described above, the mode transition is executed based on the hit / fail determination result and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter, referred to as the second mode transition).

Furthermore, restrictions (that is, prohibition processing) are set for the mode transition destination based on the result of the hit / miss judgment and the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the point effect is reduced by executing the mode transition. It suppresses the occurrence of situations.

First, in "normal mode A", as shown in FIG. 195, "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode" are set as the transition destinations for the first mode transition, and when the mode transition lottery is won. In, it shifts to the mode set as the migration destination. That is, the "normal mode A" set as the first mode when the point effect is executed is set so as to be able to shift to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

Here, in the case of the display mode for notifying that the first mode transition described above is executed and the display mode before the mode transition gives the privilege 2, the display mode after the mode transition also notifies that the privilege 2 is given. When the display mode is displayed in the display mode and the display mode before the mode transition is the display mode showing the high standard (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in the display mode showing the high standard (high standard display mode). Will be done. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed in the middle of the point effect, the player can be easily notified of the status (display mode) of the indicator.

Further, this "normal mode A" is a "dice mode" in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, "4.4.4") in which all the indicators P1 to P3 have the same display mode as the second mode transition. It is configured so that it can be migrated to. In this case, in the "dice mode" after the mode shift, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same roll (that is, doublet) display mode (for example, "3.3"). In this way, by executing both the first mode transition executed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition executed based on the display mode, the mode transition is executed in various situations in the point production. It becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

In "normal mode A", when the transition condition for transition to the first mode and the transition condition for transition to the second mode are satisfied at the same time, the transition to the second mode is preferentially executed. This is because, in contrast to the first mode transition for enhancing the effect, the second mode transition is likely to be set based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the special symbol is won in the "normal mode A", the transition condition for the transition to the second mode is likely to be satisfied. It is configured in. In other words, the state in which the second mode transition condition is satisfied is a state in which a jackpot can be expected. Therefore, by executing the second mode transition condition in preference to the first mode transition condition, the player can win the jackpot. It is possible to perform a mode transition with expectations.

In this way, in the point production where multiple modes can be transferred, the conditions for satisfying the multiple mode transition conditions are set so that the winning expectation of the jackpot is different, and when multiple mode transition conditions are satisfied at the same time, the jackpot is won. By executing the mode transition based on the establishment of the mode transition condition with the higher expectation of winning, it becomes possible to execute the mode transition during the point production as a production in which the player expects a big hit, and the effect of the production is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

Next, when the mode set during the point production is the "dice mode", the "normal mode A" or the "bingo mode" is set as the first mode transition. That is, it is set not to shift from the "dice mode" to the "normal mode B". This is a preset prohibition process, and the first mode is for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to relate the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition to the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition. Even if the transition condition for transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), the mode transition is not set. As a result, even if the mode transition is executed during the point production, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when shifting from "dice mode" to "normal mode A", the "normal mode A" displayed when shifting from "normal mode A" to "dice mode" in this point production The display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 is set so as not to be lower than the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 (the numerical value of each indicator is not lowered). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the display mode of the mode transition destination can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode shift is executed a plurality of times during one point effect and the mode is changed to the initially set mode again. It should be noted that the number of mode transitions executed during one point effect may be limited (for example, once) so that the mode does not shift to the mode already displayed during one point effect.

When "normal mode B" is set, only "normal mode A" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for the first mode transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), and "normal mode A" is set. When the "bingo mode" is set, only the "normal mode B" is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for the first mode transition is satisfied.

As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in this control example is an effect that is easy for the player to understand and has expectations due to a plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes.

In this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and the display mode of the indicator) is set only to "normal mode A", but it may be set in other modes. Good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, or an upper limit (for example, once) may be set for the number of mode transitions executed in one point effect. With this configuration, there is an effect that the effect of mode transition during the point effect can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the display mode of the indicator in the point effect will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of displaying points. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of layers are superimposed and created (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer for displaying a character image of a third symbol variation effect (main effect) among a plurality of layers, and FIG. 198 (b) shows a plurality of layers. Of these, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer for displaying a point image (sub-effect), and FIG. 198 (c) is a composite of a plurality of layers (a layer for displaying a character image and a layer for displaying a point image). It is a schematic diagram which shows the image typically.

As shown in FIG. 198 (a), the layer for displaying the character image is divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small area on which the character is displayed is displayed. (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) and a small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed are determined, and image processing is executed so that the small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed is transparent.

Further, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the layer for displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, similarly to the layer for displaying the character image. It is divided, and a point display process for displaying points for all small areas is executed. In this point display process, by receiving a command indicating the number of points output from the voice lamp control device 113, a point image indicating the corresponding number of points is displayed for all the small areas.

Then, by creating an image of each layer, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), only a small area (Dm11) of the character image in which the character is not displayed is combined with the back surface of the layer displaying the character image. The layer for displaying the point image becomes visible, and the point can be displayed at a position that does not interfere with the character image.

By executing the image creation process described above, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when executing the point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, since there is only one small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, one allowable area in which the point can be displayed, the process of transmitting the small area as it is. However, if there are a plurality of small areas in which the character is not displayed, it is advisable to execute the process of selecting one small area from the small areas. For example, the type of the character image (main effect) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character imitating a brave man as a character associated with the point effect indicator) is determined. It is preferable to select one from the allowable areas adjacent to the small area where Dc1) is displayed (in the case of FIG. 198 (a), the small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, Dm32). As a result, it is possible to execute the point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player who is watching the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

Further, although the point display is made visible to the player by transmitting one of the allowable areas which is a small area in which the character image is not displayed among the layers for displaying the character image, another control method may be used. .. For example, in the image created this time, a small area in which the character is displayed but the character is not displayed later may be determined, and the transparency process may be performed at the timing when the character is no longer displayed in the small area. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time lag between the reception of the command for the point display and the actual display of the points, and the effect of the point display can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the point display is performed based on the movement of the moving character in the third symbol variation effect, the display is related to the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub-effect. The production) can be executed, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

When such a control method is used, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters confront each other is executed, and a ally character (for example, character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. If you do, the points will be displayed, and if the enemy character (for example, character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, the points will not be displayed, or the value will be lower than the points displayed when an ally attacks (numerical value). It is good to display the points (there are few). As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are related to each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

Although the above-described control example is configured to display the same number of points in each small area, different points may be displayed. Further, the point display method described in the second control example described above may be used.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208. First, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205.

FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example has an internal level selection table 222aa, an internal score selection table 222ab, a number of times selection table 222ac, a used score selection table 222ad, and a final, with respect to the ROM 222 in each of the above-mentioned control examples. The difference is that the display mode selection table 222ae, the character selection table 222af, the mode selection table 222ag, and the display form selection table 222ae are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 200A. FIG. 200A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure change is correct, the result of determining whether or not the winning information is currently held and stored, and the value of the effect counter 223f. A table for selecting internal levels. The winning / failing judgment result in the special figure variation this time is judged based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information currently held and stored is output from the main control device 110. Judgment is based on the winning command.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the hit / fail judgment result this time is "hit", the hit / fail judgment result in the hold is "hit", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level is "3". Is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected, the hit / fail judgment result of this time is "hit", and the hit / fail judgment result in the hold is "missing", and the effect is produced. If the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "missing", the result of the hit / fail judgment in the hold is "hit", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected. If it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, the hit / fail judgment result of this time is "missing", and the winning / failing judgment result in the hold is "missing", and the effect counter 223f If the value is "0-149", the internal level "1" is selected, and if the value is "150-198", the internal level "2" is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is set to a high value according to the advantageous state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the game (for example, the state in which the jackpot is won). It is configured in. By providing an index (internal level) according to the game state in this way and executing an effect based on the index, it is easy to set the degree of expectation that the game state will be in an advantageous state for each effect to be executed. be able to.

Next, the details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (b). FIG. 200B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table referred to when selecting an internal score used when executing a point effect based on the internal level and the value of the effect counter 223f. Is.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level is selected. When the value of is "2" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and when the value is "100 to 198", "6" is selected as the internal score. .. Further, when the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal score is "4", and when the value is "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". Is selected.

As described above, in this control example, the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the internal level value set according to the gaming state, so that the player feels expectation. It is possible to perform a point effect that gives.

Next, the number-of-times selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (a). FIG. 201A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), the number-of-time selection table 222ac1 and the number-of-time selection table 222ac2 for hitting are set in the number-of-times selection table 222ac. The number-of-times selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of changes in the special symbol in which the point effect is continuously executed). Different selection tables are referred to depending on the winning / failing judgment result or the winning / failing judgment result for the winning information stored on hold.

FIG. 201 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit count selection table 222ac1. The hit number selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of points effect to be executed when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the point effect ends when the special symbol that hits the hit / fail judgment result changes. The number of point productions is selected. Specifically, if the result of determining whether or not the special symbol change is correct is correct, the number of point effects is "1 time", which is executed after the special symbol change after one rotation (that is, after the end of the special symbol change this time). If the hit / fail judgment result of the hold memory) is a hit, "2 times" is selected as the number of times of the point effect, and if the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol change after 2 rotations is a hit, "3 times" is selected.

In this way, by setting the number of points production based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that becomes a hit is executed, it is possible to suppress that the winning game is started in the middle of the point production, and the point production can be performed. The effect of the production can be enhanced.

FIG. 201 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment number selection table 222ac2. This loss count selection table 222ac2 is executed when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong (that is, when the hit / fail judgment result of this special symbol change is not a hit and the win / fail judgment result corresponding to the winning information stored on hold is not a hit). This is a table for selecting the number of points to be produced, and the number of points to be produced is selected based on the number of winning information held and stored (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved balls).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "0", "-" is set as the number of point effects. This is to prevent the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command to execute the point effect. With such a configuration, the hit / fail judgment result is out of order, and further, it is suppressed that the point effect that can be executed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuations is executed in the state where the number of reserved balls is "0". Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect to be executed. In this control example, the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, and the point effect is not executed when the number of reserved balls is "0". However, other configurations may be used, for example. , The point effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (10%).

When the number of reserved balls is "1", the number of reserved balls is "2", and when the number of reserved balls is "2", the number of reserved balls is "3" and the number of reserved balls is "3". In the case of "", "4" is set as the number of point effects. In this way, by selecting the number of points effect using the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, the point effect when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong and the point effect when the hit / fail judgment result is hit It is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated by the number of points produced.

In this control example, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the number of point effects is selected based on the timing when the special symbol change is executed, and when the hit / miss judgment result is wrong, the hit / fail judgment result is selected. Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the point effect when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, the number of reserved balls may be set as the maximum number of points effect, and the number of times may be selected by lottery within that range. With this configuration, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

Next, the usage score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. 202A. FIG. 202A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the used score selection table 222ad. The used score selection table 222ad is for selecting the score to be used at each time of the point effect, and as shown in FIG. 202 (a), the used score selection table 222ad is the number of points effect (remaining number of times). And the remaining score of the internal score, the score to be used is selected.

Specifically, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "5", the usage score is used. When "2" is selected and the remaining score is "6", "3" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the used score. Further, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "3" and the remaining score is "3", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "4", the usage score is "2". , If the remaining score is "5", "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "6", "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", then "4" is selected. , "-" Is selected as the usage score.

Further, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "3", the usage score is "2". , If the remaining score is "4", the used score is "3", if the remaining score is "5", the used score is "4", and if the remaining score is "6", the used score is used. When "5" is selected as the score and "7" is the remaining score, "-" is selected as the used score. Further, when the counter value of the effect count counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the usage score is "1", and when the remaining score is "2", the usage score is "2". , If the remaining score is "3", "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "4", "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "5", then "4" is selected. If the remaining score is "5" and the remaining score is "6", "6" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", "7" is selected as the used score.

In this way, by selecting the score to be used in the point effect executed during this special symbol change based on the remaining number of points effect and the remaining score, the number of times the point effect continues (the number of changes in the special symbol). ) Is suppressed from being grasped by the player in advance.

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. 202 (b). FIG. 202B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), in the final display mode selection table 222ae, the final first display mode selection table 222ae1, the final second display mode selection table 222ae2, the final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and the final fourth display The aspect selection table 222ae4 is set.

The final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point effect, and when the point effect is executed, the final display mode of each mode is displayed. It is configured to display the final display mode corresponding to the mode selected in advance and set in the final stage of the point effect (variation of the last special symbol in which the point effect is executed).

FIG. 203A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. The final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode A", and is set to the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. , In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.7" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are "4.4". The display mode indicating ".4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.7.7" is selected. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol fluctuation this time is a big hit, is selected, the final display mode is higher in value than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2). The final display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which the score is given has the maximum value is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.6.5" is selected, and ". In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.4" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are "5.4.7". In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the effect is produced. When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "6.3.1" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the indicators P1 to P3 are displayed. The display mode indicating "5.5.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.2" is selected, and "150 to 198". In the case of, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected, and "50" is selected. In the case of "~ 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.5.1" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the indicators P1 to P3 are "5.4.3". In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the degree of change in the display mode of each indicator in the "normal mode A" is made different. This makes it possible to increase the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode in which a specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a high value.

In the point effect of this control example, the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage includes the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, and the number of points used this time. Since the indicator is selected according to the score, the indicator having a high numerical value in the final display mode (the closer the display mode is to the maximum value) tends to increase in value in the middle stage. Therefore, by grasping the rising state of the indicator in the middle stage of the point effect, the final display mode can be predicted, so that the point effect can be continuously watched.

FIG. 203B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "dice mode", and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. The final display mode of each of the indicators P4 and P5 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected, and " In the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4" is selected. A mode is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. That is, when the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is won as a big hit, is selected, it is the display mode of the indicator in which a high value score is given as the final display mode. "6.6" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.3" is selected, and "50 to" In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.2" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 0". In the case of "49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.2" is selected. In the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.4" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicators P4 and P5 are "1.1". The display mode indicating "" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and "50 to 99" are selected. In the case of "", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the combination of the display modes of each indicator in the "dice mode" is doublet according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference whether it is doublet or not.

FIG. 204 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. The final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "normal mode B", and is set to the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "100%" is selected, and "150 to 198" is selected. In the case of "", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected. That is, when the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol variation this time is won as a big hit, is selected, it is the display mode of the indicator in which a high value score is given as the final display mode. "100%" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and "50 to 149" is selected. In the case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "90%" is selected, and the internal score is "5". When the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "50%" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the indicator P6 is "60". The display mode indicating "%" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "70%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the indicator P6 is "80". The display mode indicating "%" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "40%" is selected, and when it is "50 to 99". Is selected, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “50%” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “60%” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”. The display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates "80%" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of the indicator in the "normal mode B" is finally set according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference in how far it rises.

Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. 205. The character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point effect is executed in the "normal mode A", and is made to appear to suggest an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3. It is a table for selecting a character (a mini character for sub-effects (see FIG. 163)).

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", the character is "hero". "Kame" is selected as the character. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when the special symbol change this time is a big hit, is selected, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes, so the character "hero" Is set so that it is easy to select.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 149", as the character. When "Rabbit" is selected and "150 to 198", "Kame" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". Is selected as a character, "Brave" is selected, "Rabbit" is selected as a character in the case of "50 to 99", and "Kame" is selected as a character in the case of "100 to 198".

Further, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and when it is "100 to 198", "Rabbit" is selected as the character. "Kame" is selected.

In this way, by selecting a character suggesting an indicator whose display mode changes from the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the displayed character can be used this time. It is possible to predict whether or not the point effect of is the point effect to be executed when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

If the display mode of the indicator is changed in the middle stage of the point effect in which the "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. There is. As a result, it is possible to associate the display of the character with the change in the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 199. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during the point effect. This mode selection table 222ag is referred to when it is determined in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) that the mode transition flag 223ai is on (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212) (S6406 in FIG. 212).

In this mode selection table 222ag, the mode of the transition destination is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode in which the prohibition is applied is set so as not to be selected as the mode transition destination. As a result, it is possible to prevent mode transition between modes in which it is difficult to find a relationship between the display modes of the indicators displayed corresponding to each mode.

The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode transition destination displayed at the time of mode transition. The display mode selection table 222ah is referred to when the display mode is determined in the display mode selection process (S6408 of FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 of FIG. 213).

In this display form selection table 222ah, whether or not to change the display form to the "high expectation form" is selected based on the internal score set in the current point effect and the value of the effect counter. This "high expectation form" is a display form for notifying the player that the point effect this time is a point effect with a high expectation of a big hit.

Specifically, it is a display form in which the outer shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)". .. It is advisable to set common contents for each indicator (P1 to P7) in this "high expectation form". As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the "highly expected form" is displayed regardless of which mode is used for any point effect.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display form only for the indicator displayed when the mode transition is executed, the player is expected to execute the mode transition during the point production. It has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the RAM 223 in the present control example has an internal level storage area 223aa, a continuous effect start flag 223ab, an effect count counter 223ac, a score information storage area 223ad, and a remaining score with respect to the RAM 223 in the second control example. The difference is that the information storage area 223ae, the display information storage area 223af, the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, the mode information storage area 223ah, the mode transition flag 223ai, and the character information storage area 223aj are added, and the other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter updates the value independently. However, the description thereof is omitted and the effect counter 223f is used as a general term. do. Therefore, even when the process of referring to the value of the effect counter 223f is executed at a plurality of places of one control processing routine, different counter values are actually acquired in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In the internal level storage area 223aa, an internal level determined based on the hit / fail determination result and the internal level selection table 222aa is set in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211). Then, the set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and when the point effect is completed in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210). If determined (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored internal level information is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether the point effect, which is a continuous effect, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point effect is being executed, and when it is off, the point effect is being executed. Indicates that it has not been executed. This continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) from the next time onward, it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) to be executed when the continuous effect is started. (S6301 in FIG. 210), when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), it is set to off (S6313 in FIG. 210).

The effect count counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of continuous effects (point effects) executed this time. The effect count counter 223ac is set with a value corresponding to the determined number of effects in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and is set in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209). Each time the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) to be executed is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the effect count counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when determining whether the point effect is a continuous effect (S2051 in FIG. 209), and the point effect setting process (see FIG. 209). (See FIG. 210), which is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous effect ends (S6307 of FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the score to be used in this variation is determined. (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected in the above-mentioned internal score selection table 222ab and the usage score selected in the above-mentioned use score selection table 222ad. In the score information storage area 223ad, the determined internal score is set in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and is determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). The usage score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score (set) stored in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when the final display mode is determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the character is displayed. It is referred to when determining (S6356 in FIG. 211), and is referred to when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). Further, the used score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when updating the remaining score information in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214). It is referred to when determining the display mode when the value of the effect count counter 223ac is larger than 1 (S6503: No in FIG. 214) (S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the used score already used from the internal score set in the continuous effect (point effect) executed this time. The remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the score to be used in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is completed (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point effect, which is a continuous effect, and the display mode displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is completed (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). The display information storage area 223af is configured so that the display mode for modes other than the currently set mode can be set, and the indicator can be smoothly displayed even when the mode transition is executed during the point production. It is configured so that it can be displayed.

The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect in order to output them to the display control device 114 with one display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag was determined by temporarily storing information regarding the determined display mode (indicator color, pattern, etc.) in the display mode change process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information on the display mode (display mode displayed after the mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and information on the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is temporarily stored (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214) and is referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information on various effects is initialized (S6505 in FIG. 214). S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. In the mode transition process (see FIG. 212), the mode information storage area 223ah is updated with information corresponding to the mode after the transition when the mode transition is performed (S6409 in FIG. 212), and a display background command is set. It is referred to at the time (S6410 in FIG. 212), and is referred to when the display mode is determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point effect is preset to start from the "normal mode A", when the point effect is executed, the information corresponding to the "normal mode A" is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah. Is stored.

The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether the mode transition condition (condition for establishing the first mode transition) is satisfied during the point effect which is a continuous effect, and when it is on, the mode transition condition is satisfied. If it is off, it means that the mode transition condition is not satisfied. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to on (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is a mode transition in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6509: Yes in FIG. 214), and the mode transition is set. In the process (see FIG. 212), it is referred to for determining whether the mode transition condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is turned off when the process related to the mode transition (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed. Set.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in this special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). After that, a lottery for whether or not to execute the mode transition is performed (S6509 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined to execute the mode transition (winning the mode transition lottery) (S6509: Yes in FIG. 214), the mode The transition flag 223ai is set to on. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (S6406 in FIG. 212), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), the processing related to the mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

That is, in the point effect in this control example, the mode is changed when the next special symbol change is executed. Therefore, for example, the lottery for whether or not to execute the mode change is performed this time. By configuring the lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by, the player is made to recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol change, and the mode shifts to the next special symbol change. Can be expected to be executed.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information related to the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in the character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to suggest which of the indicators P1 to P3 the display mode changes in the state where the "normal mode A" is set. Is. In this character information storage area 223aj, information about the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set, and when the display point effect command is set in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). In this control example, only the "normal mode A" is configured to display a character for suggesting whether the display mode of the indicator changes, but whether the display mode of the indicator changes for each mode. The effect suggesting the above may be executed, or the character information may be used to suggest whether or not to shift to the mode. In this case, for example, when a mode other than the "normal mode A" is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect shifts to the "normal mode A".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208, the differences in the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example from the above-described control examples will be described. The same parts as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example generates a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to a point is described on the back side of the image in one frame. It is different in that it is set as. By generating the drawing list in this way, it is possible to create the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 3 in the third control example. In the variation display setting process 3, the processes S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 in the second control example described above.

When the processing of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (0), it is set (S2051: No). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command executes the point effect (S2052). Here, if it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2051, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, when the point effect is already being executed, S2053 is not performed without the process of S2052. Move to the processing of. This prevents a situation in which a new point effect is executed while the point effect is being executed.

Further, in the processing of S2052, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command does not execute the point effect (S2052: No), and when the processing of S2053 is completed, the fluctuation in the second control example described above is performed. Similar to the display setting process 2, the processes S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). The point effect setting process 2 (S2053) is for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. It is a process.

In the point effect setting process 2 (S2053), it is first determined whether or not the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined to be off (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to on (S6302), and the point effect initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the point effect which is the continuous effect has already been executed, so the point effect The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6304.

Here, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) executes the point effect, and various cases where the point effect is executed are executed. This is the process for executing the initial settings.

When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined with reference to the internal level selection table 222aa, and the internal level storage area 223aa is set (S6351). As a result, it is determined whether or not the point effect executed this time is a point effect that leads to the hit of a special symbol.

Next, the internal score used in the point effect executed this time is determined by referring to the internal score selection table 222ab based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa in S6351 and the value of the effect counter 223f. , Set in the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting the final display mode in the point effect and setting the character as described above. It is also used to set the score used each time the special symbol changes while the point effect continues, and to set the remaining score.

When the processing of S6352 is completed, the number of productions of the current point effect is determined based on the number of times selection table 222ac (S6353), and a value corresponding to the determined number of productions is set in the production number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number-of-times selection table 222ac refers to different tables depending on whether the hit / fail determination result is a hit or a miss.

Specifically, when the winning information corresponding to the hold storage executed after three rotations is a hit, the winning number selection table 222ac1 is referred to, and "4" is determined as the number of effects. Then, 4 is set in the effect number counter 223ac as a value corresponding to the effect number "4". The value of the effect count counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is executed, and is decremented until the counter value becomes “0”.

Next, the display mode of each indicator finally displayed in the current point effect is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, and the display information storage area 223af is used. Set (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to the four modes (“normal mode A”, “dice mode”, “normal mode B”, and “bingo mode”) that shift during the point production. Therefore, in this process, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. As a result, it is possible to display an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score regardless of the mode in which the point production ends.

When the processing of S6355 is completed, the character to be used when the mode of the point effect is set to "normal mode A" is determined based on the internal score set by the processing of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and the character information. The storage area is set to 223aj (S6356), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most modes including the final display mode of the point effect executed this time are set. By setting the mode of the point effect in advance in this way, it is possible to advance the mode of the point effect in the middle stage according to the final display mode, and it is a suitable effect that suppresses giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be executed.

In this control example, the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode. For example, the final display mode is set only for the indicators related to the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given. However, the display mode of other indicators may be set at random. As a result, the display mode of each indicator in the point effect can be made more diverse, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In this case, it is advisable to execute the prohibition processing so that the notification of giving the privilege that the randomly set display mode is not actually given is not given. As a result, it is possible to perform a point effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, the internal level is set based on the hit / fail judgment result when the point effect is executed, but the internal level based on the hit / miss judgment result is always set by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It may be. With this configuration, the internal level can be used when setting the production mode of the production other than the point production, and there is an effect that the production corresponding to the game state of the special symbol can be easily set. is there.

Further, in this control example, the winning / failing judgment result is determined by referring not only to the special symbol executed this time but also the winning information stored on hold, but the winning / failing is determined only based on the lottery result of the special symbol executed this time. The determination result may be determined and the internal level may be set.

Return to FIG. 210 to continue the description. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is completed, the mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode transition process (S6304), a process of determining whether to shift to the mode during the point effect and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode is changed are executed.

Here, the mode transition process (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process (S6304). In the point effect in this control example, when it is determined that the mode shifts as a result of a predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214) described later), the mode shift flag 223ai is turned on. It has two mode transition conditions, one is a mode transition to (when set to), and the other is a mode transition based on the set mode, the current display mode, and the number of internal scores.

In this way, by executing the mode transition randomly performed by lottery and the mode transition performed when the mode transition condition (for example, the display mode) is satisfied, the mode executed during the point production is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, when there is a high possibility that the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is doublet in "normal mode A". It is configured to shift to the "dice mode" when getting doublet ("2.2.2" or "4.4.4"). This is a situation in which it is difficult to give benefits that are advantageous to the player in "normal mode A" (for example, notification that a production with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed, notification that a jackpot has been won), that is, , Even if the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 have not reached the maximum value, when the display mode is a predetermined display mode (doublet display mode), a privilege advantageous to the player is likely to be given. This is to make it a state. As a result, even in a situation where the display mode of the indicator is not good in the point production (for example, in the case of "normal mode A", the point is not increased), there is a privilege that the player is advantageous by the mode transition. Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation given, it is possible to entertain the player to the end.

Further, in this control example, when the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 is doublet in the "normal mode A", the privilege that the display mode of the doublet is advantageous to the player is given to the "dice mode". Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode transition.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 212. When the mode transition process (S6304) is executed, first, the mode information currently set is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is "normal mode A". (S6402). When it is determined that the currently set mode is "normal mode A" (S6402: Yes), then the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is "2.2. It is determined whether it is "2" or "4.4.4" (S6403).

In the process of S6403, if it is determined that the current display mode is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is "6" or more. If it is determined (S6404) and it is determined that the score is "6" or more (S6404: Yes), the "dice mode" is set (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, in the process of S6404, if it is determined that the value is not "6" or more ("5" or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to off (S6411), and this process ends. To do.

Further, in the process of S6402, when it is determined that the currently set mode is not "normal mode A" (S6402: No), or in the process of S6403, the current display mode is "2.2.2". If it is determined that it is not "4.4.4" (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

This mode transition flag 223ai is a flag set in the point effect mode setting process (S6305) described later, and when this mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON, the next point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is set. ) In the mode transition process (S6304 in FIG. 212), the mode transition is executed.

If it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, in the process of S6406, if it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to on (set to off) (S6409: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the process of S6407 will be described. In this mode selection table 222ag, the mode of the transition destination is selected based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. Note that this mode transition is provided with a prohibition for limiting the mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, when the "dice mode" is set, the mode is not shifted to the "normal mode B". It is set so that the mode is not changed to the "dice mode" when the "bingo mode" is set.

This prohibition processing is for suppressing the display mode of the indicator from being changed by shifting to the mode during the point effect, which makes the effect difficult for the player to understand. With this configuration, the advantage of mode transition in point production (the point that the player can have expectations until the end of the production by changing the display mode of the indicator according to the mode transition) is utilized. However, it is possible to suppress the demerit (the point that the display mode of the indicator changes based on the mode transition, which makes the effect difficult for the player to understand).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 212. When the process of S6405 or the process of S6407 is completed, the display mode change process (S6408) is executed. This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition.

Next, this display mode change process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode change process (S6408). This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode transition based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition, and the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is predetermined. (A display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given and a display mode that approximates the display mode that notifies the player that the privilege is given), and the determination result The display mode after the mode transition is set based on.

When the display mode change process (S6408) is executed, the display form is first determined based on the display form selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). The display form selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after the mode transition based on the values of the internal score set in the current point effect and the effect counter 223f. As a result, when the mode is changed in the point effect, the player can pay attention not only to the display form of the indicator after the mode change but also to the display form (color, pattern), and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. ..

Further, even when the mode transition is executed at the beginning of the point effect, that is, in a state where the display mode of the indicator is significantly different from the final display mode, the indicator is displayed based on the internal score set in the point effect. Since the display form is set, it is possible to perform an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit.

When the processing of S6451 is completed, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453). This SP reach correspondence is a display mode for notifying that an effect (SP reach) with a high jackpot expectation is executed. Specifically, in the case of "normal mode A", either of the indicators P1 and P2. In the display mode in which the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), in the case of "dice mode", the indicators P4 and P5 are "doublet (excluding 6.6)", and in the case of "normal mode B". In the display mode in which the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", and in the "bingo mode", the indicator P7 is "two lines established".

In the process of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453: Yes), the SP reach compatible display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454). This process ends. That is, when the display mode before the mode transition is the display mode corresponding to SP reach, the display mode after the mode transition is also set to the display mode corresponding to SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege displayed before the mode transition (notification that SP reach is executed) disappears after the mode transition (display mode not compatible with SP reach is displayed), and the player can suppress the situation. It is possible to carry out a suitable production that does not give dissatisfaction to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is not compatible with SP reach (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode corresponding to the high standard. (S6455). As described above, this high standard is not a display mode in which the display mode of the indicator gives a privilege to the player, but is set as a display mode similar to the display mode.

Specifically, in the case of "normal mode A", the display mode of any of the indicators P1 to P3 is "6", and in the case of "dice mode", the number of the indicator P4 is "5". In the display mode, the indicator P6 is “40%” in the case of “normal mode B”.

With this configuration, even if the mode shift occurs during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is significantly different from the display mode of the indicator displayed in the point effect so far. It is possible to suppress the storage.

For example, in the "normal mode A", when the mode transition is executed while the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates "6" is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard, and the mode shifts to the "bingo mode". Is a display mode indicating that the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition is "1 line is established". Therefore, it is possible to execute the point effect after the mode transition while maintaining the expectation that the privilege before the mode transition is given to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 213. In the process of S6455, when it is determined that the current display mode is a display mode indicating a high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag Is set to (S6456), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the current display mode is not a display mode indicating a high standard (S6455: No), a display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the point effect in this control example, when the mode transition is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed, the display for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the mode, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

Further, the display mode similar to the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode indicating the high reference value is displayed. If this is the case, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating a high reference value. Therefore, when the display mode is such that the player is notified that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode transition is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In this control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given, the display mode is memorized so that it can be discriminated between the high standard and the other two stages, but it is divided into three or more stages. The display mode may be stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition and the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the meaning is the same as the display mode before the mode transition. The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode with, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is displayed based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. This makes it possible to raise the expectation of the player to shift to the mode.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 212. When the display mode change process (S6408 in FIG. 213) is completed, the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is then updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is updated. The display background command corresponding to (S6410) is set, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to off (S6411), and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 210 to continue the description. After finishing the mode transition process (S6304), the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed next. This point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator to be changed in the variable display executed this time.

Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point effect mode setting process (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the effect count counter 223ac are used to refer to the used score selection table 222ad this time. The usage score used for the fluctuation of is determined (S6501).

Then, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated based on the determined usage score (S6502). Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the used score used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new remaining score information.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and when it is determined to be 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, when it is the end of the point effect, the display information storage area 223af Based on the final display mode information set in and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, the final display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, a display point effect command is set based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the usage score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set. The display mode this time is determined based on the final display mode and the current display mode, and is set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), then it is determined whether or not the mode transition is executed (S6509), and if it is determined that the mode transition is present (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no mode transition (S6509: No), the above-described processes S6505 and S6506 are executed and the present process is terminated without setting the mode transition flag 223ai to ON.

Return to FIG. 210 to continue the description. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is completed, the value of the effect count counter 223ac is next subtracted by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac after the subtraction is "0" or less. (S6307). If it is determined that the value is not "0" or less (1 or more) (S6307: No), the point effect is continued, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6307 that the value of the effect count counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), the point effect is finished this time, so the score information storage area 223ad is used. Clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa. (S6312), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control 114 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 215) is different from the above-described second control example in that the point effect-related command process is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3. In the command determination process 3, the processes S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

Then, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the display point effect related command has been received (S2637).

In the process of S2637, when it is determined that the display point effect-related command has not been received (S2637: No), various processes described in the above-mentioned control examples are executed as other command processes (S2614). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point effect-related command has been received (S2637: Yes), the point effect-related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

Next, the point effect-related command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 216 (a). FIG. 216 (a) is a flowchart showing the point effect-related command processing (S2638). This point effect-related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands related to the point effect are output from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the point production related command processing (S2638) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a display point command (S6601), and if it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command The process (S6602) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command process (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603), and if it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), the indicator command processing (S6604) is executed and the display indicator is executed. If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the point command processing (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. 216 (b). FIG. 216 (b) is a flowchart showing the point command process (S6602). This point command process (S6602) executes a process corresponding to the point command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and suggests a change in the display mode of each indicator during the point effect (see FIG. 198). ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the point command processing (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. It is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the point command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, the indicator command process (S6604) executed in the point effect-related command process (see FIG. 216 (a)) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). This indicator command process (S6604) executes a process corresponding to the indicator command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, the effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to the display mode information (for example, the display mode and the set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined. The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6751, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. (S6754). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6755), the point command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a modified example of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 described above will be described. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the point display in the third control example. FIG. 218 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a layer displaying a point image (sub-effect) among the plurality of layers in the present modification, and FIG. 218 (b) is a plurality of layers in the present modification. FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image in which layers are combined, and FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (b) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 218 (a), points are set at different display positions (display positions within each small area) in a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) for displaying a character image. Displayable data is stored, and among them, a small area corresponding to the main effect executed this time is set, and a point display process for displaying the points of the set small area is executed. Then, an image obtained by combining the layer for displaying the point image and the layer for displaying the character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 218 (b), in the image in which the two characters (Dc1 and Dc2) displayed in the state where the main effect is started face each other, the points executed in the point display process (displayed in the small area Dm31) are displayed. The points) overlap with the character Dc1, and the display processing is performed so that the display of the points cannot be visually recognized by the player.

After that, the main effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218 (c), when the character Dc1 moves, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player. In this case, as the main effect, a plurality of operation patterns such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) are set from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured so that whether or not the point is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the progress content. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third symbol variation effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub effect, are related to each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

In this control example, a small area for displaying points is specified based on the effect pattern of the main effect. For example, as described above, a plurality of operation patterns (each of a plurality of characters moves) as the main effect. If the pattern) is configured to be configurable, point display may be performed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218 (b), display processing is executed so that the small area Dm31 overlapping the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping the character Dc2 are displayed in advance so that the main effect is produced. The points corresponding to the operation pattern set as may be displayed. In this case, the value of the points (number) displayed when the character Dc1 which is the ally character moves and the value (number) of the points displayed when the character Dc2 which is the enemy character moves are different. It is advisable to execute the display settings in.

With this configuration, it is possible to associate the operation pattern in the main effect with the value of the points to be displayed, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

As described above, in this control example, when each display content of the point effect is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, a display point command and a display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 has been executed, each command is executed when the point display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode of the indicator is changed and displayed. It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

Therefore, when the command related to the display data when the frame button 22 is operated and the command related to the display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output each time, and a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since it is not necessary for the display control device 114 to perform a process such as rewriting the display data, the control load can be reduced.

In this control example, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them are set as common display commands. , The sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to output to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the point effect in the third control example, when the mode transition is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Then, when the mode transition is executed when the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed, the display for notifying the player that the privilege is given is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the mode, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

Further, the display mode similar to the display mode for notifying the player that the privilege is given is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in the state where the display mode indicating the high reference value is displayed. If this is the case, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating a high reference value. Therefore, when the display mode is such that the player is notified that the privilege will be granted soon. Even if the mode transition is executed while paying attention to the point effect while expecting, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, so that the expectation can be maintained.

In this control example, when the display mode is not the display mode for notifying that the privilege is given, the display mode is memorized so that it can be discriminated between the high standard and the other two stages, but it is divided into three or more stages. The display mode may be stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the difference between the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition and the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition.

Further, in this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode corresponding to the high standard or the display mode not reaching the high standard is displayed, the meaning is the same as the display mode before the mode transition. The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode with, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is displayed based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. This makes it possible to raise the expectation of the player to shift to the mode.

Of course, the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example may be used in combination with the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example described above. Four modes may be set as in the third control example, and the configuration of the mode transition process of the present control example may be added, or the method of determining the displayed point in the present control example may be described in the second control described above. As in the example, it may correspond to the display content of the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Further, in the present control example, the configuration for determining the position where the point is displayed may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of effects.

Further, in the "normal mode A", the "privilege 1" given when the indicator P1 becomes MAX and the "privilege 2" given when the indicator P2 or P3 becomes MAX are expected to be big hits. Of the production contents of the third symbol variation production in which is set in stages, it is a privilege to notify that the stage is raised with respect to the production content currently being executed, and "privilege 1" is, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit. It may be a privilege to notify that a plurality of stages (two stages) are increased, and "privilege 2" may be, for example, a privilege to notify that the expectation of a jackpot is increased by one stage.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the expectation for the jackpot different depending on the content of the effect executed in the third symbol variation effect and the timing when the indicator reaches MAX, and the player pays close attention to the effect. It becomes possible to make it. In this case, it is advisable to make the timing when the indicator reaches MAX and the timing when the privilege is given different. As a result, when the indicator is set to MAX and it is confirmed that the privilege will be granted, the player can be made to predict which effect is being executed and the privilege will be granted while playing the game. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. In the first control example described above, it is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) in order to suggest and notify the content of the main effect of the fluctuation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is a sub-effect, has been described. This reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a movement display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, a notification unit Dm4c that suggests and notifies the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. This is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In this fourth control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the first control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the part is changed and the reach navigation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is described in a plurality of patterns. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the reach navigation effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the reach navigation effect. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach navigation effect is executed according to the variation time of the effect (main effect) executed by the predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) among the variation times of the special symbol. It is a sub-effect that allows the player to visually grasp and informs or suggests in stages. In this way, by displaying the content of the main effect (explanation of the effect of the main effect, the fluctuation time, and the expectation of a big hit) executed by the third symbol display device 81 using the sub effect, the player can see it. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In FIG. 219, 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 117 (b)), and it develops into super reach 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 20 seconds after that (that is, 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In addition, it shows the flow of the reach navigation effect when the variation pattern in which the main effect is further developed is selected.

As shown in FIG. 219, for 15 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol fluctuates at high speed) is displayed in the main effect, and then the reach effect (the two third symbols on the left and right are displayed). (The effect of stopping at the same number and changing only the third symbol inside) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, the main effect is a 30-second super reach effect (for example, the fluctuation of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the characters confront each other in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 163)) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, 20 seconds after the start of this super reach effect, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a ally character avoids the attack of the opponent character, or an unusual weapon The timing is set to generate an effect (for example, an effect of attacking the opponent's character using) or an effect indicating that the winning result is out of order (for example, an effect of being attacked by the opponent's character and going down). It is configured to make the player pay close attention to what kind of effect is executed at the timing.

At the timing when this super reach effect is displayed, the reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub effect in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). Since the detailed contents of this reach navigation effect are the same as those of the first control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect pattern of 20 seconds for the first reach navigation effect and 10 seconds for the second reach navigation effect is set, and the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (super reach effect is (Timing 20 seconds after being displayed) is configured to be associated with the timing of switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect.

In this reach navigation effect, similarly to the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above, the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle, and when the character reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, this time. As an effect suggesting that the result of the main effect is a big hit, the character "chance" is displayed, or the index attached to the notification unit Dm4c that is rotated and displayed can be switched (point B and point). C).

Then, when the production branch timing of the super reach effect, which is the main effect, that is, the timing (point D) where 20 seconds have passed since the super reach effect is displayed is reached, the super reach effect continues to develop in the main effect. At the same time, the reach navigation production is switched from the first reach navigation production to the second reach navigation production. At this time, since the second reach navigation effect is set in half the period (10 seconds) with respect to the period of the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), the second navigation effect is the time used in the first navigation effect. It starts from half the point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). Then, among the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) passes through the guidance display unit Dm4e again (point E) through which the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) can pass in the second reach navigation effect, and various types are obtained. The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation effect ends (point F) in accordance with the result display timing of the super reach effect (stop display timing of the third symbol).

In this way, among the third symbol variation effects that notify the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the third symbol, it is a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) with a high expectation of a big hit. By executing the reach navigation effect, which is a sub effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect, the player can visually grasp the progress of the mode of the main effect, and it is possible to notify or suggest in stages. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the content displayed in the small area Dm4 when an example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described. FIG. 220 (a) is a schematic view showing the display contents displayed at the point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect, and FIG. 220 (b) shows the point D shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. FIG. 220 (c) is a schematic view showing the display contents displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. The parts described in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display content of the point C during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. 220 (a). As shown in FIG. 220 (a), in the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit Dm4d, a “chance” with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed and guidance is provided. When passing through the display unit Dm4e, "chance" is not displayed and "x" is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of expectation that the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e have won the jackpot during the reach navigation production, the notification contents of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e and the production of the main production are combined this time. Since the lottery result of the special symbol change can be predicted, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220 (b), the display content of the point D during the first reach navigation effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 220A, the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) starts from a position half of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit Dm4e again during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, by setting the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect to pass the character Dm4b again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display unit without discomfort. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed and a "chance" is displayed. In this way, when switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect, the effect is set so that the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit that passed in the first reach navigation effect again, thereby producing the first reach navigation effect. Because the player will pay attention to the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect will be set so as to pass through the guidance display unit where the highly expected notification (“chance”) was not given. , The effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the same data can be efficiently reused in the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes again may be provided. .. In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the character Dm4b from getting bored early in the game, and the first reach navigation can be suppressed. Suppresses the production that lowers the expectation of the jackpot when the second reach navigation production is started from the position where the guidance display section where the notification (“chance”) with high expectation of the jackpot is given in the production can be passed. can do.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described.

FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example has a second internal level selection table 222ba, an effect scenario storage area 222bb, and an effect scenario selection table 222bc added to the ROM 222 in the first control example. The differences are the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. The second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting the internal level based on the hit / fail determination result of the pachinko machine 10, and is relative to the internal level selection table 222aa used in the above-described third control example. The difference is that the winning / failing determination process based on the winning information stored on hold is not executed.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is "hit" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "2" is selected as the internal level, and when it is "150 to 198". Is selected as the internal level "3". Then, when the hit / fail determination result is "off" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "1" is selected as the internal level, and when it is "150 to 198", it is internal. "2" is selected as the level.

As a result, about 25% of the internal level when the hit / fail judgment result is "hit" is set to "3", about 75% when the hit / fail judgment result is "hit", and when the hit / fail judgment result is "miss". It is possible to set about 25% of the above to "2" and about 75% of the cases where the hit / fail determination result is "missing" to "1". By setting the internal level in this way and executing the effect corresponding to this internal level, it is easier to set a plurality of jackpot expectations for the effect as compared with the case where the effect is executed only corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result. Will be possible.

In this control example, the internal level is set to 3 stages, but the number of internal level stages is not limited to this, and may be set to 4 or more stages. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level in which only about 1% of the case where the hit / fail judgment result is "hit" is set and the effect corresponding to the internal level is executed, it is rarely displayed. The production can be provided to the player. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario storage area 222bb. The effect scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of effect scenarios for the reach navigation effect are stored, and is referred to when selecting the effect scenario in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later. This is the area where the scenario is stored.

As shown in FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb is used as a scenario pattern of the effect scenario as an expectation display that is notified (displayed) by the guidance display Dm4d (first point) and the guidance display unit Dm4e (second point). Both the guidance display unit Dm4d and the guidance display unit Dm4e are used as the return positions of the character Dm4b when the high-expectation "chance" or the low-expectation "x" switches from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. A return position "1" which is a passable position or a return position "2" which is a position where only the guidance display unit Dm4e can pass is set.

Specifically, in scenario 1, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation production, the return position is returned to the return position "1", and the first point "x" is displayed during the second reach navigation production. This is a scenario in which "chance" and the second point "chance" are displayed. In scenario 2, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation production, and the return position is up to "1". Returning, it is a scenario in which the first point "chance" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation production, and in scenario 3, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation production. In this scenario, "x" is displayed, the vehicle returns to the return position "1", and the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, it is easy to facilitate a plurality of scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation effect and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation effect is different, and the scenario is set corresponding to the above-mentioned internal level. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the production according to the jackpot expectation.

Similarly, the display modes shown in FIG. 223 (a) are set for scenarios 4 to 12. The "super" displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation effect of scenario 11 indicates a display in which the expectation of a big hit is much higher than the "chance" display (for example, "super hot"). ..

In this control example, scenarios 1 to 12 are used as the scenario patterns for the reach navigation effect, but more scenarios may be used. Further, the type of the character Dm4b and the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above.

Further, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect to standardize the display data used for the effect, but the display data is standardized by other methods. Also, for example, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect when the second reach navigation effect is started may be displayed side by side. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a according to the moving direction of the character Dm4b, the display area in which the reach navigation effect is executed can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a of one route is used with respect to the moving direction of the character Dm4b, but a time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of routes may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to set the scenario pattern so that the route in which the character Dm4b moves differs between the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect. As a result, the content of the reach navigation effect can be made more diverse.

Next, the effect scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario selection table 222 bc. This effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referred to when selecting an effect scenario in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005 of FIG. 224), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 223 (b), the effect scenario selection table 222bc selects each scenario based on the internal level, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Is set to.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 129", the scenario "5" is selected and " In the case of "130 to 198", the scenario "4" is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "2" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "3" is selected.

Further, when the value of the internal level is "2", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "8" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "10" is selected. If the internal level value is "2", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "9" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "1" is selected.

When the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "7" is selected and the effect counter 223f If the value is "66-198", the scenario "12" is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 65", the scenario "1" is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is "66 to 129", the scenario "6" is selected, and when the value is "130 to 198", the scenario "11" is selected.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the second internal level selection table 222ba described above based on the hit / fail determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. The area. The second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) at the internal level determined in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario (FIG. 224). 224 S2153), it is initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed instead of the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141), and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. The reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is to execute the reach navigation effect, and is an effect mode of the reach navigation effect. Is determined.

When the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the display variation pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. , The variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2151). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the effect of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112). It is a production performed in the central part of (see).

After finishing the processing of S2151, then, the internal level is determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then the internal level and the effect scenario selection table 222bc are displayed. Based on the above, an effect scenario is selected and set in the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

Then, when the process of S2153 is completed, the processes of S2107 and S2108 are executed in the same manner as the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, a modified example of the display mode of the reach navigation effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. 225 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the modified example 1 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 225 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the modified example 2 of the fourth control example, FIG. 226. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a modified example 3 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. FIG. 226 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the modified example 3 of the fourth control example. In addition, this modification 1 to 3 is a modification of the display mode used in the reach navigation effect, and the control content uses the configuration described in the above-mentioned first control example or fourth control example. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225 (a) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a in the second reach navigation effect. By doing so, the display data used for the production can be diverted.

Next, FIG. 225 (b) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the second modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the second reach navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the effect that the character Dm4b continuously moves is executed. .. In this case, the guidance display units Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of places for notifying the expectation of the jackpot increases to four. As a result, a maximum of four "chance" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high will be displayed, and the player can be widely notified of the jackpot expectation.

In this modification, the guidance display units Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. For example, the first reach navigation effect is executed according to the progress of the second reach navigation effect. The character Dm4b may be scrolled and displayed in the moving direction (rightward from the viewpoint of FIG. 225 (b)) so that the area is erased. As a result, the effect of this modification can be executed without expanding the area of the small area Dm4.

Further, in this case, only the display results of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed by the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the guidance display unit Dm4f. And Dm4g may be replaced with the display, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation effect.

Next, FIG. 226 (a) shows the contents of the reach navigation effect of the modification 3 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the reach navigation effect of this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a branched into two paths is used, and the first path and the second path finally reaching the first notification unit Dm4c1. A second path to reach the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Of these, when the character Dm4b moves on the first route, it passes through the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves on the second route, it passes through the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4f on the way. ..

When the reach navigation effect is executed in this modified example, either the first path or the second path is moved in the first navigation effect, and the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2 is reached. Then, it is returned to the return position set at the position before the branch point where the first path and the second path branch, and the second navigation effect is executed.

Then, in the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves on either the route in which the character Dm4b has moved in the first navigation effect or the route in which the character Dm4b has not moved in the first navigation effect. As a result, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display result on the guidance display unit Dm4e that the character Dm4b has passed in the first navigation effect is changed in the second navigation effect. It becomes possible to make it.

Further, when a different route is selected between the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, it is possible to display the display result on the three guide display units Dm4d, dm4e, and Dm4f as the reach navigation effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), as a result of selecting the first route in the first navigation effect, a "chance" for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed in the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. In this state, when the second route is selected as the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route as shown in FIG. 226 (c), and the jackpot expectation is high. A "chance" is displayed to inform you that it is high. If different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation effect is currently in the second navigation effect. "Development" is displayed to indicate that it is inside. This allows the player to easily grasp the current situation.

Further, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, for example, in the first navigation effect, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is "x", the second navigation effect is produced. The display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e may be changed to "chance".

That is, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is "x" in the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect is started from the return position shown in FIG. 226 (b), the player is notified. The effect mode of the second navigation effect is an effect mode in which the same route as the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in which "x" is displayed in the first navigation effect is changed to "chance". In some cases, or when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e remains "x" and the display result of "chance" is displayed on the guidance display unit Dm4f. It is possible to expect both of them.

In this case, it is preferable to set the second navigation effect to be more advantageous to the player if the second navigation effect moves on a different route from the first navigation effect. Specifically, the probability that "chance" is displayed as the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed from "x" to "chance". It is preferable to set it so that the probability that the jackpot is won is higher when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is displayed as "chance" than the guidance display unit Dm4e. As a result, the player can be expected to select a route different from the first navigation effect as the route selected in the second navigation effect, and the reach navigation effect can be continuously watched. It will be possible.

As described above, in the reach navigation effect in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a for guiding the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) routes, and the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) is used. , The route expected by the player can be changed by the second navigation effect.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the path in which the character Dm4b moves by the reach navigation effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this modification, the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position) is described as one place (the position before the route branches), but the return position is the same as in the above-described fourth control example. May be provided in plurality. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guidance display unit Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guidance display unit Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the route (passing guidance display unit) to which the character Dm4b moves in the second navigation effect changes depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) and the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position).

Further, in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two paths, but it may be branched into more (three or more) paths, or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Further, a specific position may be set in the middle of the route in which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another route when passing through the specific position. As a result, the reach navigation effect can be made more versatile.

In addition, in this modification, a plurality of routes are displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach navigation effect is executed. For example, the route in which the character Dm4b moves during the first navigation effect. Only (for example, the first route) is displayed, and a plurality of routes (first route and second route) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. May be good. With this configuration, the player is not notified in advance (during the first navigation effect) what kind of route the second navigation effect will take, so that the player can predict the effect. , The interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the content of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (the effect explanation of the main effect, the fluctuation time, and the expectation of a big hit) is sub-produced. By displaying using, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (the timing 20 seconds after the super reach effect is displayed) is associated with the timing of switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. Of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) that notifies the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the third symbol, a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect) with a high expectation of a big hit. By executing the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect (effect branch timing), which is the main effect (or special reach effect), the player can visually grasp the progress of the mode of the main effect. It becomes possible to notify or suggest in stages, and it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by notifying the degree of expectation that a jackpot is won by a plurality of guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation production, the notification contents of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e and the production of the main production are combined this time. Since the lottery result of the special symbol change can be predicted, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by setting the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect to pass the character Dm4b again in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display unit without discomfort. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect again, the guidance (“chance”) with high expectation is not given in the first reach navigation effect. Since the player pays close attention to the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect is set so as to pass through the display unit again, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes again may be provided. .. In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the character Dm4b from getting bored early in the game, and the first reach navigation can be suppressed. Suppresses the production that lowers the expectation of the jackpot when the second reach navigation production is started from the position where the guidance display section where the notification (“chance”) with high expectation of the jackpot is given in the production can be passed. can do.

Further, since the same data can be efficiently reused in the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as the display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the fifth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. In the second control example described above, as a continuous slot effect, in a slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), a slot that is executed next depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. It was configured so that the production mode of the production was set.

On the other hand, in this control example, detailed control is added for the dynamic display (rotation display) mode and the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. It differs in that.

In this fifth control example, with respect to the second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the part is changed and the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228, a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols in the slot effect can be set, and the types of slot effects to be executed (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened). Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect (slot effect, extension slot effect) and the remaining time of the operation valid period of the frame button 22.

FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of a dynamic display mode of a pseudo symbol in a slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols "A" are stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols inside are dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, when the player presses the frame button 22 and the pseudo symbols "A" on the left, middle, and right are lined up in a row, the pseudo symbol "A" is acquired. As described in the second control example described above, in the continuous slot effect, as a result of executing the slot effect a plurality of times, a plurality of types (3 types) of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" are acquired. In that case, it is notified that the player has won a privilege (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (b) to 227 (e), another example set as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbol can be set, and the pseudo symbol can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes. Therefore, during the slot production for the player. It is possible to urge the frame button 22 to be pressed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the operation effect (slot effect) of operating the frame button 22.

FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic view showing an example in which the number of reels is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), in this control example, as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo symbol used for the slot effect is displayed is set to one can be set. There is. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed in the limited display space.

In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but the number of reels may be reduced from the normal number of reels, and the number of reels may be set to two. Further, in this control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is enlarged and displayed. However, a dynamic display mode in which only the number of reels is reduced without being enlarged may be used. In this case, in the vacant area (the area where the left and right reels are usually displayed), the display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (for example, the timing at which the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row). It is preferable to execute the display or the display of the degree of expectation in which the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row by pressing the frame button 22). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that encourages the player to press the frame button 22.

FIG. 227 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (c), in this control example, among the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, the dynamic display mode for enlarging the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed can be set. doing. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

In this control example, the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed in a larger size than the other symbols so that the player can easily grasp it. However, for example, the other symbols are reduced and displayed relatively. The pseudo symbol "A" may be a dynamic display mode that is easier to see than other symbols. As a result, the pseudo symbol "A" can be easily visually recognized without changing the dynamically displayed area.

FIG. 227 (d) is a schematic view showing an example in which the symbol arrangement of the reels (middle reels) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (d), in this control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, if the symbol arrangement of the reel (middle reel) for displaying the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is different. It is configured so that the dynamic display mode can be set. Specifically, among the dynamically displayed symbols, a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is increased can be set. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

In this control example, the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is increased so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols "A". Besides, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not the target of the stop display this time, that is, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, the pseudo symbols "B" and "C"), the relative The number of pseudo symbols "A" may be increased. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel is reduced, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols that are dynamically displayed (rotated).

FIG. 227 (e) is a schematic view showing an example in which the dynamic display speed (rotation speed) of the reel (middle reel) dynamically displayed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (e), in this control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed. It is configured so that a dynamic display mode in which (rotation speed) is reduced can be set. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be slowed in the vicinity of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and further, the period during which the reel goes around can be shortened.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the reel is rotated by a predetermined number (for example, 2 laps), and thereafter (for example, the 3rd lap) is described above. The dynamic display speed may be slowed down as described above. As a result, the player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (the period during which the reel makes two laps) can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and the frame button. It is possible to encourage the operation of 22.

As described above, in this control example, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol can be displayed in various dynamic display modes, so that the player is motivated. Can operate the frame button 22.

In each of the above-mentioned dynamic display modes, only the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is displayed with a higher brightness than the other symbols, or the display mode is changed to emphasize the edge of the symbol. This may make it easier for the player to understand.

In addition, the frame button 22 is operated even though the number of rotations of the reel has reached a predetermined number (dynamic display as if the reel has rotated a predetermined number of times) or a predetermined period has passed since the slot effect was started. If this is not the case, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. As a result, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Next, the stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, but in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a hit. Is set so that three types of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" can be acquired by multiple slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is determined. In the case of deviation, the number that can be acquired from the three types of pseudo symbols in the multiple slot effects executed in the continuous slot effect is set to be any of 0 to 2.

Therefore, if the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is incorrect, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not stopped and displayed on the line even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. Stop control is performed. Specifically, a symbol different from the pseudo symbol that is the stop display target is set before and after the pseudo symbol that is the stop display target, so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is the stop display target. When the frame button 22 is aimed and operated, the stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed one before or one after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing so, it is possible to display the disengaged stop display mode without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the stop control described above, by changing the start position of the dynamically displayed reels without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels, the player does not feel uncomfortable. The stop control for displaying the off-stop display mode is also feasible. Next, the above-mentioned stop control will be described with reference to FIG. 228.

FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol arrangement and a stop position of a reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in a slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a), a place where a pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is not set as a symbol array (a pseudo symbol not to be stopped and displayed this time is set). The parts that are marked) are a continuous pattern array. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, and one of them is a symbol array in which a pseudo symbol "A" is set (see FIG. 228 (b)).

By using the reels with such a symbol arrangement, the stop control that displays the off stop display mode without giving a sense of discomfort to the player by simply changing the start position and dynamic display speed of the reels in each slot effect is also possible. It is made feasible.

This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228 (b). FIG. 228 (b) is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a). As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in this dynamic display mode, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed this time is set in the array 4 as the symbol array of the reels that are dynamically displayed, and other than that. Is set to a pseudo symbol "-" different from the stop display target this time.

Then, in the dynamic display mode using this reel, the rotation start position 1 where the dynamic display of the reel is started is the arrangement 1 of the symbol array, and the rotation start position 2 which is the arrangement 9 of the symbol arrangement. Is set. Two types of speeds, "high" and "ultra-low", are set as the speeds of the reels that are dynamically displayed. This reel speed "high" is specifically set at a speed at which the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 0.7 seconds, and the reel speed "ultra-low" is concrete. Is set at a speed at which the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 1.2 seconds.

That is, when the slot effect in which the operation valid period (button operation valid period) of the frame button 22 is set to 6 seconds is executed, 9 to 10 symbols move when the reel speed is "high". It becomes an effect, and when the reel speed is "ultra-low", an effect of moving five symbols is executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo symbol that is dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period without changing the symbol arrangement by simply changing the position where the dynamic display of the reel is started or the reel speed. Therefore, it is possible to set various dynamic display modes without increasing the types of symbol data, and it is possible to reduce the amount of production data.

Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b). When the rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that either the reel speed “high” or the reel speed “ultra-low” is set. A dynamic display mode capable of displaying the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed is executed. In this case, the reel speed "ultra-low" (one symbol is displayed) has a longer period in which the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed than the reel speed "high" (the period in which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds). If the period is 1.2 seconds), the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time.

Further, when the rotation start position 2 is set, when the reel speed "high" is set, the symbols dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period are in the range of the array 9 to the array 5, so that the stop display is displayed. It is a dynamic display mode that can display the target pseudo symbol "A", and when the reel speed "ultra-low" is set, the symbols that are dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period are in the range of array 9 to array 2. Therefore, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed in a dynamic display mode.

As a result, if the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is incorrect, the dynamic display in which the reel speed is set to "ultra-low" is started from the rotation start position 2 to execute the dynamic display in which the pseudo symbol "A" is not displayed. It becomes possible to do. Further, when executing such stop control, it is preferable that the symbols set other than the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target are the same symbol. As a result, whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in the slot effect this time is the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed is set to other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the dynamic display contents of the symbol.

Further, when the reel speed is "ultra-low" and the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed (a dynamic display mode (). Dynamic display mode (advantageous to the player), and when the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed (disadvantageous to the player). Dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or unfavorable to the player simply by grasping the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reel is started in the slot effect. Can be prevented.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.

FIG. 229 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example differs from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cc, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. The display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the reels of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are stored, and is described in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the display mode to be selected is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, a plurality of display modes (display modes 1 to 9) having different rotation speeds (dynamic display speeds) and symbol arrangements are stored in the display mode storage area 222ca as dynamic display modes in the slot effect. Has been done. As a result, when the continuous slot effect is executed in this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns as the dynamic display mode executed in each slot effect.

This rotation speed indicates the period during which the symbol being dynamically displayed is displayed in the display area where the slot effect is displayed. In this control example, when the rotation speed is "high", one symbol is for 0.7 seconds. It is set to be displayed. Further, when the rotation speed is "low", one symbol is set to be displayed for one second. Further, at the rotation speed "ultra-low", the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the rotation speed of the reel in three stages in this way, in the dynamic display of each slot effect, it is possible to set a dynamic display in which the player can easily discriminate the pseudo symbol and a dynamic display in which it is difficult to discriminate. It will be possible. Therefore, different effects can be executed even in the dynamic display mode using the same symbol arrangement.

Further, by providing the reel rotation speed in three stages, it is possible to make the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect different. For example, when the period of one slot effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 6 seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed "high", and the rotation speed " At "low", 6 pseudo symbols can be displayed, and at the rotation speed "ultra-low", 5 pseudo symbols can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol that is the stop display mode of this time is displayed depending on the rotation speed of the reel.

Specifically, in the display mode 1, a pseudo symbol whose rotation speed is "high" and whose symbol arrangement is a stop display target (indicated by a "circle" in FIG. 230) and a pseudo symbol which is not a stop display target. (Indicated by "x" in FIG. 230) are set to be displayed alternately, and in the display mode 2, the rotation speed is "low" and the same symbol arrangement as in the display mode 1 is set. Is to be done.

The display mode 3 has the same rotation speed as the display mode 1, and the pseudo symbol (displayed with a “circle” in FIG. 230) whose symbol arrangement is the stop display target is not a stop display target (pseudo symbol). In FIG. 230, two "x" (indicated by "x") are set to be displayed side by side, and further, the pseudo symbol (indicated by "star" in FIG. 230) to be stopped and displayed is emphasized (enlarged, It is set to be displayed by emitting light, etc.). In the display mode 4, the rotation speed is "low", and the same symbol arrangement as in the display mode 3 is set.

In the display mode 5, the rotation speed is "ultra-low", and the pseudo symbol of the stop display target is displayed in the array 4 as the symbol array, and the pseudo symbol other than the stop display target is displayed in the other arrays. In the display mode 6, the rotation speed is "ultra-low", the pseudo symbol of the stop display target is displayed in the array 11 as the symbol array, and the other arrays are the pseudo symbols other than the stop display target. Is set to be displayed.

It should be noted that the display mode 5 and the display mode 6 use the same symbol sequence data, and are display modes in which the positions at which the dynamic display is started are different. That is, in the display mode 6, the dynamic display is started from the sequence 5 shown in the display mode 5. The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described with reference to FIG. 228 described above is executed.

In the display mode 7, the rotation speed changes in the middle, the rotation speed is "low" during the period when the arrangements 1 to 6 of the symbol array are displayed, and the rotation speed is low during the period when the arrangements 7 to 11 are displayed. It becomes "high", and as a symbol array, pseudo symbols that are not stop display targets and pseudo symbols that are stop display targets are displayed alternately in arrays 1 to 6, and pseudo symbols that are not stop display targets are displayed in arrays 7 to 11. It is set to be displayed.

In this way, the rotation speed is slowed down in the range (arrays 1 to 6) where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed, and the rotation speed is set to the range (arrays 7 to 11) where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed. By increasing the speed, the speed of the dynamic display can be changed to attract the player's interest, and by lengthening the period during which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed, the player is enthusiastic. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In addition, since the rotation speed is increased in the range (arrangement 7 to 11) where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is not displayed, it is possible to shorten the period of one revolution of the reel, and one slot effect period (arrangement 7 to 11). The range (array 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed can be dynamically displayed multiple times during the period (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), and the player can enthusiastically display the frame. The button 22 can be operated.

In the display mode 8, the rotation speed changes as the symbol arrangement goes around, and the rotation speed becomes "high" in the first lap and "low" in the second and subsequent laps, which is the same as the display mode 7. The display mode is set to be displayed, and in the display mode 9, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is highlighted by rotating the symbol array, and the rotation speed is "high" in the first lap. It is set to display the pseudo symbol "star mark" emphasizing the pseudo symbol "A" to be stopped and displayed in the second and subsequent laps, which is the same symbol arrangement as the display mode 7.

In this control example, the above-mentioned nine types of display modes (display modes 1 to 9) can be set as the dynamic display modes executed in the slot effect, but the types of display modes are this. It is not limited to, and more display modes may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cc. The display mode selection table 222cc is a table that is referred to when selecting a dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is described in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 231 (a), the display mode selection table 222cc has a hit display mode selection table 222cc1 and a disengagement display mode selection table 222cc2, and the display mode selection table 222cc has a special symbol. Based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected.

In this way, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol. Therefore, by grasping the effect content of the continuous slot effect, the special symbol can be a big hit. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not he has won.

FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit display mode selection table 222cc1. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f by the hit display mode selection table 222cb1. The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 1" as the normal slot effect, and "display" as the first shortened slot effect. In "Aspect 2", when "Display mode 2" is set as the second shortened slot effect and "Display mode 2" is set as the extension slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", it is set as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1" is "display mode 2" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 2" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 4" as a second shortened slot effect, and "display" as an extension slot effect. When "Aspect 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "Display mode 1" is used as the first slot effect, "Display mode 8" is used as the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is used. When "display mode 4" is set as "display mode 5" as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 5" is set as the extension slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as the effect, "display mode 9" as the normal slot effect, "display mode 4" as the first shortened slot effect, and "display mode 7" as the second shortened slot effect, as the extension slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

FIG. 231 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the disengagement display mode selection table 222cc2. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f by the disengagement display mode selection table 222cb2. The display mode of (slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" as the first slot effect, "display mode 1" as the normal slot effect, and "display" as the first shortened slot effect. When "Aspect 1" is set as "Display mode 2" as the second shortened slot effect and "Display mode 2" is set as the extension slot effect and the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", it is set as the first slot effect. "Display mode 1" is "display mode 2" as a normal slot effect, "display mode 2" as a first shortened slot effect, "display mode 4" as a second shortened slot effect, and "display" as an extension slot effect. When "Aspect 4" is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "Display mode 1" is used as the first slot effect, "Display mode 2" is used as the normal slot effect, and the first shortened slot effect is used. When "display mode 7" is set as "display mode 6" as the second shortened slot effect, and "display mode 6" is set as the extension slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" as the effect, "display mode 4" as the normal slot effect, "display mode 8" as the first shortened slot effect, and "display mode 9" as the second shortened slot effect, as the extension slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

As described above, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all the slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effect, in the continuous slot effect. Regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect to be executed, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. The stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting the stop mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and the slot effect is provided in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. If it is determined (S2034: Yes in FIG. 233), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 232 (a), the stop mode selection table 222cc for hitting and the stop mode selection table for disengagement 222cc2 are set in the stop mode selection table 222cc, and the table corresponds to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct. The stop mode is selected with reference to.

FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hit stop mode selection table 222cc1. The hit stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting stop patterns having different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "2" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "0" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "2" is set, and the number of established symbols "2" is set as an extension slot effect.

Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "2" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "1" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "1" is set, and the number of established symbols "1" is set as an extension slot effect.

In this way, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. As a result, the player is notified that he / she has won the prize.

Further, in this control example, since a plurality of stop patterns of each slot effect are provided when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the current continuous slot effect is hit when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit during the execution of the continuous slot effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is aware of whether or not the continuous slot effect has been executed.

FIG. 232 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2. The disengagement stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting stop patterns having different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "0" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "0" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "0" is set, and the number of established symbols "0" is set as an extension slot effect.

Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of established symbols "1" as the first slot effect, the number of established symbols "0" as the normal slot effect, and the number of established symbols "1" as the first shortened slot effect are as the second shortened slot effect. The number of established symbols "0" is set, and the number of established symbols "0" is set as an extension slot effect.

As described above, in this control example, regardless of whether the hit / fail judgment result is a hit or a miss, the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect has the same stop mode, so that the continuous slot effect starts. Immediately after the game is played (at the end of the first slot effect), the player knows whether or not the continuous slot effect this time is a continuous slot effect executed when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. Can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cc are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cc described above. In the display mode storage area 223ca, the selected display mode is set in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) (S2071 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is set. Information regarding the display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238) and is stored when the continuous slot effect is completed. Is initialized.

The stop mode storage area 223 cc is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the stop mode selection table 222 cc described above. The display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set in the stop mode storage area 223cc (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is set. A display mode that is referred to when setting a command (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851, S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238) and is stored when the continuous slot effect is completed. Information about is initialized.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-mentioned second control example in that the variation display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 233. In the variation display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

When the process of S2006 is completed, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is displayed based on the display mode selection table 222 kb. It is selected and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

When the processing of S2071 is completed, the stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222 cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223 cc (S2072). Then, in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, the processes of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to 2011 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 234 to 238, various processing during the production of the slot effect processing (see FIG. 174) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. Will be explained.

First, the process 2 during the initial slot effect will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first slot effect processing 2. When the process 2 during the initial slot effect is executed, the processes S4701 to S4707 are executed in the same manner as the process during the initial slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. Then, when the processing of S4707 is completed, next, a display slot stop effect command for the set stop mode is set (S4751), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is issued. Set (S4752), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even when it is determined that the current button press valid period is not (S4701: No), S4710 is the same as the process during the initial slot effect (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. ~ S4712 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal slot effect processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal slot effect processing 2. When the normal slot effect during process 2 is executed, the processes S4801 to S4803 are executed in the same manner as the normal slot effect process (see FIG. 176) in the second control example described above, and the slot effect counter is executed in the process of S4803. When it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is waited for end. The state is set (S4807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. (S4852), and the slot effect state is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809).

When the process of S4809 is completed, next, a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second shortened slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this process is terminated.

Next, the first shortened slot effect processing 2 (S4608) will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608). When the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 are the same as in the first shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above. Execute the processing of.

After finishing the processing of S4904, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223 cab is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223 ca is set. The corresponding display slot effect command is set (S4952), and this process ends.

Next, the second shortened slot effect processing 2 (S4610) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610) is executed, first, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed in the same manner as in the second shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above. When the processing of S5002 is completed, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223 cab is set (S5051), and the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223 ca is supported. The display slot effect command to be displayed is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and this process is terminated.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension slot effect processing 2 (S4612). When the extension slot effect during process 2 (S4612) is executed, the processes of S5101 and S5102 are executed in the same manner as the extension slot effect process (see FIG. 179) in the second control example described above, and then the stop mode is stored. A display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223 cab is set (S5151), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223 ca is set (S5152). ), Set the slot effect state to the end waiting state (S5104), and end this process.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol is displayed in various dynamic display modes. Since it is configured so that it can be displayed with, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Further, even during one slot production, the dynamic display mode is changed when a predetermined condition (the number of laps of the symbol array displayed on the reel or the lapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied, so that the player can use it. On the other hand, the operating means (frame button 22) can be operated more enthusiastically.

As a plurality of dynamic display modes, the number of reels to be dynamically displayed may be changed. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed in the limited display space. Further, the size of the pseudo symbol may be changed. As a result, the player can easily grasp the portion where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically pressed.

In this case, the pseudo symbol to be relatively stopped and displayed may be a dynamic display mode that is easier to see than the other symbol by reducing the display of the other symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize a predetermined pseudo pattern without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. As a result, the player can easily grasp the predetermined symbol. Further, by reducing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not stop display targets), the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased. In this case, since it is possible to reduce the total number of dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols that are dynamically displayed.

Further, as a dynamic display mode, the symbol arrangement of the reels that are dynamically displayed may be changed to set a range in which predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) are concentrated.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed in the slot effect can be changed. As a result, it is possible to set a dynamic display in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is easy to grasp and a dynamic display in which it is difficult to grasp even if the symbol arrangement is the same. Can be executed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be slowed within the range in which a predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is displayed, and may be increased in other cases. As a result, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time without changing the period for displaying the predetermined symbol arrangement.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the reels to be dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the number of reels reaches a predetermined number (for example, two laps), and thereafter (for example, the third lap) is dynamically displayed as described above. You may try to slow it down. As a result, the player who has not operated the operating means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (the period during which the reel makes two rounds) can easily grasp the predetermined pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed). It is possible to urge the operation means (frame button 22) to be operated.

Further, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the effect content of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect Based on this, it is possible to predict the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not. Therefore, there is an effect that the production content of the continuous slot production can be interested.

In this control example, each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect) that may be executed in the continuous slot effect is dynamically performed in advance. Since it is configured to set the display mode, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed regardless of the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. Can be done.

Further, in this control example, the same stop mode is obtained in the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect regardless of whether the hit / fail judgment result is a hit or a miss. Therefore, immediately after the continuous slot effect is started (first time). (At the end of the slot effect), it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the continuous slot effect this time is a continuous slot effect executed when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. ..

In this control example, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are preset, but when the slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is determined. (When the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect), the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode of the slot effect may be set.

Further, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the initial slot effect is being executed are also at the same timing as the other slot effects. You may set it.

<6th control example>
Next, the sixth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. This control example is a detailed explanation of the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above. The combined pressing effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the compound pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the compound effect executed based on a plurality of special symbol variations are configured to be executed. It differs in that. Further, a detailed explanation is added about the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the compound pressing effect executed based on one special symbol variation and the executed pressing effect.

In this sixth control example, with respect to the second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. It differs from the point where the part was changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 239, a rear image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic view showing an example (“mountain” stage) of the rear image data stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. 239 (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example (“sea” stage) of rear image data stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

In this control example, the stage shown in FIGS. 239 (a) and 239 (b) can be selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241. During a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change of the special symbol, a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set, and the game is played during that period. When a person operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is switched.

Further, in this control example, the effect corresponding to the displayed stage is executed. Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 during the period during which the stage can be changed (for example, 5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started) to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute a new effect, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the combined pressing effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of the combined pressing effect in this control example. In the combined pressing effect of this control example, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals with respect to the parts overlapping with the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol change is executed. Period is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous striking effect is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation 1 (60s) is 12 seconds remaining to the time when the remaining 2 seconds is left.

When the player executes a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the number of repeated hits is 50 times or more) on the frame button 22 during this continuous hitting effect, the background (stage) executed in the next special symbol variation is set. It is configured so that the operation mode to be changed is changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 (b) and 241 (c).

FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode in which the background of the special symbol change being executed can be changed as the background change operation mode, and FIG. 241 (c) is executed as the background change operation mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation mode which can change the background of the next special symbol variation. First, in FIG. 241 (b), a rear image corresponding to the currently selected background (“sea” stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub display area Ds is small. Stages (“sea” stage and “mountain” stage) that can be selected as the background selection screen are displayed in the area Ds2, and the currently selected stage is displayed larger than the unselected stage.

Then, below the main display area Dm, "The background changes by pressing a button" is displayed as a background change notification display for notifying the player that the current period is a period in which the background can be changed, and next to it. , A display imitating a "button" indicating that the current operation is valid for the frame button 22 is displayed.

As a result, the player can easily grasp that the background can be changed, and the player can select an arbitrary background.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, an effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the end of the special symbol change (for example, 5 seconds until the end of the special symbol change) (for example, a continuous hit effect). May be executed. In this case, as a result of the player enthusiastically operating the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is operated even after the next special symbol change is started, and the background is unintentionally changed in the next special symbol change. There was a problem that it would end up.

If this problem occurs, for example, in a state where an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations is executed, the player cannot see the effect that the player was looking forward to. There was a risk of dissatisfaction with the player.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to prevent the above-mentioned problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol change ends) is performed (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol change ends). When it is determined that the continuous striking operation) has been executed, the background change operation mode executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode.

Here, the above-mentioned specific background change operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). As shown in FIG. 241 (c), this specific background change operation mode is different from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241 (b), and even if the frame button 22 is operated, the special symbol change currently being executed is caused. It is configured so that the background does not change until it finishes. Below the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Select the background of the next change by pressing a button" is displayed as a display for notifying the player that the current is a specific background change operation mode. It is displayed, and in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the selection content indicating the background to be displayed in the next variation is displayed.

In this way, the situation in which the player is dissatisfied by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change. Can be suppressed from occurring.

In this control example, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been executed for the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special symbol change ends, the frame button 22 is executed in the next special symbol change. Although the operation mode of the effect of operating (hereinafter, referred to as a frame button operation effect) is changed, other configurations may be used.

For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol change exceeds a predetermined number of times, the mode of the frame button operation effect in the next special symbol change may be changed, or this time. The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol change of 1 and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the mode of the later frame button operation effect may be changed based on the determination that the operation content of the previously executed frame button operation effect is the predetermined operation content.

Further, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed. It is configured so that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only when the above-mentioned problem can actually occur, but it is not limited to this, and it is executed in this special symbol change. Based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds), the next It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation. As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being executed for the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol change is incorrect even though the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol change from starting and unintentional background change being executed while the is being operated (pressed) multiple times.

As described above, in this control example, a plurality of frame button operation effects (repeated hitting effect of special symbol variation 1 and background change effect of special symbol variation 2 in FIG. 240) executed across a plurality of special symbol variations are used. On the other hand, the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation content during the frame button operation effect to be executed before.

In addition, as in the case of the second control example described above, the frame button operation effect executed before is being performed for the plurality of frame button operation effects (composite press effect) executed during one special symbol change. It is configured so that the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation content.

Returning to FIG. 240, the combined pressing effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a compound pressing effect in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed is executed. This composite pressing effect is the same as the combined pressing effect executed in the second control example described above (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect in each frame button operation effect executed in the compound pressing effect will be described with reference to FIG. 242.

FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the compound pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the compound pressing effect is executed, the pressing effect 1 is first executed. Similar to the second control example described above, this pressing effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 (after the effect period is 12 seconds and the operation valid period is 5 seconds after the start of the effect). 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157 (b)).

During the pressing effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (a timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation valid period). As the determination content, based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (operation 3), and when the number of repeated hits is small (50 times or less), "weak continuous hit" and the repeated hits are determined. The automatic continuous striking function is executed by the "strong continuous striking" that is determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) and the operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more in the pressing effect 1. "Long press" determined to be, "No operation" determined when the frame button 22 is to be operated even once during the pressing effect 1, and an unnecessary frame button operation is executed for the pressing effect 1. It is determined to be in five types of "other operations" that are determined to be present.

Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1, the mode of the pressing effect 2 which is the frame button operation effect to be executed next is set. Specifically, when the pressing effect 1 is determined to be "weak continuous hitting", the pressing effect 2 is set to "timing pressing effect" (see FIG. 158 (a)), and when it is determined to be "strong continuous hitting". Is set to "continuous hitting effect" (see FIG. 243 (a)) in the pressing effect 2, and when it is determined to be "long press", "timing release effect" (see FIG. 158 (b)) is set. When it is determined that there is no operation, the "timing pressing effect" is set in the pressing effect 2 as in the case where it is determined as "weak continuous hitting" described above, and when it is determined that there is "other operation", pressing is performed. A “timing push effect (difficulty)” (see FIG. 243 (b)), which increases the success difficulty of the above-mentioned “timing push effect”, is set in the effect 2.

In this way, by setting the mode of the pressing effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the pressing effect 1, for example, the frame button exceeds a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the pressing effect 1. A player who has pressed 22 (a player who is good at continuous striking operation) can be enthusiastically participated in the frame button operation effect by continuously executing the effect of repeatedly striking the frame button 22.

In addition, for a player who is executing the automatic continuous striking function in the pressing effect 1 (a player in a state where the frame button 22 is continuously pressed), an effect of releasing the button instead of pressing the button is performed. By executing, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the current button operation state (state in which the button is pressed), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the effect.

Further, as a penalty, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the press effect 2 to succeed for the player who is performing an unnecessary frame button operation for the press effect 1.

Then, when the pressing effect 2 is completed, the continuous hitting effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the operation valid period is 5 seconds from the start of the effect) is executed in the same manner as the combined pressing effect of the second control example described above (FIG. 159 (b). )), The compound pressing effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), the continuous striking effect of the pressing effect 2 executed when it is determined to be "strong continuous striking" in the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed by the press effect 2 in the combined press effect. The same elements as those of the compound pressing effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243 (a), when the continuous striking effect is started by the pressing effect 2, "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment column, and it is suggested that the display mode of the meter display unit D1 changes. "Maybe the meter may penetrate !?" is displayed. Further, a "continuous hit" indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is a continuous hit effect is displayed between the meter display unit D1 and the small area Dm5.

In the continuous hitting effect executed by the pressing effect 2, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is set based on the game result of the combined pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol, as in the pressing effect 2 of the second control example described above. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159 (a)), and specifically, when the number of times the frame button is pressed exceeds 20 times during the period (3 seconds) in which the pressing effect 2 is executed. The display of the meter display unit D1 changes based on the result of determining whether or not the special symbol that satisfies the operating conditions and the compound pressing effect is executed. For example, if the special symbol wins the jackpot as a result of the winning / failing judgment, and the special symbol wins the jackpot in the winning information stored on hold, the meter display is shown in FIG. 159 (a). The meter of part D1 is extended.

In this way, for the player who has executed a sufficient continuous striking operation in the pressing effect 1, the continuous striking operation can be continuously executed in the pressing effect 2, and further, the continuous striking operation is executed based on the continuous continuous striking operation. Since the effect mode is different between the pressing effect 1 and the pressing effect 2, the player can be enthusiastically operated on the desired frame button 22.

In this control example, the effect mode is changed based on the number of repeated hit operations on the frame button 22, but for example, the number of repeated hits (operation conditions) for which the effect mode is changed is set to a plurality of operation conditions. It may be configured to be decided by lottery. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation conditions in the pressing effect this time, so that the frame button operation can be positively executed until the end.

The timing pressing effect (difficulty) of the pressing effect 2 executed when it is determined to be "other operation" in the pressing effect 1 of FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed by the press effect 2 in the combined press effect. The same elements as those of the compound pressing effect of the second control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the timing push effect (difficulty) is the display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge with respect to the timing push effect (see FIG. 158 (a)) of the second control example described above. The difference is that the position is different and the moving body D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the success difficulty (difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the center of the target Db3) with respect to the normal timing pressing effect. This makes it difficult for a player who does not intentionally participate in the compound pressing effect to succeed in the timing pressing effect (difficult to satisfy the operating conditions), and the effect displayed when the operating conditions are satisfied (special). It is possible to make it difficult to execute (the effect of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol).

The method of increasing the difficulty of success is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, while the timing pressing effect is being executed, the target Db3 is moved at high speed in the timing gauge to make the pressing timing difficult to understand. , The display of the target Db3 may be temporarily erased, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or contracted to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

Further, as a condition for setting the timing pressing effect (difficulty), the operation determination result and the pressing effect 2 are started other than the case where the operation determination result in the pressing effect 1 is determined to be "other operation". When the operation status is different from that at the time, for example, in the pressing effect 1, the frame button 22 is pressed when the pressing effect 2 is executed even though "long press" is set as the operation determination result. The timing push effect (difficulty) may be set even when it is determined that there is no such effect.

Further, in this control example, the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is executed for the player who is determined not to intentionally participate in the compound pressing effect. For example, the operation content for the frame button 22 in the pressing effect 1 is executed when the operation content is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the number of repeated hits is 7), and the timing pressing effect (difficulty) is successful. In some cases (when the operation conditions are met), a player who notifies the lottery result of a special symbol, displays a specific effect (image or video), or provides information that the player can accumulate. It may be configured to give a privilege that is advantageous to the user.

<About the electrical configuration in the 6th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 244, in the RAM 223 in this control example, a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a checking flag 223dc, and a press count counter 223dd are added to the RAM 223 in each of the above-mentioned control examples. It differs in that it is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, "sea" stage, "mountain" stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22. This background information storage area 223da is used when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation valid period, which is the operation period in which the background can be changed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). , Background information based on the operation content is stored, and when the checking flag 223dc is set to ON in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is used for display based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation. When it is on, it indicates that the frame button 22 is operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the frame button 22 is operated. Indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. When it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) that the operation change flag 223bad is input to the frame button within 5 seconds (valid period before the end) until the special symbol change ends (valid period before the end) ( It is set to on (S6810: Yes) in FIG. 247 (S6811 in FIG. 247).

Then, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that the first frame button operation is valid (S6802: Yes in FIG. 247), and the checking flag 223dc is set to off. If determined (S6803: Yes in FIG. 247), it is set to off (S6805 in FIG. 247).

The checking flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether or not an effect of changing the background of the next change (see FIG. 241 (c)) is being executed as a background change effect, and when it is on, the background of the next change is changed. Indicates that the effect to be performed is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the effect of changing the background of the next fluctuation is not being executed. This checking flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804 in FIG. 247). In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when the display background command is set (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to off after the display background command is set (S2083).

The pressing count counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of operations of the frame button 22 executed during the pressing effect 1 of the combined pressing effect. When it is determined in the auto pressing effect setting process 2 that the pressing effect 1 is being performed (normally being pressed), the pressing number counter 223dd is added one by one (S4510 in FIG. 246) and pressed. It is referred to when determining whether the number of times pressed during the effect 1 has reached the predetermined number of times (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246), and when it is determined that the number of times the button has been pressed has reached the predetermined number of times (50 times) (FIG. 246 S4552: Yes), the value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Further, although not shown, the value of the counter is initialized to 0 even at the timing when the pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp device 113 in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. In this control example, for the second control example described above, the variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the automatic pressing effect setting process (FIG. 173). The difference is that the auto-press effect setting process (see FIG. 246) is executed instead of (see), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 247) is explained in detail, and other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When this variation display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and then various processes are executed. The variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed based on the acquired fluctuation pattern are set. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to 2033 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

After finishing the processing of S2040, it is next determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and when it is determined to be set to ON (that is, during the previous special symbol change). (When the effect of changing the background is executed by the next special symbol change) (S2081: Yes), the display background command is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da (S2081: Yes). S2082).

Then, the checking flag 223dc is set to off (S2083), and then the processes S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. End the process.

With this configuration, the third special symbol change is started at the timing when the next special symbol change is started, based on the information in which the background of the next special symbol change is set (information set in the background information storage area 223 da). The background (“sea” stage, “mountain” stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

Next, the automatic pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the auto pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410). This auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is a case where the auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is normally pressed (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246) with respect to the auto-pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. The processing content is different.

When the auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed in the same manner as the auto-pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S4510 that the normal pressing period is reached (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246), a display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing count counter 223dd is added by 1. (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and if the value of the press count counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552: No in FIG. 246). ), This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4522, when the value of the pressing count counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552: Yes in FIG. 246), the pressing effect scenario is then changed to non-automatic pressing 2 (4553), and the pressing count is changed. The value of the counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this process is terminated.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1707) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. In that case (S6801: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), then the current is the first frame button operation valid period, which is the period in which the background can be selected. (S6802). In the process of S6802, when it is determined that the first frame button operation valid period is (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S6803), and it is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no flag (set to off) (S6803: No), then it is determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to on (S6804).

If it is determined in the processing of S6804 that the operation change flag 223db is set to on (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to off (S6805), and the checking flag 233dc is set to on. (S6806), the process proceeds to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processes of S6804 to S6806 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6807.

In the process of S6807, it is determined whether the confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation is an operation of the frame button 22 while the effect of setting the background of the next fluctuation is being executed, and it is said that there is a confirmation operation (the frame button 22 is operated) in the process of S6807. If it is determined (S6807), the information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this process is terminated.

Here, the process of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). If the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background of the next fluctuation is being executed, the display is switched to the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. The enlarged background display (“sea” or “mountain”) in this small area Ds2 becomes the background to be shifted when the next fluctuation is started. That is, in the processing of S6808, when the confirmation operation is executed once for the background information currently set (in the current fluctuation) (the "mountain" stage in FIG. 241 (c)), the transition is made in the next fluctuation. The background information corresponding to the "sea" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background to be used, and when the confirmation operation is executed twice, the background information corresponding to the "mountain" stage is used as the background to be transferred in the next fluctuation. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 247. In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag is not set on (set to off) (S6804: No), it is for display corresponding to the next background of the currently set background. A background command is set (S6809), and this process ends.

The process of S6809 is in a state where both the operation change flag 223db and the checking flag 223dc are set to off during the first frame button operation valid period, that is, a normal background change effect (FIG. 241 (b)). This process is executed when (see) is executed, and the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

In the process of S6802, if it is determined that the current period is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the period before the end (S6810). The pre-end period is a period indicating that the remaining period until the end of the special symbol variation is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and when it is determined that it is not the pre-end period (S6810: No). ), When this process is terminated and it is determined that the period is before the end (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, a continuous striking operation) is performed during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends). ) Is executed, the background change operation mode executed in the next special symbol change is changed to a specific background change operation mode, which causes dissatisfaction to the player. Can be suppressed from occurring.

Further, by changing the mode of the effect using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change, a situation occurs in which the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to suppress this.

It should be noted that the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in this special symbol change and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol variation based on the setting in. As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination means determines that a predetermined operation is being executed for the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. As a result, for example, when it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol change is incorrect even though the frame button operation effect is not executed, the player regrets the frame button 22. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol change from starting and unintentional background change being executed while the is being operated (pressed) multiple times.

In this control example, when the pressing effect 1 of the compound pressing effect is determined to be "long press", the timing release effect is executed in the pressing effect 2, but for example, the player. May be configured so that all of the combined pressing effects can be executed while the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. The effect executed by the pressing effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the pressing effect 2 executed when the operation determination timing of the pressing effect 1 determines “long press” as the combined pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player presses and holds the frame button 22 and reaches the operation determination point while the auto continuous hitting function is being executed in the pressing effect 1, "auto timing is set by pressing and holding the button" in the comment column. "Masu" is displayed, and next to it, a schematic diagram imitating a timing gauge and an expectation level indicating the rate at which timing is set are displayed.

In this case, during the pressing effect 1, the operation timing of the timing pressing effect is changed in the timing gauge displayed in the comment column while the effect of raising the meter of the meter display unit D1 is executed by executing the automatic continuous striking function. The lottery effect is executed.

Then, the auto timing is set in the period until the pressing effect 2 is started, and in the timing pressing effect (see FIG. 158 (a)) executed in the pressing effect 2, the frame button 22 is operated at the set auto timing. The same effect as when it was done is executed. With this configuration, the player can execute the continuous hitting effect and the timing pressing effect simply by continuously pressing (holding down) the frame button 22.

In the above-mentioned example, the degree of expectation for which the auto timing is set may be set randomly or may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the degree of expectation may or may not be notified to the player. Further, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (until the pressing effect 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance. May be good.

For example, two timings for determining the operation content of the pressing effect 1 are provided, and when it is determined that "long press" is performed at the earlier determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed and before the subsequent determination timing. The auto timing setting result may be notified to the player. With this configuration, if the auto timing setting content is bad, the operation content can be changed (for example, a continuous striking operation) from there, and a normal timing pressing effect can be executed as the pressing effect 2.

<7th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. In the seventh control example, when the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at a short interval (10 seconds in this control example) with respect to the second control example described above, the interval (10 seconds). In this control example, it is configured to execute an additional effect for 10 seconds). Specifically, when the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) is started after the pressing effect (first pressing effect) is completed and a short interval (for example, 10 seconds) is opened, 1 It is configured to execute an additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 between the second pressing effect and the second pressing effect. As a result, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect.

Here, when the first pressing effect is completed, the second pressing effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) even though the player releases the frame button 22. , The player has to move his hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may make it impossible to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect. Therefore, it is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the second pressing effect is completed, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the flow in which the additional effect is set in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing a flow in which additional effects are set. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a plurality of operation effects are performed by the third symbol variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (The effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is configured to be configurable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for the special symbol variation 1 (special symbol variation with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is changed to the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts). The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the period of ~ 30 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the special symbol fluctuation), and the third fluctuation pattern (the special symbol fluctuation It is configured so that the third symbol variation effect is set separately for the variation pattern) corresponding to the period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start.

Here, in recent years, in order to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage, it is required to increase the types of the effect patterns of the third symbol variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Was there. Therefore, the applicant divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into a plurality of periods as in the control example, and creates a series of effect patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period. I thought about the process to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to create the same type of effect pattern with a smaller amount of data than when each series of effect patterns is stored. Therefore, a larger amount of effect patterns can be created by using the same amount of data when a series of effect patterns are stored, the amount of data used for the third symbol variation effect can be reduced, and other effects (for example, an accessory) can be created. It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, privilege effects displayed during jackpots, etc., and it is possible to set various effects within the limited data capacity, allowing players to set various effects. It had the effect of suppressing early boredom of the game.

However, when creating a series of effect patterns by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, when an operation effect is set in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each of the continuous variation patterns. was there. Furthermore, among the continuous fluctuation patterns, the operation effect is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation pattern that is executed first. When the operation effect is executed in the first half of the variation pattern to be executed next, an effect pattern in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is created.

Further, by setting a long period of the operation effect executed in at least one variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns, the period in which the player is enthusiastically played the game is continued, and the player can play the game. It is conceivable to suppress getting bored early, but when such a configuration is used, it becomes easy to create an effect pattern in which a plurality of operation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Met.

As described above, this control example solves a problem that occurs when a process capable of creating a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is executed.

In the first variation pattern, the operation effect for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 (“variation B”) is performed, and in the second variation pattern, the operation effect is 25 seconds (“SP2”). However, in the third variation pattern, an operation effect (“SSP2”) having an operation validity period of 10 seconds can be set.

Specifically, the "variation B" that can be set as the first fluctuation pattern has an operation valid period (10 seconds) 17 seconds after the first fluctuation pattern is started (after the special symbol fluctuation is started). It is set, and the operation valid period ends after 3 seconds. In the third symbol display device 81, after the third symbol fluctuates at high speed in the first 17 seconds and the left and right third symbols stop at the same number, the operation effect suggests the expectation of a big hit ( The operation valid period (10 seconds) is executed, and the effect of notifying the player of the result of the operation effect to the player is executed in the remaining 3 seconds.

"SP2", which can be set as the second fluctuation pattern, is the operation effect to be executed next for 3 seconds after the end of the first fluctuation pattern (after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the special symbol fluctuation). A display explaining the effect content of the operation valid period (23 seconds) is executed, and then the operation valid period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation valid period ends after 4 seconds. In this "SP2", the operation valid period is set as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variable (color change, (Changes in comments, etc.), the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be changed (color change, brightness change, change in presence / absence of lighting), or a drive provided in the pachinko machine 10. The drive mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change in presence / absence of drive, change in drive speed, change in drive range). Therefore, the player changes various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period of time (23 seconds in this control example).

"SSP2", which can be set as the third fluctuation pattern, is the operation effect to be executed next for 4 seconds after the end of the second fluctuation pattern (60 seconds after the start of the special symbol fluctuation). A display explaining the effect content of the operation valid period (10 seconds) is executed, then the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and 16 seconds after the operation valid period elapses, that is, after the special symbol change is started. It ends after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during the operation valid period is executed. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the special symbol is the period during which the operation valid period is not set (from 15 seconds after the start of the third variation pattern to the end). Period) is used.

Then, when "fluctuation B" is set in the first fluctuation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second fluctuation pattern, the operation validity period set in "variation B" and "SP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid period and the operation validity period is 6 seconds. This 6-second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed. When "SP2" is set in the second fluctuation pattern and "SSP2" is set in the third fluctuation pattern, the operation validity period set in "SP2" and "SSP2" are set. The interval between the operation valid period is 8 seconds. This 8 second interval is the interval at which the additional effect can be executed.

Then, the remaining period until the operation valid period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "variation B" is set to "SP2" is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (10 seconds) set in "variation B" is within 4 seconds, the additional effect is executed. It will be. Further, the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is set to "SSP2", and the remaining period until the operation valid period (10 seconds) is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (25 seconds) set in "SP2" is within 2 seconds, the additional effect is executed. Become.

In this way, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set are executed, additional effects are added based on the operation content (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated) of the previously executed operation effect. By using the configuration for determining whether to execute, the problem when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set is executed (that is, the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of not operating the frame button 22 are repeated in a short period of time. As a result, the operational burden on the player increases, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player cannot concentrate on the game).

As described above, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set are executed, the operation content of the operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 is operated) to be executed before is executed. ) Is used to determine whether to execute the additional effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of operation effects for which the operation validity period is set are set at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the additional effect may be executed at a predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251 the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an operation effect when "SP2" is set as the second fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 250 (b) is a diagram between "SP2" and "SSP2". FIG. 250 (c) is a schematic view showing an example of a normal display in which the "additional effect" is not executed during the period in which the set "additional effect" can be executed, and FIG. 250 (c) shows the case where "SSP2" is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation effect in.

As shown in FIG. 250 (a), during "SP2", the valid period notification unit S1 (a diagram imitating the frame button) that notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is set. The period display unit M1 indicating the operation valid period in "SP2" is displayed, and the remaining period (a in the figure) of the operation valid period is displayed by the period display unit M1. Then, in the comment column, the characters "press the button" that urge the player to operate the frame button 22 are displayed.

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the character "chance" is displayed in the comment column as the operation result as shown in FIG. 250 (b). Since the timing shown in FIG. 250 (b) is the timing when the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), the valid period notification unit S1 and the period display unit M1 display. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), "SSP2" is started, and the valid period notification unit S1 (a diagram imitating the frame button) notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is reached. ) And the period display unit M2 indicating the operation valid period in "SSP2" are displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display unit M2. In addition, the characters "continuous hit" indicating the operation content in "SSP2" and the characters "set the meter to MAX" indicating the effect content are displayed.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (c), when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is in the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). Since the display of the valid period notification unit S1 for notifying the fact, the display of the period display unit M2 indicating the operation valid period, and the display for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 are not performed, the player once The operation of the frame button 22 will be stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250 (c) is displayed. If such a display (directing) is executed in a short period of time, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the motivation for playing the game is reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-mentioned problem occurs by executing the additional effects during the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). It is restrained from being lost. Next, the display (effect) content of the additional effect will be described with reference to FIG. 251.

FIG. 251 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. , FIG. 251 (c) is a schematic diagram showing a further different example displayed as an additional effect in this control example.

In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), with respect to the display content shown in FIG. 250 (b), an additional valid period notification unit Sa for notifying the operation valid period set by the additional effect, and an addition indicating the additional operation valid period. The difference is that the period display unit Ma is displayed, and the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation valid period is displayed by the additional period display unit Ma. By executing the additional effect in this way, the operation valid period of "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250 (a)), and then the operation valid period of "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250 (c)). ), Since it is possible to continuously notify the player that the operation is valid for the period up to), the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and the motivation for playing is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (a), the display mode (display form and display position) of the additional valid period notification unit Sa for notifying the operation valid period is the same as the display mode of the valid period notification unit S1 or S2. , It does not give a sense of discomfort to the fact that the additional effect is being executed. Further, as an additional effect, the player operates the frame button 22 to display the additional comment for the comment displayed by the operation effect of "SP2". Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The displayed effect (operation effect) does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), only the additional period display unit Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation validity period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 (b) and 251 (c).

FIG. 251 (b) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of “SP2” shown in FIG. 250 (a) is continuously (extended) displayed. As shown in FIG. 251 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the period display unit M1 indicating the operation valid period of "SP2" is displayed in a state where there is no remaining period, and next to it ( The additional period display unit Ma is displayed on the left side in FIG. 251 (b). As a result, when the remaining period a decreases in "SP2" (moves to the left side of the period display unit M1) and the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, an additional effect is produced. When it is started, the additional period display unit Ma can be displayed, and it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the operation effect executed by the additional effect is an extension of the operation effect of "SP2". ..

Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also added because the effect of rewriting (updating) the characters of "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" is executed. It is possible to recognize that the operation effect executed by the effect is an extension of the operation effect of "SP2".

FIG. 251 (c) shows the display content when the additional effect is set so that the display content of “SSP2” shown in FIG. 250 (c) is displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251 (c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display unit M2 indicating an operation valid period of "SSP2" is displayed, and next to it (from the viewpoint of FIG. 251 (b)). The additional period display unit Ma is displayed on the right side). As a result, the remaining period b decreases in the additional effect (moves to the left side of the period display unit Ma), and when the remaining period disappears (when the operation valid period ends), that is, of "SSP2". When the operation valid period is started, the remaining period of the period display unit M2 can be displayed so as to decrease, and the operation effect executed by the additional effect is the operation of "SSP2" for the player. It is possible to recognize that the production is being executed in advance.

Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also an effect in which the display form of the meter, which is increased by the operation effect of "SSP2", is changed (for example, the color of the meter is changed or the effect around the meter is changed. By making it variable, an effect that suggests that the meter becomes MAX in the operation effect of "SSP2") is executed, so that the additional effect and the operation effect of "SSP2" are more related to each other. Can be recognized as.

<About the electrical configuration of the 7th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from the second control example described above, and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that the content of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

FIG. 252 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting a detailed variation pattern according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110. Has been done. Specifically, the first variation for selecting the effect mode (first variation pattern) for the period of 30 seconds from the start of the variation (that is, the period from 0 second to 30 seconds after the start of the variation). The pattern selection table 222a1, the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the effect mode (second fluctuation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation. A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the effect mode (third variation pattern) for the period until the elapse has elapsed, and an additional effect selection table 222a4 for determining the effect mode of the additional effect are provided.

In this control example, the first to third fluctuation patterns and additional effects are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the main control device 110, and the fluctuation patterns are combined. Perform one variation effect based on. For example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and one fluctuation is made based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Perform the production. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the main control device 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and the second fluctuation is selected from the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. A pattern is selected, a third variation pattern is selected from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, an additional effect is selected from the additional effect selection table 222a4, and one based on the selected first to third variation patterns and the additional effect. Perform a variable effect of.

Although not shown, when a fluctuation time other than the above-mentioned fluctuation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time is displayed. Will be selected. For example, when the short deviation (variation time 7 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in which the variation pattern of 7 seconds is defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 252 (b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of the variation) will be described. FIG. 252 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252 (b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from 0 second to 30 seconds from the start of the variation) corresponds to the value of the first effect counter 223f1. Is stipulated.

Specifically, the variation A, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the first effect counter 223f1. Although not shown, a plurality of types of effect modes of variation A are defined, and variation A is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variation A, so that the player's interest can be improved.

With respect to the value "100 to 198" of the first effect counter 223f1, the variation B, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. Although not shown, a plurality of types of the effect mode of the variation B are defined as in the variation A, and the variation B is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variation B can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from the start of the variation to 31 seconds to 60 seconds) will be described. FIG. 252 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252 (c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the effect mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the variation is defined corresponding to the value of the second effect counter 223f2. There is.

Specifically, the variable SP1 which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the second effect counter 223f2. As with the variation A, the variation SP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variable SP1 can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

With respect to the value "100 to 198" of the second effect counter 223f2, the variable SP2, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. As with the variation B, the variation SP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variable SP2 can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (the effect mode in the period from the start of the variation to 61 seconds to 90 seconds) will be described. FIG. 252 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252 (d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the effect mode from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of the variation is defined corresponding to the value of the third effect counter 223f3. There is.

Specifically, the variable SSP1 is defined as an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed for the value "0 to 99" of the third effect counter 223f3. As with the variation A, the variable SSP1 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, the variation of the effect mode of the variable SSP1 can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

For the value "100 to 198" of the third effect counter 223f3, the variable SSP2, which is an effect mode in which the pressing effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined. As with the variation B, the variable SSP2 also defines a plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect is executed in any one of the effect modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the variable SSP2, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Although the details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. By these independent counters, each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern with a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern with a period of 31 to 60 seconds, period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) is used as a detailed fluctuation pattern. Since the effect mode in the third variation pattern) is selected, the variation of the effect mode can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

Here, in each fluctuation period (first fluctuation pattern having a period of 0 to 30 seconds, second fluctuation pattern having a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and a third fluctuation pattern having a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds). When the pressing effect of pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, when the pressing effect is executed in the period of 0 to 30 seconds and the period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, the pressing effect executed first. If the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in (pressing effect executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds), the pressing effect (a period of 31 to 60 seconds) is performed with a short interval after pressing the frame button 22. The pressing effect) is executed. In this case, even though the frame button 22 has been pressed in the first pressing effect and the hand is released from the frame button 22, the second pressing effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, the player moves his / her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may make it impossible to concentrate on the game.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variable effect and the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow, the first pressing effect ends. During the period from the later to the start of the next (second) pressing effect, an additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is selected and executed. As a result, the pressing effect or the additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect to the end of the second pressing effect, so that the second pressing effect can be performed. It is sufficient to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the end, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

Here, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

The additional effect selection table 222a4 is used to select an additional effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first pressing effect when the pressing effect is continuously executed in the above-mentioned one variation effect. It is a table of.

As shown in FIG. 253, an additional effect is defined when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect are a specific combination (when the pressing effect is continuous). When the frame button 22 is pressed late in the first pressed effect among the continuous pressed effects, the period from the end of the first pressed effect to the start of the next pressed effect. The specified additional effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation patterns (first to third fluctuation patterns) of each fluctuation period in one fluctuation production do not form a specific combination (when the pressing effects are not continuous), the additional effects are not specified and are added. No production is performed.

Specifically, first, a case where the first fluctuation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (no pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (no pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (that is, 60). The pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect regardless of whether the variation effect is completed in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)". Since there is no additional effect, no additional effect is specified and no additional effect is executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (without pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" and "variation SSP1". (No pressing effect) ”, since the pressing effect is not continuously executed in one variable effect, no additional effect is specified. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so that the additional effect 2 is added. It is stipulated.

If this additional effect 2 is specified, the additional effect 2 will be executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the pressing effect executed in the second variation pattern. Since the additional effect 2 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player can continue to use the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. The operation can be executed.

Next, a case where the first fluctuation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (without pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (that is, 60). The pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect regardless of whether the variation effect is completed in seconds), "variation SSP1 (without pressing effect)", or "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)". Since there is no additional effect, no additional effect is specified and no additional effect is executed.

When the first variation pattern is "variation B (with pressing effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP2 (with pressing effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" and "variation SSP1". In either case of "(without pressing effect)" or "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern. Additional effect 1 is specified.

Further, if the third variation pattern is "variable SSP2 (with pressing effect)", the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern. Therefore, in this case, , In addition to the additional effect 1, the additional effect 2 is specified.

If the additional effect 1 is specified, the additional effect 1 is executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the pressing effect executed in the first variation pattern. Since the additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player continues to use the frame button 22 until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed. The operation can be executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the second control example described above in that the content of the effect counter 223f is changed and that the validity period storage area 223ea is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is used to select the first fluctuation counter 223f1 used to select the first fluctuation pattern described above, the second fluctuation counter 223f2 used to select the second fluctuation pattern, and the third fluctuation pattern. A hanging third fluctuation counter 223f3 is provided (see FIG. 254 (b)).

The valid period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not the effect is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (that is, the period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is valid), and is a frame. The period during which the button 22 is effective is set by the value of the elapsed time (ms) from the start of the variation effect. This valid period storage area 223ea is used for the pressing effect to be executed when the variation pattern command for executing the pressing effect is set in the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031: Yes in FIG. 256). The period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257), when an additional effect is set (S6854: Yes in FIG. 257), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 according to the additional effect becomes effective. Is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). Although not shown, the contents of the valid period storage area 223ea are cleared when one variation effect is completed.

Next, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the second control example described above in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

The additional effect data storage area 233n is an area for storing the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. The additional effect data storage area 233n is set to the received command when it is determined in the variation pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes). Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when the execution of the additional effect is determined at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is on), the data is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. The effect data is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the additional effect is executed.

The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined. If it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined, and it is turned off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 has not been decided. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to on when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command processing (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6903). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1, it is referred to (S3851: Yes) (S3852), and the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is turned on. When the determination is made (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined. If it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined, and it is turned off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has not been decided. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to on when the additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6902). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2, it is referred to (S3855: Yes) (S3856), and the value of the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is turned on. When the determination is made (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. In this control example, for the second control example described above, the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the frame button input monitoring -The difference is that the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed instead of the effect process (see S1707 of FIG. 137), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 256. In the variation display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, when a variation pattern in which the pressing effect is executed is set for the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above (S2031). : Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid according to the pressing effect to be executed is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In this seventh control example, the pressing effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed, and the processing corresponding to those effects is not executed. However, the pressing effect in the second control example is not executed. , Slot effect, and point effect may be executed, and processing corresponding to those effects may be executed. As a result, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the variation display setting process 6 (S1712), first, the processes S2001 to S2003 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (that is, the variation pattern received from the main control device 110) is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a (first variation pattern selection table 222a1 to third variation pattern selection table). The selection is made based on 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and a display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

When the processing of S2006 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S2031. In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is to execute the pressing effect (S2031: Yes), each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091 is selected. The operation valid period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the valid period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute the pressing effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process of S2007 Move to processing.

When the processing of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processing of S2007 to S2011 is executed as in the second control example, and this processing is completed.

Next, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 257. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707), the frame button pressing command is set based on the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period of the frame button 22. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period of the pressing effect, the period until the next pressing effect is started is determined, and the period until the next pressing effect is started is short. When it is determined (10 seconds or less in this control example), an additional effect command is set to execute the additional effect.

Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the valid period storage area 223ea, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid (frame button operation valid). It is determined whether or not it is a period) (S6851). If it is determined in the process of S6851 that the frame button operation is not valid (S6851: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6851 when it is determined that the frame button operation valid period is (S6851: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801).

If it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6801: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the processing of S6801 (S6801: Yes), the display frame button pressing command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to S6853. Transition. The display frame button pressing command set in the process of S6852 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display frame button pressing command, the display control device 114 determines a period in which the command is set (for example, a pressing effect period in the second variation pattern) from the received command, and produces an effect according to the period (for example, the period of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). For example, the comment display effect (see FIG. 250 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S6852 is completed, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853). In the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is not the period in which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6853, when it is determined that the current period is the period during which the pressing effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in order to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, S6854 Move to processing.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less. In the process of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), an additional effect command for display is issued in order to execute the additional effect. After setting (S6855), the valid period storage area 223ea is updated (S6856) based on the pressing valid period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processes of S6855 and S6856 are skipped and this process is performed. To finish.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 260. In this control example, the command determination process 4 (FIG. 258) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) for the second control example described above, and the variation pattern command process (FIG. 146). The point that the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 259 (a)) is executed instead of (see (a)), the point that the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) is added, and the pointer update process. The difference is that the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the command determination process 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 258. In the command determination process 4 (S2502) in this control example, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) is replaced with the variation pattern command for the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above. The difference is that the process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) is executed and the additional effect command process (see FIG. S259 (b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

In the command determination process 4 (S2502), first, the processes S2601 to S2604 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example. If it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command in the process of S2604 (S2605: Yes), the variation pattern command process 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (a). In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) in this control example, when there is additional effect data for the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) in the second control example described above, additional effect data is added. The difference is that the data is stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

In the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751). When additional effect data is set as the variation pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when the pressing effect is continuously set (selected) in the first variation pattern to the third variation pattern. Is.

In the processing of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes), the additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to additional effect 1 or additional effect 2) is input. , It is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process proceeds to S2701.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751 when it is determined that the received variation pattern command does not have additional effect data (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2701.

When the process shifts to the process of S2701, the processes of S2701 to S2706 are executed and the main process is terminated in the same manner as in the second control example described above.

In this way, when a variation pattern command that may execute an additional effect is received, the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n in advance. When executing (displaying) an additional effect, the additional effect can be executed (displayed) without delay. Not limited to this, the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect may be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n only when the additional effect is executed. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to store the effect data in the additional effect data storage area 233n, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example.

In the process of S2612, if it is determined that the error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not the additional effect command has been received (S2639). If it is determined that the additional effect command has been received in the process of S2639 (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (b). This additional effect command process (S2640) is a process executed when an additional effect command indicating execution of the additional effect is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901).

In the process of S6901, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and this process is performed. To finish. As described above, the additional effect 1 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern.

By setting the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 to ON by the process of S6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to be (displayed).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this process is terminated. .. As described above, the additional effect 2 is an additional effect executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern.

By setting the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 to ON by the process of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed at the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to be displayed).

Returning to FIG. 258, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2639 that the additional effect command has not been received (S2639: No), the process of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Next, the details of the pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 260. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined for the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the second control example described above, and the update timing of the additional effect (in each variation pattern). The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the pressing effect), and the other points are the same.

In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), first, the pointer 233f is added by 1 (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether or not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern) is determined (S3851). ).

In the process of S3851, when it is determined that the update timing of the additional effect 1 is (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). In the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case when the additional effect 1 is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed early or is not pressed). Or, the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), the additional effect 1 is executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). Since it takes less than 10 seconds to start), the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to off. (S3854), this process is terminated.

In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten with the area in the display data table buffer 233d in which the display data executed one second later is stored as the head. As a result, the additional effect 1 can be executed (displayed) from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (1 second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the pressing effect, and may be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed according to the change.

When it is determined in the process of S3851 that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern). Whether or not it is determined (S3855).

In the process of S3855, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the case when the additional effect 2 is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed early or is not pressed). Or, the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), the additional effect 2 is executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). Since it takes less than 10 seconds to start), the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to off. (S3858), this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S3855 that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the processes of S3802 to S3806 are executed and the present process is terminated in the same manner as in the second control example described above.

In this way, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect is overwritten (updated) in advance in the display data table buffer at the update timing of each additional effect. The production can be executed (displayed) without delay. Not limited to this, it is of course possible to update the display data table buffer at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed. The data table buffer 233d may be overwritten (updated).

Further, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of each additional effect, and then whether or not the additional effect is executed (whether or not the additional effect flag is on) is determined. It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the additional effect is executed (that is, when the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect. As a result, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is the update timing of the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed with a predetermined interval, an additional effect is set for the interval between them, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, a plurality of operation effects can be continuously performed by performing processing so as to delay the start timing of the operation effect to be executed first by a predetermined interval. It may be executed, or may be configured to perform the process so that the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later is advanced by a predetermined interval.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting an additional effect between the plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned additional effect after the end of the operation effect to be executed later, or to set a long period of the effect for displaying the result of the operation effect.

<Modified example of the 7th control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. In the above-described seventh control example, a case where a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol change effect executed for one special symbol change has been described, but in this modified example, continuous special symbol changes are performed. A case where a plurality of operation effects are set so as to straddle will be described. The same elements as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, a flow in which the additional effect in this modification is set will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing a flow in which additional effects are set across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set for a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the special symbol change is started. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22.

Then, when the first fluctuation pattern "variation A" and the second fluctuation pattern "SP2" are set as the fluctuation patterns of the special symbol fluctuation 1 (60 seconds) (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is 27. The operation effect is executed in a period of 2 to 4 seconds (23 seconds). In the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), since the end of the special symbol variation is the end timing of the second variation pattern "SP2", the end timing of the operation valid period of the "SP2" in the special symbol variation 1 and the special symbol variation The period between the start timing of the operation valid period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

Even in this 5 seconds, the same control as in the 7th control example described above is executed, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display contents of the additional effect 3 displayed in this modification will be described.

FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining the display contents of the additional effects when a plurality of operation effects are set across continuous special symbol fluctuations, and FIG. 262 (a) is an example of the display contents in the normal background change effect period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. FIG. 262 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262 (c) shows the display contents in the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), in this modified example, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed as in the sixth control example described above. Since the display content is the same as FIG. 241 (b) of the sixth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), an additional validity period notification unit Sa that notifies the validity period set by the additional effect 3 and an additional period display indicating the additional operation validity period are displayed. Part Ma is displayed, and the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation valid period is displayed by the additional period display unit Ma. Then, the characters "Get a new background with MAX" explaining the content of the game in the additional effect 3 and a meter that can be changed by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, the background that cannot normally be selected can be selected in the background change effect. Become.

FIG. 262 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the background change effect when a new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. As shown in FIG. 262 (c), normally, two types of "sea" stage and "mountain" stage could be selected as the background (see FIG. 262 (a)), but the new background was acquired by the additional effect 3. , The "River" stage is displayed selectably.

As described above, in the present modification, the additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed in the same manner as in the above-described seventh control example even in the plurality of operation effects set to straddle the plurality of special symbol fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the frame button executed by the player across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the additional effect 3, the condition that the meter is MAX may be the case where the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol variation 2 is set in advance. (So-called look-ahead), and the determination result may be a predetermined result (for example, a big hit). Moreover, you may combine both of them.

Further, the additional effect used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control example additionally sets both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operation validity period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 may be changed, and the operation validity period of the frame button 22 may not be changed.

Next, a case will be described in which only the effect mode is changed without changing the operation valid period of the frame button 22 as an additional effect with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic view showing a display content in which the display of the additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation valid period is deleted from the display content of FIG. 251 (a) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. 263 (b) shows an additional period display unit Ma indicating an additional operation valid period and a display in which the display of the period display unit M1 is deleted from the display contents of FIG. 251 (b) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. FIG. 263 (c) is a schematic view showing the contents, and FIG. 263 (c) shows the additional period display unit Ma and the period display unit M2 indicating the additional operation valid period from the display contents of FIG. 251 (c) described above in the modified example of the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

As shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (c), since the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is not changed as the additional effect, the period during which the additional effect is executed is a period in which the operation valid period is not set. Therefore, the period display units M1 and M2 indicating the operation valid period and the additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation valid period are not displayed.

However, as an effect mode, the operation display unit Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the valid period notification unit Sa shown in FIG. 251 as a notification for urging the player to operate the frame button 22, so that the operation is effective. During the period between the period and the operation valid period (operation invalid period), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the frame button 22.

In this way, by executing the notification (display of the operation display unit Sb) for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 as the effect mode without changing the operation validity period as an additional effect, the player is notified. Therefore, it is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 over a plurality of operation validity periods, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of stopping it are frequently repeated. ..

As the effect mode of the additional effect in this case, it is preferable to use an effect mode in which the display mode is changed based on the player operating the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. As a result, although it is actually the operation invalid period, the player can be made to think that the display mode is changed based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22.

Specifically, as an effect actually executed during the operation valid period, an effect in which an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251 (a) or an effect shown in FIG. 251 (b). The operation of the frame button 22 is such that the content of the comment is changed in the middle based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the meter is accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251 (c). Regardless of this, it is preferable to execute the pseudo-effect mode that is executed in a pseudo manner.

As a result, it can be made to think that the display mode is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22. Further, the timing at which the display mode of the pseudo-effect mode described above changes may be switched based on the operation content (operation interval and number of operations) for the frame button 22 executed during the actual operation valid period. As a result, it can be made to think that the effect mode during the operation invalid period is variable based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<8th control example>
Next, the eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, various effects are configured as an operation effect in which the player operates the frame button 22. This control example differs in that the effect mode control when the operation effect in each of the above-mentioned control examples is executed is different.

Specifically, control is executed to change the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated, based on the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect. With this configuration, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period is the predetermined time or less (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the operation valid period is the predetermined time. The effect mode in which the amount of change in the effect mode (meter increase amount, numerical value increase amount, etc.) based on the operation of the frame button 22 is larger (larger) than in the above case (for example, more than 5 seconds) is executed. So, you can enjoy the operation production to the end.

Further, in an operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (that is, a long press operation) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the remaining period of the operation valid period is a predetermined time or less (for example, 5). When it becomes (seconds or less), the period for determining that the long press operation has been performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). With this configuration, it is possible to experience the change in the effect mode based on the long press operation even at the end of the operation effect, so that the operation effect can be enjoyed to the end.

In this eighth control example, for each of the above-mentioned control examples, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. It differs from the changed point. Other points are the same as each control example described above. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of each control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the operation effect in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 (a) and 264 (b). As shown in FIG. 264 (a), a display mode is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 during the variable display of the third symbol. Then, a remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the symbol that imitates the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is configured to be variable based on the decrease in the remaining time. In this control example, the period of the remaining time is set as the red display color, and when the remaining time decreases, the remaining time is variably changed to white (the part displayed in red decreases). See FIG. 264 (b)).

Further, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, a long press of the frame button 22 indicates that the control (discrimination) is automatically performed in the same state as the continuous hitting. The characters are displayed. An indicator whose color changes based on repeated hits of the frame button 22 is displayed at the upper part of the display area. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the scale is set to the degree of expectation that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is a hit. When the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit and the color is changed (variable from white to red) to the place where the scale of the indicator is larger, the player does not win the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is changing. You can expect it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 264 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed and held (the frame button 22 is pressed continuously for 3 seconds or 1 second), the frame button 22 is pressed and held on the symbol imitating the frame button 22. The characters "automatic continuous hitting" are displayed to indicate that the detection is made and the state of repeated hitting is automatically set. In this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 determined to be long-pressed is variably set according to the remaining time when the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 has been pressed continuously for 3 seconds, the setting determined to be a long press is changed to the frame button 22 continuously for 1 second. When is pressed, it is switched and set so that it is determined to be a long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed and held after the remaining time is running low, more indicators can be stored and the button effect can be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held is changed depending on the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of variable indicator is increased or the speed of variable is increased. It may be configured. Further, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less) and the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value at which the indicator is variable or a predetermined value (for example, scale MAX) If the effect to be displayed up to is selected, the indicator may be variably displayed up to the scale 1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, regarding the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707), which is one of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time (frame button operation valid period) is a value larger than 0 (S7031). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is added by 1 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW press counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the long press determination value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the long press judgment value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is added by 1 within the range of the effect value set in the fluctuation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. Set the display command (S7042). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value (S7040: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7037, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. Is determined (S7043). When it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW pressing counter (not shown) is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S7044). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after being pressed, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, and the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is added by 1. Update. Then, when the value exceeds the long press determination value, the SW indicator is set to be variable. The amount of variation of the SW indicator is preset for each variation pattern, and is set to represent the degree of expectation of the hit / fail determination result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator regardless of whether the player presses and holds the button or hits the button repeatedly. Further, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, the player can be shown the effect of changing the indicator even when the SW effective time is short. The speed at which the indicator is varied may be set to increase depending on the value of the SW effective time.

The SW pressing counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a counter for measuring the number of times of pressing) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player executes the long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

In the state where the player continuously presses the frame button 22, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds) has been reached is determined by the pressing period determining means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determining means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You may.

By providing the press count measurement counter and the press period measurement counter in this way, it is possible to independently control the press operation (continuous press operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22.

Next, a modified example of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) described above, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is pressed and held. By shortening the long press judgment value (shortened from 3 seconds to 1 second), which is a value for determining that the device is used, long press operation is performed even when the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is short. When (automatic repeated hits) can be executed, and when the long press judgment value is shortened, the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is short by increasing the speed at which the SW indicator is changed. The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that can be variably set in advance) by the long press operation (automatic continuous hitting) executed in.

On the other hand, in this modification, if the long press operation (auto continuous hitting) is executed in the state where the long press judgment value is shortened, the long press operation (auto) when the long press judgment value is not shortened. The difference is that the value of the SW press counter is configured to be added more than the repeated hits).

In this modified example, when a long press operation (automatic repeated hits) is performed while the long press judgment value is shortened, a large amount of the SW press counter value is added (the interval between automatic repeated hits is short). However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), A large number of SW press counter values due to automatic repeated hits may be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266) of this modification will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 of FIG. 266).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, as in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above, S7031 to S7037 The process is executed. Then, in the process of S7073, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7051), not 1 second. When it is determined to be (3 seconds), the processes of S7038, S7041 and S7042 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S7051 when it is determined that the time is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown) is added by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is added by 2. S7053), a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S7037 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the same as the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. The processes of S7043 and S7044 are executed in the above, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this modified example, when the remaining period of the SW valid period (button operation valid period) is less than or equal to a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held. The value (time) to be used is shortened (reduced from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter added by the automatic repeated hit operation is added more than usual. did.

As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that can be variably set) by the long press operation (automatic repeated hits) that is executed when the SW effective time (button operation valid period) is short. be able to.

Further, unlike the eighth control example described above, since the value added to the SW pressing counter is configured to increase, the value of the SW pressing counter can be associated with the value of the SW indicator, and the control load can be associated with each other. It also has the effect of being able to reduce.

The SW pressing counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a counter for measuring the number of times of pressing) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player executes the long press operation, first, the press count measurement counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, and the measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

In the state where the player continuously presses the frame button 22, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( Whether or not the value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds) has been reached is determined by the pressing period determining means.

Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determining means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You may.

By providing the press count measurement counter and the press period measurement counter in this way, it is possible to independently control the press operation (continuous press operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22.

As described above, the configurations described in each control example may be appropriately combined, and in particular, each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example and each configuration of the reach navigation effect described in the fourth control example are combined. Alternatively, each configuration of the combined pressing effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configuration of each pressing effect of the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or described in the second control example. Each configuration of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example is combined with each configuration of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example, and each configuration of the point effect described in the second control example is described in the third control example. It may be combined with each configuration of the point effect.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaced in a linear displacement on the base member, and a contact member formed so as to be in contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is the base. It has a first member rotatably arranged on the member, a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and can be linearly displaced on the first member. The base member includes a second member to be arranged, the base member includes a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. Game machine A1.

Here, a game machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed of the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57166). In this case, for example, a displacement member that is being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member to displace the contact member together with the displacement member, or a contact member is arranged at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , When the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper). Are known.

However, the above-mentioned conventional configuration has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the contact member while ensuring the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is a second member. Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the one member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased as compared with the first member. The speed can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the effect of the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, since the displacement member brings the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, into contact with the contact member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and the displacement member and the contact member are suppressed from being damaged. can do.

As a form of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a pinion gear arranged on the base member is meshed with a rack gear formed on the first member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to base the first member. The base member is displaced linearly with respect to the member, or the tip of the arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member and the arm body is rotationally driven to rotate the first member. An example is one that is linearly displaced with respect to.

Further, the contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the second member is linearly displaced in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the projecting direction. , The second member may be the one performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In either case, the first member, which has a slower displacement rate than the second member, is brought into contact with the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the contact, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A game machine A2 characterized in a direction that allows displacement.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is in contact with the displaceable direction of the contact member. Since the direction is such that the displacement of the displacement member is allowed, the contact member can escape while receiving the displacement of the displacement member, so that a cushioning action can be exerted, and as a result, the displacement member and the contact member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member in the game machine A2.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is in contact with the game machine A3. At that time, the escape operation of the contact member can be smoothly performed. Therefore, the cushioning action can be reliably exerted, and damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A3 includes a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member, so that the device as a whole is compact. It can be changed. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. As a result, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement increases, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, by also using one of the guide members, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

A game machine A5, characterized in that, in any of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member, so that the displacement member hits the contact member. It is possible to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, so that the displacement member is brought into contact with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position of the displacement member with the target position, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the member (the contact member functions as a stopper). By arranging the displacement member in a non-contact position and not contacting the two, the number of contacts is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to the contact is reduced, and the life of the members is improved. Can be planned.

In any of the game machines A2 to A5, a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is By engaging the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member. Since the structure is such that the vehicle is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is increased, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the displacement may be hindered.

In this case, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the effect of the effect due to the displacement.

The direction of pushing back the displacement member means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member comes into contact with the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized by being displaced.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member is among the displacement members. Since it is in contact with the first member of the displacement member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be improved. That is, since the contact member is in contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, an auxiliary force acts from the contact member to the displacement member (first member). (That is, the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state starts to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) is longer. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

In the game machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member. The gaming machine A8 characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, it is possible to quickly and linearly displace the displacement member from the stopped state, and after the start of the linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect of effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force to push back the displacement member by the contact member is strengthened to cause displacement. The initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, so that the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. You can increase the speed.

The large (small) gear ratio means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one rotation is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation is reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slow. That is, it has been impossible in the past to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member and increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, this compatibility is possible for the first time.

<Concept of the invention using the lower united unit 600 as an example>
It includes a driving means, a displacement member driven by the driving means and formed so as to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member with which the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that at least a component of the velocity components of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members can be displaced between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and a contact position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. The game machine to be formed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position are displaced in a direction close to each other, and the pair of displacement members are integrated at the contact position. The production is performed to form a single character.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated, and the posture becomes unstable, for example, they are bounced off each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, it takes a long time to integrate the pair of displacement members to form one character, which increases the time. The effect of the production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so that the displacement member is located at the first position. It is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement is performed until the vicinity of the first position is reached. Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, the time required to integrate the displacement member with the contacted member to form one character can be reduced, and the extension can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the contacted member may be a member stopped at the first position, or may be a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the contacted member is arranged in the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displacement member is placed in the first position with respect to the contacted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state. It may be abutted), and is arranged at the first position substantially at the same time as the displaced member (that is, the displaced member and the abutted member in the displaced state are abutted at the first position). It may be.

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position and a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position. , A form combining these is exemplified.

Further, the decrease of the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is reduced but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes 0, and This is intended to include a case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

The game machine B1 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means has a speed component of the displacement member in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the transmission means reduces the velocity component of the displacement member at least in the direction toward the contacted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the drive means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

As the state in which the drive state is constant, for example, if the drive means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. To. However, changes in state during transient response during start and stop shall be ignored.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a displaceable base member, and the transmission means is located at a position separated from the rotary base rotatably connected to the base member by a predetermined distance. A connecting member having a connecting tip portion that is formed and rotatably connected to the displacement member is provided, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base portion in a direction that brings the connecting tip portion closer to the first position. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

According to the game machine B3, a connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip portion of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base portion. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated with the rotation base as the center of rotation in the direction in which the connecting tip is brought closer to the first position, the first position (that is, the contacted member) of the velocity components of the displacement member. The component in the direction toward the direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. As described above, since the transmission means inserts a connecting member between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means is transmitted. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a base member in which the displacement member is displaceably arranged, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guide groove. A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is a component of at least a velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the contacted member. However, the gaming machine B4 is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B4, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guided portion to be guided along the guide groove. Of the velocity components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means The structure of can be simplified.

A game machine B5, wherein any one of the game machines B2 to B3 is provided with an interposition member which is displaceably connected to the base member on one side and displaceably connected to the displacement member on the other side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B3, one side is displaceably connected to the base member and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. , The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the intermediate member can be caused to act on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be in a form in which the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposition member are combined. As a result, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In the game machine B5, the interposition member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support on one side and the other side.

According to the game machine B6, one side and the other side of the interposition member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the interposition member is on one side. The other side is displaced by an arc-shaped locus with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Therefore, such an arcuate displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the intermediate member member. As a result, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. A game machine B7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B7, in any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means has such that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. Since it is formed in, it is possible to more reliably suppress the generation of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

In the game machine B7, the transmission means is characterized in that, among the velocity components of the displacement member, a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to have a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member has a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in the direction away from the contacted member at the first position, the displacement member is contacted when the displacement member displaced at the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Can be released from the contacted member, whereby the generation of impact can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, if the value is negative in the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc. Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value) can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the generation of impact.

In any of the game machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the contacted member and a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacting member are provided, and the above-mentioned The contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmitting means is a speed component of the contacted member in a state where the driving state of the second driving means is constant. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that at least a component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, so that the effect of bringing the pair of members into contact with each other is produced. The effect of can be enhanced. For example, by displacing the contacted member and the displacement member in a direction close to each other and abutting (coalescing) them at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the game machine B9, a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacted member is provided, and the second transmitting means is at least one of the velocity components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the generation of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. it can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the contacted member and the displacement member from repelling each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of the contacted member and the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, it is covered until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time required to integrate the contact member with the displacement member to form one character is reduced for both the contact member and the displacement member, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means reduces the velocity component of the contacted member at least in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position in a state where the drive state of the second drive means is constant. Since this can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, the control of the second driving means can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

The contacted member, the second driving means, and the second transmitting means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement members, the driving means, and the transmitting means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposition member in the game machine B5 or B6 may be intervened between the base member and the contacted member.

<Concept of the invention using the protruding unit 700 as an example>
A first transmission means and a second transmission that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the first member and the second member, respectively. In a gaming machine provided with means, the first transmission means has a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the driving means, and the first driving loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means can be formed, and the second transmitting means has a second predetermined section in which the driving means is loaded with a second driving force. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmitting means is the first. 1 In the state of forming a predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section at least a part of the first predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmitting means and the first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-53858). According to such a game machine, since the two members (first member and second member) can be displaced by the driving means of 1, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the configuration in which the member 2 is displaced by the driving means 1, the driving force for driving both is overlapped, so that the load on the driving means becomes large and the durability thereof is lowered. It was. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (first member and second member) are alternately displaced (one by one), the load of the driving means is reduced, but the state in which both the two members are displaced cannot be formed. The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the first transmission means can form a first predetermined section and a first suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than that of the first predetermined section, and the first suppression section can be formed. In a state in which the two transmission means can form a second predetermined section and a second suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than the second predetermined section, and the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section. In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, at least a part of the second predetermined section is the first. 1 The transmission means forms the first suppression section, that is, when one is relatively high load, the other is relatively low load, and when the other is relatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the drive means can be distributed, the load of the drive means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), and it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are both displaced. Therefore, while reducing the load on the driving means, It is possible to improve the effect of production.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member, and the first member or the first member or A cam rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member is provided, and in the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is determined by the first predetermined. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member in a section or a second predetermined section.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which the pin portion of the crank member slides and which imparts a displacement to the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member is measured by the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member.

According to the game machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the center of rotation to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the center of rotation of the crank member). The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member per unit can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member can be changed. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is performed while enhancing the effect. In the section, the load of the driving means can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity, and the first suppression section or the first suppression section or the first. 2. In the restraint section, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the weight of the first member or the second member is used to obtain the first. The load of the driving means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the driving means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

Further, in this way, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the own weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the cam member and the cam rubbing member are interlocked, or the crank member and the crank rubbing member When the load of the driving means is changed as in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the drive means can be changed while maintaining the speed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means gives a displacement to the first member by being rubbed against a cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member. The second transmission means includes a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion, and a crank thereof. The cam member and the cam member are provided with a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and a crank rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so that a space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately is provided. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the displacement deviation of the first member and the second member and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, and the first member or the second member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a non-transmission section for maintaining the two members in a stopped state can be formed, and displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transfer the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, so that the first member or the second member is in the stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the driving means becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force, so that the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. In places where it is difficult to displace smoothly, the driving force of the driving means is not transmitted to the first member or the second member, and a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state is provided. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to give momentum, and after the momentum is given (that is, through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each of the non-transmission sections. A game machine C7 characterized in that.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form a non-transmission section at the same time, and after passing through each of these non-transmission sections, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time, the driving means can idle with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. A game machine C8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member Has a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, so that when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect by avoiding being in a state.

In any of the game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides are provided, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to give a displacement to the first member or the second member. The non-transmission section is a section provided with the crank rubbing member and the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed concentrically with the rotation center of the crank member, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. If so, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. , The pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin part reaching a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. When sliding toward, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means The load of is excessive. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member displaced so as to be slidable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member, the slide member can be rotated. The conversion means includes a rotating member arranged in the base member and a conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into a rotational motion of the rotating member. The converting means is such that the slide displacement is the rotation of the rotating member. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is possible to form a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, a game machine including a base member, a slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236802). Further, there is also known a game machine in which a rotating member and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member are provided on the slide member. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to rotate a rotating member arranged on the slide member while sliding displacement (linear motion) of the slide member, and it is possible to produce an effect that combines linear motion and rotary motion. Can be done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are arranged on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member and a conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational motion of the rotating member are provided. The rotating member can be rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced by that amount to drive the slide member (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load of the driving means for causing).

In this case, according to the game machine D1, the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. Therefore, only the form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the slide member is slidably displaced while the rotating member remains non-rotating. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotary movement) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. D2 is a gaming machine D2 comprising a pinion gear, and a releasing means formed on the base member so as to be able to release the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear.

According to the game machine D2, the conversion means are a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member and a pinion gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Further, since the conversion means includes the releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to form not only a form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also a form in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotating. The number of combinations of member motions (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, the releasing means is arranged on the base member, and it is not necessary to dispose the means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. .. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means rotates at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain a mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by being released.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to rotate at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain the rack gear. Since the meshing with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. At least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. , When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, such meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to displace at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby causing the rack gear and the pinion gear to come together. Since the meshing is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction after the release, and when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. A gaming machine D6 comprising a pinion gear and a part of the rack gear in which teeth are missing.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member when the pinion gear passes through the tooth-missing portion of the rack gear. .. That is, according to this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, while the teeth of the rack gear. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the missing portion, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by the inertial force.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped. The form in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of the sliding member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game machine D6, the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear are released by missing a part of the teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to dispose of the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D6, the tooth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear is characterized in that the rigidity is higher than that of the other teeth.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion collide with the teeth of the pinion gear that have passed through the missing portion of the rack gear, so that where they are easily damaged, the rigidity is increased to improve durability. be able to.

As a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a form for increasing the tooth width of the tooth is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration of the meshing property with the pinion gear.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. The one-way clutch includes a pinion gear and a one-way clutch disposed in a rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation is cut off. A game machine D8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that the state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the state of blocking the transmission of rotation can be changed. Therefore, by changing the one-way clutch to the state of blocking the transmission of rotation, the slide displacement rotates. It is possible to form a state that is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, not only the one-way clutch is in a state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also, for example, the one-way clutch is in a state of blocking the transmission of rotation of the rotating member. The slide member is slid and displaced while it is not rotating, or the one-way clutch is changed from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. It is possible to form a form in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued by its inertial force while the is stopped.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is non-rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the rotating member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped, and the number of combinations of the slide member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be determined. Can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and displaced on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. D9 is a gaming machine D9 comprising an operator operated to change between a state in which the clutch is allowed and a state in which the clutch is blocked, and the operator is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and being arranged on the slide member are provided. , The displacement of the displacement member can be combined in addition to the motion of the slide member and the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion), and the number of combinations thereof can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operator of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can have both the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the slide member with a means for operating the operator of the one-way clutch, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operator operated to change a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation transmission is blocked, and the base member is used when the slide member is slidably displaced. The gaming machine D10 includes an engaging portion located on the displacement locus of the operator, and the operator is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, the base member is provided with an engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the slide member is slidably displaced, and is engaged when the slide member is slidably displaced. Since the operator is operated by the joint, it is not necessary to dispose of a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the operator) on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole is increased accordingly. Can be lightened. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

The position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the displacement locus of the operator described above. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement locus, or may be in the middle of the displacement locus.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member that is slidably displaced on the base member and a second driving means that applies a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the allowable state to the regulated state or from the regulated state to the allowable state. As a result, the position where the rotating state of the rotating member is changed when the sliding member is slidably displaced and the position where the rotating member is rotated while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped are set according to, for example, a gaming state. It can be changed, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated according to the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operator can be operated and the position where the operator cannot be operated due to the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched when the slide member is slidably displaced, and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched. That is, a form in which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed and its effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be arranged on the second slide member or may be arranged on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably arranged on the base member, and the second sliding member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member, and a shielding / opening means capable of forming an open state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding / opening means is provided. A first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the first member, and a second rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the first member are provided with a second member having and displaced linearly in the first member, and a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first-side pinion gear. The shielding state is formed by linearly displacing the two members to one side, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. A game machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a shielding / opening means capable of forming a shielding state for shielding a predetermined region of the base member and an open state for opening a predetermined region is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the predetermined region is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. (Forming a shielded state) On the other hand, by rotating each rotating plate 90 degrees and turning the thick portion (side surface) to the front, a gap is provided between each rotating plate and a predetermined area is opened (opening state is formed). ) What is disclosed.

However, according to the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating plate in a state of being rotated by 90 degrees and having the plate thickness portion (side surface) facing the front remains in the predetermined region. However, there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to the thinning in order to secure the strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-like body having the same area as a predetermined area is displaceably arranged, and the plate-like body is displaced (arranged) to a predetermined area to shield (shield) the predetermined area. On the other hand, a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined area is opened (a state is formed) by retracting a plate-like body from a predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area) is also known. There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if the plate-shaped body is retracted from the predetermined region, the predetermined region can be completely opened.

However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-shaped body retracted from the predetermined area. There was a problem that it became necessary and caused an increase in size. Further, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the plate-like body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the game machine E1, the shielding opening means includes a first member rotatably arranged on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a pinion gear thereof. A second member having a second rack gear to which the first pinion gear is meshed and linearly displaceable to the first member, and a base rack gear formed on the base member to which the first pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to one side. By doing so, an open state is formed.

That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to reduce the size by reducing the space for evacuation.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined region or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined region can be shortened, and the shielded state and the open state can be quickly switched.

The shielded state in which the predetermined region is shielded does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and the region is open to a part of the predetermined region. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined area is opened does not have to be the state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined area is covered by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state, in other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielded state.

In the game machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion that is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion that is connected to the main body portion, and the second member is the said. A second main body portion having the second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and being supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second displacement portion connected to the second main body portion. The gaming machine E2 is provided, wherein the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first main body portion in which the first member is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the first displacement portion connected to the main body portion are provided. In addition, the second member is connected to a second main body portion which has a second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the second main body portion thereof. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side because the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside a predetermined region with the second displacement portion. Only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body portion and the second main body portion from passing outside the predetermined region and their loci overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and a part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined region. The entire surface of a predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the shielding opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first member is a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. Since the first main body is provided with a structure in which the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear, the structure for linearly displaces the first member is small. Can be changed. That is, among the spaces required outside the predetermined region of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear thereof. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a third side rack gear to be meshed with the third member and a third member which is disposed linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear. And a third member having a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, so that the second member is provided with the linear displacement of the first member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is linearly displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced to, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. It is possible to reduce the size by suppressing the space for arranging the member, the second member and the third member.

In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member) in this way, it is compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superimposing the three-divided ones than by superimposing the two-divided predetermined areas.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member, and the second member is linearly displaced from the second member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region or from the retracted position. The time required for arranging in a predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state can be performed more quickly.

In the game machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member in a linearly displaceable manner, and a third main body portion thereof. The gaming machine E5 characterized by having a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first member is first. Only the loci of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body, the second main body, and the third main body from passing outside the predetermined region and their loci overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical idea (relationship of the third member with respect to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be extended to provide a game machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member, ..., And an nth member.

That is, the shielding opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. By expanding the configuration in which the second member is provided with a third member that is linearly displaceable, the shielding opening means is rotatably arranged on the nth member and meshes with the base side rack gear. An nth side pinion gear to be formed and an n + 1 member having an n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the nth member may be further provided ( However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member is connected to a third main body portion which has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the third main body portion thereof. Expanding the configuration including the third displacement portion, the n + 1 member has the n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an n + 1 displacement portion connected to the n + 1 main body portion thereof may be provided (however, n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means has a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. It is characterized by including a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced. The game machine E6.

According to the game machine E6, the shield opening means is a case where the third member displaced linearly on the second member and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. A third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displaces the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the following effect is produced.

That is, by linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and at the same time, a shielding state can be formed. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. It is possible to reduce the size by suppressing the space for arranging the member, the second member and the third member.

In this way, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member), it is compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area is smaller when the predetermined area is divided into three parts than when the predetermined area is divided into two parts.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the speed of the second member is increased and the third member The linear displacement of is at least faster than that of the first member. The time required to retract the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or to arrange the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the shielding state and the open state can be switched. It can be done quickly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as examples>
In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to reach the overhanging position. The gaming machine F1 is arranged, and the second member is arranged at the overhang position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least a rotational displacement.

Here, a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, respectively (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533) is known. In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the overhanging position and brought close to each other or brought into contact with each other, thereby associating (integrating) them with each other. , The effect of making the player visually recognize as one character is performed.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the overhang position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they move to the overhang position. There is a risk of mutual interference during displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and the displacements of the second member must be staggered. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first member is arranged in the overhang position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from interfering with each other during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, the time until the character is formed can be shortened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position by being displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the second member is displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, so that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, so that it has a curved shape. Can form a trajectory of. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

The game machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member so that the second member is displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. A game machine F3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, thereby causing rotational displacement and linear displacement. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position, and the position of the second member at the retracted position is free. The degree can be increased. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhang position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not the movement to the overhang position, but the second member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, as a result, the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the overhanging position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

The game machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device arranged in the game area, and a retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position and vertically long at the retracted position.

Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the effect is sufficiently produced. I can't show it. That is, while the game area is formed vertically, the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed, and the arrangement space of the members is large. It is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order for the second member not to protrude into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture in the overhanging position, while being arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the size of the second member can be increased accordingly, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position. Can be made larger.

The game machine F3 is characterized by including a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position can be made larger. .. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is retracted to such an area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a third member is provided so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the third member is the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the first member and the second member are provided because the third member displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position is provided. At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the effect of the production can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the first member and the second member at the overhang position, it does not come into contact with the first member and the second member at the overhang position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of the damage due to the impact at the time of contact. , Since it is not in contact with the first member and the second member, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the first and second members of the starting lineup at the overhanging position, and the effect of forming the character can be enhanced. ..

The game machine F6 is characterized in that the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to a side having the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

Here, if the positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member in the front-rear direction are different, the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction becomes larger and larger by that amount. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to the side having the same front-rear direction as the first member and the second member, and thus the whole (first member). And the front-rear direction dimension as the total of the second member and the third member) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the third member is increased to ensure its rigidity. can do.

The game machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the game machines F1 to F7 includes a contacted member which is arranged on the first member and a part of the second member is in contact with the first member at an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is abutted at the overhanging position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

The contacted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly in contact with the first member and the second member when they are arranged at the overhanging position, or the first member and the contacted member may be formed. When the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, it may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when both are closer than the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is in a state where the contacted member is separated from the first member. A game machine F9 characterized in that it is placed in an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the contacted member is the first member of the first member. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position in a state of being separated from the member, it is possible to ensure reliable contact with the second member at the overhanging position. Further, at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by the amount that the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member.

In the game machine F9, the game machine F10 is characterized in that after the first member is arranged at an overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction close to the first member.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in the direction close to the first member, so that the second member A space can be formed for the member to be displaced. That is, when the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is kept away from the first member to exert a role of receiving the displacement of the second member, and then to the first member. The contacted member can be displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position, and the contacted member is the first member. A game machine F11 characterized in that it is in a state of being close to.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is hit at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in a state of being close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that amount.

In the game machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the contacted member is maintained in a state of being close to the first member until the first member is arranged at an overhanging position. ..

According to the game machine F12, in addition to the effect of the game machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until it is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contacted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect of the effect.

In any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact is made. Along with this, the gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set.

According to the game machine F13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member hits the contacted member. When they are in contact with each other, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the second member is in the reference position. When the contacted member is displaced beyond the above and is brought into contact with the contacted member, the contacted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set in accordance with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member is brought into contact with the second member in the other set, the impact of the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the other set may be received only by the first member. It can also be received by the second member in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member due to the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set is the displacement in the other set. A structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member by being transmitted to the contact member, and the displacement of the contacted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, and the displacement thereof is transmitted to the first member. A structure in which the first member is displaced along with the transmission so that the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member together with the first member, or a structure in which these are combined. Is exemplified.

A game characterized in that any of the game machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at an overhanging position and is formed so as to be periodically displaced. Machine F14.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F13, the periodic displacement member includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be in contact with the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. Since periodic displacement is possible, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement members are shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displaces the first member and the second member, respectively. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or may be separated from each other (non-contact).

In the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member.

According to the game machine F15, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member. A member (periodic displacement member) arranged on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated by the member on the front side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to convey the force of the vibration to the player.

In the game machine F14 or F15, the game machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is determined. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they are vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the portion formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 700, and the lower united unit 800 as examples>
A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, the first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and the first effect mode is formed. When each displacement means is arranged at an overhang position, in a gaming machine in which a second effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group, the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means are described. The gaming machine G1 comprising a means for both displacement means of one of the second groups.

Here, from the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and from the plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. A gaming machine including the second group of the above is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this game machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) with one character (first). While making the player recognize it as an effect mode), when each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhang position, each displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) with another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect of making the player recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each of the displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhanging position, so that each of the first groups The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to the overhang position. By arranging them, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each displacement means of the second group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger character can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required for forming the plurality of characters also increases, and the displacement means are evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the displacement is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since it is provided with a means for both the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means of one of the second group, a plurality of means (third). The total number of displacement means required to form the effect modes 1 and 2) can be reduced, and each displacement means can be increased in size. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the game machine G1, the combined means has a different position between the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode. A game machine G2 characterized by being said to be.

Here, if the combined means are arranged at the same overhang position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) common to the production mode is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means arranged at the same position (overhanging position), the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the combined means forms the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since the overhanging position is different from the overhanging position, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed from being inhibited. Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the combined means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be used. Differences (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means is characterized in that the posture when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different. Game machine G3.

Here, if the combined means have the same posture in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, it is common to the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) of the above is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means of the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode of.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means has a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode. Since the posture is different from that of the above, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest. .. In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by allowing the combined means to have different postures between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement). It is possible to easily form the installation position).

In the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at an overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means are moved back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means in the first group. The gaming machine G4 characterized in that the directional positions are different and at least a part of them overlap in a front view.

Here, the combined means has different overhang positions or (and) different postures depending on whether the first effect mode is formed or the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position or (and) posture) tends to vary accordingly. In this case, in the structure in which the dual-purpose means abuts on one displacement means at the overhanging position (at least a part of the dual-purpose means coincides in the front-rear direction position) While a gap is formed between the displacement means and the displacement means, when the arrangement position or posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the first group Since the position in the front-rear direction is different from that of at least one of the displacement means and at least a part of the displacement means overlaps with each other in the front view, even if the stopped state (extending position or (and) posture) varies. It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the dual-purpose means. That is, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient due to the partial overlap in the front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the dual-purpose means and the single displacement means, and the positions in the front-rear direction are different. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent one of the displacement means from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined means.

In the game machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. A game machine G5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G5, in the game machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are in contact with each other, one of the displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the combined means tends to vary in the stopped state (overhanging position or (and) posture), and the combined means is used at the extending position when forming the first effect mode. , In a structure that is in contact with one displacement means (at least a part of the positions match in the front-rear direction), if the arrangement position and posture of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, there is a gap between the two displacement means. Is formed and the association (unification) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, the configuration of the game machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is different). (Partially overlaps) is particularly effective.

In the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is located on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that one of the displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view with respect to a portion in contact with each other.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is more than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view, for example, one displacement means or (and) another displacement means. When a deviation occurs in the target position of the above and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap can be shielded by the combined means to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means is hindered, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, whereby rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. The overhanging position of the combined means that is displaced in the embodiment and arranged when forming the first effect aspect, and the overhanging position of the combined means that is arranged when forming the second effect aspect. Are in different positions, and the posture of the combined means when forming the first effect mode and the posture of the combined means when forming the second effect mode are different. A game machine G7 characterized by.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linearity are linear. Since the displacement is combined with the displacement, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means. The means can be positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see them, and the position in the front-rear direction of one displacement means and the combined means can be made closer to each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily associate (integrate) one displacement means and the combined means so that the player can recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In the game machine G8, in a state where the displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged at a position where the linear base member and the linear base member overlap in front view. A game machine G9 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of the game machine G8, in a state where one of the displacement means and the dual-purpose means in the first group is arranged at the retracted position, one displacement means and the linear base member Since they are arranged at overlapping positions in the front view, when one displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position in order to form the first effect mode, one displacement means is linear. It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they do not overlap the linear base member in front view. Then, while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position where the other displacement means overlaps the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that at least the region where the other displacement means overlaps in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means are in front of the linear base member. The other displacement means are arranged at positions that do not overlap in view, and while the other displacement means and the dual-purpose means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they overlap the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member. In order to form the first effect mode, at least the region where the other displacement means overlap in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view. And when the straight base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the straight base member.

The game machine G10 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. The gaming machine G11 is characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base member is arranged in a region where the displacement means overlaps in a front view at a retracted position.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect of the game machine G10, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual-purpose means can be synchronized with each other, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the dual-purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be improved. Therefore, the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the combined means can be formed in a large size, and the character formed at the overhanging position can be made larger. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the combined means material is retracted to such an area. While setting the position, the combined means can be formed in a large size.

In this case, since the displacement means of one of the linear base members is arranged in the area where the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the front view at the retracted position, the other area of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged). The anteroposterior dimension of the area) can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
An effect mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, a display means capable of displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and a plurality of stages of information on the display means. When the stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information by the stage information display means for displaying, the stage information variable means for changing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information variable means. A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, and a switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. And, a game machine H1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of effect modes can be set as the effect modes displayed on the display device, and when a specific effect mode is set, a predetermined score is given to the player. Some effects are performed based on the cumulative value of the given points (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-215579).

In such a conventional game machine, points are given only in a specific effect mode, so that all the accumulated points obtained when the player shifts to another effect mode are discarded, so that the player can discard the points. There was a problem that the motivation to get a score was reduced and the game got tired early. In addition, in order to reliably execute the effect using the given score, it is necessary to fix the effect mode to a specific effect mode from the time the score is given until the effect based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production became monotonous.

On the other hand, in the game machine H1, one of a plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display means. A plurality of stages of stage information are variably displayed on the display means by the stage information variable means, and when the stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information, a specific effect is produced by the specific effect executing means. Is executed. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means is switched by the switching means to the display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, even if different production modes are set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set production mode. Therefore, even if the production mode shifts, the stage information is continuously used. It becomes possible to execute the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine H1 has a stage information storage means for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information display means switches the display mode when the switching means switches the display mode. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the stage information is displayed based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the following effects are played. The stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored by the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display means based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

As a result, even when the display mode is switched by the switching means, it is possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means. Therefore, even if different production modes are set, it is possible to continuously execute the production using the stage information, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The display mode corresponding to the effect mode is, for example, the identification information that can identify the score to be given, the numbers, characters, symbols used in the currently set effect mode, and the characters appearing in the effect mode. It is conceivable to use a display mode using. In addition, it is conceivable that the image accompanying the identification information that can identify the score to be given is displayed in a display mode using an image corresponding to the motif (for example, the sea or mountain) used in the currently set production mode. Be done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in the display mode corresponding to the currently set effect mode, even if the effect mode is changed while the effect for displaying the stage information is being executed, the variable effect mode is changed. The stage information can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, at least predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that different production modes are set in a state where the predetermined stage information is displayed. Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display predetermined stage information in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the stage information is displayed is being executed.

In the game machine H2 or H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information that is close to the predetermined stage information.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, at least the approximate stage information that is close to the predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that the approximate stage information is displayed. Even if different production modes are set and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the approximate stage information in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, if the effect mode is switched while the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is displayed is displayed, the stage information that does not approximate the predetermined stage information is displayed, and the game There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in a person's willingness to play.

Here, as the approximation stage information in the game machine H4, for example, when an indicator capable of displaying the stage information in 7 stages is used, the stage information indicating the 7th stage (MAX) is set as the predetermined stage information and approximated. It is advisable to set the stage information indicating the sixth stage as the stage information.

A plurality of such approximation stage information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the predetermined stage information. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort when different display modes are set and the display mode is switched.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the effect mode setting means has a specific effect mode setting means for setting a specific effect mode when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. A game machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effect is played. That is, when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode.

As a result, it is possible to switch the effect mode according to the displayed stage information, so that there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be enhanced.

Here, if the game machine H3 has a configuration, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the effect mode is switched in the state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

Further, if the game machine H4 has a configuration, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the effect mode is switched in the state where the approximate stage information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the stage information can be further enhanced.

In the game machine H5, the step information display means displays the predetermined step information as the step information when the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means. Game machine H6 to play.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H5, when a specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means, the stage information display means displays predetermined stage information as stage information. ..

As a result, when a specific stage information is displayed, a specific effect mode is set, and when the display mode is switched, the predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, in the effect of displaying the stage information, it is possible to expect the player to switch the display mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Here, if the game machine H3 has a configuration, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the effect mode in the state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, if the game machine H4 has a configuration, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, the predetermined stage information can be switched by switching the production mode in a state where neither the predetermined stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, when the expectation of the jackpot is low in the production in which the stage information is displayed. Is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the step information variable by the step information variable means, and the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means. The gaming machine H7 is characterized by having a variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the following effect is played. That is, the variable amount of the stage information that is variable by the stage information variable means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is generated. It is displayed by the variable information display means.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the variable amount in which the step information is variable by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, since the variable amount in which the stage information is variable is displayed as variable information corresponding to the currently set production mode, the variable information is displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player even if the production mode is switched. It has the effect of being able to.

The variable information displayed based on the variable quantity may be information that specifically indicates the variable quantity, information that suggests the variable quantity (for example, information such as large variable quantity or small variable quantity), and further, a plurality of variable information. If the stage information of is displayed, it may be information indicating the stage information to be variable among a plurality of stage information.

Further, the timing of displaying the variable information may be appropriately set based on the displayed variable information. For example, when displaying the information concretely indicating the variable amount as the variable information, the step information variable means. It is preferable to display the variable information after the step information is changed by. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the mode in which the stage information is variable, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when displaying information suggesting a variable amount or information indicating a step information to be changed as variable information, it is preferable to display the variable information before the step information is changed by the step information variable means. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to how the stage information is specifically changed after grasping the displayed variable information, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H7, a variable information differentiation means that differentiates the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display that displays the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means. The gaming machine H8 comprising: a display timing setting means for setting the timing.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the following effects are played. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is differentiated into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiation means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to display the variable information for changing the stage information in a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as a method of differentiating variable information by the variable information differentiation means, when the variable information displays a specific numerical value (for example, a score), the numerical value (score) is displayed as a plurality of numerical values (small score). ), And if the variable information is a display that suggests the variable content of the step information (for example, the variable degree or the variable target), divide it so that the suggested content is displayed step by step. Just do it. As a result, the player can continue to pay attention to the effect in which the stage information is variable, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when displaying the variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, there is a high expectation that the variable information (stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information) which is advantageous to the player. Variable information) should be displayed later. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect can be executed while giving the player a sense of expectation until the end.

In the game machines H1 to H8, the effect mode setting means has a setting regulating means for restricting the setting of a predetermined effect mode according to the set effect mode. Game machine H9.

According to the game machine H9, it is regulated by the setting regulating means that a predetermined effect mode is set according to the set effect mode, so that various effects can be executed by using a plurality of effect modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate the switching of a predetermined effect mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching means, it is possible to suppress the setting of the effect mode in which it is difficult to convey to the player that the effect of displaying the stage information is continuously executed. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the game machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the setting condition when any of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, and the effect mode is set in the plurality of setting conditions. On the other hand, it has a priority setting means for setting a priority, and when a plurality of the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is based on the setting condition having a high priority set by the priority setting means. The gaming machine H10, characterized in that it sets an aspect.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H9, the following effect is played. That is, when any of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the effect mode is set based on the setting conditions. Then, priorities are set for a plurality of setting conditions by the priority setting means, and when a plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is produced based on the high priority setting conditions set by the priority setting means. The mode is set.

As a result, the effect mode is set based on the setting conditions having a high priority, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature J group> (Production display position setting)
A display means having a display area, a first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period, and a predetermined first effect on the display means while the first effect executing means is being executed. In a gaming machine provided with a second effect executing means for executing the second effect, the second effect executing means is the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. The gaming machine J1 characterized in that the second effect is executed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a device that executes an effect of displaying points showing a predetermined value on a display device and gives a privilege effect when the points reach a predetermined number (for example). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-179176).

In such a conventional gaming machine, a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and there is a problem that the mode in which points are displayed becomes monotonous. In addition, if the points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying the points on the display device, the display of another effect executed on the display device and the display of the points overlap, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, a predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing means on the display means having a display area for a predetermined period, and the second effect is executed while the first effect executing means is executed. The effect executing means executes a predetermined second effect on the display means in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect.

As a result, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the first effect being executed, and it is possible to prevent the first effect and the second effect from being displayed in duplicate. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine J1, the second effect executing means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display areas in the display means, and the second effect when the second effect is executed. (1) The gaming machine J2 having a region variable means for varying the allowable region based on the display mode of the effect.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the following effects are played. That is, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display areas in the display means. Then, the permissible area is changed by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

This makes it possible to change the permissible area for executing the second effect based on the display area where the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since the second effect can be executed in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine J2 has a first effect determining means for determining a main display area in which a main image is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means. The area variable means is characterized in that the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed is changed based on the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2, the following effects are played. That is, among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means, the main display area in which the main image is displayed is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed is changed based on the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means by the area variable means.

This makes it possible to change the permissible area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the main image is displayed in the first effect. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the second effect in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

In the game machine J3, the area variable means sets the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means as a prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to execute, and allows other than the main display area. A game machine J4 characterized in that it is an area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determining means is set as a prohibited area in which it is difficult to execute the second effect by the area variable means. Then, the area other than the main display area is set as the allowable area by the area variable means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display area in which the main image of the first effect is displayed and the display area in which the second effect is executed from overlapping, and the effect of the effect from being lowered. effective.

In the game machine J3, the first effect determining means determines a specific subject display area in which the subject image is not displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period, out of the display areas determined to be the subject display area. The gaming machine J5 having a discriminating means, wherein the area variable means uses a display area determined to be the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area discriminating means as the permissible area.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, among the display areas determined to be the main subject display area, the specific subject display area in which the main image is not displayed after a predetermined period of time is determined by the specific subject display area determination means, and the display determined to be the specific subject display area The area is set as an allowable area by the area variable means.

As a result, as the display area for executing the second effect, the display area after the lapse of a predetermined period can be set as the allowable area. Therefore, it is possible to give a range to the timing of executing the second effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines J2 to J5, a value information setting means capable of setting a first value information showing at least a predetermined value as the second effect and a second value information having a value higher than the first value information. And a permissible area setting means capable of setting the permissible area to a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area, and the second effect executing means is the first permissible area. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the value information is set to be displayed in the first permissible area and the second value information is set to be displayed in the second permissible area.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J2 to J5, the following effect is played. That is, as the second effect, the first value information showing at least a predetermined value and the second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowable area is set by the allowable area setting means. It is set to a first allowable area and a second allowable area different from the first allowable area. Then, the second effect executing means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

As a result, the value information can be displayed in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the value information showing different values can be displayed in different small areas, for example, even when the same value is displayed in total, the first value information is displayed a plurality of times in the first allowable area. A plurality of display methods can be set such that the second value information is displayed or the second value information is displayed only once in the second allowable area. Therefore, since the player sees the place where the value information is displayed and the value information displayed on the display means while paying close attention to the number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. There is.

In any of the game machines J1 to J7, the display image creating means for creating the display image displayed on the display means is provided, and the display image creating means has at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed. And the second layer on which the second effect is displayed are combined to create the display image, and the first composition process of superimposing the first layer on the front side of the second layer. The gaming machine J8 is characterized in that it executes a second compositing process for transmitting the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J7, the following effect is played. That is, the display image displayed on the display means is created by the display image creating means by synthesizing at least the first layer on which the first effect is displayed and the second layer on which the second effect is displayed. .. Then, the first layer is superposed on the front side of the second layer by the first composition process, and the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer is transparent by the second composition process. Will be done.

As a result, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display means at the same time, which has the effect of reducing the control load.

In the game machine J8, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed for each of the plurality of small areas. The game machine J9.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J8, the following effects are played. That is, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

As a result, it is not necessary to change the display content of the second layer according to the area for displaying the second effect, and the display area corresponding to the transparent display area of the first layer of the second layer can be obtained. Only the displayed second effect is visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed on the display means at the same time, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic K group> (Change the production navigation in the middle)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the above-mentioned effect and a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the effect executed by the effect executing means It is displayed by a period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of the effect, a progress information display means for displaying progress information indicating an elapsed period since the specific period is started, and the progress information display means. Specific effect mode information display means for displaying specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode given to the player when the progress information satisfies a predetermined condition, and the progress displayed by the progress information display means. The gaming machine K1 comprising: an effect mode variable means for varying the specific effect mode information based on the information.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a time gauge for displaying the progress of the production is provided to display the progress of the production to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6280). In such a conventional game machine, the player predicts the lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter and plays the game, but even if the fluctuation ends in the middle of the meter or reaches the end of the meter, from there. Furthermore, since the production continues, there is a problem that the motivation to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter is reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine K1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the privilege granting means gives the player a privilege. The effect is given and the effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the specific period information indicating the specific period of the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed by the period information display means, and the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period is displayed by the progress information display means. .. Further, specific effect mode information indicating a specific effect mode given to the player when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by the specific effect mode information display means, and the progress information is displayed. The specific effect mode information is changed by the effect mode variable means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

As a result, the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode given when the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period satisfies a predetermined condition can be changed based on the progress information. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode showing the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the effect mode changing means changes the pseudo specific effect mode in the specific effect mode information.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, the following effects are played. That is, the specific effect mode display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode showing the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode, and the specific effect mode is displayed. Of the information, the pseudo-specific effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means.

As a result, the pseudo-specific effect mode that is pseudo-displayed based on the progress information is variable, so that the player can gaze at the displayed content based on the progress information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the expectation that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result is expected to be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies the specific display condition. The gaming machine K3, which has a degree display means, is characterized in that the specific effect mode information can be changed when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, the expectation that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result is displayed by the progress information display means. When the progress information satisfies the specific display condition, the expectation display means can display the progress information. When a specific display condition is satisfied, the specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode variable means.

As a result, it is possible to execute both the expectation degree display and the change of the specific effect mode information at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine K4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines K1 to K3 has a specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined effect mode is given as the specific effect mode.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K3, when a predetermined effect mode is given as a specific effect mode, the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. , It is possible to set a specific period according to the production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine K4 is characterized by having an extension period information display means for displaying the extension period extended by the specific period extension means by using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display means. Game machine K5.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4, the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extension period information display means using at least a part of the specific period information. There is an effect that the amount of display data for displaying the extension period can be reduced.

In the game machine K4 or K5, using at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means, the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is used. The gaming machine K6, characterized in that it has an extension progress information display means for displaying.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is extended by using at least a part of the progress information. Since it is displayed by the information display means, there is an effect that the amount of display data for displaying the elapsed information of the extension period can be reduced.

Any of the game machines K4 to K6 has an expectation display conversion means capable of converting the expectation displayed by the expectation display means when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. A game machine K7 characterized by.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation displayed by the expectation display means is converted by the expectation conversion means. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the specific period is extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines K7, the specific period information used when the extension period information display means displays the extension period includes the specific display for the expectation degree display means to display the expectation degree. The establishment period in which the condition can be satisfied is included, and when the extension progress information has passed the establishment period by the extension progress information display means, the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means. A game machine K8 characterized by this.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effect of the game machine K7, the following effects are played. That is, when the extension period is displayed by the extension period information display means, the specific period information including the establishment period in which the expectation degree display means can satisfy the specific display condition for displaying the expectation degree is used. When the extension progress information elapses from the establishment period, the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means.

As a result, when the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation degree display displayed during the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is executed. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to display to the player that the degree of expectation is converted in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means moves on the time gauge. A game machine K9 characterized in that it displays a body.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K8, the following effect is played. That is, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating the period as specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a moving body moving on the progress information time gauge.

As a result, the time gauge makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the specific period, and the player can easily grasp the progress information according to the movement status of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine K9, the expectation degree display means is for displaying the expectation degree when the establishment condition is satisfied when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the extension period information display means. Displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge. A game machine K10 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine K10, the establishment condition is satisfied when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation degree is displayed by the expectation degree display means. Then, the extension period is displayed by using a part of the time gauge by the extension period information display means. Further, the extension progress information is displayed by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge by the extension progress information display means.

This makes it possible to display the extension period using the time gauge and the moving body. Therefore, the extension period can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, since the display data for displaying the specific period can be diverted as the display data for displaying the extension period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

In the game machine K9 or K10, the game machine K11 is characterized in that the time gauge has a plurality of paths through which the moving body can move.

According to the game machine K11, in addition to the effect of the game machine K9 or K10, since the moving body has a plurality of movable routes, the player is made to predict which route the moving body will move. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through a branching position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of paths. Game machine K12.

According to the game machine K12, in addition to the effect of the game machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of paths. , When the specific period is extended, the player can predict which route the moving body will move again. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Variable each production mode of continuous slot production)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an effect execution means that can execute an effect based on the operation on the operation means, and a display means that displays an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means. The effect executing means executes a specific effect capable of executing at least an operation effect for which an operation valid period for determining that the operation to the operation means is effective is set a plurality of times within a specific period. The present invention is characterized by having an effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of another operation effect based on information on an operation for at least one of the operation effects executed during the specific effect. The game machine L1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and by operating the operating means, an effect of aligning a predetermined pattern is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223651).

In such a conventional game machine, a valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set, and by operating the operating means within the valid period, only a specific effect is executed, and the game is monotonous. Therefore, there was a problem that the game got tired early.

On the other hand, in the game machine L1, the effect based on the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means is used as the display means. Is displayed. Further, a specific effect capable of executing at least an operation effect for which an operation valid period for determining that the operation on the operation means is valid is set a plurality of times within a specific period is executed by the effect executing means, and is specified. The effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode variable means based on the information regarding the operation for at least one of the operation effects executed during the effect.

Thereby, in the specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, the effect mode of the other operation effect can be changed based on the operation content to the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine L1, the effect mode changing means is characterized in that the operation valid period of the other operation effect is variable.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the operation validity period of other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means, so that it is possible to provide various effects to the player. , There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the effect mode changing means is characterized in that the number of times of the other operation effect is variable.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects is changed by the effect mode changing means, so that it is possible to provide various effects to the player. , There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the operation effect executes a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period. The gaming machine L4 is characterized by having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by a plurality of the operation effects in a specific effect are in a predetermined combination.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effect is played. That is, a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period is executed as an operation effect, and a symbol that is stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation effects in the specific effect is predetermined. In the case of a combination, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the individually stopped and displayed symbols of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage during the period when the specific effect is being executed.

In any of the game machines L1 to L4, the operation timing determining means for determining the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation valid period set in the operation effect is provided, and the effect mode variable means is the said. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means in one operation effect.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L4, the following effect is played. That is, the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation valid period set in the operation effect is determined by the operation timing determination means. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means in one operation effect, the effect mode of the other operation effect is changed by the effect mode changing means.

As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode of the other operation effect depending on the operation timing of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine L5, when it is determined by the operation timing determining means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started. , The gaming machine L6, characterized in that the number of times of the other operation effect is increased.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L5, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined by the operation timing determining means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started, the number of times of the other operation effect is increased by the effect mode variable means. Will be increased.

As a result, it is possible to increase the number of operation effects by operating the operation means at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the operating means, which has the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect.

In the game machine L5 or L6, the effect executing means can execute the other operation effect a plurality of times, and after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started by the operation timing determining means. When it is determined that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period, the first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation effect of the first operation effect is enabled by the operation timing determination means. When it is determined that the operating means is operated within a predetermined period after the period is started, it is determined that the operating means is operated within the predetermined period after the operation valid period of the one operation effect is started. The gaming machine L7, characterized in that the operation effect is executed the same number of times as in the case.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L5 or L6, the following effects are played. That is, when another operation effect is executed a plurality of times by the effect execution means, and it is determined by the operation timing determining means that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period after the operation valid period of one operation effect is started. In addition, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect execution means. Then, when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation valid period of the first operation effect is started, the operation valid period of the first operation effect is started within the predetermined period. The operation effect is executed the same number of times as when it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

As a result, even if the operation means cannot be operated within a predetermined period in one operation effect, one operation can be performed by operating the operation means within the predetermined period during the first operation effect to be executed next. It is possible to execute the same number of operation effects as when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period in the effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of operation effects for a player who does not notice that the operation effect has been executed or who cannot operate the operation means at an early stage because he / she pays too much attention to the operation effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines L1 to L7, the effect executing means produces a normal effect in which the operation valid period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period of the one operation effect. A game machine L8 characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines L1 to L7, the following effect is played. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period of one operation effect, the effect execution means executes a normal effect in which the operation valid period is not set.

As a result, the player's motivation to play is reduced by repeatedly executing the operation effect for the player who did not operate the operation means during the operation valid period, that is, the player who does not like the operation effect. It has the effect of being able to suppress.

In any of the game machines L4 to L8, the game machine L9 is characterized in that the more the number of times of the operation effect executed by the effect executing means is, the more easily the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines L4 to L8, the more the number of operation effects executed by the effect execution means, the easier it is for the privilege granting means to grant the privilege, which is motivated by the player. It is possible to operate the operating means, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<Characteristic M group> (Change the mode of slot production based on the remaining period of operation validity period)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period for which an operation for the operation means is effectively determined, and an effect execution means that executes an effect for which the operation validity period is set. In a gaming machine having a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A dynamic display effect is executed in which a predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed from the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed by displaying and operating the operation means when the operation validity period is set. When the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode and dynamically displayed. A game machine M1 characterized by being.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and by operating the operating means, an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-). No. 223651).

In such a conventional game machine, a valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set, and by operating the operating means within the valid period, only a specific effect is executed, and the game is monotonous. Therefore, there was a problem that the game got tired early.

On the other hand, in the game machine M1, the operation validity period for which the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation validity period setting means, and the effect of setting the operation validity period is executed. It is executed by the means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed by the effect executing means in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and a plurality of identifications that are dynamically displayed by operating the operation means when the operation validity period is set are set. When a dynamic display effect that stops and displays a predetermined identification information from the information is executed and the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period changes. It is displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed changes depending on the remaining period of the operation validity period in which the operation on the operation means is effective, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. Will be. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine M1, the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period, and is the remainder of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect. When the remaining period determining means for determining the period and the remaining period determining means determine that the predetermined remaining period is determined, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M2 having a dynamic display mode variable means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M1, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined by the effect executing means, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determining means. To. Then, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is a predetermined period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, since the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches a predetermined remaining period, it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation valid period in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.

The game machine M1 or M2 has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode has the plurality of said. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the specific identification information among the identification information has a dynamic display mode that makes it easier to identify than the other identification information.

According to the game machine M3, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification among the plurality of identification information is executed as the variable dynamic display mode. It becomes a dynamic display mode in which the information is easier to identify than other identification information.

As a result, the specific identification information on which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is stopped becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It becomes possible to increase. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine M3, the effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect executing means executes the dynamic display effect during the continuous dynamic display effect. The specific effect is executed when the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects satisfies a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is the dynamic of the above 1. The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the display effect.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine M3, the following effects are played. That is, the effect executing means executes the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination of the above satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, the variable symbol satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1. To. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the operating means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines M2 to M4, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is executed, and the remaining period determining means sets the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M2 to M4, the following effect is played. That is, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period during which the dynamic display effect is executed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means according to the remaining number of operation valid periods.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of operation valid periods, so that the player is enthusiastically operated by the operating means during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines M1 to M5, the sequence information storage means for storing the sequence information in which the plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined sequence, and the sequence information stored in the sequence information storage means are used. It has a start position setting means for setting a start position of dynamic display, the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is provided by the operation valid period setting means. Within the set operation valid period, the first start position where the predetermined position of the sequence information is easily displayed on the display means and the second start position where the predetermined position of the sequence information is difficult to be displayed on the display means. A game machine M6 characterized in that and can be set.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M5, the following effect is played. That is, the sequence information in which a plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined array is stored by the sequence information storage means, and the start position of the dynamic display using the sequence information stored in the sequence information storage means is the start position setting means. Is set by. Then, predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the sequence information. Within the operation validity period set by the operation valid period setting means, the first start position in which the predetermined position of the array information is easily displayed on the display means and the second start position in which the predetermined position of the sequence information is difficult to be displayed on the display means. Is set by the start position setting means.

This makes it possible to execute a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is easily displayed on the display means and a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information is difficult to be displayed, using the same sequence information. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of the display data for executing the dynamic display can be reduced.

A game machine M7, wherein in any of the game machines M1 to M6, the effect executing means includes a dynamic display speed variable means for changing the speed of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M6, the speed of the dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display speed variable means, so that the predetermined identification information is displayed within the operation valid period. Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature N group> (The next button effect is determined based on the content of the button operation)
An operating means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation when the operating means is operated, a discriminating means that discriminates a signal output by the signal output means, and a discriminating means thereof. An operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a discrimination result determined by the discriminating means during the period during which the operation effect executing means is executing the operation effect mode. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within a period in which the determination means for determining the above and the predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed are satisfied, the operation effect mode is described. The gaming machine N1 is characterized by having an execution control means for switching and executing the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode based on a determination result by the determination means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using the operation buttons, an operation of actually pressing the operation button and an operation of automatically executing the continuous striking operation by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period of time. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

In such a conventional game machine, in an operation effect (for example, a continuous hit effect) in which the operation button needs to be operated a plurality of times, the operation button is actually pressed a plurality of times or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. , It was said that you can enjoy the operation effect by automatically executing the continuous hit operation, but when the operation effect is executed multiple times in succession, during the operation effect that is executed first There is a problem that the operation to the executed frame button may be executed in the operation effect to be executed later, and the effect of the operation effect to be executed later is lowered.

Further, in the conventional game machine, as an operation effect for operating the operation buttons, for a player such as the above-mentioned operation effect (continuous hitting effect) or an operation effect for operating the operation button at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing push effect). Some have an operation effect that allows different operations. In this case, if the timing push effect is executed after the continuous hit effect is executed, the timing push effect is started while the operation (continuous hit operation) executed during the continuous hit effect is continuously executed. , There is a problem that the operation buttons are operated without aiming at a predetermined timing during the timing pressing effect, and the effect of the timing pressing effect is lowered.

Further, in the conventional game machine, since the effect is generally executed based on the variation period of the special symbol, in order to execute a plurality of operation effects within the limited period of the variation period of the special symbol. It was necessary to shorten the interval at which a plurality of operation effects were executed. Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it cannot be solved by a simple method of lengthening the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine N1, when an operating means that can be operated by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and discriminated by the discriminating means. A predetermined operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. During the period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect execution means, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means within the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, the execution control means determines the determination result by the determination means. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to a specific operation effect mode and executed.

As a result, if the second operation effect mode is executed within the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed. It is possible to switch the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode based on the operation content of the operation means performed by the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation for the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine N1, the determination means differs from at least the first determination result and the first determination result of the determination result determined by the determination means during the period during which the first operation effect mode is being executed. It is determined based on the second determination result, and when the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained, the execution control means determines the first determination result as the specific operation effect mode. A game machine N2 characterized in that it executes a corresponding operation effect mode.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N1, the following effects are played. That is, during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means as a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result. .. Then, when the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained, the execution control means executes the operation effect mode based on the first determination result as a specific operation effect mode.

As a result, as the second operation effect mode, it is possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. Therefore, when the operation effect modes are continuously executed, the effect is not reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the operation can be enhanced by making the operation effect modes continuous.

In the game machine N2, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means has the said specific operation effect mode. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N2, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined as the first determination result that the operation of the operation means is executed a plurality of times by the determination means, and the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times as a specific operation effect mode. Be done.

As a result, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect mode, the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, even if the player continuously operates the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for the game can be suppressed. ..

In the game machine N3, the operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operation means is operated and the number of times measured by the operation number measuring means are determined during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. It has a number-of-times determination means, and the determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means. A game machine N4 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N3, the following effects are played. That is, during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the number of times the operation means is operated is measured by the operation number measurement means, and the number of times measured by the operation number measurement means is determined by the number determination means. .. Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines the first determination result and the third determination result different from the first determination result.

As a result, it is possible to switch the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operation means is operated during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed.

In the game machine N4, when the determination means determines that the determination result of the number of times determination means is more than a predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the first determination result. ..

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determination means is more than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the first determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation effect mode. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, there is an effect that the state in which the player is enthusiastically operating the operating means can be continued.

In the game machine N4, when the determination means determines that the determination result of the number of times determination means is less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the third determination result. ..

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number-of-times determination means is less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the third determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated less than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is provided as the second operation effect mode. It can be prevented from being executed.

In the game machine N2, the determination means determines as the first determination result that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period, and the execution control means has the specific operation effect mode. The game machine N7 is characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N2, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined as the first determination result that the operation of the operation means is continuously executed for a predetermined period by the determination means. Then, the execution control means switches to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated as a specific operation effect mode.

As a result, when the player continuously operates the operation means for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, the operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated is executed as the second operation effect mode. .. Therefore, even if the player continuously operates the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for the game can be suppressed. ..

In any of the game machines N1 to N7, the execution control means has a notification means for notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed, and the notification means executes the second operation effect mode. The gaming machine N8 is characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the time.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines N1 to N7, the following effect is played. That is, the notification means notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the execution control means by the time the second operation effect mode is executed. As a result, even when a specific operation effect mode is executed as the second operation effect mode, the player can execute the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the game machine N8, the determination means executes the determination while the first operation effect mode is being executed, and the notification means is the first after the determination by the determination means is executed. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed until the operation effect mode of 1 is completed.

According to the game machine N9, in addition to the effect of the game machine N8, the following effects are played. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination of the determination means is executed, and the specific operation effect mode is determined between the execution of the determination and the end of the first operation effect mode. The notification means notifies that the execution is performed.

This has the effect of reliably notifying that a specific operation effect mode is executed by the time the second operation effect mode is started.

In the game machine N8 or N9, an aspect display means for displaying the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means, an operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode, and an operation content display means. The gaming machine N10 is characterized in that the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode by the operation content display means.

According to the game machine N10, the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means.

As a result, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed, so that the player can execute the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In any of the game machines N1 to N10, the operation effect executing means enables execution of a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A game machine N11 characterized by being.

According to the game machine N11, the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed is executed by the operation effect execution means. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to perform an effect in which the operating means can be operated in a short period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine N11 has an effect result display means for displaying the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means, and the effect result display means has the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode. The gaming machine N12, characterized in that the effect result is displayed based on the operation effect mode of the above.

According to the game machine N12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N11, the following effects are played. That is, the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the effect result display means. Then, the effect result is displayed based on the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode.

This makes it possible to create an effect in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are associated with each other, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic P group> (Change the interval between automatic repeated hits)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation of the operation means, a signal discrimination means that discriminates a signal output by the signal output means, and a signal thereof. When the discrimination result by the discrimination means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means for setting the first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the signal discrimination in the state where the first effect mode is set. When the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect every first period and the first effect mode are executed when the determination result by the means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition. In addition, a period variable setting means for variably setting the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means to a second period different from the first period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. A game machine P1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, a continuous hit operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364). Issue).

In such a conventional game machine, in an effect in which the operation buttons need to be operated a plurality of times (for example, a continuous hit effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hit effect simply by continuously pressing the operation button. However, in the operation effect other than the continuous hit effect (for example, the timing push effect), the automatic continuous hit operation is executed, which impairs the operation effect other than the continuous hit effect, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the game machine P1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the output signal is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Then, when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies the first condition, the first effect mode in which the specific effect is executed by the first setting means is set, and the first effect mode is set. When the discrimination result by the signal discriminating means satisfies the second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect every first period. Further, when the first effect mode is executed, the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means by the period variable setting means is set to the first period based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. Is variably set in a different second period.

As a result, it is possible to make the interval of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means different. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects using the operation means while the specific effect execution means is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine P1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the privilege granting means that grants the privilege to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result. A gaming machine P2 having a game machine P2, wherein a predetermined variable condition is satisfied based on the result of discrimination of the discriminating means.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine P1, the following effects are played. That is, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination result is a predetermined determination result, the privilege granting means grants the privilege to the player. Then, a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the determination of the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the determination means according to the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to a specific effect executed based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine P1 or P2 is characterized in that the game machine P1 or P2 has a notification means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal discrimination means.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, the signal discriminating means notifies the notification means that the second condition is satisfied, so that the player operates the operation means and the second condition is satisfied. When the conditions are satisfied, even if the execution period in a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the game machine P3, the game machine P4 is characterized in that the notification means guides an execution period set by the period variable setting means.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3, the notification means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means, so that the player is informed of the timing when the next specific effect is executed. It becomes possible to guide. Therefore, even if the execution period in a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In any of the game machines P1 to P4, the validity period setting means for setting the validity period for effectively determining the operation of the operation means, and the remaining period for determining the remaining period of the validity period set by the validity period setting means. It has a discriminating means, and the signal discriminating means determines that the second condition is satisfied when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first discriminating period, and the remaining period. When the remaining period is determined to be a predetermined period by the determination means, the determination period variable means for varying the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period is provided. Game machine P5.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P4, the following effect is played. That is, the valid period for effectively determining the operation of the operating means is set by the valid period setting means, and the remaining period of the valid period is determined by the remaining period determining means. When the operation means is continuously operated for the predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period. The first discrimination period is changed to a second discrimination period shorter than the first discrimination period by the discrimination period variable means.

As a result, when the remaining period of the valid period for which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined becomes a predetermined period, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a specific effect changed in the second period, which makes the game more enjoyable. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine P5, the game machine P6 is characterized in that the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determination means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period.

According to the game machine P6, the remaining period determination means determines a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period as a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the valid period is short, the identification is changed to the second period. It is possible to execute the effect of, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced until the end of the valid period.

<Feature Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
An operating means that can be operated by the player, a discriminating means that determines that the operating means has been operated, and a valid period setting means that sets a valid period for which the operation of the operating means is effectively discriminated by the discriminating means. An operation notification means for notifying a player of an operation notification mode for operating the operation means, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means, and an operation effect execution means. When at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the first valid period and the second valid period are specified. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized by having a notification control means for notifying the operation notification mode of the above by the notification means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

Since a plurality of operation effects are executed in such a conventional game machine, it is possible to increase the chances for the player to operate the operation buttons and increase the motivation to play, but the plurality of operation effects are frequently set. If this is done, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button, which causes a problem that the motivation for the game is reduced.

Further, in the conventional game machine, a valid period in which the operation of the operation button can be accepted is set, and if it is within the valid period, the effect based on the operation of the operation button is executed, and it is not the valid period, that is, the invalid period. For example, since it is configured so that the effect based on the operation of the operation button is not executed, when the player operates the operation button multiple times, a part of the multiple operations is performed during the invalid period. However, there is a problem that the production is not executed even though the operation buttons are operated, and the motivation for playing is reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine Q1, the valid period is set by which the discriminating means determines that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated, and the operation of the operating means is effectively discriminated by the discriminating means. The operation notification mode that is set by the means and causes the player to operate the operation means is notified by the notification means. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means.

Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the notification control means straddles the first valid period and the second valid period. The notification means is notified of a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions, a specific operation notification mode is notified across the first valid period and the second valid period, so that a plurality of operation notification modes are notified. It is possible to notify that the validity period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation of the operating means between the first valid period and the second valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In this case, as a predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period, it is desirable that the set interval is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such a condition, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing can be further suppressed.

Further, as a method of determining whether or not the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions, a method of determining the actual period may be used, or a plurality of operation effects are predetermined. A method of determining that the combination is set may be used.

Further, as an operation effect in the game machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the game machine, a drive mode of a driven object provided in the game machine, and an output from a voice output device provided in the game machine. It is conceivable that the sound mode is to be output and the light emitting mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game machine. As described above, the effect to be executed based on the determination of the operation on the operating means may be recognized by the player who operates the operating means.

In addition, the operating means in the game machine Q1 may be any as long as it can be operated by the player. A sensor device, a dial device that can be rotated by a player, a lever device that can be operated by a player in front, back, left, and right can be considered.

The game machine Q1 is characterized by having a notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, so that the first validity period And a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the second validity period can be set based on the operation effect executed during the first validity period or the second validity period.

This has the effect of being able to inform the player of a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the first valid period and the second valid period in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extension effect mode based on the first operation effect, which is executed when the first validity period is set. A game machine Q3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, the notification mode setting means provides the first operation effect to be executed when the first validity period is set as the specific operation notification mode. Since the extension effect mode based on this is set, it is possible to make it appear that the first validity period continues until the second validity period is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In the game machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means provides a pre-effect mode based on the second operation effect, which is executed when the second validity period is set as the specific operation notification mode. A game machine Q4 characterized by being set.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2 or Q3, a second operation executed when a second validity period is set as a specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the pre-effect mode based on the effect is set, it is possible to make it appear that the second valid period is continuously set with the first valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can further suppress a decrease in the motivation to play by frequently repeating the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q4, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated. A game machine Q5 characterized by having a pseudo-effect execution means to be executed.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q4, the following effect is played. That is, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means is simulated by the pseudo effect execution means.

As a result, the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, so that the player can be made to appear that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuously set, and the operation buttons can be displayed. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing can be further suppressed by frequently repeating the act of operating and the act of not operating.

As a pseudo operation effect in the game machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect in which the effect mode is variable. As a result, the operating means is operated by the player who continuously operates the operating means during the period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the invalid period is actually set. It is possible to make the player think that the production mode is variable, and there is an effect that the motivation for playing can be increased.

Further, according to the configuration provided with the game machine Q3, it is possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed in the first valid period is extended, and the player can perform a pseudo operation effect. It has the effect of being able to provide a more understandable effect.

Further, according to the configuration including the game machine Q4, the pseudo operation effect is executed so that the operation effect executed in the second valid period is continuously executed in the first valid period. This has the effect of providing a more understandable effect to the player.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means determines the specific operation notification mode based on the determination that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination means during the first valid period. A game machine Q6 characterized in that it is notified by the notification means.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are played. That is, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode based on the determination that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination means during the first valid period.

As a result, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, a specific operation notification is given. The aspect is not notified. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a player who does not like the operation effect from being unnecessarily notified of a specific operation notification mode, so that there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed.

Even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first valid period, the above-mentioned problem, that is, Since the problem of reducing the motivation to play due to the frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means does not occur, the player's motivation to play is motivated even if a specific operation notification mode is not notified. It does not decrease. Rather, it is possible to reduce the processing for notifying a specific operation notification mode, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect executed in a normal state.

As a predetermined operation condition in the game machine Q6, for example, it is preferable to set as an operation condition that the operation means is operated a plurality of times during the first valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is enthusiastically operating the operating means from losing his or her willingness to play. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first valid period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined remaining period (for example, within 5 seconds remaining). A state in which the fact is set as an operating condition, or a means for determining the period until the second valid period is started is provided, and it is determined by the means that the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds remaining). It may be set as an operation condition that the operation means is operated by. Even in such a configuration, there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed by frequently repeating an act of operating the operating means and an act of not operating the operating means.

In the game machine Q6, the discriminating means has an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the operating means is operated, and the operation number measuring means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first valid period. The gaming machine Q7, characterized in that the above-mentioned operating conditions are satisfied when the above is performed.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q6, the following effects are played. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated by the operating number measuring means of the discriminating means is measured. Then, the operation condition is satisfied when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

As a result, when a predetermined number of operations are executed during the first valid period, a specific operation notification mode is notified. Therefore, for example, when the operation effect of repeatedly hitting the operation means is executed during the first valid period, the player who is enthusiastically operating the operation means is notified of the specific operation notification mode. It becomes possible to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who is enthusiastically operating the operating means from frequently stopping the operation of the operating means, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, according to the configuration provided with the game machine Q5, the player is made to execute the pseudo operation effect by executing the operation effect in which the effect mode is frequently changed as the operation effect to be simulated. On the other hand, it has the effect of suppressing giving a feeling of strangeness. Further, it is preferable that the pseudo effect executing means can execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the effect mode is changed, and the operation effect is set based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation number measurement means. ..

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Machine Q8.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Until the end of the first validity period, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the second validity period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect due to the player grasping the operation effect to be executed later.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under the predetermined conditions, the first valid period and the said first valid period. A gaming machine Q9 characterized by having a valid period changing means for changing the valid period so as to be continuous with the second valid period.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are played. That is, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions by the valid period setting means, the valid period is such that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuous. The validity period is changed by the changing means.

As a result, when a plurality of valid periods are set, it is possible to make the plurality of valid periods continuous valid periods. That is, since the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period can be eliminated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to the effect not changing even though the operating means is operated. It has the effect of being able to.

Here, to make the valid period of the game machine Q9 continuous means to set a period between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the effect is not variable even though the player operates the operating means. The validity period may be changed so that the first validity period and the second validity period are actually connected, or the first validity period and the second validity period may be changed. There may be a period shorter than the period required to determine that the operating means has been operated.

In the game machine Q9, the game machine Q10 is characterized in that the validity period changing means additionally sets a period between the first validity period and the second validity period to the validity period.

According to the game machine Q10, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q9, the validity period is additionally set in the period between the first validity period and the second validity period by the validity period changing means. As a result, a plurality of valid periods can be made continuous without changing the first valid period and the second valid period, so that there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In the game machine Q9 or Q10, the game machine Q11 is characterized in that the validity period changing means delays the start of the first validity period.

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q9 or Q10, the start of the first validity period is delayed by the validity period changing means. As a result, since the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, it is not necessary to set a new valid period, and there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any of the game machines Q9 to Q11, the game machine Q12 is characterized in that the valid period changing means accelerates the start of the second valid period.

According to the game machine Q12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q9 to Q11, the start of the second valid period is accelerated by the valid period changing means. As a result, since the first valid period and the second valid period can be made continuous, it is not necessary to set a new valid period, and there is an effect that the control load of the valid period changing means can be reduced.

In any of the game machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has a validity period display means for causing the display means to display the operation notification mode, and is based on the fact that the validity period is changed by the validity period changing means. The gaming machine Q13 is characterized by having a valid period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the valid period display means.

According to the game machine Q13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q9 to Q12, the following effect is played. That is, the operation notification mode is displayed on the display means by the validity period display means, and the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display changing means based on the change of the validity period by the validity period changing means.

As a result, it is possible to display to the player that the validity period has been changed by the validity period changing means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the game machine Q13, the game machine Q14 is characterized in that the valid period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the elapse of the first valid period.

According to the game machine Q14, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display changing means based on the elapse of the first validity period. As a result, the player grasps the content of the operation effect (operation effect in which the second validity period is set) to be executed later before the first validity period has elapsed, and the effect is reduced. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where it happens.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q14, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and a privilege grant that grants a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The means and the period effect executing means for executing the period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the discriminating means, and the period effect executing means executes the compound effect in which a plurality of the valid periods are set. A gaming machine Q15, which is possible, wherein the notification control means notifies the notification means of the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the discrimination means.

According to the game machine Q15, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are played. That is, when the result of the determination executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Then, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the period effect execution means executes a composite effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set as the period effect for a predetermined period.

As a result, it is possible to execute a composite effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q14, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and a privilege grant that grants a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The notification control means includes means and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of determination by the discriminating means, and the notification control means is executed first among the continuous period effects. When the first valid period set in the first period effect and the second valid period set in the second period effect executed later are set under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine Q16, characterized in that the notification means is notified of the specific operation notification mode.

According to the game machine Q16, in addition to the effects played by the game machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are played. That is, when the result of the determination executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Further, the period effect for a predetermined period is executed by the period effect executing means based on the result of the determination by the discriminating means. Then, of the continuous period effects, the first valid period set in the first period effect executed first and the second valid period set in the second period effect executed later. When is set under predetermined conditions, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, even when the first valid period and the second valid period are set across a plurality of period effects, the act of the player operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means are frequently repeated. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in motivation to play.

In the game machine Q16, a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of discrimination information based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the discrimination information stored in the discrimination condition storage means. The gaming machine, characterized in that, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

According to the game machine Q17, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q16, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of discrimination information based on the establishment of the discrimination condition is stored by the discrimination condition storage means, and the plurality of stored discrimination information is determined by the prior judgment means. Then, based on the determination result of the pre-determination means for the second period effect, the notification control means notifies the notification means of a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when the first valid period and the second valid period are set across the first period effect and the second period effect, the preliminary determination corresponding to the second period effect to be executed later is performed. A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A game machine Z1 in any of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop is performed. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, In any of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine Z3 is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided and an effect of aligning a predetermined symbol is executed by operating the operating means (for example, Patent Document 1). : Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223651).
However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, further improvement of interest has been required.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to improve the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period for which an operation on the operation means is effectively determined, and an operation validity period setting means. The effect executing means includes an effect executing means for executing the effect for which the operation validity period is set, and a display means for displaying the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means. Is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation validity period is set, the operation means is operated to determine a predetermined value from the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information. A dynamic display effect for stopping and displaying the identification information is executed, and when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period is possible. It is dynamically displayed by changing it to a variable display mode.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and the effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period. Yes, the predetermined dynamic display is performed when the remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect and the remaining period determining means determine that the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period. It has a dynamic display mode changing means for changing at least a part of the mode to the variable dynamic display mode.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is a game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, which provides a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect. The variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, and the effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times. The effect executing means executes the specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect satisfies a predetermined condition. The variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4, and the operation validity period setting means sets the operation validity period during the period when the dynamic display effect is executed. It is set a plurality of times, and the remaining period determination means determines whether the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the operation validity period for which the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation validity period setting means, and the operation validity period is set. Is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed by the effect executing means in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and a plurality of identifications that are dynamically displayed by operating the operation means when the operation validity period is set are set. When a dynamic display effect that stops and displays a predetermined identification information from the information is executed and the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period changes. It is displayed dynamically.
As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed is changed depending on the remaining period of the operation valid period in which the operation on the operating means is effective, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined by the effect executing means, and the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determining means. To. Then, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is a predetermined period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.
As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches a predetermined remaining period, so that there is an effect that the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is identified as another identification as the variable dynamic display mode. It is a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than information.
As a result, the specific identification information on which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is stopped becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It becomes possible to increase. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, the effect executing means executes the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination of the above satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Then, as the variable dynamic display mode, the variable symbol satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1.
As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute the dynamic display effect a plurality of times, the variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1. To. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player to operate the operating means can be increased during the continuous dynamic display effect.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of Technical Thoughts 2 to 4. That is, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period during which the dynamic display effect is executed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means according to the remaining number of operation valid periods.
As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of operation valid periods, so that the player is enthusiastically operated by the operating means during the remaining operation valid period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
8 1 Third symbol display device (display means)
S216 discrimination means
S1712 Production execution means
Dm4a time gauge (first production period mode, second production period mode)
Dm4b movement display unit (part of the first remaining period information suggesting means, part of the second remaining period information suggesting means)
Dm4c notification unit (specific effect mode display means)
S2005 mode switching means

Claims (5)

Operation means that can be operated by the player,
An operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for which an operation for the operation means is effectively determined,
An effect executing means for executing the effect for which the operation validity period is set, and
In a game machine having a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means.
The effect executing means is
A plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation validity period is set, the operation means is operated to determine from the plurality of the dynamically displayed identification information. It executes a dynamic display effect that stops and displays the identification information of
When the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect becomes a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation valid period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode and dynamically displayed. A featured game machine. The effect executing means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period.
Remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect,
Having a dynamic display mode variable means that changes at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode to the variable dynamic display mode when the remaining period determination means determines that the predetermined remaining period is reached. The gaming machine according to claim 1. It has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect.
The variable dynamic display mode according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is a dynamic display mode in which the specific identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information. Game machine. The effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect satisfies a predetermined condition. And
The third aspect of claim 3 is characterized in that the variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol satisfying the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display effect of 1. Gaming machine. The operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during the period during which the dynamic display effect is executed.
The game according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the remaining period determining means determines whether the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation valid period. Machine.

Images